2012-08-12 21:26:59 UTC

5017e1875493c 49.48.221.186 Thailand

CHATANA'S

PALI

GRAMMAR.

INTRODUCTION

KACHCHAYANA'S

GRAMMAR

PALI

LANGUAGE;

AN

INTRODUCTION,

APTF-NDIX,

NOTES,

fee.

D'ALWIS, .TAMKS

:-o

i.o"i

ISO.

I86;i.

H-

WiLiuHa

A^D

NonuirEjJ,
AND

Heisbiett* IrEOLKILK

SmeET, STHECT,

TovfNT

Cihoen,
RUU.

Londc

SO,

SOIIH

t^OINBL

PKion

To

Sir

Charles

Justin
Governor

MacCarthy,
and "c.^

Kt.

Commander-in-Chief.
"Q.y Sec,

Sir,
The
of
the land
practice
is very

of inscribing
ancient,

literary

work

to the

Ruler
East

and
;

very

general.

In

the

it has and the

the

been

almost
of

universal
old

and

in Ceylon,
patronage
times

while
of have

the Poets
the

Historians
translators

sought

the
of recent

King,

and

compilers
to

dedicated

result

of their labours
however,

the

British

Governor.
to
to

In inscribing, merely
a

the

present

work seek
any

you,

I do
homage
of

not to
our

follow

time-honored
stands
in
no

rule, need

nor

do

Power

which
and

of

evidence that
it
a

loyalty
kind
work
of

attachment.

But,

remembering
me
are

was

your

patronage
;

which

chiefly
that
to

enabled
you,

to

publish
familiar
pages,
to

previous many

and

knowing

who

with
they

the

questions
an

discussed which

in the

following
not

will

possess
reader;
not

interest

they

do

possess

the
as

general
a

I take
of my

the liberty

of dedicating

this

work,

token

only
common a

gratitude,
my

but

also of the

high

esteem

which,

in
as

with

countrymen,
your

I entertain
as a

for your

abilities

Governor,

and

attainments

Scholar.

I have

the

honor

to

be.

Sir,
Your
Most
Excellencv's
and

obedient

humble

Servant,
Alwis.

James
Hendala,
2bth August,
1862.

r^

THE

NTRODUCTION.

INTRODUCTION.

here

is

hardly
greater

country

on.

the acquiring
no

face
a

of

the

Globe
of

presents Paliy

facilities

for

knowledge
possesses

than

Ceylon;
for

and,
its

perhaps,
than

nation

ter

advantages the

study

the
a

Sinhalese.
necessary

Pali,
part of

Sanskrit
of is
common

and

the

Sinhalese,
by

forms

course

education
to

pursued these
to

the

natives.*
and

Our
the

Alphabet

several the

languages,!
both
easy

affinity
and people

the

Pali

bears

Sinhalese,
far
more

verbally
to

matically,
country

renders
than the
the
even

its

study
to

the

this

the
as
a

Burmese.
language, has the has of been in

Although

Sinhalese,
Pali,
from
are

latterly
which the who

ected; Buddhist

its

being

dialect always

scriptures study
of of

recorded, portion the kings

statesmen
;

been

cipal
followers

the

largest

the

Ceylonese,
it became

Buddha.
of

From
land,

period and

when
princes

the
encouraged

ed

language
its
to

the

have
vied with and works.

study;
excel in

nobles
its
some

and

have and

each
priests

composition
of
our

in it laymen elegant

produced of

most

The

Batuvantudkve,

Hikkaduve, Kahave,
familiar
even
now

Lankagoda, and

Dodanamongst
as

la,

Valkna,
of
learned
means

Bentota,
are

Sumangala,
Pali
scholars,

host

others,

to

those

he
no

who

are

able
of
a

to

produce

compositionsj
or a

inferior like
some

to

those

Buddhagosa

Parakmore

ma,

though, than
*

the
of the

modern
more

Sanskrit,
ancient
p.
222*

certainly

ficial

writings.

See
lb.

my p.
a

Sidatsangark,
xi.,
et

seq.

For

specimen,

See

Appendix.
a

The
in

number
the those that

of

books,
;

too,

in

the

Pali

language,
on

id

greater

an

Sinhalese
upon

and,

though

those
it

Religion nevertheless, is not

ceed

other
literature

subjects,
of
the

is,

ct,

the
upon

Pali

Sinhalese
of

deficien

works

other
a

branches
array

Oriental
volumes

Science.
on

esents

indeed

proud

of

extensive

Prosody,

etoric,
no

Medicine,
less is

and
forty the
in

History.

On

Grammar
in
the

alone

the

than
one,

Pali
solitary the

works;*

whilst

Sinhalese
the

ere

but
of
in
errors:

Sidat-SangarS.
monasteries

From
of be

con st

study

Pali
that

Buddhist
are

this

islan

books
from

language and

found
known willing free
access

to

comparatively the Pali Buddhist

ee

it is

well
are

fact,
to

that give
to

iests,

unlike

the

Brahmans,
or

scholars,

ether

Buddhist
like

Christian,
these,

their
others,

libraries

Advantages

combined
late

with

enabled of

Hon'ble
to attract

George
the language his
in

Tumour,
attention
as

Colonial

Secretary
to

lon Cey

of
existing

Orientalists
in
a

the

high
the

claim

the

Pali of

Ceylon.

In

prose cutio

labours
his

with

such

praiseworthy
to

object,
the

he

dre

tention,
of
to

elaborate works

Introduction
extant

Mah"vansa, and,
amongst

the

Pali

formerly

in which

Ceylon,
he

em,

Kachchdyana's

Grammar,
very
outset

then
studies,

regarded
after

tinct.

This, devotion

in the
to

of

my

Pali

many

ars'
a

Sinhalese
added
it

literature,
to

ascertained
in
a

mistake;!

having

my

library,

purchase

"

The

high

state

of

cultivation
that has

to

which
paid
to

the it in

Pali

language
may

was

d om

the
the

great fact

attention

been

Ceylon,
ot

be

carrie inferre

that
my

list of
residence

found

during Grammar,
Eastern

works in them
pp.
extant

in
that

the

possession Island, includes

of

the

Singhalese,
works
"

thirty-five
extent."

li

some

of

being
191-2,

considerable

Rev.

rdy's

Monachism,

find

that

this
says

is
:"'"

ptist

Union

also ' The

in

Burmah.
reputed

The
to

Rev. have the

two

F.
been

Mason

of

^ammar
I
nad
a

written

chch^yana,

stiU
and

exists. the

copy

made between

from

palm-lea^
and three

arto

paper,

Pali

text

occupies

on sma hundred

Pali

books

which
of

I
the

had
late

then

(1855)
F.

recently
D'

made
Levera^

from
Esq.^
communicated

collection

lamented

rict

Judge
the
fact

of
to

Colombo.
some

Shortly
of
my

afterwards in Europe;

friends I
have

and from upon

the

ated

communications
from for
a

which Bost
of

received
urging

them"
me

cially

Dr.
the

Canterbury,
of
a

necessity

publication
to

Pali

Grammar,
have

and
induced
to

essing
to

curiosity
a

examine

Kachchayana,
it,
as
an

publish translation.
laying of
a

Chapter

from

Introduction

er

this
some

before
of the

the
Pali
age

public,

propose
known

to

give

brief

Grammars
and
on

in of the

this

country,

uding

notice

of
also

the
an

anthor
the

work
of

here

ented;

and

Essay

relations

the

Pali

the

Sanskrit.

he

terms

Pali

and
in

Magadhi

are

at

the and

present
even

day

fferently

employed

Ceylon,
of
the

Ava,
the
term

Siam,

China,
being

express
to

the

sacred

language

Buddhists;
Pali

and,
not

ined
of

those

countries, writings.
correct

is

met

with

any

the

Indian
is the

agadhi
not
so

and

original
as

name

for

the

Pall.
of

It

called

in

coiisequence,

some

suppose, introduce

the

ion

of

Asoka,the
It had

king

of

Magadha,to that
after
name

Buddhism
age of

Ceylon.* and
the

received

before
ancient vernacular

the
name

of that

rch,t

was

so

called
for

the

Behar.

as

appellation It
was

the

ancient
for

language
of

of

dha.
"

the

designation
bhash

the

dialect

the

Ma-

s.

Magadhanan

Magadhi.X

compendium of European
and

of

the

whole

Pali

and

English,
be

few in

years
one
or

ago,
two
or

on

the
hundred

Grammars,'
convey

pages,
in

all

the
"i4m.

might which information

Or, Journal^

printed

contained

in 107.

the

two

three

nd

Profeswr
See

manuscript.*" SpiegeVs

iv.

p.

Kammavachdy

p.

vii.

Sanyut

Sangiya,

Pali

is comparatively

modern
region

name

for the Magadhi.

Pallistan

It

has

not

originated
land
of the in

from

*the

called

the
not
or

posed) (supcome

Paliy^ovLT

Palestine'

It does
tower

(vom

Palitur
no

Tyre"

the connection called

nor

so-called
with the

*Pali
*

Fort.' hills
of of

It has
Rome.'*
the
as

historical
It
was

the

Palatine
the
"

not

after

Pehlve,

dialect
a

Sesdanian
we

dynasty,

is it derived distinguish

from

Palli
*

village,
*

should

now-a-days
the

gunavctri

village,'

ish,' boorit

from indeed
Like
*

Urduy

language
or

of

the

Court,"!

Nor

does

mean

"root"

"original."t
signified
to
mean
or
a

a/i the

word
was

/?""* originally

*line,'
^suttan,'

^row,'

range,' its being

"

and like

gradually

extended
to
or

from of

Une;|| and
discourses

signify

edicts,f
which
an

the
are

strings

rules
the
text

in Buddha's

doctrines,
it became
as

taken

from for the

"

Suttans.**
of the

From

thence

appellation

Buddhist

Scriptures,

in the

following

passages:

'

See

the Priasep,

Friend,

Bengal
;

vi. p. 236. As. J., vii. this

'

p.

282.

\
the
that

Tvirnour's

Mah^vansa,
and

p. xxii.,
is
no

where
correct
"

he

merely than

Buddhists
Prakrita

more

the

the gives Bi*ahmanical

opinion

of

opinion,

means

the

derived.'

" See
the
the does,

Abhidh^napadipikS,
between their when "Sowar,"
row,

Mohammedans, period
Koran
*

whom
sacred

post, It is mdeed p. 71. and the Buddhists

were

Vide

p. xxxix.
not
a

there

was

little curious that intercourse no at

books

written, The

('Sura,' Sing.) sign^ing

regular Sanskrit Tora series.' 'Sreni'
or

derived import
as

or order, from the

call the lareer portions of Pali the as precisely word Arabic Siira, whether ately immedi"

not,

is

the

same

in

use

the

Sura

or

a of the Pentateuch, word signification. Itaran Atth^nan totha savana II suvattato pana; stichanato; si!ldanato Sutt^nato suttan sutta gatocha sabh^ suttanti akkh^ktan. its illustrating *The (which is) the Suttan^ is called ^Suttan'' from other

of the Siddrim^

Jews,

who

also of the same

call the

fifty-three

and Sections

the

properties

(of duties);

from from

(ofmucn
(which
it

sense); and affords); and from

hevan

from its being tenor; exquisite ductive proits overflowing (tendency) the protection its being like Buddhagosn's a string.^
"

its

Atthakathd,

^
to

Hevancha
read my

cha
or

me

pkliyo
"

vadetha:

*Thus,
Asoka

thus

shall

ye

cause

be
**

pdliyo
suttena

edicts.'

JPrinsep^s

Inscrip.

Yatticha
eva me

siyanti

ai*e not string this (Suttan)

kirfyanti naviddliaix pupphani navi flowers 'As together sangahita with a attUk. strung likewise doctrines so from the are taken scattered,
sangahitani
thena

which

are

not

lost,'

"

Sumangala

VildsinL

eyachariyjl
preceptors
text

sabbe held

P"lin
this

yiya

Tamaggahun: in
the
same

^
"

All

the

compilation

estimation palehi padehi

text

the

(of the

Pitakattkya).'*
'In

Thera
discourses

v"dehi
as

njanehicha.
Fitakattaya);
thence in Pali again
which has

the and
Pali

Thera

in
as

the in
a

(o

in has

an

expression the his

name

letter.'
Md^gadhi

become
delivered the

of

the

age

Buddha
also

doctrines.
of
Tanti^

he

received

designation being

'the
From

ng

of

lute/J

its
it

Sanskrit
to
*

cognate

tantri.

signification

seems

have
religious
for

been

originally

applied peculiar

by

Brabmans
mystical
attainment

to

tantruy

treatise

teaching
of
or,

formula of
five

and

rites

the

worship

their

deities^
which of

the

super-human the gods,

power,' creation

'that

rized
the

of

subjects,
of

and
attainment

destruction
of

the

d,

worship for the of

the

the
of

all

objects

cal four

rites

acquirement

six

super-human

faculties,

modes

union

with
their

the
secession

spirit from
term,

by

meditation.'"
the in

Magadhas,
probably
they the

before used

Brahman
this
sense;

gion,

the the

Md^gadhi Buddhist
as

toTZ^/

when

embraced

faith,
the

they

used
passages:

it

ify

doctrines

of Gotama, pi
te

in

following

"

Samm^
aropento

Sambuddho
Mdgadhi
tepitaka
m^ns

pitakan
aropesi Tanti

Buddha

vachanan

Tan-

bksayeva words
into

"

'Buddha
tantra
or

who

rendere

his
so

(or

doctrines)
Atuva.

by

of

the

Mkgadhi
chatuttinsa

language'
suttanta

"

Vihhanga patimanditanchatu
ayan

) Tivagga

sangahan

hi

bh^navd^ra
'

parimd,nan
"

tantin

sangdyetv^ the
34 Tanti

digha

yo

nam"'ti
contain

Having
banavctra

rehearsed embracing

(the doctrines)
composed

64

Suitans

classes,

(this was)
*

named

Dighanikdya'

"

Bodhivansa,

Mahavansa,

p. p.

253.

f
I

lb.
Abhidhknapadipikk,

252.

p.

16.

From
a

itfi
name

application
for the
or

to

the

Buddhist

doctrines,
itself
in

Tanti

come

sacred PaK. first

language

of the

Buddhists
Attha-

z.

the
9

Magadhi
^

Thus
convocation

Buddhagosa's

th^

"

Why
of

was

the
Vinaya

held
merits

In
which

order
are

tha

nidanan

the

pitaha^xhe
language, in
a

of

convey

in

the
in

Tanti

(P^li)
Balavataray

might
part

be
the

illustrated/*
which
where

us

also,
to

the

of

passage

ers

"58

in
:

the
"

Bev.

B.

Clough's

version,

left

uutranslated

Eva

mafifl^

pi

viSHeyya

Sanhita
Sanhita

tanti

y^

hita;

cbita

vannanan

Sannidha'byava
is to
are
'

dhanato.
know Tanti
a

at

say,

In

this

wise

the

rest

of

the

combinations
"

ich

susceptible of

in
letters

the

(language.)
hiatus.' of this all

Sanliita

combination For

without

the

elucidation

of
or,

the

grammar words,

language

there

three
in

schools;

in

other

Pali
classes,

Grammars
viz.,

ant

Ceylon

may

be

divided

into

three

(1

ddaniti;
1.
2.

(2) Moggall^yana;
are

and
treatises
head
there

(3)
which
are

Kachch"yana.
come

There Under
written
writer
of

but

few

under all

the

firs

the
upon

second
the

several, down by
to

which

have

principles

laid

Moggallayana,

Abhidhknapadipikk.

Owing of
that

the
in

omission
the

Introduction

and
the Bev.

Conclusion

work scholars
As
a

edition
expressed

lished
various
tho^e
a

by

B.
as

Clough,
to

oriental date"
in

have

conjectures
who
may
to

its

help,

however,

be

engaged
date of

antiquarian

researches,

and

view

fix

the

Moggallftyana,

the

omissions

here

supplied.
A.

B.

J.,

ya

ered

pitake into

vol. yi. Tanffn

tanti^

p.

511.

"

knilhk. original

^Pa^hama ^This

mahk first

sanglti
great
or

nkma

esk
was

kinchk-pi
moreover

rehearsal

(the

discourses

the

text)

on

the

Yinaya

Abhidhanapadipika.

1.

Tathagato

yo

karuiia

karo

karo
padan

'Paydtamos"ajja
Akd Nam^xni
paratthan
tan

sukhap

padan bhave
karan

kalisam kevala

bhave duk-karan

2.

Apiijayun

yam

muni

kunjar^
tare

jari

'Rujddimutta
2'hita

yahimuttare
nidhin

tiva^^ambu
tan

nara'nara

Tarinsu

dhamama'

magha

pahan'

pahan

3.

Gatan

munindo'

rasasiinutan

nutan
sutan
varan

'

Supu^tHakhettan Ganampi Sad"

guno'

bhuvane'sutan
pslni ghcna

kata

san

varan

nirantaran

taran

4.*

Nama *Attha

lingesu nichchhaya

kossallam
kdranam

Yato

mahabbalan
pi^a

Buddha

Vachane

vatthinam. Buddha
n'aham

5.

N"malingsln'
Bhd.sitass"' Dassayanto

yato

rahk

pakksissam

Abbidhd.na'

padipikan.

6.

Bhiyo

rupan

tarS, cha

saha

'Chariyena
Kvacha'
iVeyyan

katthachi vidhancna
napunsakan.

hachcha

thipun

7.

Abhinna
Dvando

liDginan
cha

yeva vdchak"

linga

G^thd.

pddanta

majjha/^/td

8.

Pumlttliiyan Sabba
Abhidhunan
^6yyan
tvanta

padan
cha
tara

dvisu
tisviti

linge

raiiibhe
mathtldi
cha.

9.

Bhiyo
Sogate
Nighandu

payoga
agame

mb,gamma

kvachi

yuttin lingan

chaniya

N^ma

kathiyati.

*I

adore

Tatkagata^ the
on

who

is

mine

of

compassion,
bis

and
reach,

who,

ving

renounced happiness
acts

beatific

nihhan

within
all the
to

confer

others,
in

performing

the

difficult-to-beof
sin.

complished
'I

metempsychosis,
DAawTwet,

fountain

(adore)

the

sin-scaring and
which

which paid

holy
reverence;

sa^es^

voidof

decrepitude
to

disease, the have

high

have and

an

conformance

the
the

mean,

both

(amongst)
ocean

and

other

beings,*

crossed

tri-annularf

f metempsychosis.)
'And
meritever

(do

adore)
field,

the who

supreme

priesthood^

(like unto
the legitimate

(producing)
Buddha;
worlds
an
"

have
reverence

become
"

J of

and

who
preserve

receive the
of

are

illustrious
itself"

(three)
practise
*

sanvara

" like

life

an

abundance

virtues.

Since

an

intimate
essential

acquaintance
to

with

nouns^

and

(thei
"5orrect

ders,

is

the

(ascertainment
is
a

of)
help

the
to

nifications
of

(of, words),
mastering
the

and word

powerful

those

si de

of

Buddha;

''''Nara
The

and

dnara

human

and *The

non-human.*
ocean,

"j-

^^tivattambunidi."
used which

encompassed the Klesa

here

for

"metempsychosis;"
merit

and

three

with barriers

three
are

circles Kamma^
sorrow

on
"

begets
the
term

and of
to

demerit
merit disciples.
or

Vipdka''
"

rewards applied the

and

evil, demerit.*

trouble,

pain

or

Sons

That

is,

'Preserve

Sila

shall
and

publish

the

Abhidhanapadipika,*
according
to

illustrating
their

oiins

(their)
of

genders^
discourses
feminine,

application

in

he
'

language The

(the

of)
and
different
;

Buddha.
neuter
are

masculine,

to

be

distinguished, from

chiefly,
association rule.
'

from

their

forms; and

sometimes

of

words

(context)

sometimes

by

fic speci-

[In

this
same

work]
genders.

dvanda,
When
or

compounds words
of

will which
a

consist
denote in
a

(of nouns)
the
verse,

the

genders

cur

at

the

end
to

the

middle
at

line

(such
line)
;

ords) refer but where

to)
Know
;

the
are

(names
placed

the)

beginning
commencement,
same

(of

that

they

efer
'

the

remaining
the
term

words

at) the (of the

denotes
all the

(they

line.)
both
;
are

that that
tu
or

dvisu

masculine and
that
to

and

eminine
in

tisw

signifies

genders "c.,

words
express

nding

(preceded
of
a

by)
series

aiha
of
are

given

he
*

commencement

names.

Nouns
to

and

(their)

genders chiefly

(here)
the
in

illustrated,
works,

according

their

appUcation,

in

Buddhist
Lexicons.'

and

ometimes The
I

after above
cannot

the

usage

adopted
to
was

is the

Introduction
why it

the

Abki^idnapadlpikA
in
out

nd

conceive by
B.

omitted
was

the

translation

f that

work

Mr.

Tolfrey, At which
;

and the
are

left

by

his
same

er, publishbook the

the
also

Revd.
nine above

Clough.

conclusion
likewise

of the left
out

stanzas,

in

lication pubus

mentioned
of

and
are

which,
here
bhii

since

they
;
"

enable

fix

the

date
1

the

work,
kan("o s^anna

subjoined
kanc?o

Sagga Tathk

cha

kan^^akan
esa

KaiK^attdyanvitk
Abhidhkna 2

padipika.
mahiyan

Tidive
Sakalattha
Ilxa PaAi yo

bhujaga

vasathe

samavhaya

dipani'yam
sanaro

kuBsdo

matiaia

hoti

mahdmunino

vachane.

Porakkama
Bhiipalo gima

bliujo

nkma

bhuaano

Laiikaya'
Jayi
4

masi

tejassi

kesari

vikkamo. chiran bhikkhu

samma

Yibhinnan

sanghan
sammagge digha
kalan

nikkya

Tayasmin

cha

kare^i

Sadehanva
Mahagghehi
5

nichchk
rakkhesi viharehi

'daro

yo

pacbcbayebi.

Yena

Lanka

Gama'rama Kittiyaviya

purihicb^
sambodhi

Kata
6

khettehi sadhkranan

vapihi.
patvit

Yassk' 'Nuggaham
Abampi

sabba
gandha vibudha
tena

kkmndam kkrattam

Patto

gocbaram.

Kkrite
Gropurkdi
Sa^a Sayasmin

pkssada
vibhusite

kan(^va

tattoya

pa^bimbite

Maha Vih^bre
Sarogama Yasata

Jetavana
sadhu

khyamhi
sammate

samuhamhi
santa

vuttina. kametia dbimata

Saddbamma/^Aiti

Mo^allanena
Tberena
racbita

yesa

Abbidbanapadipik^.
'

The

Abludhanapadlpika
Earthly, interprets the regions. the
was

consists General of
A of

of

three

sections

"

on

eavenly,
'

and
names

subjects.
all

It the

objects
person
sage.

in
who

Heaven,
excels

Earth,
in

nd

N6ga

sensible the

this,

ill
*

master

words
in

great

There

Lanka

Monarch

named

ParaJckamabdhw
virtues,

celebrated,

successful,

endowed

with

and

valorous

'

He

in
the

the

right

manner

(in
Sanghaa
long

the

legitimate
of the three his

mode)
Nikdyas
protection gf

reconciled*

bhikkkua
unceasing

and love, body,

;-|
to

nd,

with
as

extended
valuable

(them)

to

his

own

with

objects
in

mainte-

ance.:|:
'

He that

established
it
was

to

profusion
with
his

in

Lank^

the

same

manner

filled

renown,"
his

monasteries,^

ges, villa-

||parks,**
*

cities,-!^fieldsJJ and
special

tanks.""
wish-conferring of authorship
patronage, pecuUar
to

Being

the

object
the

of

too,

have

acquired

privilege

he
'

learned. Desirous
of
was

perpetuating
composed by

the

SaddJoamma,
erudite amongst
the

the

Abhidhatheray

apadipikd
'

the

Moggalldna the

Of

mild

deportment,

dwelling
received
in the

Saroga/m/in^
with
tion approba-

raternity
; ;
'

(who

and
"

were) (residing)

by

virtuous

Vohara

called

the

MahA

Jeta-

ana

[A

monastic.

Establishment]
"c.,
a

adorned
were

with by him

the

temples,

rnamented

porches,
as

which

built
Heaven

(the said aforein

his

king)

it

were

portion

of

reflected

ank/
Here
we

have

su"Scient
It
was

data composed

to

fix

the
a

date

of

the

Abhi-

hd/napadipikd.
who had

by
by

thera

named

MoggalHis

iina,

been

patronized

king

Parakkcmia.

"

"

He

reformed

the
or

religion.

""Upham performing
maintenance"
'

VoL

1.
the which

p*
same

299,

**

Association

Congregation
of
;

duties.'*
are

PaehekayoF^*'
; jnndaj"ata

Objects
*

foar, ; gilana

viz.,

chivara
'

ments' gar-

food'
the

Senuana sick
"

sleeping

objects'

pachciuiya

that

hich

is

necessary

for

^medicines."

"

See
"

deylon
He

Almanac the

for

1834.
in the

built
King
"

Viharas made

City

of

Anuradhapura""
of

i".

at

p.

190.
streets

II

"

The shops."
"

also

several

hundreds

houses

and

many

arranged

ith
**

Mahawansa,

He

formed

many

pleasant

and

delightful

gardens.""

ilfa%.

C.

B,

A.

S.J*.

148.
f t
"

He
**

built
formed

three

more

Cities." fields.*'"

"

Upham't

Makawansuy
B.

p.
Vol.

277.

tt
""

He

Paddy also

MaA.

C.

A.

S.

J.,

VII.,

p.

141.
ib,

"The

King

repaired

many

ancient

Tanks.""

^AfaAau;an"a,

p.

119.

cts,
"

which the

are

here
and

related, invincible

can

only

be

identified

with

those

heroic
with

royal and
most

warrior,
;

gloriously

endowe

might,

majesty,
"the

wisdom
martial,

and

radient

with and
to

enignant

virtues/'*
of the

enterprising according
He ascended

lorious
was

Sinhalese

Sovereigns,"-f"
of Polonnoruva.
we

who,

hi"the

ory,

Parakkamab^hu
in
1153
a.

hrone

d.

and

when

notice years,

that

who
the

reigned

for

thirty-three

turned
here

sovereign, ..that his attention

to

internal

improvements
of

which and after

;

are

mentioned,

in

he

latter
foreign

part
wars

his
to

reign,
a

he
we

had
may

brought
assign of is

his
to

local
the

and

termination

Abhidh"napadipika
of the

date

at

the

latter

end

the

second

half

twelfth

century. which
is

This, much

therefore, the fashion

posterior of the
we

to

the

Amarako"a,

after

Abhionly the

dhlinapadipikk.
the named three
work. masculine,

To

show

their

correspondence

need
from

present

following

introductory

stanzas

first
'

The

feminine, their
;

and

neuter

(genders)
;

are

to

be
the

known

chiefly
of

by words
a

different
sometimes

forms
by

sometimes rule.

by

association
'

and
to

specific

Here,

with

view

distinct
are

elucidation
not

(nouns
into

of)

fere dif-

unspecified Neither indeed

'

genders
are

rendered

dvmida

compounds

they,

without

order,

jumbled

together

nor

expressed

by

eka

sesAa.J
the
a

The
male

term

trlah'w female.
the
in

(denotes)
(Where

three

genders gender

; and

dvayok
expressly

the

and

certain)

is
;

negatived, ending preceding

remaining
tw

ones

(are meant)
Sec,
they

and,
not

where refer

words

(occur or)

atha,

do

to

the

(words).'
in

"

ItiscriptioTi

Ceylon Ixvi.
one

Almanac

for

1831.

Mahawansa,
Eka
seshah
:

p.
**

left

out"

".

".,

the
or,

omission conversely,

of

one

to

designate
of

the
one

same

another,

which

has

been
omitted

mentioned
name

the
or

expression
;
as

name
"

designate Asvin,"
in

another the

of
'

the
the

same

genus

family heaven,

A^vlnau

the
of

two

dual,

designate

Physicians

of
are

and

twin

sons

th

the

Aavini,'

who

Nasatya

Moggallayana's
that
was

Qrammar,
given
to

to

which

we

may

assign is
rules,

the
written

same

the

Abhidhanapadfpika,
style
; and

in

tation
notes
a

of
or

Kachchana's

contains

tary supplemenhas left

Vviti

and

examples.
on

The work.

same

writer
It has

hind

large

commentary

this

been

ther fur-

illustrated

by
work,

Totagamuva*

in
high
esteem

his

PanchikA-praxTipa^
among
moreover,

Sinhalese
a

held
of

in

the

learned.
an

yadassi,

pupil
of the
Satthanam Fkram
There

Moggaldyana
work, is

has,

written

ridgment

his

master's

called
:
"

the

PadorSddana,

om

which

following
karunSt
param

extracted
vatk

gatavat^

dhimatSt

nk
sadda

'tuma

pkdapanjara
disu.
vissute

gato

To

sattha

MoggaUkyana 'Chkpo
So' vinito

niha

suvach

yathii

kitsip

Piyadassi

nikma

yati

'dam

Byattan
'

Sukhappattiyk.
to

With

view

facilitate
the ascetic into of

(study)
named
the

this

specific

(work)
who,

has
a

en

composed

by
was

Piyadassi,
cage
of

Hke tuition, ous, generrenown.'

roquet
trained

which
in the

taken science

his the

(feet)
wise,

grammar

"c.,
of

by

and
There

eruditef
is also
a

Moggall^yana

thera
on

(world-wide)
above by the

Commentary
;
:
"

the
we

Ananda,
following

upil

of

Medankara
remarks
1.

from

which

select

introd

YagsSt

tulan

samadhi
parahitan
rakkhita

gamya vipulan
itlrita

parappasitdan
mayedam dheyyo

Samp^tam
So sangha

nkma

Bhkniiva
2,

bhktu
dhanassa

suchirkya
pa^patti khila

mahkdiskmi. parkyanassa kibbisassa

Saddhk

Sallekhiyena

likhitSt bhi
hita

Odumbai^

pabbata

vksi

kassa

Medankaravhaya

mahk

yati

pungavassa.

"

See

Sidatsangara

p.

li.

3,

Siladi

setihtk

pa^patti
saparattha

parknugena
ratena

Sisso-rasena

tena

Ananda Sankhepato

n^ma

pathi

tena

tapo

dhanena

nigadito

Padasl^hanattho.

1.

'

May

the

Supreme
of whose

Lord

named

Sangfaarakkbita,
patriotism* by
me,

by great like

the

aoquirement

unparalleled
been

this
exist

benevolent the
2
sun

(deed)
!

has

achieved

long
*

and

3.

'

The

Padasadana
known
to

has

been
the
name

concisely
of

commented

upon

by
upon
to

the

ascetic doing

by

Ananda,
;

(who

is) bent
adhered
who

good

himself

and
usages

others of

(who
;

has)
(and Mer
"

the

principal

(religious)
preeminent
the

SUaSx,
named

is)

pupilf
that

of the
on

chief-priest
called

dankara,

dwelt
faith,

Mountain
to

Odumbara,
duties,

(was)

rich

in

(was )
sin

attached
by

(religious)

and

(had)

scratched

off all
by is

SdUekhiya'l
in Pali
the reign

Payogaaiddhi
Buvanekab^u's, of has
3.

Vanaratana,
also
the
a

of
upon

one

of
the

the

Grammar
to

basis

Moggal"yana, quoted
The
in

from

Commentary
to

which

Tumour

his

introduction and, by
far
on

the{Mahayansa.
most
numerous,

next,
are

the
the

class enunciated

of Pali

Grammars
the

founded
usually

principles
after
the
name

in
author

SandhiJcappa,

called I
have

of

its

KachchAycma, Ceylon
; and,

This,
from it
or
a

as

already
Pali
that

stated, wori^s

is in

extant

in

list of

Burman
in

my

sion, possesseveral

I find
other
as

that

is

abo

found

empire.

The

editions

revisions Mr.

of Kachch^yana's "profess,
more

Grammar,

which,
as

remarked

by modem,

Tumour,
to

according

its

date
than

is
the

more

be
are

cond

ensed,

and and
in

methodized BiJavat^ra

preceding

one",

the the

Riipasiddhi BiLpasiddhi
namitwjb;

Buddhappiyo
''

commences

these

words Kachchd^
wyattau

Kachch^yananchachariyan

niss^ya

yanawannanadin, sukandan
"

b^appabodhatthamujun

karissan

padarupasiddhin."
*

lAL
lit.
'

love

for

"then*.*

4-

Son-pupil.*

"

Reverentially guided
by the

bowing

down

to

the
by

Achirayo-KachchJmo,
the

the

rules

laid
in

down
a

said
form;
of

KachchJkyano,

compose

Biipasiddhi, sections,
present p.
the

perspicuous
the
use

judiciously

bdivided

into

for

degenerated
not

telle inthe

(of
"

the

age"
xxvi.

which

could

grasp

riginal)"
The
"

Mahdvansa,
is in

following

conclusion

of

the

same

work

"

Wikkhy^iitdjiandatherawhaya
sisso

waragurunan Damilawasumati

Tambapan-

iddhaj^nan

Dfpankarakkhyo

dlpalads^isanan

appakiso
yo,

B^lAdichch^
soyam

wdsaddwitayamadhiwasan,

otayf

Buddhappi-yawho

yatf

imamujukan

ipasiddhin
*'

ak^i. disciple
unto

certain

of Anando,

preceptor
like
unto

who
a

was

(a

lying ralin

point)

eminent

preceptors

standard,
the

mbapanni,

named

Dipankaro,
and the

renowned

in of

Damila
frater
caused
the

ngdom

(of Chola)
there,

resident-superior

two

ties,

theB^^dichchd

(and
to

the

Chudd.manikyo),
He
was

religon

(of Buddho)
the

shine
of
periect

forth.

priest
o

obtained
and

appellation
thi"

Buddhappiyo
Biipasiddhi."

(the
"

delight

uddho,)
p. xxvL

compiled

Mahdixin-'

Before
we

I
are

notice

the

principal
viz., of
some

and

the

oldest

work

with

ich

concerned,
the
names

KachchJtyana's
of

Grammar, Comments
in

hall

mention
to

the
to

principal
refer

ereon these

which
;

I shall
viz.
or

have

occasian

the

course

notes

Nyltsa

Mukhamatta

Dipana

Kachch^yana
Kachch^kyana

bheda
bhede Tika Vannana.

Kachchayana
Kacheh^yana
Kachchayana

bhede Yannan^
Sara

Kachchayana Sandhikappa Sandhikappa

S^
Atavii

T\kk

Viggaha.*

All

these

have the in the

been
text

written of

expressl^^J

for

Ihe
I need

purpose

of

elucidating
is held is by

Kachch^yana^
high
estimation

which,
by

scarcely
that

say,

the

same

Buddhists

Panini

Brahmans.

Kachch"yana's
*

Gi^mmar

is divided the
on

into
on

eightbooks.
*

The
the
on

first treats third

*

on

Combination',
the

second
*

Declension',
the
*

on

Syntax',
'

fourth

Compounds',
sixth
on

fifth

(Tadhita)
on

nominal

Derivatives,'
'

the

Verbs', eighth

the
on

seventh

(Kitaka)
Affixes.'
are

verbal

derivatives,'

and

the

Unnddi
These
But,
seven.*

found
aphorisms

subdivided
do
not extract

into

Chapters
six hundred the first

or

Sections. and
eighty ductory introof his

all the
The

exceed

following

embraces

writers

remarks,

together

with

the

Section

Grammar:

"

SeHhsai Buddhan
Satthossa Yakkhkmi
Seyyan

tiloka

ahitan

abhivandi
Tnams^lftTi
varan

yaggan

cha

dhamma'

gana*

mutta

mancha

tassa

vachanattha hita'
nayena

subuddhim

sutta

mettha

su

Sandhikappan.

Jinerita
tassa

buddhii

labhanti

Tanchii'pi
Attan

vachanattha padesu

subhodhanena
amoha
vividhan

cha

akkhara
ko

bhik.v^
simeyya.
to

Seyyatthi
*

pada'mato

Having

reverentially

bowed three

down worlds, priesthood

the

supreme
to

chief
the pure

Buddha

adored and

by
the

the

and
;

also I
now

dkamma,
the the

illustrious in import

celebrate^
Sutta,
may
to

(pure)
end that

Sandhikappa
the

accordance
of that

with teacher's

the

deep

words

be

easily
*

comprehended.
wise
to

The

attain the
Sotto

to

supreme
of

(bliss)
Buddha.

by

conforming

(themselves)
*

teachings

That

(is

the

re-

Satta
cha

utattana
sata
aon
"

painanato=687
I ntter*'
'
"

SattaoR.
tnie

Vakkhami

The

import

of

this

word

taken his
Grammar

in

connection
in

with
midst

the the

allegation
priesthood'
since

that
may
same

Kachchayana

publiahed inference fonnd osed that in

(pakosMi)
it had
at

the

lead

to

the
are

first

only
were

memorial

existence.

But,

the

words

works

which

donbtless

from

uit)

of
sense,

correct

acquaintance

with
a

the

import

of

his

word.

he

too,

(is learnt)
words.

by

[non-ignorance]
let

knowledge aims
at

of

characters

and felicity

Wherefore,
the

him

who

that

ighest

hear

various
I,

verbal
1.

forms/

Lib.
1.

Section
sannato.

Attho

akkhara by

The

sense

is known

letters.
^

2.

Akkhark
a

p"dayo
"c.,
are

eka

chattklisan.
one*

The

letters, 3.

forty sar^

Tattho the

dant^

a^^ha"
with
o are

Of

these
4.

eight

ending
tayo

vowels.

Lahumatt^

rassk.

The

three
5.

light-measured Anne

(are)

short.

digh^.

The

others,
6.

(are)

long.

Ses^
are

byanjana.
consonants.

The

rest

7*
Each

^^^

pancha
five
to

panchkso
the end
of
m

mant^.

"

(set of)
8.

(constitutes^

class.

An is Para
names

iti
a

niggahitan. dependent,*

The

An\
9.

samann^
in

P^yoge.j;

Other's
10.

composition.
madho'-^hitam'
assaran
sarena

Pubba'
first

viyojaye.
vowel,

Let

the the

be

separated
a

from

its

(inherent)

by

endering)
Such is

preceding
sententions

consonant.

the

brevity
are

with

which

the

Rules
author
or

Kachchayana's
three

Grammar

expressed. them.

The

opts

modes
disputes
forty-tliree

of
the

explaining
correctness

First,

Vuttiyd
that

Moggallayaua
contains

of

this

Sutton,

and
short
as

says
e

the

Pali,
and natios
o

habet

characters,

including
is
nearly
as

the old

(epsilon;
Sinhalese
from

icrou.)
omits

The

Sinhalese
This

Alphabet, is evidence of

which

the

these.
anusvBra.

that

language

beimg

derived

the

Pali.

The

"f

Names
AHiO'tfUtam
most

or

technical
"that

terms.

which

stands
to

below
mean

[after
preceding
to

such
;

separation.]"
for
in composition,

The

word

however
writers

be

unArstood
as

whio^
is
oon-

ern

regard

tree

from

IxUtom

top,

the

first* written

character

ViirttikdSy
and

comments

to

supply clear
on
some

the
;

deficiencies
examples

in
;

th

uttas,

to

render

them
notes

secondly
of

and

hirdly

explanatory in
the

the and

principal
answers.

gi-amma-

ical

terms
are

shape

of

questions
a

To exceptions several by "z* the

these

gain

occasionally

added
examples

note

to

mark
is

the

he

Rule.
and

In
towns

the

mention
were

made
sacred

of

of the

laces

which
as

rendered

abode

G6tama,
much given

such

SAvaMi,

Patdli,
between
E.
panchaml

Baranaai

There

lso

correspondence
in
1.

the

Paninya

Sutras

and

hose

Kacchjlyana.
ApsLd^e Apadwie

"

Pamnt
"

III.

4,

52.

panchaml

Kachchsofana.

So

likewise
2.

:"

Bhuvkdayo
Bhuvskdayo

dh"tavah.
dhs^tavo.
ratyanta

I. 3,

1.

3.

Kkladhvano JK^iiladdhsina

sanyoge.

II.

3, 5.

mackclianta

sanyoge,
6.

4.

Kartarl

krit.

III.

4,

Kattari
5.

hit.

Asmadyuttamah.

I. 4,

107.

Amhe

uttamo.

Again,
of the

the

text

of

Panini

is
thus

altered
;

to

meet

the

cies exigen-

Pali
6.

Grammar,
Tinas
trini

trlni

pa^ama

madhyamottam^
purissL.

Dvedvepathama

tnajjhimuttama.
the whole work

[1. 4,

101.

Tradition
we
now

represents

that,
was

(including
the
same

VvMi)
person.

have is
a

it,

written

by

one

and

ut

this

contradicted
few

by

another
hereafter.

Tradition.

On

this,

shall

offer

observations the
was

From

its language, work.

was

Pali

Qrammar
written

appears
at
a

to

be

very

ncient

It

probably
on

time

when
form

ature liter

usually

carried

in the

concise

Algebraic

"

These
as

are

donbtless, by
at

taken

from

"

the

conteiuporaneous

History
as

of
at

Baddha/
a

hich,

stated

Buddhagosa,

''contains
or

records

snob

these-"'

such

period dwells

htgava

dwells

Savatthi,

at

the

Jetavana

vobara'

"

'-he

risms.
B.

This
C,
embracing

is

put

down the

by

Pr.
at

Max
which
the

Muller "he
proof
not

at

600

"

period which
upon

founder
on

of

ism may
to

flourished, be

and
in

best
was

which
rior poste-

te

fixed

Asiatic
are

History,

only

the

Mcmtas
and

(which

identified
but

with

the

V^das
to

Vedangaa

Veyydkarana,

subsequent

the

d
upon

Bhdrata,f
other

Md/mdyana;
data,

Asvaldyanal
B.

and

Pardaara

"

477

C.
of
so

To

the

indefatigable
whom
notes, to

labours
I
were

the

learned

translator

Mah^vansa,
of

have

frequently first of

mentionedin

the for

these
as

Europeans
date
my

indebted

the

rmation

the
to

probable

Eachchjbyana's
clear,

Gram*
Mr. Tur-

In

order

render
on

observations
are

authorities
In

the
on

subject
the

here

extrated.
we

"

the

commentary

R6phasiddhi
particulars in
son

find

the

low fol

distinct purporting Eachch"yano

was

and
to

important be

regarding
own

Kachchjir
:
"

conveyed the

his
of

words

"

sigrifies
the

Kachcho.

Thethat
name

said

hdio

first

individual family.

(who
All who

assumed
are

as

patronymic)
stock
"

in by

that birth
who
?

descended

from

are,

Kachch^yana.
is this

(If

am

asked)

Kachchayano
It is he
the

?
was

Whence
selected

hi

Kachch4yano
important office
who

(I answer), (of
compiling
on

who

fo

first

Pali
'

Qrammar, Bhikkhus
of

by from

dho

himself;
my

said

that

occasion)
who
are

gst in

sanctified
that

disciples,
is

capable

ing elucidatthe
most

detail,

which

expressed

in

the

abstract,

nent
'*

is this

Mah^kachchkyano.'

Bhagaw^

(Buddho)
of

seated
his

in

the

midst
was

of

the

four

classes

devotees,

which

congregation

composed

(vi
by

These
iita,

ate

saiJ,

in

the

Buddhistical

annals,

to

have

heen Kassapa,

compiled and
'H

A/"aka,

Yomataggi,
is

Angtrasa,
frequently

Bharadvaja,
mentioned

Vase^fha,

Bbagu. Itiliasa.

Mafaabharata

under

the

designati

of

iests

and

priestesses, mouth, of

male

and
a

female flower and

asceties expanding
forth
*

:)

opening under
a

sacred

like

unto

the

nial

influence
like

Surio's
that

rays,

pouring
"

stream

eloquence

unto

of Brahmo is

said

My

disciples
abroad by of of

profoundly
tidings of

wise
the

SJtriputto

competent
in

to

spread

wisdom
of
me

(contained
that, of
;
*
"

my

TeUgion)
the

hi

aving

proclaimed
by
a

To

define
let
water

bounds
grains
great

hi

niscience

standard counted
the well

measure,

the

sand
ocean

the

Ganges
;
;

be
let
as

let

the

in
in

the the

measured

particles
as

of matter his that,

various

great

earth

e
"

numbered' It
has

by

other

discourses. the
saviour

also there
one

been
are-

admitted
no

excepting whose

he

world,
to

others
part the

in of

existence
the of

wisdom of has

qual
the

sixteenth also

profundity Sariputto
great and

Suriputto.
been
also,

Achkrayos Moreover,

wisdom the of
other

brat cele

while dominion
were

disciples
the

who

ad

overcome

the

sin
;

attained

four

gift

sanctification

yet
were

living
capable
task

he of

(Buddho)
illustrating in

allotted, the
same

from

mongst

those
this

who

word
manner

athagato,
a

important

to
on

me,

"

the
son,

hat

Chakkawatti
sustaining I must
to

rkja
the

confers of

an

eldest
the

who
of

is

ble capa

of

weight

empire,
unto

oflSce
a

Parinkya-

o.

therefore

render conferred.

Tathagato
Bhagaw^ has place propound.
nations

service assigned

equi vale
to

the

honor

most

worthy

commission. has achieved, dialets which vouchsafed

men

Let

me

impUoit

faith

whatever
"

Bhagawk
being
the

to

This

of

various

and by

tongues,
its

rejecting

had

become and
to

confused languages, of the

diso derl

mixture

with
by

the

Sanscrit

other
the

will,

wit

facility

acquire,

conformity

rules of

grammar
of here his

pr po

by Thus
the called

Tathkgato,

the

knowledge
Kachchkyano,

word is

Buddho

'

There simply

Mahd

who
setting

(in

work)

Kachchkyano,

forth

qualifica tion

resented

by

letter"*'"

composed

the

grammatical

work

led Before

NirtiUipitako.'*
I

Makdvaiwa
of

p. xxvii.

notice

some

the

objections
be

urged
to

against
refer
to

the
the of

ve

ta*adition,
other

it may

perhaps;
who

coQYenfent ^iven

ious

Pali

writers

have

it the

sanction

ir

high

aut}iority.
commences

Kadlichiiyana

his aanndbto
;

work,

as

we

have

already
been Suttan

seen,

th

AWid
the

akhka/ra
passage

and

it has

already
that

shewn
was

om

quoted himsel"

by

Tumour, This
is

that
mwe

clared in

by
the

Budi^ia

dearly

stated

as

llows

SUTTA AWio
?

NiDDESA, 6di Kadib m"ha;

aJckhara
!Kiagavata

sanndto-ti
vuttan.

idan

suttan

kena
Uppala gahetvit
kari*

ttan

vuttanti"Yama

imakii

dve

Brahman^
Nadi-tire

Khayorvaya KhayorVayanti
machdian

kammaMi"nan j^ammat^h"ne
charantan
patan

chchhantil
eko

milne

udake
bakoti

ganhitun Eko ghato

bakan
gha^

sv^

udaka

vicharati. Bhagava

disv^

to

ti vicharati,

Tad4

obhd49an thapesi.

munchiivK

attho Kamma^thi

ok-

ara

aaflj^^o-ti
pati^hahi. mahlk

vkkyan Tasm"

Tesan
vuttanti

cha

Bhagavati
Bhagavantan

vuchchati.

Tan

atv"

Eachchano
tale

y"ehitv"

Himavantan
slsan

ntv"

Mano-silik

dakkhina
hutv"

disd-H^gan
aitho

katva

r"tthima

dis^bhimukho

akkhara

saHfiUo-ti

kan
*

Kachchdyana
It is

paJcaranan
*

rachi.
by laid
Two letters* "c.

said

that

sense

is

represented
? It
was

By

whom

as^this

suttan

declared
it
was

down

by
Brahman

Bhagavk.

(To

xplain)
and

when

declared:"
learnt

(Priests
the
;

ama

Uppala,
of
abstract
name

having

(from
we^t

otama)
away
*

hhayawhilst
on

aya

branches
in
Another with Maha

Kammaiihd/riarvf
meditation
the

and,

ngaged
"
*'

repeating
"

Khay

a-Vaya*

for

Rupasiddhi.*'
But, different
the
it

In

the
seem

ahove that

note

Tumour latter
is
an

identifies

pasiddhi
of

Nlruttipitaka.

would

th" and

orif^inal
also
from

rk

Kachchayana, work
such
as

from

his

Grammar, See

different
Vannanti,

s
f

theological

entitled
abstract

Nettipakarana.

Kachchiiyana
to

Studies

meditation

"g.,

preparatory

th"

attainment

of

th

banks
catch
*

of
a

the in

Nadi,
the

one

of

them

saw

crane

proceeding

fish

water,

and other,

began seeing

muttering*
a

UdaJco
*

ko

water-crane.'

The
began of
a

ghcUe-patan
At this
the time
sen"

oth

in

pot'
means

muttering

ghata-pato.
he
issued,
sense

agavaby

light,
sannhto

which
"

declared
is

nce,

Attko
Their that

akkhara
Kamma^h^nan

*The
also

represented
Wherefore

by

tters.'

was

efiectual.

said

this

Suttan
this,

was

declared proceeded in
south,

by

BhagavJL

When

Mahi
sion permisregion
east

chchkna
to

learnt Himavanta.
head the

he

with
the and

Bhagavk^s

Beclining
towaids the

Ma/ruhsila
facing consisting the

th

his

mposed

Kachchdyana-prtkarana akkhara
to

of

(th

uttans)
In

attho

saimaio

"c.'

the

oMhakathd
spoken of

the

Anguttara. the Tlka

to

NikAya
the
in
same

Malia
work

Kach-

^yanais further
from

;*("and
which

contain

particulars

are.quoted

the

following

extra

The

Kachchayana lakkhana

Vannana.
Udaharana sankh"tan
iman
eva

Achariy"

pana

vutti

chchkyana

gandha

pakaranan

Eachchayanattherena
eka

tanti

vadanti.

Tena

fih"

nipkta patthana
pakaranan,

Anguttara
vasena

tikayan

ahk

Kachchdyanatthero
pakaranan, chUi Mahli

pubba

Kachnan, pakara-

ayna

Nirutti
sangha

Netti

pakaranattayan
say that this

majjhe

pakitsesL'

'

Teachers
or

Eachchkyana
numbers

gandha lakkhani

pakarana

Text

composition)

which

(Rules),
(Examples),
Wherefore
*

wtti
was

supplementary
by the

notes),
Eachchayana Anguttara

and

Uddharana
thera
himself.

mposed
to

th

ka

of

the

Ekanipdta
to

says previous the

the

thera

h^

Eachchkyana,

according midst of
the

his

aspirations,
three

blished viz.

in

the

priesthood

tions, composiPakarana,

Kachch"yana
Pakarana'
on

Pakarana,

Mahd

Nirutti

nd
^

Netti
Or

r"tber
extract

pondering
therefrom

what infra.

he

had

observed.

Vide

Of

the
extant

three
in

books this the

here

mentioned

the it has work, from The

Netti'
been

PaJcarana
suggested

is

lso

Island;
style
to

and
of this

by give
a

Pandit

that

of that

which

pecimen,*
can

would
be
no

seem

diflFer

of

the

Grammar.
of
a

here
as

question
grammar,

of this.
in

language

work of
not

uch

the Max

Pali

which

(to

adopt
theauthor
his

the

words

rofessor
and
them

Muller

in but
jas

respect
squeezes

ofPanini)
and which

"does
thoughts,

rite

compose,

distils

and

uts

before

in

form any

hardly
Xa

deserves
the style

the of

ame

of

style,''*^cannot
on

bear

comparison
was

work
the

religion, reader,

where

the
to

object
cramp
a

to

convince

and in
who

nate fasci-

and
a

not
to

the

writer's
to

ideas
those

small
com-

entences

with

view

render

facility other the the

same

nitted

them and

to

memory.

Even written

in by

languages
person
may

works
present demand. the

on

cience
same

religion
of
terse,

he

diversity
may be

style

which

subject
dry
here. does
by
;

he

one

sententious,
as

and
case

and The
no

other

ull,

flowing,

and

elegant
in

is the
two

difference
means

style,
any

therefore,

these

works,
the I of
am

furnish
to

ground

for

overthrowing

authorship again

ascribed by

his

PdU

Ghrammar.
Pandit
are

And,
the
from
;

reminded
the

my

earned

that

metre

some

of

g"th^

in

Kac-

h"yana
as

different

those and
that

in the that
was

text-books difference

of Buddhism

uch

Dhammapada
that
era.

would
long

favor

he

belief

this

grammar

written

after

the

uddhist I freely
that

admit
the

the

force
of
ima's

of
metre

the

learned

Pandit's
were

observat-

ion,

difference

(if,such
and would of

the

fact)

tween be-

confessedly

Got

gathks,

all other establish

PUi
a

writings

including

Kachchlina's
between
two

grammur)
periods

line
I

marca of dealso
a

literature.
in my
as

And
search

onfess

that in
the

I h^ve

been

disappointed
metre,

after

erse

Vasantatilaka
in
any
}

such

Setthan
in the

tiloka
Buddhist

ahitan
*

"c,,J
Appendix.

of the

original

writings

See

Saiiskrit

Literature

312.

orks.

But,

leaving
and
permitted
in

this

question
mate

for

the

determin
sdiol^rs
thnn of

tion

ture

researches,

ot

competent

my
a

lf^

I may
metre

be

to

remark
lectures

that
does

the
not

absence
necessarily
metres
are

par

cular it

Buddha's
in his

prove
suit

at

Was

unknown

time.
are

Different
some

fe di

compositions.
to

There

which
form

peculiarly

apted

the
the

genius

of

the of

oldest
poets.

of

the the

I^,

before

received
Tiistvibh, and
in
to

daborations
the

Such*are
the

Anu^^bfa,

Anua^bh-triatobh,

Jagati,
we

the

Tri^^bh*

gatly

the

Yaitaliya The
it is
to

metres

which mtatilaka

frequently

meet

th

old

writings. Pali,
as

Vas
the

is generally

unsuit-

the

Sinhalese, compomtions
of

and in
those

other
that

soAsalled
metre
;

akrita

dialecta
found

Although
in

ar

casionally have

works

bo(h

languages

ye

ey

all the
of w^cb
free.

evidence
the

of

being

fc^roed,

and

abound
are

with

mpounds^

reaQy

dd

Buddhist
the
not
reason

writings

com-^

ratively
metre

This

is

(kubtless
is

why fo^und
occa"ons

this

par tic

(Vasantatilaka)
which
with
a were

to

be
as

in

the

tu le

of

Gotamay

expressed,
to

presented

themselves^ study,
the

view

impart
attempts however,
for
too,

religious
at

instruction,

thout with

and

without

any
was,

ornament.

The

grammarian
which
ornament.
we

different.

Except
he
seems

the
have

Suttans
studied He,
as

were

designed Perhaps

instruction,
he
not
was

fcmd

of

di

learn

from He
in had

himself,
no reason,

ay.

did

despise

Sanskrit
to

ammatioa].
Sanskrit

terms.
metres

therefore,

reje
depict

ally

whidi

he

could
the with

wiUi adoption in

el^ance
in this

virtues of
metres

erf his

Teacher.
axe

Hence
not
met

mar gram-

whidi

original

Buddhist

ltiixgs.

There
aside which

is not,
the I

therefore,

apprehend,
as

sufficient

evidence
of this

popular
perceive

tradition

to

the
by

author various

mar, Gram-

is supported

considerations

ical

facts.
the
at

That
Pd,l%
the time

the
was

Magadki
an

which

the

Buddhists
form be
of

despeech ed.* believ-

minate

actually
arose,

existent may

Behar

Buddhism period
,

easily

Yet,
common

before

this

when
perhaps,

the

Magadhas the
zest,

had
language

but

religion,
that

and,
was

cultivated

which

religion

taught
to

with

greater

it is not

robable
were,

that
as

the
the
this

treatises

elucidate
are

the
at

vemacul"r
the
why present

gidhl

Sinhalese
is

Grammar
the

limited.
as

And
he

obviously
had

reason

Kachterms

ayana,

himself
authors.
payoor.

declares,

borrowed

technical

m Para,

Sanskrit
samanna

(Vutti)
ti vk

"

^ya

cha

pona
t"

sakkata

dh^su
pi

samann^

ghosik'
*

sghosik'

ti

va

pa^yoge

sati

thfk'

utti]

composition yujjante. Such terms (Grammatical)

or

In

other's
as

appelations. called ghdsa,

are

sonants)
here

ajhdaa
as

(surds)

in Sanskrit
may

(gandhas')') compositions
require.' the
or

adopted
*

exigency

By

Sanskrit'
by

sources,

perhaps, writers,

writer
such

meant

the
of

PrAPimini

it
are

Grammars indicated by

Sanskrit
the

Rules
the

in

following
:

extract

from

Kavikan-

pdsa

Kedara-bfaatta
P^ni
Lakshana

bhagav^
mapi

Prikkrita
vakti

Sanskritit

danyat

I^rghaksharancha
Dekiin

kutrachi
mupaititl.

mkti^

is

"

Pknini,

the

Rishi,
of

speaks

also besides

of

the

lakshana Sanskrit;

(or
and
one

mmatical
that

Rules)
in
some

Priikrita,
a

the
letter

ays)

languages

long

j
be

becomes
well

labic
or

instant*
not,

But, dear

whether that

this
this
was

inference
"me

founded

it is quite

of the
terms^ not

earliest
from Rules

Pali PaK
of

mmars, Sanskrit
See
This

which

borrowed
Its
as

its technical

writers.
Nikaya"
is sometimes
to

object
Magadhi
gantha,

too,
being

was

to

fix

the
of

Sanyatta
vord

th"

the

langaage

MagadJu.

written
that
fcome

The

commentator

explains
m

by

long
or

letter*
are

are

meant

the
to
one

Sanskrit syUabie

become

languages,

each

equal

stant in-

at

language
the become and

since

at

the

time
other its

Eaehchayana

wrote

ammar
to

Magadhl,
'

like by

''dialects/'

had

cy tenden-

confused
other
the age its

disorderly
This is
a

mixture fact. As

with
a

th
vernacular

nskrit

languages/ Magadhl
of

dialect, Asia
till the

scarcely
Two

maintained hundred
'

its
years

character

As6ka.

had

ly hardbetween

elapsed
Pali

before
and

development
There in
must

was

intermediate
have those

Sanskrit/

therefore, during
been

been
two

adual

declension Indeed
that

Pali
not

literature

centur

this
the

could
very

have
of

otherwise

when

certain

pupils

Gotama
of

had Buddhism.

resorted Hence
"

her

languages
necessity

for
for
a

the

elucidation
like

compilation the easy

Eachchkyana's of the

work

Grammar

'for

comprehension

word

ddheJ ^SvMhia
as

BuddJia Kachchdyana
not

VachoTian
says in the

ugganhiasanti-ti
opening of his the the

himself
to

work,

itten,

according
'

the

vernacular

dialect

of
of

Ma^

dhas,
"

but

in

accordance
auftu,

with
metta

the
8U

(language)
Sandhikappan.
"om
was

Sut

ns'

vakkhdmi
are

hita

These inferred first

not

all

the

circumstances
I's

which

it

mny

that

Kachchkyan
of
a

Grammar
As
was

written
case

dawn
nations,

Buddhism. sacred
literature

the
rise

with

cient

gave

in

Magadha

ilological
a

sciences. written

Religious medium,

doctrines naturally

when led
for the
rescuing

disseminated
Buddhists
the
correct

rough

ammatical
from

inquiries.
corruption,
as

The
and
seen,

necessity

dham-

for

preserving
was

their

preta inter

already
to
as

powerful of

inducement
Preceptors*

tama's

disciples vachana,

fix

the

rules

their
is

words,

Jina

the

Mikgadhi

called

in

most

ancient

rks. It

may,

however, centuries

be before recorded

asserted

that
nor,

neither

was

writing
were

own

six

Christ,
at

consequently, I have

ddhist

doctrines

that

date.

discussed

ose

investigations,
into
as

that

at

the

time
was

when

Buddhism
in

first
as

rted

existence,

writing It
was

known

Magadha
time

painling.*

practised
were

in

the
to
were

ofGotacountries

-f
by

Buddhist
its
means.

doctrines

conveyed and
usages

different

Laws taught
to

recorded."
women

tle

children
able
to

were

write.

Hf

Even
character

were

nd

read

and

writfe.||
was

The
'

used
metal

was

Ndgari,**
hydes, That the

Vermilion

the

ink', the

and

plates^ of
the
to

th,

and

leaves

constituted
annals

'paper'
were

me.-f-f-

Buddhist very

therefore,

reduced reasonable^

ting

from

commencement,

is not

only
proof.

is indeed To
return

capable
to

of

easy

and
The have

satisfactory
literary

the

subject.
seem

qualifications
indeed such the is

of
as

the
to

ra

Kachchayana,
the belief of

to

been his
He time
was,

rant

that

he

devoted

to
as

elucidation

the

language
in

Buddhism.
works,
He
as

abundantly
member

ved

the

Pali Church.
Annals,

distinguished,
also of

of

Buddhist Buddhistical
it is

is
one

mentioned
the disciples
'

in
of

the

tan Tibe-

Gotama
the

expressly in Kor^si

stated the

of

him,

that

he

recited
*

S^tra

emancipation
Mons.

vulgar
doubtless

dialect.'
meant

By the

the

vulgar
to

dialect*

De had Gotama

language
"

which

lebrooke

previously
himself
was

given
states,
most

that

appellation
of

the

MdMahk

hi,

that

all
to

his

pupils
his is
:

chchayana
In
the

the
very

competent of
of

elucidate
which

trines dochere

language the

the Angutta

sage,

oted

from Bhikkhavfe

the

Ekanipdta
mama

Nikdya

Etanag-

s"vakknan
atthan
iii. in
my

bhikkhunan

sankhittena yadidan Mah^

^sitassa

vitthlurena
lib.
Vagga.

vibhajantknan,
possession.

Fapanchasadaniya. Id. also

Sanynt

Maha

See

C.hamakkhandaka

and

host

of

other

aathorities.

X Jd.

Nikaja"
Vilasini.

"fec. ""e.

Sumani^ala
Maba

Vag^a.
Nikaya Sudan
; Mrtha
lya.

II Sanyat
Papancha

Vngga,

and

atthakatba

to

Dhammapada

*"

chchano
of the all

'
"

Priests,

he

who my is

is

MahJt
who

Eachchkjana
can

is t

ief

the

bhikkhus,
of
to

pupik,
concisely

minutely
That

date eluci

aeTise

what

expressed.'
not

th

premacy of
we

refers Eachchkyana
extract

the

literary,
appears

and from

the

theological,

ments attaincomment

the

following
to

ich

from

the

atthakathii

the

Anguttura

kdya.
Anne

kira

Tathligaiassa

sonkhepa
vasena

vachanan

Attha
pana
thero

vasena

ritun
sakkoti
'

sakkonti
:

vyanjana
aggo-ti
to

vk

ayan

ubhayeni^

tasmi^
are

Tutto.

Some by

able
of

amplify
or

the
by

concise

words
their

of

Tathlkgata

ther

means

letters,
so

[shewing]
waya.

sense.

Bu

is

thera

can

do

in

boiJi

He

is therefore

calle

hief.'
In the
to

Nydaa
be

or

the

Mukha
commentary

maMcHRpanif
on

which
Eachch^yana's
than

is

pos sup

the and,

earliest
as

Ps

rammar,
the

may

be

proved,

older
is not
'

the

Eiipaaidr'

hi,

author

of

this
thera"

Grammar
whose

only

identified

wit

Eachchkyana
by

intellectual
is
thus

supremacy
respected

was

tolled
'

Buddha'

but

his

memory

Obeisance/
Eachchliyana9 Eachch^yanassa cha

muni

vannita
matta'

buddhi-'massa
mahan

mukha gata

kanissan cha.

Pkrampar^
'

vinichchaya

nichchhayan

Also

(bowing
had

down been

to)

Eachchkyana,
by

whose

intellectual
I

a t

complimented
conclusions
as

Buddha,

shall
have

comment

upon
down

the

positive by

(Rules)
very

which

been

nded

tradition

the

oral

(teachings)*

is

Eachchkyana/
reference the
:

With

to

the

name

Eachchiiyana
occurs

in
the

the

above

tract^

following
wherein
also

passage
the

in

Nirutti
the
consum^

sdr

anjuaa

writer

acknowledges

te

scholarship
Mukhamatta
*

of
the very

the

Grammarian.

(word

of) mouth',

term

which

does

Dot

necessarily

Kasi

KBinmkdina
pitit tassa

vykparena

knchclinti

dippatlti

Kachcho,

thera

apachchan
p^bhinna
tan

putto
pafi

Kachchkyano etadftgga

Neruttukknan thine
^ha-

pabhava

bhiito

sambhido
natvana.

pito
'

khin"savdtthero,
By
reason
'

pana

of

the

occupation
Thence
son

of

ploughing

"c.
name

[comes] of)
who the
was

aChchati

he

shines/

Kachcho,
"

(the
a

hera's

father.

His
who

is Kachch^yana

thera,

arahanta,
had attained

was

placed

in

the

highest
who
was

position, the
first

who

the

patiaaTobhidd,*

and

ause

(source)
Although
the

of

all NeruttikJb,

[Grammarians
Kachchdyana
the foreign

or] philologers/
was

it is

stated-f"

that
'

residing

at

vanti,

pachchanta stated
;

or

regions'
was

J,

it is however
in

expressly

that the

this

Grammar
of

written

the

iTnavanta

and
the

from

mention

the of

principal
and
to

towns

elebrated
that

by
which of
a

presence

and from
in

abode
a

Gotama,

cially espe-

had

risen city

small time the

then
Tarnoar

village
of the

the I
mean

importa

populous it may of the

in
four

the

sage, took

Patdbliputtay%
such
Sivpilisimbia. of the

be
names

inferred
as

that
were

writer of recent
has

for

his

xamples
*

celebrity.
this
to

See

Clough's
of

Dictionary. sanctification.'

defined

be

'

the

ttainment
f

gifts

Id
Dr.

the Mair
or

Ckammakkhandaka in
men

Section
Texts,
mast

of
says

the that
been

MahB,
'

Vagga,
people

his

Sanakrit
Eastt

the

whom
or

Yaska
ihe

designates
or

reLchyaSt

of the
"

have

the

Kikatas annals
the

Mag.idhas,
the
dem,

the

ngas,

orthe is used defined

Vangas/
to

^p. 871.

lathe
the
'

Buddhist beyond
the

however,

word

chanta Pach-

designate
MahA

all
Vagga

countries

Majjhima
are

which

is

us

in

the

Here
town

Pachchanta

these

Coantries.
the side it
West

On
Maha it is
the

he

East

[of Mrijjhima]
Beyond
them

is tLe

market
conntry

called of

Kajangala,
and

and this

on

ala.

is the

great is the

pachchanta,

of

ajjha.

On
country,

the

South-east
and this side

river

called

Salalavatt.
On the

Beyond South this side

it is is of is

is

the

chanta Pach-

of

it the

Majjha.
conntry, called Thuna.

the
it

town

called

takanni.
the West

Beyond is the

it is the Brahman side

of it it

Pachchanta
village the
the

and

the

Majjha*

Beyond
the

the

Pachchanta

untry,

and

this

Majjha.
Pachchanta

And

on

North
and

the

mountain

called
it is the

suraddhaja.

Beyond

is

country,

this

side

of

ajjha/
"
Jt

is

stated
this

in

the

Buddhist
which of
in

annals modem
for
was

(see
times

the

first received
of

Banavara
the
name

of

the
of

Parinibban
Patna,
was

uttan)

that

city,

has
purpose by

ilt
is

during also
stated

the

lifetime that
at

Gotama,

the

checking
Vassakara,

the

Vajjians;
two

and

the

time

it

built

Sunidhaand
its future

ministers

Gotama

As

we

hare

already purity

seen,

the
in

Magadlii Magadha
the code and

scarcely

maintained

its

original

the
;

deaa
of

until

the

econd

ecumenial which
was

convocation

and
time,

the

Vajjia
may

eretics,

made
as

at

this

which
was

learly

identified

the

Nepal
between and the which the

collection,* the Prkkrit prove

in

point

anguage

''intermediate'' Dhammapada;
are

Pali of

of the

Kachchkyana

nd

the
These

Pillar-dialect.
Grammar the Pali

important composed
it became
was

facts,
in

that'the
age

uestion
"

was

golden with

of the

ratu lite

^before
the

interlarded
so

Sanskrit,

and

efore
the

language

much that, the

neglected,
excfept those

(as
who

at

the

time

second

convocation),
version of

maintained
men were

he

orthodox
to

Scriptures,
to

literary
nature
as

nal)]e

pay

correct

attention accidents

'the

of well

nouns,

their
the

enders,

and

other

of Grammar,

as

ous vari

requirements
Nkma

of

style/-|parikkhkran
kkappakarankni
tancha
annan

lingan

cha
akansute.

Pakatibhkvan

vijahitvk,
imiform which
with
;

Thus, above aside,

when

the

and
there

popular
is
no

tradition
reasonable inferences
very
was

stated
ground
to

he

extracts,

is

coupled
attention

the
it is, I
of

many

which

ve

directed

apprehend,

clear
one

that

achchkyana,
eminent
in

the

author of

Sandhi-kappa,
As the

of

th have

ighty

disciples the

Qotama^
of

such,

he
century

must

lourished

latter-half

sixth

before

hrist.
Against
to

this
another

popular
name

belief
of

I have

been

referred
the

by

several
of

riends

Kachch^yana, Tnentioned

author
in
the

th

bhidharTTia
of

Jndna
Hiouen-thsagn,

prasthdiia,
the

following 629

count
D.

Chinese

traveller

of

"

645

Apres

avoir

fait

environ
il

cinq
au

cent

li,

au

sud-est

de

la

capi

ale

(de Chlnapati),

arriva

convent

appel^

Ta-mo-souou

a-na-seng-kia-lan

(T4masvana-sangh4

lAma),

le

convent

la

Foret qui

Sombre.
suivaient
un

On
les

comptait

environ

trois

cent

reli-

ieux

principes grave leur

vertu surtout
et

de

Tdcole'^des Sarv^tivJuias.
et
se

avaient par Us la

ext^rieur de

imposant,
et

distingualeur
carac-

nt

puret^

U^dvation
Fetude du

de petit

re.

approfondissaient Buddhas du kalpa la

V^ieule. doivent leur

ex-

mille
ce

des

sages

(Bhadrakalpa)
des

ns

lieu,
la

rassambler subEme'
loi.

multitude
la
trois

Devas

et
annee

iquer Nirvana

Dans

centifeme
eut
un

aprfes des

de

S"kya

Tathagata, qui

il
composa,

maitre
ce

S^sle
sicr

as,

nomm^

KUty"yana,

dans
"

convent,

a-tcbi-lun

(Abhidharma-jnina-prasthJtna.)
occidentales
travelled
par

M^moirea

es
'

Contr^
Having

HioueTv-thsang,
five hundred
at

liv, i/v, p.
li
southwest

200.

about
he

of

the
"Tathe

pital

(of Chinapati)

arrived
"

the

monastery

called
or

-sou-fa-na-seng-kia-lan of
are

(Tamasvana
About
who

Sangharkma)
three follow
a

nastery

the

dark-forest.
in

hundred
the

Reliof

eux

reckoned

this

place,
They

principles and virtue,

he

Saivdativddas
exterior, and

school
are

maintain for engaged thousand

were

grave

imposi

remarkable

purity in

of

and

levation

of of
the

character.
little wise
men

They
vehicle.

are

the

profound
of the

udy

The

Buddhas bound
the
to

alpa
this

of the

(Bhaddrakalpa)
whole

assemble, and hundredth

place,
to

the

multitude
law.

of

Devas,
three

expoun

them the

the

sublime
of

In

the

ar

after of

nirvdna

Skkya

Tathkgata, who

there composed

was

ster

the

Sslstras,
the

named

Kdtydyana,

in

is

monastery,

Fa-tchi-luii

(Abhi-dharma-jnSna-pras-

hana,)'
Here age
on

there
too,

is nothing
given by the

to

establish

the

identity
does
not

of persons.
throw of
any

he

Chinese

pilgrim,
the
300 A.

ght

the

subject.
Prasthdna
according
to

IfK^ty^yana,
lived
the
same

author
he

Abhiafter

harma-jndna
and,
'

B.,

flourished
by

6ka,
a

authority
;

quoted
at
a

Co

well,

Monastfere
sure

fondfe
have

par

Asoka'
very

and

time
in the

when

was

to

figured

conspicuously

Bud-

The I

absence, apprehend, K"tykyana

the
one
*
"

however, what-

of any

notice

regarding
himself
was

him,

proves,

the

Chinese

traveller

indicates,
one

hat

of

Tamaavana
of the
seventeen

Sanghdrdma

who

fo lo

principles
of

Sabbatti
sects

vdda*'8choo\,
mentioned
and the
in

and, the

there-

ore,

the

Dlp"-

nsa

who
;

distorted omitted
a

the
portion

sense

phraseology
original

(of

th

criptures)
of the

of

(compilation)
of

nd

gdthda;
nature

substituted
of the by
nouns,

others
their

(in

lieu

them)

garde ; disre

the
as

genders,

and

other
;

ac ci

well
same

as

various

requisites

of

style

and

corrup

the

different
clear,

substitutions.' the that from evidence contained

in

Now,

it is

quite
as

from
as

th

bove

passage,

well

from

furnished
the used
*one

by
statements

the

styl

the

Nepal

scriptures, that

and the

also
language

in

th

hinese
as

accounts,

by

these

sectarians

stated and

by the

Professor

Bumouf,
;

intermediate

between Fan,
or

he

Pali

Sanskrit'
as

that

it

was

called

the

th

rahman
following du
ciel

language, passage"

that

word dieu des

is

unmistakeably

used
et

Le

Fan
et
se

(Brahman)
conformerent

(Indra)
that
the

^tablirent
it
was
a

regies

mps;'

and

language
as

with

the
name

dual
A
to

number,

therefore

Sanskrit,
the

moreover

the
attributed

bhidharma
Kii.tyayi,na

ndna

prasthdm^,
indicates. also stated
to

work

itself

early It is

that

the

Buddhists

had
Professor

an

object
Max

in

ascribing
traces

his

Grammar animus

Kachchayana.
to
'

Muller

fa

Icendi,

tendency
works

of later
to

Buddhist

writers famous

refer

the

authorship

of

their
"

names

cient

Brahmanic for

history.'

303.
^p.
'

There swallow
instance

is,

I believe
not
a

undation

this

assertion.

One

does

make

mmer.'

Much
solitary
to
a

less

does
is of

single

prove
i-ule,

practice.

exception question
acts.'

here
"

made
*

the the

especially
of
a
"

gard

custom

tendency
names

people

certain

If, therefore,

no

other

but

Kachchd-^

'

can

be itself,
to

pointed
I
a

out

in

support is disproved. into

of

this

allegation,

the

gation

apprehend, brief the

excursus

But,

take
arer

the

subject,
as

nothing

be

cle

from

history than
always
that

of

Buddhism,
the

we

find

it i

annals

of

Ceylon,
have

Buddhists,
to

in
a

imitation

their

teacher,

attempted
sects,
case, even

draw
the there

distinction
Brahmans.
is
no

een

themselves will be diffe found

rence

and
to

other

especially
where

be

the

stan subI
am

between
out

them.

Although and
upon

Buddhism, although those upon it

of which the the

uaded

arose
,

of

Brahmanism,
are

very

rines there

of is

the

former
a

bmlt

latter

scarcely
are

single

subject
Gotama,
draw

the also

trin docseem,

of
los
own

both
t
an

identical.
to

would

opportunity

some

distinction
Brahmans.

between Take,
or

doctrines,
the
;

and of

those 'the

of

the

fo

l^ance, soul*
none

doctrines
of

Creation*;
'

oi{aiman
eternal
attempt bliss'
that

attha
"c.

[Nirvdna
fail
to to

or

"c. is In

nibban]
the Brahman

can

perceive
the

made

Buddhists they
which also the

vary have

doctrines.
as

this

eavour

got

into

confusion,

in

the
'a

case

bban,
I
may

evenNdgasena
allude
to

pronounces
the

to

be

mystery.*

institution
on

of

Castes.
He

Gotama
differed

ied

Brahmanical
as

doctrine its origin.

the

subject.
that

them the
a

to

He

abolished
he
never never

distinction
against
tp

ng
in

priesthood.
point of
to

Although
view,

preached aflSrmed
it the

social

and
;

be

sin ful

and
the in

pernicious
'twice
a

society
declared of

yet

to

set

aside

pretensions

bom*

he

the

v/niversal

equaUtyo{maiL^

religious
Khattiyo

point
se^^ho

view.
tasmin
so

jane
sampanno

ye-gotta se^ho deva

patis^rino m^us.

Vijjk
'

charana

ongst

mankind,

who

are

scrupulous
;

in

regard is

to

their

eage,

the

Khattiya
and

is

supreme is

but

he

who

endowed
devas

Vijjd

Charana

supreme,

both

amongst

The

Vijjd
:
"

and

Charana

are

also

thus

defined

by

the

Buddhists

YipassaniUnkaa
Iddhippabhedo Parassa
cheto

manomayiddhl
picha

dibha
nanan

sotan

parijkya

Fubb^nivk Dibbancha Etkni

Alankaron Yisesa
*

sknu chakkh^

gatancha^n^an.
sava

sankha

yocha

nankn
yk

idhattha muni
guna
are

vij}^
dhamma deham
peta.

sobhk

majjhu

Here
;
"

the

eight

Vijjd
devout

the

(following
;

heads
to

of)
assume

knowledge
any

abstract figure of

meditation
at
one's

power
;

corporeal

whatever
;*

will
;
;

the

various

other

attri

iddhi
in

divine

hearing mind

knowledge
of
;
are

of

that

which
state

is produced

another's
;
a

knowledge and

the
the

previous

existences

divine
These, the

perception
which

extinction attributes of

of

(distressful)
qualities,

desire.

peculiar

or

embellish

{dhimmx]

religious-body

dha.' Bud-

Sllan

varan

indriya

san

varocha'

Mattd. Saddhk
Parakkamo

sitd.

j^gariy^'nu-yc^o
bahussutat-tan
satl maticha.

hirottappa
cheva

Chattikri
Tipancha

jhlinaDicha
dhamm^

tkni'

m^ni

charan^jii

jann^

Etehi Sampanna
'

vijjiihicha sampayogo vijjd

fifteen
charano
munindo.

Know

that
of

these
the

constitute
precepts,

the

Charana
of

(viz.

observance
eating

supreme

subjugation
^^^^y

the

passions

ordinately,f

fear

memory
*

(of sin), much {aati), understanding

an

wakefulness,! hearing (study), (mati),

Hsrdy
eat
on

shame

(for sin)
retentive

prowess,

and
p.

the
"00.
bat

four

jAnas."

For

explanatiun is explained

of
to

this,

see
'

Baddhism,
to

Which
'

be

"

to

only

live

for

reli^on"

not

to

live

to

at

only.

X Refraining
of

from night,
or

mnch four

sleep" English leads

which
hours
to

the
at

reclnse midnight.

is

restricted

to

the

middle

Atch

the

"

Abstract

the

destruction

the

association

of
was

these

with
with

the

foregoing

Vijjd
Charana'

the
"

preme

Buddhii

endowed

Vijjd

and

adipikdva,
The

anxiety

of

Buddhists
also words
'

not

to

identify

themselves which

with
former g, is

ahmans
to

appears

from

the

meanings from in his

of
the

the
e,

tach

the

very

borrowed
Brahman

latter,

Brahmachariyd,
to
'

the

noviciate'

interpreted

mean

the

whole
the

course

Buddhist
Between

religious
it

ties/*

Take word
;

again

word

Va^abd.
is but

and
the
v,

the
two

nskrit

badavd, the
of

there

the

difference of in
the

of

alects

for

interchange,

occasionally,

and

and
well

change

the

Sanskrit
this,

into
to

{, be

Pali,

is

own.
we

Taking find
for

therefore,

the

Sanskrit the

word man Brahor

davA
word
and

that

the

Buddhists,
sub-marine

whilst fire, of the

adopting called

"Aurvd,
as
'

badava

bdto

va, the

personified
meaning

the
a

son

Saint

Urva",
with
^not

assign
a

like

of
Brahmans,

sub-marine explain
'

fire*, but, it to be of Urva,

it,
fed

view

differ the

from

the

"

the

deva
with
a

Hindu

Pantheon,
sprung
from
"

who, the

consisting thighs describes of

flames and
was

but

e's

head
the
ocean',

received

but

Milton
^as
*

fiery sulphur

deluge,

With
The unquenchable
water
'

ever-burning

unconsum'd.'

fire inflames

of
it

hell, the

so

rigorous

that

its the

contact

th

only

more."f
the
as

And
Hindu

badavdentered, ;

nukha
is also

the

mare's

mouth',
to

wherein

Urva

known it
to

the
*

Buddhists
or

valabdmukha
in

but
the

ey

define

be

pool

hollow by

the
waves

trough

of

a,

occasioned
the

in
or

stormy

weather

the

rolling

toward

Meru
to

the

Sakvala-gala.'
'

To have

return

the

alleged but
in

tendency in vain, the

a

of for

later
a

Buddhists
single
of

4 c/

closely

searched,

instance
any

Kachchayana
might
*

excepted)
be

which
such
his

Buddhists

period

charged
Mon. fiumoaf

with
in

weakness.
du

See

Hisioire

Buddhisme,

1.

141.

Take,

for Pali is
no

instance,

the which

Evpf

aiddhi
have

or

BdlavatAra, been
of
ancient

and
noticed.

other

Grammars correspondence and

Take

already
the famous
names names

There

between
"

their

repu

authors,

the

names

in
as

BrahBudll"yana,

manic

history/'
Ananda,

also

such

Mihindu,
Mogga

dhagosa,

Buddhipiya, and
we

Yanaratana,
ii:

and

Anomadassi,
'

look

vain

for

their

celebrated
some

prototypes Buddhist
all
reasons,

famous
names

in
are

Brahmanic Brahmanical,
arose

history/
and
out
some

True,
for the

the

simplest

of

that

Buddhism
soil
;

of
'

Brahmanism, the
most

and
famous

on

Brahmanical Brahmanic

and such

that
as

of

in

history*, "c.,

Amara, the
new

PuruahottaToa,
religion. anciently,

HeMoreover,
as

machcmdra,
the
at

have

embraced
appellations
names.

in

East,

Brahman
common

were

they
in

are

present, and
a

Amongst of

the
do
; yet, it

coolies
we

the with

CoflFee

Cocoanut
Rdmd,

plantations

Ceylon
"c.

meet

many

Paraai

Chandra,
Kachchdyana,

"c.,

with difficult be in

the

tion excepto

of the
single
name

Patronjrmic
of
names
a

is
can

find

Buddhist the
the

'

writer, Brahmans

which

referred

to

similar The
reason

amongst
too,

famous by
may

history.'
not

for

anxiety with

evinced

Buddhists
be easily Brahmans, upon and
wits

to

identify
It
as

themselves
was

Biahmans,
the

expla

to

remove

reproaches

of

the

such

the

following,
"
"

which
These

Kumdrild
Vai"eshikas,
out

casts

the

S^kya

fraternity.
who have

Sakyas,

other by
as

heretics,

been

frightened
away

of
our

their
own

the

faithful

Mimansakas,
to

prattle of
a

with

words

trying
Having

lay
thus

hold

shadow.*
the
arguments

noticed

for Pali

and

against

the

alleged
matter

date of
between

and
curious

authorship

of

this

Grammar,
in
view

it is indeed of

inquiry, and bear Pinini

to

especially
'

the does

larit simi-

it

"

what

relationship
prototype
?

the here

Pali

Kachchdyana
first

its Sanskrit alleged

And
the

shall

dwell

upon

the

identity

between Professor

author

of the

Prakrit

Prakdsa,

and

Kachchdyana.

Cowell,

erudite

translator
:
"

of

the

Pritkrit

Prakksa,

thus

notices

e
"

subject
Katyliyana
or

has

always

been
remarks

the
on

reputed
the in

author

of

the

.rtikks, P"nini

supplemental and
both
names

ancient
the
accounts

Grammar
of the

are

found
who

inese
first

Buddhist
half
of the

Hiuan-thsang,
seventh
century
as

travelled

in
era.

India
P^ini

in

of
the

our-

led

Pho-ni-ni,
to

and
the

described

founder

of music,
for
as

which

ears
;

be

nearest

Chinese
to

expression
is

Grammy
*
*

an

the

passage

relating

K^tyayana
limite

follows

Tchi

poit

ti

{erigipar
Au

lea
sud-est

Chmoia),
de
na

de ville,
;

Plnde
k
a

du
500

Nord. li,
le
mo*

la

grande

t^re

de

Tha
to

mw

sou

fa
300

(forfit obscure)
apres le

]"

v^u

doc-

Kia
par

yan

na,

ans

Nirvfina-fin

Monast^re all agree

d^

Asoka/
the author

The
of

Buddhist
the

traditions Pali
have

Ceylon

calling
;J

earliest is said
to

Grammar
perished,
is form
to

Kachchfiyet

and

although

this
very
is

when and

remember

how

closely the that

allied
Pritkrit
the

PUi

PrJtkrit,
Katyiyana,
of

Kac"chJtyano
can

simply

of
grammar

re

be
the

little

doubt
grammar

Prakrit
are

the

and

Pali

of
versions

the of

other,

only

the
"

Brah-

ical
The

and

Buddhist

the

same

tradition/'
amounts
was

^p. viii.
to

learned
'

Professor's
alias

argument Vararuchi

the
writer
whose

llowing the

"

K^ty"yana

the

V"ximjBrVd/rUikaa.
and
that
was

Kachch^yana, there
of
a

between
is only

of the
moreover,

Kkty^yana
author

the

difference

dialects,
was,

Pali
of

(PrJJcrit)
the

Grammar. Prakdida.
to

aruchi

the
to

writer
same

Prdkrit
are

ngs

which

are

equal

the

thing,

equal

each

Quoted
on

in

the

Appendix des
royaunies

{p. 383)

to

Remasat'a

translation

of

the

"

Fm
:

Kou" de

Btflation
Hionen
common

Bonddhiqaes."

See

also

M.

Jolien's

Hist

la

de

Thsang,
date
a

p.p.

102,

JS6.
Nirvana of

The

of the
p.

Baddha

is

B.

C.
dates

543
aa

; hut
current

Hiaan
in

Thsang

")aotcd
time,

in

note

to

237;
is

gives
ahoat

several

different

India

im

the

latest

of

which

B.

G.

360.

ther.

Therefore,
;
"

Vararuchi
and

was

KMyayana;
Vararuchi. writer
were

"

Katykyana,

achchkyana Pali This

Kachchkyana, and
is the

Therefore,
identical

he

Qrammarian
reasoning

Pritkrit

certainly identity
several

inadmissible.
of persons.* Kjirtyilyanas, and
names.

Identity
It
is

mes

does
out

not

prove History They

axe,

possible
as

oint

from

and

many
in
no

araruchi's.
or,

like

Kdliddsa
common

Kdsyapa
We
have

I d

as

Smith
than

in

England,
the
"

ter bet which

authority with

idle

tale

of

Vrihat
prove

Kath",
that for

ounds
called

the

marvellou8,"f
;

to

K^ty"yana
the

Vararuchi

and;

even

admitting
of
was

sake

gument,

and

upon

the

authority such

the
the

Kathd
fact
;

Sarit
it

SAgara,
remarkable

Hema-chandra,
that,

that

is

when

people
name

speak

of

the
"

author
not

of

the

Varttikas, and

ey

generally they

himKiityAyana
to

Vararuchi; Prakaaa that

tha

en

allude Vararuchi,
men.

the
not

writer Katyayana

of

the
"

Prakrit shewing
no

they
were

ll

him

they

different

There Panini's
none,

is indeed

tenable and
shew

evidence

identity
the

between

Commentator,
indeed,
wrote

the the

author

Prdkrit
the
same

Prakasa;
individual evidence,

to

that

latter

that

the

Pali

Grammar.
in
they the

The

internal

however,

contained
proves that

Pali
were

and

akrit
by

Grammars,
two

satisfactorily
men,

ten writremote

different
each

and

at

comparatively

two

mes

from

other.
was a

Kachchkyana
the

Buddhist,
the of

not

only

upon

the

authority
it,

Bupasiddhi,
evidence

but

testimony
the

which in
a

confirms
Pali
to

viz

internal

fact with

the

Grammar.
"

chchayana
infinite

opens
knowledge,"
was

his

work

salutation

Buddha
it

whereas

Vararuchi,

I believe This
is not
Paoini
the

will There

be

mitted,
Professor
of bore
family,

of

the

Brahman

faith.
the
never

all.
"

Goldelucker
names,

says that

in

his

work
can

on

Age
prove

of

In of

^jfeueral

ess

like
;

of

Katyayana, proved

identity both

persons,
to

ho

them]
or

there

is
were

nothing
followers

by

it, except
same

that the

belonged

th

('r"*/".')

of the

School,

Katas.""

187-8.

no

correspondence
or

whatever
between
:

in
two

either
works.

arrajigement, According
six
to

ments, senti-

words,

the

fessor Pro-

Lassen Prkkrit below

any of
the

(Inst

" 6.)

"Each

(of the
"

dialects,
by
one

of which degree
remote

Grammarians
the

treat)
one, so

descends that
common

of

ity

preceding
former, the from

the

last

is

more

of

the
case,

the

source."

In in
the
even

this

Mdgadhl
Yet
it is
a

takes well

third

place

list

of
in

cenic

dialects."
of

established Lassen,

fact,
sur

opinion
138

M.M.

Burnouf
the

and
Pali with
to

(Essai
as
a

le

Pali

ff.) that
Sanskrit,
origin, those
on

"when
is

(Magadhi)
other

derivative uhich have

the
same

compared

dialects,

it is found
to

approach
common

far
source.

more

closely
It stands,

than
so

of

others
the

that
of

speak,

first

step first
of

the

ladder of

of

departure

from

skrit,
that fully

and

is the

the

series

dialects

which

break'
fore there-

rich

and

fertile that

language.*'
Vararuchi
of
an

This
treats

discrepancy,
of

proves the than

Prdkrit
as

dialects,
language

pecially

M"gadhi,
the
text-books

age

much

later,

the

ews,* of

of

Buddhism. which Lessen for

in
we
a

His

grammatical
the

les

the

principal
Praecipua*,

Prkkrit,
are

denominates

alectus Pali
"

designed
a

modified
and

form degenerated

of

after
the

it

found

retreat

Ceylon,
it in

from

form
and

in

which
it

find assumed

Kachchkyana, shape
to

Dhammapada, Mahkr^htri.

before

the

of

the

esent

This

I shall
to

endeavour
here
from
that

shew the

hereafter.
Prkkrit-

SuflSce
of

it

however
is

state

igadhi

Vararuchi
which is

different
to

the
risen

Pali,
from
of

and it.

from

ery
It

dialect would

supposed
that

have

thus

appear,

the
were

author

the

Prkkrit
;

ak^a,
the
was

and

Kachchkyana,
of religion,
from

different
it
the may

persons inferred,
sage

and;
the

on

evidence also

be Brahman

that

tter

different

of

the

ninyaIn

Far^ifcas. view,
however,

of

the

correspondence

between

P4-

ninl's

SaDskrit

Grammar,
which found
not
sameness

and
is not

Kachchiyana's
to
one
or

Pali
two

work
stray

"

correspondence
but

limited
chains

st in

in

different

of

SUtras,

and of

which

may

be from of

detected
the

merely
of
was

from

the

similarity it may

thoughts,

but

language"
in

be
?

inquired

which This
;

these

works
may

prior

point
in

of
two

time

question
1st,

be

considered

different himself
was

points

view

whether
to

Kachchkyana whom

availed

of

the

same

Qrammarians

P4nini

himself
whose

indebted? grammatical
was

or

2ndly,

whether
the

the

Sanskrit
writer
researches

author,
chiefly
have

ter min

Pali
my

adopted,
extended,

Fanini and
they favors in
'

So

far
very

as

are

indeed

limited,

the

only
some

circumstance of

which
terms

th

first

hypothesis
e.
*

is, that

the

technical
for
not

Each-

chkyana,

g.,

Pancha/mi moods,
of the

and

SoMami,
which
are

the
found from

Benedica

tive'
a

and

Potential'
division
same

as

Jif^
names

and

aeveifUh
to

verb,

are

different

the

given

the

by tyayan
are

PJknini.

The

Baldvatara

explains that

(panchaml
and

sattami SaMaml

pubb'i^hariya
appellations
states,

sann^)
of these such
as

*Panr

ehami the

the

former

teachers*

and

Mahd

Sadda
with

Niti

that

appellations
as

are

in

accordance
a

Sanskrit
modem

Orammars, Grammar,
however
"

the
by

Kdtan-

ra,*

comparatively These
"

stated
no

Cole*

brooke.

statements

are

of

value.

The

expressions

former
are

teachers"
too

and and
By

the

Grammars

siich
their
we

the

Kdtantra"
conclusions infer and
those

vague

indefinite.
'*

Upon
teachers"
or

basi

no

can

be who

drawn. lived thatthey

such

former

may

fairly

before

Kachchkyana,
likewise
as

before

Pk
same

nini;

who

can

say
"

didnot

adopt Kktantra"
?

the

appellations
to

which
the

Grammars
and

the

use

regard

BenedAcUve
Plbnini,
other, like

Potential

moods

It is indeed certain,

probable

that certain

Kachchkyana^
terms,

adopted "c.,
of former

an

rejected

technical

rians. Gramma-

My

acquaintance

with

the

Sanskrit

literature

is f

limited

to

draw

any

further
some

inferences. which I shall that the

But

all

stances circum-

considered
cannot

(to
from

of

hereafter

refer),
had

refrain before
him

the he

conviction

KachchJi^yana

knini
were

when

composed
not
era

Sandhikappa.
Grammarian

If be

uch

the

fact,
the

should

the
?

Sanskrit

laced
This

before question,

Buddhist
as

indeed

every

matter

relating considerable

to

Asiatic

istory
I must give

and

Chronology,
most

is

one

of

diflSculty
pretention

nd

distinctly proof
on

disclaim
the

the

slightest question,
as

any

definite such

particular scholars, "sdled which

to

especially

en

I find Weber, in

eminent Max of

Sanskrit
Muller, the
have

Wilson,
so.

BohthI desire

ng,

and
view the

do

All

wever,

evidence
incidents

the
the

Pali
Pali
to
a

Grammar Buddhist
few them,

eveals,

and

historical is to
attract

which
attention

nnals

disclose,

public
may

ences inferand

and
do learned Experience
to

deductions
not

which accord

be

drawn
the

from

hich

precisely
scholars

with

views

expressed

by

he

abovenamed. proved,
that in their upon whatever

has facts

weight
works,

might
no

be

at*

ached
be
may

stated
upon

Brahmanical chronological
to
a

reliance

uld

placed
be

calculations.
extent
are

All their of

hat

depended

certain
by

opular

traditions,
especially then,
among of
as

when
the

supported
nations.

the
The

testimony popular

ther,

Bvddhist,
age of of what

traditio
not

to

the Brahmans

Pd/niniy
India,
is

which but

is current
among

nly

the

the

Bud-

hists

Ceylon,

is

exactly

stated

by

Colebrooke

in.

he
"

following P^nini,
an

passage.
the

Father
that

of

Sanahrit
amongst
a

Grammar,
those

lived

in

so

remote

age,

he

ranks

undent
place is
a

sages,
in the

hose

fabulous
or

history

occupies

conspicuous
The
name

urd/naa

Indian
his descent

Theogonies.
from
Panin,

patronymic
to

ndicating

but
of

according
an

the

aurAnica

legends,

he

was

grandson

Devala,

inspired

egidator."*

Againgt
passage

this

popular

belief,

several

writers

hare
as a

quoted
name

he

wherein
**

P^nini
the

mentions of

Yavandni
the

lipi,

or

writing,
to

alphabet

Yavancta*'
the Yavanas,
or

The

infer
who

sought
a

be

deduced,
race"*

viz.,
were

that

re

"head-shaving
who of could
only

lonians,
known is indeed

Bactrian
after

reeks,

have
the

been

in

Asia

the

nvasion Few

Alexander
in the

Great,i"
of that

unfounded.
are

subjects
satisfactory
known

history than

the the

East,

capable

ore

proof

Yavanas

or

Yonas

had

een
The

before

Qotama
of

Buddha.
with

identification
in the the opinion
are

Yavanas
of Professor

Mohammedans, Wilson,
in works
to

is
the prior

also

pen,

objection
to

hat

former

mentioned

the

ohammedan
In
one

era.|
of

Asoka*s

inscriptions,
'

the

Qimar,
of
the

Antiochus
Yonas.' king. Yonaka
From
; that

alled

the

Ybna

rAja,
speaks of

the Milinda

king
as

The

ilindappanna
he

Yona
the

ther Whecountry

be

identical

with

Meneander,
remains
we

and
to

with

Evihydemia%
extracts,

be the

proved.

the

ollowing
bom that

however,

glean
200

facts

Milinda
Sigal;

as

at

Kalasi
was

in
only

Alasadda,
twelve

Yojanas
from

from

nd

Sigal
^ha

Yojanas
yo

Cashmir.
kato

Brkj^

bhante
yocha

N^gasena
idha taran'-ti. kala

idha
kato

kUa Kasmhre
MahJt

Brahma

oke

uppajjeyya
taran

uppajjeyya rkj^'ti.
nagaranti

ochira

ko
"

slga

Samakan

Opam"

an

karohi'ti

^kuhinpana

Mah"
gitmo

rkja
nitma

tava

jkta

At
Kiva

higimo
Mahk

bhante

Kalasi
ito
kiva

yatthahan

j^to'ti
"

iiro

rAja
"

Kalasi duran
"

gJuno mah^

hotiti

"

^Dumattkni
ito mahJb
tvan

bhante

yojana

satkniti

rkji
tvan

Kasmiran

hotiti-

Dvedasa

bhante
chintehiti
"

yojanJtniti
Chintito

Ingha
"

rikj^

Kalasig^

an

bhanteti

^Ingha

Mahit

raj

"

"

Sagara
Pr.

made

the

Yavaiias

shave
on

their

heads.""

FM^nu

Parana,

vr,^

3.

Bee

Benfey's Hindu

Article
Theatre,

India.
p.

Wilson's

ii,

179.

smiran

chintehiti

"

Chintitan

bhanteti"
i^Kataman

nukho
"

raj"

chirena

chintitan mevako
yocha

k ataman

sigataranti yo
kato

samakan
Brah

nteti.

Eva

mahik

rkja
kala

idha

k^la

kato

loke

nppajjeyya
yeva

idha

Kasmire

uppajjeyya
dies

akan
"

uppajjantiti.
said,

The

king

Lord in

l^agasena the
Brahma
:

(suppose)
world
of
; and

one

who another

re

(Sagal)
here

is born in
them

who
soonei*,

is bom

Kashmir later
an

which

them

is born
at

which
?

of
"

Priest
"Monarch,

the

same

King

Give
thy

illustration.
?

Priest
I

"

Monarch, bom
in how
a

which

the

City
is

of

birth

King"ltOTd, Priest

was

place far

ch

called

Kalasi
from hence how

gdma.
?

"Monaxch,

asi
"

gdma

King

"

Lord,
from

about
hence?

200

yojanas.
"Lord, KalaJ^i think Which

est

Monarch,

far

is Kasmir Monarch,

King
of

lve

yojanas.
King
"

Prie"^"
Lord,
I have

think

quickly
"

a.

thought.

Priest

Monarch,

ckly

o{ Kasmir. Monarch, of them hast longer

m,

Lord, Ihave. -ffingr" thou taken shorter

?

i^ms^"
time
time.
is
to

of and
"

think, Priest bom

in in

ch

King
who
who

"

Lord,

equal

So
thd

ewise.

Monarch,

he
and
he

dies

here,

and

hma both
Again
'
"

Vbha
bom
:
"

dies

here,

and

is bom

Kasmir,

at

the

same

(period of)
pana
nkma

time."

Thero

^hakuhin

maha

r^ja
dipo

tava

jsita

bh6-

i'

Atthi

bhante mah^
sat^

^iasaTirfo

tatthlkhan
*

jatoti

*kiva

d6ro

ritja
niti.'

ito

Alasando

hotiti'--

dumatt^ni

nt^
"The

yojana
Priest there

asked,
is
an

Monarch,
island
named

where

is the

land

of
was

thy bom
?"

birth

Lord,

Afasanda.
from
hence

there.

arch,
two

how

far

is

Alasanda
"

(S%ala)

Lord,
"

ut In

hundred following in the

yojanas
*

the

passage
same

Isiodorus
"

mentions

Sdgal
ubi

and

xandria

sentence

et

Sigal
et
non

urbs,
procul

regia

carv/m,

propeque urbs.
From

Alexandria
the

urbs

Alexanwe

apolis

Mahawansa,

moreover,

learn

liv in
no

INTRODUCTION

ntion

of cR,po
presents

reference valid
for

to

Alasanda,

in

one

of

the

above

tracts,

objection
writers,
a

against

its

identification
in general,
of the

th

Alexandria
ancient position the

Pali

and vague

Buddhists
notion

ke the

Greeks,

had

very

Geogra-

ical

of countries.

Perhaps
furnish

Milindappanna,
proofs of Asoka,
are
on

as

well

as

the

Inscriptions
they

do,
were

conclusive
the date

the who

subject
is of

; since

learly

after
Nor

expressly
much

mentioned
value,
not

herein.
same
or

indeed
But

the
same

NAtikas

for
to

he

reason.

the

objectior
in

does

apply
works

anu,

the

Mahd
are

Bhdrata,
mentioned.
that have the

both

which

ancient

he

Yavanaa
Manu

states*

following

tribes
sunk
to

were

originally
state

shatriyas,

but

gradually
the

the

of

rishalas
from

from (fifudras),

extinction

of

sacred
;

rites
viz.

nd

having

no

communication

with

Brahmans

aun(2rakas,

Odras,

Dravitias,
Chinas,

Kambojas,
Daradas,

Ydvanas,
and
Kha^as.

"S!akas

aradas,
*'

Pahlavas, tribes

Kiratas,

These

of Kshatriyas,

viz., Sakas,

Yavanaa,

Kambojas,
and

Dravi(2a8,

Kalindas,
have become

Pulindas,
Sudras
in the
;

Usinaras,
from seeing

Kolisarpis,
no

ahishakas,
The
facts

Brahmans.''-}supported
it becomes

contained
annals
to

above

extracts

are

in

he

Buddhistical
privilege but

and

in quoting
to

therefrom
which
to

adduce he

the failed

authority
to

Mr. that

Turnour
*

eferred,

which

adduce,
to

prove

Yavain

(y6na)
ancient

is mentioned

anterior

Alexander's the

invasions
Pitakattaya

he

Pali
after

works the

'J
death
of

Whether
of the

Buddhist
or

as was

written
at

Sage,
era

before
also

(and
capable

that of

the

period

the

Buddhist
whose
;

is

satisfactory
spoken

proof),
of the of

Qotama,

age
in

is firmly

established,
to

as

Yavanas and
_

and

special
was

reference

the

istinction

Aryaa

ddayaa,
"

which
_.

recognized
.

in
"

"

"

"

"""".

""

Chapter
Anusaiiana

z.

48.

44.
Tenes

Parva,

2103
to

et

aeq.
il., vL

I See

Tornoar's

Introd.

Mahavansa,

tiie

pachchanta

(foreign)

countries

such

as

Yona

and

Kamboja.
In the

MajjhvnuL
is

NikAya,
have

from
:

which

I shall

again

quote,

Gotama Tankin

said

to

asked

maniiasi cha

Assaliyana
mesu

'

suttante

Yona

Kambojesu
ayyocheva

nnesu

pachchante
"

janapadesu
dasohoti, thou

vevanna

ditso
*
.

cha

hoti

ayyo

hutvk

dteohutvi,
of

ayyohotVti.
?

Assalkyana, that
in

what

thinkest
and

this
in

Hast other and

thou

eard,

Yona
are

kamboja,
ayyas*

and

foreign

countries,

there
that

various

(superiors)
and

ddaaa
riors supe-

(inferiors);
'

superiors

become

inferiors,

inferiors

It

is

said

in
a

the
case

commentary

that
:

the

above

was

said

to

llustrate

(such

as)

this

Brihmano
vk

sabhariyo

vanijjan
vk

payo

jento

Yonaka
"

rat-

than

Eamboja
d^so

rattan

gantv^

kUankaroti,
d^enav^
darake

tassa

gehe

vayappatto

hoti;

Brkhmani
;

kammak^e

ava

saddhin
hoti
;

vdsankappeti
tassa

etasmin para
so

jate

so

puriso hoti-

d^sova

j^ta

dkrako
"

d^yajja

s^miko

matito

suddho

pitito
gantv"

asuddho
br"hmana

vanijjan payojento
gahetvk suddho yeva
;

majjhipuch-

padesan

dikrikan
sopi

tass^

chchismin

puttan Evan ti dassanattan

pai^abhati,

m^titova

hoti

pitito

asuddho.
"

Brihmana
etan

samayasmin
vuttan.

jatisambhedo

hoti
'

Brahaman,
his wife of in

provided
either
to

with the
There The

merchandize,
of
a

having

gone
or

with

country

Kamboja,
up

the
or

ountry

Yona, his
or

dies.

is

grown lives
a

dAsa

laborer

house.
the

Brahmani begets

either
for him
for
as

with
;
"

the

ddsa
person

laborer,
a

and
The

child

that

is
as

still

ddsa.
the
the

child

that

is bom

him,

who

is pure
father,

regards

mother,
of
goes

and
the

impure

regards

the

becomes

lord

inheritance. the

He
region,
a son,

(too),
and
is

provided
to

with
him
on

merchandize,
a

to

Majjhima
too

takes

Brahaman
mother's
definition

lass. side,

She
but

gets
on

who of

pure
"

only
For

the

impure

that

the

Brahmanical

father.

Thus
there

according
is
a

to

the of

very

observances

of

the

rahamans

distinction above

tribes.* satisfactorily explains K^lidAsa

; it also

Whilst
reason

the

authority
as

quoted

the

why,
the the

in

the

Hero
to

amd

the

Nymph,

has

applied

term

Yavana
the

Tnenial
were

femalea
ante

estab

fact been
to

that

Yavancu by Professor

Buddhistical.

It

has

also
refers

stated
the

Max which

Muller mention

that

since

Pdnini

Unnddi-s^tras,

cUnAwith

rah

'the
a

Iloman

denariu8\
saint',

Jinah
*

'synonimous

Arhat
the

Buddhist

tiritam
Sanskrit
Professor

golden Grammarian

diadem',
was

stUpah

Buddhist
The

topes'

the

after

Buddha.*

learned all these

the

himself
were

has introduced
of
was,

rendered
into

very

probable

that

words
general
in

the

Unnddisiitras
the

'after

spreading This s^traa,

of

Buddhism,
however,
are now

and

erection

of

Topes

India.'

upon

the

supposition
were

that

the

Unnddi
the

which the
same

extant,

identical

with the
;

Sutras
is indeed

name

quoted

by

Pknini.
was

But,
fact
to

proof
the

wanting
of

to

show
many

that

such

the

and

non-existence refers,

the

Grammatical
by

works the fairly

the

which
to

Pdnini
place

and
as

the

anxiety

evinced

Brahmans lead
to

that
that

sage

Pdnvn/yadworks,

yah,

may

the

inference
s4tras

all those
to

inclu

particular ago
sheets been

Unnddi

referred

by

Panini,

had

been

long these

lost."fhave gone
to

Since

the

press,

and
from

the

two

firs

sheets

have

printed,
of

I have

received

England
age

the of

invaluable
;

work I here
on

Professor myself

Goldstucker
of that

on

the

ni Pani-

and

avail

consummate

scholar's bear
upon

remar

the

Unnddi

Sjltras,

which

directly

the

subject.
*

It

is true

(says he)
but

that he

this
never

grammarian speaks of

(Pknini)

speaks

twice

of

UnnddiSy

VrmMi-Siitras^

"

Sankrit
*

Literature
the
more

p.

215. works
seem

None

aucieni

to

be

now

'"Colebrooke'sEisaja

former imply, of words

a

term

merely
to

implies analogous
these

list

of

Unnadi

aflSxes, in
can

and

according

expressions
;

Fanini^
never

formed
which

with
treats

affixes affixes
are

but

it

ply im-

work

of

these
we

and

these
of.

formations,
Between

the of
is

Unnadi Unnkdis

Sutras

which
or

speaking
"

list

"affixes
the
a

words exists All

and between

Unnadi-Stitras,
a

re

all

diflference

which
work.

lexicographical
fore, thereat
once

and

grammatical

the of

conclusions,

which
159. Again, five

are

based

on

the

identity

both,

vanish

says

the

same

writer

Had
he
all

PJtnini
explains the of

not

written method
terms

Sutras

(1,
or

2,

53-57)
he

in

\ihich

the

his

grammar,

had absence

explained
of
a

technical

by

him,

the

definition
us

such

terms

in
any

the

adi-Stitras
as

would regards
we

not

justify
mutual

in

arriving
of

at

conclusi

the

relation

the

two

works.
terms

since
on

know
other

that

Panini
that
a

does treatise

not

define
like
by

all

his

the

hand,

the
him,

XJnnadi-Suand
exactly
the
only

uses

those
same sense

terms

which

are

defi
occur

ned

the

in

ijchich
is of
that

they
this
"

in

his
was

work,
written

ible the

conclusion Qrammar
examined
;

treatise p.

later

Panini.*

170.
with
to

I have

the have
them

XJnnadi-Sturas
not

the
any

assistance

of

Pandit

but

been the which

able

find
in
my

correspondence

between
a

and

Unnadi
favors
the
*

Kachch^yana's
belief
that the

mar"
work

circumstance
was

er

also for

later

than,

Pali
the the

grammar.
Roman

This

efore 'the
sect'

accounts

the

mention

of

denarius'*
of
a

Buddhist "c.

sthApa
the

and
two

*Jina,
last,
as

founder
remark,
shewn

Buddha
an

; although

I may be

had
from

in

before
of
Indeed
this

the
that

age
sage
like

of

Qotama,

may

the

himself.
higher than

word

the

others,

has

claims

to

antiquity

the

M.

Reinaud Sur

in
Y

his Inde

Memoire "c.

Geographique,
says.
as

Historique

et

Scientifique
*

(Paris 1849)
to

Hiouen
notable refers
at

Thaang

attributes
of

Pinini,

he

does

to

many
;

other

personages
to
an

Buddhism,
which the about the

two

existences of
man was

the

first he than
the
a

epoch
and

in the

life

er long-

present,

second is, in

the
of

year

500

after

death

of

Buddha the

; that

time In in
to

Vickramaditya, first
existence, he,
p. 88.

century

after professed
with

reign

of

Kaniska.
;

his

Fknini

Brahmanism
father,
this Weber
was
"

but

in

his

second,
"

toge

his
upon

converted

Buddhism/
also

Founded

Ghost-story",
that

it has

been
placed
But

sup-

ppsed
centuries

by

Professor
after tale

PJknini
or

shoidd
140

be

si

Gotama
which far from

Buddha,

at

A.D.* and

the

legendary

Hiouenikaang
countenancing
when

relates, this

which
merely reduced

quoted
places
to
as

below,
him,
"

conjecture,
man was

at

the

epoch This
from is

the
not

life

of

hundred
again

years."

need
the

necessarily
annals,

have

been,

we

ascertain

Buddhistical
in

after
that.

tam Go-

Buddha.
'

It

stated

the

BudcUtavansa
the

At

the

particidar
the
term

period
of

(of

manifestation
was one

of himdred
age

the

great
years;

elect)
and his

human appeared
take

existence
to

that advent

it therefore

be

the

proper

which This

should
may

place.'

subject
the

therefore

be

dismissed
of
the

by
passages

simply
referred

subjoi

following

translation^
:
"

in

Hiouen
'

thaang
travelled

Having

about

twenty

li

north-east

of
at

the
city

town,

Ou-tO'kia
lo-tou-lo

han

fcha

(Udakhanda
birth

?)
place

he
of

arrived

the

Po-

(SS,14tura), the
of
the
were

Biahi
lun

Po-ni-ni

(Pdni-

ni)
'

author

the

treatise of
a

Ching-ming
remote
nimierous

(Vyakaranam.)
the

During

times
extremely
Max

antiquity,
;
hereon

words

of

the

language
*

but
in

after
Sanskrit

the

world

had

See seq.

Professor

Muller's

remarks

his

Literature

p.

80

et

"f

For

which

as

weU

as

Tarious

other

passases

from

French

and

German

writers

been

destroyed,

the
an

universe

was

found

void

and

waste.
on

Some

Gods
to
serve

of

extraordinary guides
to

longevity

descended
Such
of
was

the origi^ their Fan rules

earth

as

the
the

nations.

the

of

letters

and

books. itself, the

to

At and

conclusion

this

epoch
god

ource

enlarged
and

becskme
of heaven

boundless.

The

(Brahman),
conformed each
on

king

(Indra)
heretic used

established
Rishis them
as

nd

the
some

times. words. and

Some
Men

compos,-

ed,

of

them, their
;

models' ing preservwas

arried

work, but
to

rivalled

with
vain

each

other

in
it

tradition
for
*

students

made
their
life

efforts,

and

ficult dif-

them
epoch
the

comprehend when
the

meaning,
man
was

At

the
years,

of

reduced
received

to

hundred

Rishi
birth,
at

Pdnini
and

appeared,
an

who immense age,

to

instruction

from

his

possessed
of

ing. understandlonged
to

Grieved
all vague

the

ignorance

the

he

abolish

and

false
terms,

conceptions, and
to

extricate
its laws.

language A^ he he him
was

rom

superfluous for
Taeu

estabUsh and

ravelling

the

purpose

of research

instruction,
set

met

he

God

tiisai
he

(Isvara
was

Deva),

and

before

the

lan
*

of the Very

work

medit"\ting.

well
on

said
my

the

god

Ts"U/'thsai

(Isvara

Deva)

you

ay
'

reckon

assistance, his up of and

slokas

Having then
gave

received
himself energy

instructions
to

the

Rishi

departed and
a

profound
He
a

researches,
"

employed

all the
of
a

his

intellect.

collected

tude multicou,-

expressions,
thousand

composed
;
to

vocabulary
consisted
of

which

ained

each

sloka

thirty-two

yllables.

He
and letters

sounded

their
and

utmost

limits,
brought it in equally ordered that other,
he,
a

knowledge together,
in
envelope,

oth

ancient

modem;
and
it
terms,

having
enclosed who

his

work,
and

he the

sealed
prized all
who

presented
it.

to
a

king,

and
subjects

dmired
to

He

made
and

decree,

which

his

study
to

teach

it.
one

He
end

added
to

should
receive
reason,

able

recite

it from

the gold.

would the

reward

of

thousand

pieces

of

Hence

is still

held
of

in

g reat

estimation.

Hence

it is that knowledge, by
their

the
and
the

man? Brahtalents
extent

city t|}is

possess

substantial always the rich

of

high

order,

and

are

distinguished
stores

of
'

their

knowledge, the
city

and of

of

memory.

In
is

Po-lo-tovr-lo
It
a

(read
this

So-lo-tonrlo^
that Five
a

Salatura)
Lo-han

there

Stilpa.

was

in of

place

(an
years
was

Arhat)
after
a

converted

disciple

Ponini.
had coming
for

hundred
world, the there

is Jou-lai

(the Tath^gata) (Arhat) (Cashmire)

When
he who,

left the from

the
in

great

'Olohan

kingdom
of

of

Kia-chi-milo
people.
saw
a

travelled

purpose this in
you

converti

had

arrived

country,

he
a

Fan-tchi
boy, ?'
am

(a Brahmacharin)
he
the A
was

occupied
"

whipping
ill-treat that

little

whom

teaching.
to

Why

do

child
*I

said

rhat
him

the

Fan-tchi.
replied
he,

making of

study,*

'the

treatise but

of
he

the
makes
*

doctrine
no

sounds,

(ching-ming

Vyakaranam)

progress.' seemed

The

Arhat The

amused,
said

and
to

suffered
him,

a
*'

smile
The

to

escape

him.

old
possess

Fan-tchi
a

Chcirmen
heart,

(sramanas)
pity
of

tender that
upon

and
are

compassionate
enduring I
pain.

and
man

they full

the

creatures

A wish

humanity the
cause.

smiles

occasion.

should

to

learn
'

It

is not

difficult
but

to

make I
shall

you

acquaint

ed in of

with

it,
a

replied

the

Arhat,

I fear have,
who

produce heard
the

you
a

hesitancy

of

belief.

You

doubtless, composed

certain

Risy

named

Ponini,
that The
he

treatise

ching-ming'lwn,
instr uction

and

has

left

it

behind
to

for

the
"

of
of

the

world.
city

Po-Uy-men
are

said
his

him

The his
at

children
virtue,

this
the

who

all
to

disciples,
memony,
this In his

revere

and

statue,
*

erected
said
that

his

exists

this

day.
you

Well

the

Arhat,

child,
former

to

whom
existence,

gave used
did all

life,
his
not

is

actually

Rishi.
in

he
:

strong

memory

studying
treatises,

profane
and

writings

he
at

speak,

but

of

heretical

did

not

seek

the

hough,

without
to
a

stopping,
remnant

the of

circle he

of

life, been

and

of

death.
to

hanks

virtue,

has

permitted and
the

ecome

your

dear
age
to

son.

But impose

profane
a

writings, labour.

elo-'

ence

of the

only

useless of

Can
which, happiness.
the

they by
a

compared

the

sacred

instructions

Jom
-lai
and
of trunk

ysterious
*

influence,
times,

affords there
tree
was,

underst
on

anding the
shores

In

former
a

Southern
an

cean,

whithered
five
of

whose

hollow day,
some

afforded

sylum

to

hundred
this
tree

bats. As
men,

One
there

merchants
at

halted time with

an

the cold

foot

prevailed
were

the

cy

breeze,

these

who

tor

mented
thorns,

cold

nd

hunger,
at

collected foot the

moment

together
tree.

sticks The
on

and

and
by

lighted

fire

the
set

of the

flame fire. of
a

increased

degrees,

nd
*

soon

withered
there
to

tree
was

At
at

this mid

one

the

merchants

who
collection
as

gan, beof they

to

night,

read

with

loud
The

voice, bats,

the

he

O-pi-torTno
by

(Abhidharma.)
heat
of of
the

tormented with without

re

the

the
law,

fire,

listened
the

however, pain

desire

he

accents

endured
terminated

quitting
In
consequence

heir

retreat,

and this

there

their
they

existence. the

of

virtuous
in the

conduct,
class of

obtained beings.

honor They

of
left
to

eing

bom families,

again gave

human

heir

themselves law
which

up they

to

study, formerly

and,

thanks

he

sounds
a

of the
rare

had

heard,

they nity dig-

cquired
of

underst and

\nding,

obtained
from

altogether
to

the field

Arhat,

cultivated

age

age,

the

piness. of hap-

'During
the

this

latter

period
Hie

the

limg

Kia-ni^e-kia
assembled

(Kanish'ka)
five hundred

and

Honorable
in the

(Arya-Parsvika)
ol

sages

kingdom

Kia-cki-mi-lo

(Cashmire)
s4stra).
formerly I possess
men

and
these

omposed
were

the
the

Pi-po-cha-hin
five

(the
bats
tree.

Vibh"sha
who

All

sages

hundred

had

inhabited
a

the

cavity

of the

withered I by
am

Although
But,
or

limited
one

intelligence,

yet
either

one

of

them.

differ

from
of

another,

the

superiority,

mediocrity

their

Rcurity.
your

And

now,

0
leave

man

full
his

of

humanity,
In

you

must

allow this
act,

dear
is,

son

to

friends.
of
a

performing
one

4hat

embracing merit.

the

life

religieuse,

acquires

in

eflfable
'

Having divine

finished
power
by

his his felt

discourse,

the

Arhat

gave

proof

of

his

immediate himself

disappearance.
penetrated

'The
reverence

Brahman
;

by

faith

and
went

and, the
son

having
event

loudly
in
the the As the

expressed neighbourhood. life himself,

esteem

his

admiration, He also
and

and

related
his

permitted

to
to

embrace

of

Religieuse,
was

vote de-

himself converted;
The this by
men

study. showed
village inhabitants

for

he

immediately

and of the his

greatest

for the

Three
and,

Oems.
even

followed
are

his

example, in

at

day, day.'

confirmed

their

faith,

day

Professor
the the
'

JBohtlingh,
arguments
as

in

his

introduction
as

to

P4nini,
seem,

advances
on

following
same

founded,
those

it

would
quoted.

nearly

authorities
respects I
to

already

As

the

age

(he says) in
some

which
which

our

Grammarian
give
some

lived,
weight

will
the

produce received
to

citations that

will

opinion,
our

Pdnini

lived

in

the

4th

Century,
*

according

chronology. ancient

Amara'Sinhxiy
is
extant,

the

most
as

lexicographer
received, in
we

whose the

work

lived,
after

universally

middle
with
which
one a

of

the

first centry
of also
not

Christ.

In

his

work,

meet

multitude
occur

grammatical

expressions
From

and

affixes,
alone,

in

PdbninL
to
as we

this absolutely
early

circumstance
on

should of

venture

decide

the

high

antiquity

Pd,nini;

for,

have
is

enough

remarked,

Pdnini
his

grammatical

terminology
By be
means

easily

discovered

amongst
however.

predecessors.
I
trust,

of the
to

following draw
a

passages,

I shall

authorized

conclusion.

AToara
25

Kosha

(S

363,

I. and

S.
is
is

378
said,

12

and
the

384

of

Colebrook's
at

edition)
of
a

It

that

word except

Edtra

the

end

compound,

masculine

ccording
is

io

PJtnini

(II

4.

29),
;

Bktra
Ehtykyani
compare

at

the
also with

end

of

compound

always

masculine
rule

appears
II.
4.

to

aintain
363.

the Z.
4.

unrestricted;

29

"

(Colebrooke's)
(^patka^
is
at
on

(S.
a

384.

26.)
or

Pathah
an

Sank-

yavyayat

parah
following,

numerable of
a

undeclinable

ord

the

end

compound
to

neuter.)"
neuter
as

'knini

(II, 4. 30.)
enlarges compare

allows

only in
4.

Apatha
the
30."
same

be

Kkt-

h.yana

the
with

rule, 11.

manner

Amara

inha;

S.

368.

Z.

4,
on

(Colebr.
punaAha,
at
are

85.

15.)
and

Punayasudinkmyd
following, compound,

twahah

parah," With

Aha, PdjUiniy
Both

avbdina
of
erery

(is a neuter.)*'
is
a

he

end
by

neuter.

opinions The

iven

Katyayana
is most
our

(compare
decidedly S.

with
only

II. 4.
half
Z.

29.)

passage
without
45.

ext

following

intelligible,
3.

opsulting

grammarian

374.
The

(S.

393. in

C.j
"c.

ndghantkstetarak
the

i^ghxirthe.
of "coloured

derivatives
"c.

An

signification
An

thereby"

(are

all of three of grammar

of; in
1.

genden,.)
which

is the

first
Q.nd The

affix their

in

that

division
are

the IV.

taddhitas
1.

significations
of

treated affixes,
IV.

ompare

83.

first

signification

these

he
*

formation
It is indeed,
centuries

of

adjectives,
by
no
means

is Tenaraktan

; compare

2.

proved

hereby

that

P"nini
this

lived
opinion

hree

before probability,
recent

Amara

Sinha.

But

then
that

ill

acquire
more

when than

it is stated

Amara
case we

Svnha
shall

still

Patangali.
and
of

In

this

till

have,
;

between

P^nini the author

Amara

Sinha,

four

rians Grammaauthor

Katyayana, and makes of

the

Paribdahd,

the

of

he
'

Karika^
Tradition
the

Patangali.

Bhartrihari
the

the

brother

of Vickranvadit
this

a,

author

KaHIca.
at

Were
a

point
of

settled,
Amara

atangali
This

would

be

most

contemporary

inhtd,
which
a

tradition
is

is contradicted

by
a

another

; according

Patangali
mythological however,

removed
being in

to

high
shape

antiquity,

and

constitut

the

of

Serpent.
the

We

hall

not,

take

our

refuge,

by

proving

worthless-

"

command
The passage

an

historical contains removed

by

testimony
a

in

the

annals

of Kashmert.

grammatical
a

difficulty,
alteration. The

which
verse

may

however,

be
in

small
as

is pre ex-

the

Calcutta

edition

follows
tasmat

(1. 176.)
tadligaman. krit.

Chandrachary^dibhirlabdhadesan
Pravartitan
*

sahabhashyan

svan

cha

vyakaranan

Troyer

(in his
Chandra
"

recent

edition

of this
for

chronicle,

Rajatarmvy^karavam,
receiving

gini)
and the
tra,

reads

vyhkaranam

avan

cha

translates

TchandrJbtcharya
explained
a

and

others

after

commands^ and
the

his

(the

king

Abhimanyu's)
and
a

Sasing bear-

composed
name

large

commentary

grammar

of Chandra.*'

Seeing,
about

for

ought

that

I know,^that

nothing
a

is

said

any

where word

Abhimanyu's
can

having have
is
no

composed

iSdatra,

the
to

pravartitan
;

grammatical

reference

tad^aman

for
as

this

word

of necessity

masculine. and
him
too to

To render

join tad^aman
it
to
"

an

to

come

thither

adjective to (to Abhimanyupura)

by
can

lahdhddesan,
or

to

according
forced. united
on

the read

command

received
;

him**

would

be

"We with this

labdhvddeaan
Professor proposed
be
no

then Herr

tadhgaman Lassen, whom

be

easily

Adeaan.
passage,

consulted
by which

to

me

to
"

read The

taddgame
causul than
sense

the has

difficulty here,
to

would

removed;
other
'*

from.
'

pravart
set
verses

assuredly, introduce
be
a

signification
Tlie
"

to

up

thing,

matter.'

full

of the teacher him" they mar." gram-

will and
king

accordingly others had

the

following the

when

the "om

Kandra

received
thither,

command
to

(the

Abhimanyu)
the

(or
composed

him)
an

to

repair,

produced To
quite

Mahabdshya
this from

and

accurate

corroborate
passage

translation
same

put

down

here

similar

the

work

(TV. 487.)
ksham^Lpatih. svamandale.
in

Deslditar^agamayya

vykchakshan^n

Prkvartayata
"*

vichcchinnan king
he

mahabashyan
had brought his

After

the

(Gay^pida,)
introduced
a

expositors
worn-out

from

other
longer

lands,
extant

into

land

the

(no
again.**

in

perfect

condition

?)

Mahabdshya
by

M.

Troyer

renders

vichchinnan

Mahabhshyan

"the

s,

that

this

is
man

Pknini's
has

Grammar. translated
as

In

the

first

verse

at

learned
"

Makabkkshya
I

quite from
study ing accordthe
can

mmonly

large

commentary,"
to

conjecture,
that
the

this

ound

that
was

it

appeared pursued

him

improbable in the

of

ammar
to
our

already

twelfth
maintains

century

reckoning.
of

(M.

Troyer

strongly

hronology
only

the
his

Cashmirian
remarks
on

chronicle.)
every

From
"

this The
amongst

we

plain

passage

titles

of
the

books

vydkarana,
to

and

UpadSsa,
to

appear of the

uddhists,
tantras*'

be

equivalent the Memoir

those

"purknas"
in the

and
Transactions

(See
the

of Mr.
of Great

Hodgson and

of

RL II.
occurs

As.

Soc.

Britain

Ireland,

Vol

IL

arts
'

I. and

Kandra
aneient

in

memorial

verse

in

union

with

the

following

grammarians.

Indra,
and

Kasakritsna,

Aplsali,
mentions

dkatkyana,
him
'

PsLuini,
and age
of

Amara,

(Hnendra.
Kandras,
in

Bhattogi
often.

his

followers,

the

The
may

the fixed Under

king
in

Abhimanyu,
several ways,

whose

reign

Kandra
to

ived,

be

all of
there whose

which appeared

le^d
in the in the

the

me

result. the
400

Abhimanyu,

mere, Cash-

Bodfiisaiva
years

Nagdrjuna,
Buddha's
His death,

birth

Tibetans
year

lace
144

nfter

therefore
as

143

before

Christ.
may

preaching
fixed
when
we

well

as

the

reign
100.

of

Abhimanyu
the

be

accordingly
number,

for

the

year
to

We

maintain

same

adhere

the of

chronicle
the

of

Cashmere.
is, is
;

Aaoka,

the

forty-eighth the grandson

king
of forty-nine

second

period

without

doubt,
from

Kandragupta.
or

Aaoka

removed the

his
of

grandfather
his reign

sixty-two the
year

years

beginning

will

fall
to

in

250

before

Christ.
divide

Five
Aaoka

kings,

according

the
us

annals
allow

of
each

Cashmere,
as

from
to

Abhimanyu.
reign
on
an

Let
average
number
same

of them
;

well then

as

Aaoka,
have the

twenty-five
of
years

years

we

wished
close
to

for

for
we

Abhimanyu.
follow the

We

arrive

the

result

when

Chinese
of the

narrative.
Turushka

This

narrative

places direct

Kaniahsor predeces-

Jca

the

last

princes,

and

the

the ered,

year

143

"

144

after

Christ.

Now,

since

we

have in into

discor-

that

PatangnKs
in

Makabhshya
year
1 00

throngh

Kamdra
came

mere, Cash-

ahready
use, we

the

before
to

Christ,
back

general

are

fully

authorized
on

put

the
to
as

composition the
we

of

the

great

commentary

Pknini'a
there

SAtras
are,

year

150;

Between

Patangali
above,
three

and

Phnini,

have

remar

Grammarians
to

known grammar. merely

to

us

who need
or

furnish

us

with
to

contributions

Phninis
between
which, be

We
two to

ingly accordyears,

place
the
our

the

intei'val
350, in

fifty

to

reach

year

according placed.'*
the
to

Kathd-^aHt-

sAgara,

Grammarian
Max Muller

is to in

Professor
says

reviewing

above
shew that

arguments
the
great

Professor of

Bohtlingk

"endeavored
which embraces
of B.

commentary

Patanjali,
and
the

both
was

the'

VarttikJi"

of the tory
sent

KJityftyana, middle
of of the Kashmir,

sfltras
century

Panini,

known in the

in

second
that
to

C.
the

It

is said

Ms*-

Abhimanyu,
the
not

king

of

Kashmir,

forBrahmans
it

teach

Mahabhashya
reign,
as

in his Professor
as

kingdom.
Bohtlingk

Abhimanjru, supposed,
from
coins,
even

is true,

did

in

the by

second
Professor this

century

B,

C,
in

but,
the

has

been

proved A.

Lassen,

first
In

century

I".

But

thus
literature,
even

argument
dates
are

is important. mostly
or so

the

history
that
a con*

of

Indian

precarious, is not
to

firmation
fact

within

century

two"

be
on

despised.
Phnini

The

that

Patanjali's
had
become
into shews

immense
so

commentary

and

K^tykyana
royal

famous in that of the

we

as

to

be

imported of the

by

authority

Kashmir
at

first half
cannot

first
far

century, in

D
,

least,

be

very grammar
the

wrong

placing

the

composition
rules

the

original
on

and

of the

supplementarjthird century

of

Kktykyana
At
what

thres-.

hold

of the

B.

C.

time

the

Mahk-

IntrodttctioQ

to

Panini

by

Bohtlingk"See

contva

by

Weber

his

Intro^

bh^hya
author

was

first composed
of the
;

it is impossible

to

say.*

Patanjali,
identified

the

great

commeiitary,

is
as

sometimes is Panini,

with

ringala
brother,

and
or

on

this
least

view,

Pingala
of

called

the

younger

at

the

descendant composition
century.

it might

be

supposed

that
to

the

original third from for

of But and the

the

Mahaof be

bhkshya

belonged and
use

the

identity
it

Pingala
to

Patanjali
it
as

is far

probable,

would

rash
All

foundation
Professor

other
MaxMuller

calculations/^
characterizes
as

these

arguments

entirely fail to

hjrpothetical/'
perceive
of that
at

Indeed

they it

are;

and
quite

the

reader
to

cannot

though
some

is

correct

fix yet

the

date

Panini

time

before

Amarasinha,

The This

fullowing
is

observRtions
only

have

an

important
which
is

Leariag
"

upon

the

que"tion
in Mnlier's
from

:""

'

the

date,

the
;

fixing
as

of

called been
to
one

impoisible"
ray

cient Anthis

Santikrit
in all
its npon

Literature

and

14

has

hitherto merely the

fate
a

to

differ

ork

chronological
tke date like
of

views,

seem

follow

predestined
ventare

necessity
to

looking
with
so,

Patanjali
certainty.
as

as

only

which

I should

de-

ermine
*

anything
because

I do

Patanjali,
attach
to

if foreseeing
life,
or

the
doubt

conjectural
that
a

date
lift before

which him which

aome

fnof
must

ure

Pandit

would
reach,
once

his

the

might period

out
we

all

istorical

took
to

the

opportunity

of stating
on

ot

imagine
he
"

him
actually

have

lived,

vhile

another
,

occasion

he

mentions

the

time

hen
*

did
says

live.
Panini, rule
"

If the

thing,"

serves

for

livelihood,
with

but
the

is not
words

for
"

sale"

(it has
Skanda,
time

affix

ka),

Tliis
the

Pxtaujali
that
represent

illustrates
these

Siva,
the
same

ifakha,"
a

meaning living
to

idols who

divinities
they therefore
are

and
not

at

ive
why

the

men
"

possess

them,"

while

for

sale.

And,

he

asks.

The

Maurya*

wanted
may
common
names

gold,
to

and
such

established
as

religious
; but
as

estivities. which
an

Good
are

(Panini's
about

rule)
(by
their

apply

(idols,
for the the

they

sold)
of

to
as

dola

hawked

people)
will of have

sake
ka"

such

worsh'p

rings
*

immediate
or

profit,
this

affix
given

Whether
show that

not

interesting
are

bit

history
servants

was

by

Patanjali
mcst

ironically,

even

affixes
they
"

the

obedient

of

kingps,
money

and
at
at

vaiiish
same

befor6
that
tells

idols bargain

which

sell, because
as

they
people

do

not

take

the
not.

the

time
he

he

is made by
was

poor

do,-*-I did
who
to
not

know
live lived

But,
the

all
king

events,

distinctly
who

these

words

that

he and

before 81ft B.

first

of

the

Maurya
too,

nasty
to

Chandragupta,
interpretation
hut
king
even

C.
he

And
tells words
ns

I believe,
us,
on

if

we

give
lived

natural

his

words,
or

that in
to

the than

contrary^

at

he

after
But

the

of been
on

this

dynasty,

other

later
from
a on

180

before

Christ.
doubt
to

he

has

good

enough
rule
"*

relieve
or

possibility
a

of

is

when it by

commenting Kotyayana.'"

another

of

Panini,
p.y.

rather

criticism

C7ol"Z""ttc*er'#

Ponint"

228"9.

tached

no

valid

ground the

has

been

shewn
era.

to

determine

that

as

having

been
A

after
fact,

Euddhistical
may be

however,

here

cited

from
the

the

Buddhistical
of

annals,

which
Max

apparently
Muller.

countenances

conjecture
is

fessor Proas

It

is this

that

D4vala

mentioned

contemporary The

of

Gotama.
to

Atthakathk
of Siddhattn

the

Buddhavansa
he
became

after

alluding

to

the
:
"

birth
'

before
a

Ootama-Buddha
named Kkladewalo,
and

says

At

that

period

certain
the

tdpaao,

who who
"

was

confidant
the of

of eight

maharaja
his

Suddhodano, having
taken
rest,
"

had

acquired
purpose Tkwatinad

samdpatti,

his

meal,

^for the
to

enjoying
realms.

noonday
there found in

repaired
host

the

He realms,

the

of the

dewalk,
ance exuber-

in

the

I^watinsa
of their
'

revelling

joy,
over

and
their

in

felicity,

waving
ye
me

cloths
thus

heads,
fulness
of

and
the

asked,
heart's thus
at

Why

is it
?
*

that

rejoice,
cause

in

the
?'

delight

Tell

the

thereof
a son

The
who

dewatk
seated
es-

replied,
the

Blessed
of

! unto

the having

rkja

is born,
Buddho,
we

foot

the

bo

tree,

become
:

will be

tiblish
with

the the

supremacy of the
of

of

dhannmo
attributes

and

shall

blessed
and
that

sight hearing

many
his

of his It is from

Buddhohood,
this
cause

with
we
*

the

dhammo.

rejoice/
Thereupon
the

said

Dewala
descending its golden

the

tapaso,
from

on

hearing

this Dewa-

announcement

of theirs, with

the
;

supreme
entering

16k

enchanting of
the

glitter

and

the
on

palace

monarch
throne who
a

Suddhodana,
erected accorded
is bom therein.
to
:

seated
He then
a

himself
thus

the

pre-eminent the
'

ed addressreception. The that

rkja
to

had
son

him
him I

gracious will

Rkja

thee
infant,

see/
in

raja
he
The
evolution,

caused

the

richly

clad,

to

be
to

brought,
the tkpasp,

order JDevalo,
an

(the infant)
feet
of the

might

do
elect,

homage
at

great

that
on

instant
the

performing

planted which
cloud

themselves
from

js^th (top-knot
like
imto

of

Devalo)
white greater

glittered,

its hoariness,

the
no

fleecy
one

impregnated

with

rain.

There

being

tained

the
on

last

stage

of
was

existence, seated,
over

"

instantly

rising
bowed
the

from

the

throne

which
hands

he

(Dewalo)
his head, this
to

down

with

his

clasped

raised
on

Buddho
result,

elect
likewise

and

the

E^ja

also,

witnessing his
own
son.

miraculous

bowed
'

down

to

The

i^paso

having
of
not

perceived
the elect,
was

the

perfection

of

the

mortal imhe

attributes
or

meditating
supreme

whether
Buddho
;

would

would

become he he

the

and

while

thus into

meditating, futurity,
'

ascertained would wonderful I not

by

his

power
so

of
;

perception and thus

certainly
mortal.'
to

become

smiling

said,
'

This

is the
or am

He
behold

again

meditated of in

am,

destined
said,
*No,
a

his
rot

ment achieve;

Buddhohood
the

? interval,

and

am

destined be
to
me

dying

though

thousand be I shall
:

Buddha

henceforth participate

manifested, in
such
a

it

will

not
:

vouchsafed be

to

iJiessing

regenerated
shall

in

realms

inhabited

by
mortal

incorporeal
: a

spirits

never

I behold
over

the

wonderful
Having
*

mighty
he

calamity
wept.
'

is impending

me.'

thus

divined, remarking, smiled,

The

bystanders
this
'

our

ayyo

(revered teacher)
to
over

having

moment

has

now

commenced impending
:

weep,'

inquire

Is

there
?'

any

misfortune

the is
to

infant
no

of

our

ruler

The
:

tdpaso
beyond
thou mortal
unto

replied,
all doubt then
as

unto

him

there

pendin im-

calamity
'

he

is destined
am

become
to

Buddho.'
so

Why

dost
a

weep
this,
this
on

?' 'I
his
an

not

destined hood Buddho-

ee

wonderful
most

attaining awful

assuredly

me

is

calamity.

weep

in

the

bitterness

of ascetic

my

own

disappointment.'
'

If

the

Kii,lad6vala
eight

here

mentioned
'

who

had

ed acquir-

the

samlipatti,'

and legends

Devala
were

the

inspired
we

legislator'
might indeed

of the

Hindu

Pauranic in
placing B.

identical,
as
*

be

warranted
the

Pslnini,

the

grandson
century

of Devala,' A.
D.
But,
same

in

third
no

century
means

C,

or

in

the

third

this

is by

satisfactorily their
names

proved.
as

There

is the

diflference

between The

between

Sclkatayana contradicted

and by

Katy^yana.

Pauranic

legend

is

also

to

Ehott
more

gi,

descendant

of Fln;n"^
of
at

who

is either Be
the
to

grandsov.
this
how

or

remote

descendant

Panin."

ever,

as

it may..
of

Without the
that

all

impugning the

authenticity

or

genuineness be
us

Pali
the

Atthakathii identification
viz.

Buddhawansa,
two

it may

stated
in

of these
to

persons

involves

this

diflSculty,
writers,
whom

that

other

well-known
mentions,

Hindu
we

works
must

and
in

Gotama
a

unmistakably

that

case,

assign

post-Buddhistic Vedangaa
were

date.

At

the

time At

Qotama
the

appeared,
time
the

the

had
composed,

been
'

in
the

existence. of

Yedangas
to

period

inspiration,' long for

according
ceased.* They

Brahmans
authors

and
too,

even

dhists, Budno

had
inspiration
"

before

Their

claimed
the
'*

themselves.

merely

rendered
as an

study

of

the

revealed
"

literature,"
therefore and

easier.

Devala,
to
a

inspired
the

legislator'

must

belong
anterior
to

period

before

Vedd^iga
Buddha. devala.
If, again,
we are sure

literature,

the

appearance

of Gotama

Hence

the

non-identity

between

Devala

and

Kdla

PItnini
to

lived
in

two

or

three
some

centuries

after
to

Buddha,
the
'

have

his

stitras, which,

allusion
M.

sage

or

his

remarkable recruits

doctrines,
among

as

Bumouf
were
'

says,

found
by

numerous

those

who
science
'

frightened

the
no

difficulties such allusion

of
;

Brahmanic.il and
means,

There
if
tope,'

is

however
wera

the
'

word
not
a

Stfipah/

it

not

a
*

later
a

introduction,

Buddhist
been
era

but

simply Vedas.
that

heap

of

earth,'
Piinini

as

it is said

to

have

used

in the

To
have affirm

place

after
the

the

Buddhist
age

(supposing

I
to

correctly

fixed

of
were

Kachchkyana)
indebted ceceded of the from
for

is indeed

that

the

proud
to

Brahamans those

their

matical GramChurch,

principles and who

at
were

who

had

their

availing
time
too,

themselves when

Brahaman
with the

literature
language

and
which This

Buddhism
was

in

it

was

promulgated,
so

fast

disappearing especially
that

in Hindustan. in he view had

had

is indeed
expressly
Ootama

very

improbable, by Kachchhyana,
long
before his

of

the

fact
*

stated

adopted
fallen

himselt*

that

Brahamaus

rms

given be

by

Sanskrit
that

QrammariaiiB
PJtnini
was

that

it

may

reasonably

concluded
before

before

Kachchayana,

and

erefore
Professor

Ootama

Buddha.
'

Ooldstucker

says

Though

Y"ska
there No
us

be

older

than

nini,

and

P"nini
as

older the
my
as

than of

E^tyayana, Panini.
gives

still remains
of

mystery

to

era

work
the
of

the

ancient of trating pene-

terature, it.
may

within But

knowledge,
the
a

means

remotest

date

Hindu

antiquity

ich

be
of

called
to

real
know

date,

is that

of

BuddhxjUa
is likely

death,
to

it

st

be

interest
or

whether

Panini

have

ved
*

before Not
only
to

after is the
the

this
name

event.

of of
name

S"kyamuni,
PAnini, which
but

or

S"^kya,
is

never

verted

in

Stitras
this

there is still

another
more

ct

connected

iiith

remark

The

great

schism
centres

which
in

divided the
notion The

ancient
which

India
each

into

two

stile

creeds,
nature

entertained Hindus
with the

the

of souls
;

eternal

bKss.

Brahmanic

hope

at

their

will
which,

ultimately
in
;

become language in

united
of of the the

versal uni-

spirit
the
neuter

the

Upani
sects,

shads, the

Brahman who
takes

and,

that
of

suprem

deity,

the
however

place

this

philosophical
this god Brahman

and

personal be,
an

god.
it is

And

indefinite
to

nevertheless,
The

the

mind

of
of

the
a

Brahmanic Buddhist
goal
of

ndu,

entity..

final
difference

salvation
between

is both,

tire

nonentity.
that
pf all the
none

This

the

eated

deep
of shades

and
the

irreconcileable compromise

antagonism

which

lowed

which
of
the the

was

possible

tween befaith,
The creed, either

the
most

and

degrees
to

Brahmanic
degenerate.
Brahmanic all
"

om

enlightened for
eternal

most

rious

expressions

bliss

in

the

ke

a/pavargay
from

TnoJcaha,
this

mukti,
career"

nihareyasa,
or

mean

liberation
therefore

earthly
a

the

absolute
The

good

;"

ey

imply

condition

of

hope.

absolute

end

This

word

means

literally
i
am

"

blown

out

;"

but

there
its
"

is in
in

this
the

difference,
Brahmanic former,

if

not

mistaken, Buddhistic like other

in
too,

between literature,

use

and
it is

in

the

^that,

the

employed,
whereas

past
latter in

participles,
it
occurs

in

any in

of

the
neuter
noun,

three

genders,
and of
no

the

only
of
an

the

gender,
in that

there,

only
e.,

the

sense

abstract
of the

extinction,
instance
classical

i.
at

absolute command

annihilation
in

soul.

I have

my

which
any

nirvana,
other
sense

when
than

used the
with
sense

in

the
"

literature,
or

implies

blown

ovi,"

sense

immediately
the fire
use

connected

it.

Thus

Patanjali,
gives

when

illustrating
"

of this
out

past by
yata

participle, the

the

instances
out

the the

is blown
;" and
a

wind,
on

the
the

lamp
same

is blown occasion,

by

wind
that

Kaiy"

who, has

observes
not

phrase,

the

wind
no

ceased
but

to

blow,"

would vatah," his

be

expressed

by
the

"

nirvdrinstances

vdtah,

by

nirvdto
one

corroborates
"

of

Patanjali
by

with

of

own

blowing
who

out

(has
the has

been

effec

the

wind."
in

But
rule

Panini,
VIII.
2,

teaches
which

formation

of

this

participle forth all these

50,
''

indirectly
participle

called
va

instances,

says

(the

past

of

with wind* This

it into

prefix

nir
'

is) nirvdn/i
blowing,
as

(if

the

word

means)

'free

from
*

(or,

not

wind*)."
of Panini's

is the is

natural

interpretation
a

rule.
the

KAtyOrword

yana,
av"te

true,

gives

Virttika,
"

which
not

corrects

avdtdbhidhane
;"

(if it have)
very remarkable does
not
to

the
that

sense

of

wind
in in

(or

of

blowing)
on

yet

it is

Patanjali,
its
the

commenting
his

this

V"rttika,
but
;

interpret them

words
instances

usual

maimer,

merely

adds

I have
them
to

just
with

named

it is

remarkable,
"

too,

that

he

introduces
in

the
that

observation

(this
or

Varttika

is given

order
in

show)

(nirvana)

is

also
he

is

emphatically
no

used
whatever
"

the for

following the
sense

instances." stated does

not

Still

has his

instance
"

by

Pdnini,
to

and be

word

also*^
the

or

tically" empha-

appear simply

justified by
the

criticism

of into

Kity"yana,

which

corrects

word

avdte

"

In

short,
I have

my

opinion

on

this

Varttika

is

analogous The

to
sense

that
of

hich

expressed
from

in

previous

instances.
not

irvkna,

"free
in of
it

wind
of

(or

blowing)/'
who

had
knew

become that

bsolete

the

time
found
the

Kiityityana, its ulterior

merely
special But the

ense

which
of

and

application

in
is
no

the

nirvina
link

Buddhistic
this latter it

faith. word
is not and

since nirvkna,
that

there
"

logical

between
;
over

windhe would which

still," of

Panini

and
in

since
silence
sense,

probable
sense

have

passed became
in

that I hold

of

the

word
sense

finally

its only
his time
;

that that

this his the

did

not

yet

exist

in

other

words,

silence
origin

affords
of the

strong

probability
*

of his

having

preceded

Buddhistic
Dr.

creed.'
after

Weber

reviewing
by

the

remarks
"
"

of Professor

Goldis

stucker,"f-

concludes

exclaiming
is

And
up

this

then opinion

all
of

wherewith
*

Gk)ldstucker

able

to

prop

his

Goldstuckei-'s
As follows
:^-'

Panini,

p the

2*25

et

seq. reception Panini's

of

"f

As

by

general

Qoldstucker's
with the
crown

resalU,
the

xelatively qnestion
he has

chronological
after

result

only attained
if his

concerning
;

connection
to

work

in

has

all
that

been
work,

let

us

now

proceed this time

with
viz., the

which

adorned Panini

which
before

awaits
the
is

consummation,

demonstration which,
upon
if truo

that

must
an

have

lived

of

Buddha.
two

This
points. Now
we

indeed, First,
learn

discloses

important
not

disenvery,
the
name

founded

upon

this,

that

Panini

does

mention

of Sakyamimi.

firom

Goldstucker from
thatcir*

himself

(p. 18.
"

vide

supra the of

p.

48.)

tliat which

nothing belong
to

is

to

be

inferred

cumstance"

sometimes
same

words

his

(Paninl'a)
; but

province
not

will

be
at

at

the

time

also
a

historical
of

and latter second

"

antiquarian category
point
from
:
"

interest is omitted is, that

it does his

follow

all,

that, the

because

word

the

in

rules,

it is absent

Irom

language
but

also." in the
sense

The
of the

Panini

mentions
and
not

indeed in the

the
sense

word

nirvana,

free

wind,
"

wind-still,"
since

in

which

the have

word
passed I hold

is held
over

by

Buddhists
that did
not
sense

and
of
exist

it is not

probable
finally

that

he its that

would
only

in this

silence
sense

the in

word

which
time
:

beoame
words
of the

sense,

that
a

yet
his

his

in

other

his

silence

offers

strong

probability
It is quite

of

having
from

preceded
this

ihe

origin that

Bud'

dhistic

creed,"

(p. 227."
opposition also
in

evident

pass"ge

this

exposition

stands

in'direct

to the
to

above-cited
observed
free
k

earlier
that
wind,"
arhiirary

expressions word
a

of Goldstuoker'sfrom
avate

p.

18.

It

is

again
sense

be
"

the
as

in

'*

nirvano

'rate"

Pan.

8. 2. 50.,

the

of
but

from

possessive

adjective,
against
commentary the words
is
to

is not

the

''natural

interpretation,"
of
it.

perfectly
the

ontt

blundering
the

Paniui's

usage

language,

as

well
avate

as

against

sense

in

which

stands underasparce be

The

word

rather in

stands

in

juxtaposition

with

immediately

Pjuuni's
and
at

priority
the
same

to

Buddha
an

"

a-

daring

undertaking
speaks

indeed
to

time
excites

ignominy

of all that
!

the then
"

contrary,

which
to

surprize"
in

The of

learned his
own

Doctor opinion
four

proceeds that such

adduce
was

proofe than

support
;

P"nini
as

later

Buddha of
the

and

produces
sramana,

items,

the

frequent

mention

bhikshu,

chivara,

munda^ Pliuini Bumouf

thus years

"c.
as

"c. having

2.

That

Buddhists

themselves time.
For

consider

lived
us

after
the

Buddha's

(says he)
"

informs

from

Aryamanjusri
future

MMatantra,
of that

It is
400

that

S"kya
him.

predicts
He

the

advent

Nagarjtuia
of

after

likewise

announces

P^nini,

of

Chandragupta,
is proof
is

and

of Aryasangha''

;
;

3.

That
4.

P^nini's
That
no

vocabulary

of the

proposition
names,

and

mention
or

made,

among

other

of

Pjtnini

in

the

Rik

Rik.

Sanhita.
Taking entering
the

the
into

last

ground

first, it

appears

to

me

thaf(wilhout
this
of
no

other
here
the

questions
sought inference
to

which
be
drawn

arise

upon

point),
greater

inference
than

deduced

is

weight
the that ceased
contrary,

like

byProfessorGk)ldstucker

past
is

peif.
to to

pMf

"

of

the

"

root

va]
from

oat

of the

'*

viod"

or,

when
out,

there
it is

is

no

wind/'
it has
on

say,

nirvana but
from

is not the
are

the

wind
part
are

which
p.

blows

blown

ont,

blow,

regular
out
or as

p.

nirvBia.

From
; for

other

things
according

the

things
for is used

that

blown

blown

away

example,

to

Patangali
nirvana

the for

fire,

light,

the
last

Calc.
example
one

Scholiast
is, from
to

(how

correctly

?) adds

that

bhikihu.

This
a one as

Panini'e that
mere

freqneot his
mle

mention he
which

of

bhikshn,

directly

snch in his
can

to

lead

suppose
is a
as a

by

had may

^uite
probably
in these

particularly
be
so,

eye.
be of

But
no

I
yalue

add

that

this

conjecture^
1 have
in
Panini's
note
must
on

but
IV. time,

anywhere
of

proof. found

therefore

also

Studies,
his
in hhikshUf

89., where
only
very

treat

intimations them
out

vocabulary
the
of

concerning
nirvana

briefly

pointed
at

in
that

the

sion expres-

YIII.
or

2. 50.
indeed

If

I had
it

all believed

that

word

necessity
suits

relate
'

to

that

could

bear

that

signification
have

Uliich
quite

the

nirvana

of the

Buddhistic

faith," words
"

I would
and

throughout
that with

laid

another

weight
ex-

upon position
the

it

In
of

truth,
nirvana

both
has
is

it is therefore

Goldstucker's
each other.

reciprocal

failed
by
no

"

have
means

nothing
a

to|do
of

The

nirvana

of may

Buddhistic acquired
nirmana

faith
an

neuter

the
is
out"

part

perf.
a noun

passive,

which

have

abstract in the

signification,
**

but

it

wholly
"

substantive,

as

niryana,

sense

of

the
the

blowing

the
to

extinction."

It
of

is

so

regularly
the

formed

that formed

Panini
past.

had

not

least

occasion

make

mention

it, while

irreg^arly

perf.

passive

instead

from
to

the

fact, that

no

mention
I fail

is

made

ofSkkya

byPanini.
which the
prove, scarcely
*

As

PJUoini's
to
a

vocabulary,
one

to

perceive
other
;

anything
and

leads

conclusion
as

way

or

the

words
inmy
any

given

by

Dr. Weber opinion,

"actually

Buddhistic
the

terms"

humble

nothing.

For
not

Buddhists
from the
to

have Brahmans

words

which
titles

they

have

taken

e.g. is

the

veyydkarana
one
"

and above

Upadesa,
are

which the

reference

made

in

of the the

extracts,

for

AbhidhammKi'
of the dhists. Budthat

pitaka,

and
It

hymns
also

of

joyous
from

inspiration" the

would
or

appear

Buddhist

works before

the

Lok^yata Jainas
or

the

Jainas-f*

had

an

existence

Gotama. their
;

The

had

doubtless
hearers.

their
They

bkUckhu
wore

mendicants,

Samcma
like
say

SctvaJca
Yavanas,

chwa/ra
It the

robes

and

had,

the

their
rash
to

heads
affirm

bare.
thai*

would,

therefore, words given

to

the

least,
as

be
"

other

by

Dr.

Weber
to

actually pre-existing

Buddhistic Sectarians
of
;

terms"
more

had

not

been
as

known find

other in
the

especially Brahmans
"

text

books

Bhuddhism

that
epithets

had

requently

addressed

Buddha

with

the

S(r)amana

havat We

Go(w)tama."
are

also is

told

that

the

Buddhists
Buddha. by

themselves This the is

a

consider
mistake. in
the

hat

Panini is
no

after

Gotama

here

such
is
no

belief

entertained

Buddhists
any
to

Cey-'

on.

There

mention
The

of Panini

in
referred

of
are

Ceylon
the
The

uddhist

works.
works,

authorities
are

from
alL

epaul

and

they
are

indeed

no

authorities
are

at

rophecies
seceders
in

which
from
some

related

in

them

the

interpolations

the of
our

Buddhist
own

Church.
books regarding

The

predictions
persons who

iven

ived
are

after

Gotama,
additions

such of
"

as

Wijaya,
Buddhists,

Asdka,

N^igasena,
to

c.,

the

zealous
The
extent

anxious
Baddhists" literature

up-

Vide

Supra

p.

xxxiii.
"

et
a

seq.

technolD^y
borrowed
terras

of
from
are

the the

stiys

Pandit mans.. Brah-

ojendralal
"

Mittra,

is to

g^eat

of the and

Their
most

metaphysical
are

exclusively

Hindu,

the

es

of

of

their

divinities

taken

from

the

Hindu

Pantheon""

La/tto

tara

8.

Ixvi

INTRODUCTION

hold their

the
acts

characters

of whom authority
part

they and

wrote,

and with

to

procure
such
to

for

all the
on

weight
was

which

prediction
them.

the I
may

of

the

sage

calculated
that

invest works ed, recordnot

And,
in

conclude
these modem

by

remarking,

the
are

themselves,
are

which

pretended
works
;

prophecies*

comparatively of Buddhism,
to

and

therefore

the

text-books
To
return

the
not
more

subject.
the only

The

proof

adduced
on

by

Professor

Goldstucker
is

is
of

evidence proof. be

this

matter.

capable
the

satisfactory
may

The

best
in

mode
view
us,

which
scanty

dates

of authors

ascertained,

of the

information

wh^ch
are

Asiatic
made few
by

biography
writers

affords
whose been

is by

the

references
ascertained.

which

dates better be
not

have

been

Now,
of

dates

have

ascertained

than
it is

that

Ootama
B.

Buddha.
If, therefore,

If

it the

54*3

assuredly
figure
most

477

C.

personages,
history,
can

who

conspicuously

in

Brahmanic
there

are

unmistakably
little doubt

mentioned
of
their

by

Gotama, having

be

bu

existence
into the

been

anti^Buddhistic.
we

By
a

an

investigation which,
to

Buddhist

Literature,

obtain

result

say

the

least,

is satisfactory.
on

According

Shacigurusishya's
krama
:

Commentary
I
am

Kityayana's,

Sarvdmt
for the

(and
his

here

indebted Literature,
of

to

Pr. Max
p.
230,
race

MuUer
et

ex tr

see

Sanskrit
of

seq.)

Saunahotra,
who

descendant
the

Bharadv"ja
of

the took
was

of Angiras,
name

en te

family

Bhrigu,

the

of

Saunak#
*

the

Raverend

Asvalayana

Saunaka's
of both
Saunaka

pupil and

an

Ksltyslyana
The

studied
same

the

works

Asvalayan
same

authority

places
to

Vyasa

about

the

date,
learn

if from

not

little

anterior

Saunaka.
was

And
the
son

Yyaaa,

other

Brahmanical

sources,

of Para

See

Tumoar's

exposition
for

of

these

frauds, with

in

the

Bengal
to
"

Journal
the

of the

Eoy

Asiatio

Society

September,
says the

IS37,

reference

Nepaul

"amplified
to

[vaipulya]
who lired and

sutras,'*

the days

learned
of
no

Kajendralal
alleged
as

Mittra,

they

allude
a

individuals

long

after

their

author,

and

claim

degree

tion of elabor
at
a

finish,
"

which Lalila

leave

doubt p.

to

their

having

been

compiled

muc

later

period."

Vistara,

10.

sara.

If
we

therefore, obtain,
5
1

we

adjust
2

these
Vyasa, facts their

names

according
3

to

their

dates,

Pardaara, These

Saunaka,
perhaps

Asval^

yana,

and
:

Eaty^lyana.

may

be

relied
to

upon

but

must

object
S^rit

to

being

applied

the

idle

stories"
or

of Eath" any

Siigara

of Dr.

Somadeva
being

mir, of Kash-

to

chronological

calculations

built

upon

their

basis.

I have work
a

already
in
of

had

occasion
as

to

refer

to

this, It

which

is

the

ame

substance
any

the
"

Yrihatkatha. It is
a

is

confessedly
of fables,

ot

book

authority.
"

compilation
was

abounding
to

with

the

marvellous."
or

It

composed
not
even

without followed Panwithout

reference

History

Chronology.
of his

It has contemporary various

no

he

chronological
The
or

system

Kalhana
stories would
at

dit.

author

has
and,

strung

together persuaded,

order

date
than

am

one

be

more

mused

Somadeva
attached
by

himself,

if

now

alive,
to

the

historical stories,'

mportance
in

Europeans
depths of

his
"

"ghost

lost

the

unfathom"ble It
may

his

Ocean-of-Rivers-ofProfessor Vrihat

tories."

indeed

be

asserted,
or

(says
the

Wilson)
Cathd,
and
that
is
a

hat
a

the
much

Cdthd

Sdrit

Sdgara,
than

rather

ot

better
of idle

guide
tales

the

Bhf)japrab(mda,
evidence
are
:

ollection

is bad
that

historical tales

it must

be

emembered
:

however,

those merit

not

of

Sbmadeva's
in his
own

nvention

he of

has

only

the

of telling them of together the

them

ay,

and

having
we

collected
have
most

from

various
to

uarters.

Thus which

legends

relating

ikrama,

constitute

the

Sinhdsana
have

Dvdtrinsati
a

and

Vetala

Pancha
of the

Vi/rmiti,
Hitopadesa

and
or

we

also

very

considerable
in

ortion

Panchatantra

comprised

this

election.'*
Be the
as

authenticity
it
mav.

of the
for
to

matters
one

in Somadva's
moment

work,

ever howthat

It cannot authority

be

maintained
which king

t lends

any have

the

identity

(upon
between is

several

riters

based
with

their
whom

inferences)
Katyayana

Nanda
and

in
the

onnection

mentioned,

predecessor
to

of Chandragupta
me

;*

My
in

pandit

has

shrewdly
age and

tima in-

the

probability, from

view

of the

of

Asvalishifts
story

yana,
to

as

it

appears

Buddha's
to

discourses,
connect

the

which
other

Somadeva fables,
led
the

resorts

Katy"yanft's of

with Nanda,

that the

the

mention
to

Channakka
some

and previous

had

writer

identify the
manner

Nanda
is
not

with unlikely

predecessor
in

of
same

Sudra
that
assigns for

king.
the
a

This Nepaul Cashmi:

the
to

Buddhistical
rian need
mention
to

writings,

which

M.

Bumouf

origin,

had

mistaken that
no

Dharmd^soka
inference
can

E^lksoka

and
the

hardly
of

add

be
are

drawn
indeed

from

Ghcmnakka.
that
the

No
scheming,
who

arguments and

necessary

prove

treacherous
so

Purohita
in
was

Brahman
Hindu
ferent

Channakka,
N"takas
from
"

figures
own

conspicuously

the

and
the

in

our

Buddhistical

annals,
the
as

di fof
having

venerable
among

sage the

Saunaka,
rishis
who

preceptor glorious,

Asvalayana
seen

celebrated
the

the

second

Mandala,

and

beard

the

collection

of

the

Maha Nor
has

Bharata/'
this,
the
I believe,

been between

attempted. the
of
us

But

the

authority

upon
and
to

which
the

identity
of

writer
F^^iputta that

of the is

Varttikas
attempted

minister

King

Nanda
have
of

be

established,
the

would

believe
*

the

former

was

also Panini To

contemporary

Pdnini
controversy.'

and
! !

actually

defeated

in
return

grammatical

from

this

digression
may

the

dates

of Pard^ara from

and

Asvaldyanay
annals. but if it
can

however, True it

be

ascertained
we

the
them

tical Buddhisexactly
before
Now, any of

is

that

cannot

fix
an

be

shewn
it is

that

they

had
for
our

existence

Q6tama
one

Buddha,
who

suflSicient

purpose. with the

has

the

slightest the disputes

acquaintance
which had in the with the

history fraternities
cannot

Buddhism,
of
to

and
are

principal

Brahmans

said

to

have

Gotama,
following

fail

identify

the

youth

mentioned

extract,

(the

Professor

Max

Mailer

himself

has

fairly

stated

the

weight

dae

to

this

authority.

irst) with
;
"

one

of

the the notable

descendants
molmxivo

of
in the

Parasam,

the
extract,

Hindu
with
a

ge

and

likewise of the

second
of

scendant In the
at

Aavalayana
from

Hindu

legends.
I
:
"

Majjhima
p.
me

MMya,
the
:

which
occurs

have

already

oted,
1.

xlv.,

following
ekan

passage
samayan

Evan

sutan

Bhagav^ Uttaro

Kajangalibyan
mitnavo

hariti

Mukheluvane.
vasi
no

Athakho bhagavJ^ Pkrasariyo

Pkritsari-

nte

yena

tenupasankami

seti

Uttara
?

brahmano

S^vak^nan
PJtrksariyo

indriyJlnan brahmano

avananti

Deseti

bho

Gotama

vakanan
*

indriydnan
have I heard. in the

bhavananti.

Thus

When,
a

at

time,

Bhagava

dwelt Uttara,
the

at
a

kheluvana of

Kajangala,

youth

(named)
went to

pil

Pdrdsariya
was

fraternity,

place

ere

Bhagavk

(Gotama
Brahman

inquired)
P^Jlsariya
Sir,
Gotama

tara,

does

the
teach

(your
bhdvand
of
to

teacher)
to

of

the
?

aternity

Indriya
the Brahman

pupils

eplied Uttara)
teach

the

Parasariya

fraternity

s In

Indriya Assalayana and

of

bh^vana

pupils/
where
a

the

Suttan,
one

dialogue

is

given
a

tween be-

Gotama
member *the Brahma,'
passage
me

of

the

AssalAycma
fraternity, purest,'
'

family,
as

guished distinalone
of the

the
race,

Brahman
'the

to

their

ing

highest*

*the from

projenitors
his mouth
;*

hk

and

who
:

had
"

sprung

lowing
2.

occurs

Evan

sutan

ekan

samayan

bhagava
khopana

Sdvattiyan
nknk

arati

Jetavane
brahmananan

Tena

samayena Brahmana

rajjakanan

panchamattani

satani Atha
kho

attiyan

pativasanti

kenachadevakaraniyena.
*

an

Brahmananan

etadahosi
pannkpeti asmin

Ayan

kho

samano

Gotamo
samanena

tuvannin

suddhin saddhin
samayena
;
"

konukho

pahoti

amena
pana

vachane
nkma

patimantetun'ti.
mltnavo

Tena

Assalayano
vuttasiro

S^vattiyan

ivasati

dharo

salasavassuddesiko

j^tiyk;

tinnan

an

itih^isa
purisa Thus have
;

pancbamknan
lakkhanesu I heard and
at
:

j^ako

veyyakarano

lok^yata

aha
'

anavay6. At
a

time

Bhagavsl
five there

dwelt
hundred
for
some

nt

Jetavana
Brahmans

in

l^vatti different
thus of

that

time
also

about resided

countries,*
'

purpose.
the

They

thought

this

Samana
:

Qotama
who

proclaims
to

purity

(all) the
Qotama
a on

four
this

classes
matter

is this He
of

able
time
was

dispute
there young,
his

with
at

Samana

At

lived

Skvatti

youth and mastered

named about the

Assal^yana. sixteen three

head-

Bhaven,+
had

years

age

(from
with

birth.)

He

Vedas,
and the
a

which,

(the supplements)
of

Nighandu,
"c.,

Ketubkd, Itihdsa

distinction

Akhhara,

(letters)

have

for

fifth.|

He

was

F4daka,"

"

By

'

diiTdrent

countries'
was

says

theComnientator,

'

are

meanl

Ang^ thereture,

andUa^ha.
agrees with

4-

Assalajana Brahmanical

of

the
"

Bhaga
that
*

(Bhrig^;
the

family,
have

and

this,

the

account

Bhrigus

their

heads

quite

shayed.'"

Orihyu-Sanffidh

pari"i"hta.

The

ahove

enumeration of
are

of

Brahmanie
is
said

sciences

may

not

be

unimportant in
them.

in

the

identification
Vedat

the here

person,

who

to

have

been

accoiiiplished
are,
as we

The

three

unmiBtakably

mentioned.

They

learn

from

the

Ambalta

Sultan,

Iruhheda

(Rig.
Sages.

Yedh)
The

Yajxthheda
fourth

(Yajur;,
V"da,
which
*

and
is
in

Saanaveda,

made
is

by

Attaka

and
stated

other
U"

religions
be the

here

omitted,

else

where

Attabbana

{ Atharvaaa)
introducing
,

Veda,

made
and
is

subsequent
other

times

by
cere

impious
monies,

(wicked)
snch
as

Brahmans
sacrificial
'

life- slaughter,

irreligious
IUha"a

torments

"e.'
of

The

fifth

yeda
times

called
as

[puravutta
Ac*
and the
v

pabando
is

Bharatodhiko]
here of

compositions
the

ancient
'

such

Bbarata

also

stated
AkkJuwa
are

that

three
are

Vedas

included
the in the
of

Nifhandu,

Kehtbhaj
to

tin dis

"g.'
also

These

douotless

supplements Buddhist difficult and the vikappo As

banskrit
;
a

the

Vedas, By

z.

the

VedangaSf

which
as

expressly

mentioned
'

annals.
obsolete
Veda."

Kighandu

is

meant,
a

Professor

Both

says,

collection
mode of

words,
Ketubka

which

formed
explained

basis
in
'

f""r instruction

in
be
an

the

expounding

the
science

Glossary

to

[ketubhanti
auxiliary identified
of
to

kiriya-knppa poetry.' the

kavinan

upakaraya

Battaii]
the
Veda,

which
can

is only

supplement,
Nirukta,
a

however, science

Kctubha
for

be

with hymns

servic

the

understanding
Tannnd

the

Fedic

Vedtartheofa'-bodhBya

upayuktan

Niruklam.
of

'Hence
'Vedas.'

the
*

Nirukla
The

is

serviceable
of

for

the

understending
may

the

meaning
with
the

of

th

dittinetion

Akkhara

Ao.f
to

also the

be

identified of

Brahmanica

Siktha,

which

Sayana

definea

be

**

science

the

pronunciation

letters,

accents,

"e,* This word

is
not

Padaka.-"

explained

in

the

glossary.

From

ito

being

however

Yeyy^karano
and
in

(grammarian).
the
science
than

He

was

accomplished

in

kJiyata,* More of
I

of
the

Pnri8arlakkhand.f
above,
in
can

direct
the

evidence
identity
of

scarcely

be
:

duced adif, of
of

persons
here amongst
remoter

Asiatic
was

History
a

and,

apprehend,
'

Assal^yana celebrated

named,
the

descendant
the
are

vaUyana,
to
an

Bishis',
Ootama,
the

claims ed. undoubtrian Grammabetween

nini
It

antiquity
thence himself

than that

may

be

concluded,

Buddhist

availed
and

of

the

P^ninya
there

Vyikarana, is
so

which

the

Pkli

aphorisms

much

corres"

ndence.
But, there is the
same

correspondence

between

the

krit SansKktyi-

Varttikas,
anterior believe it
to

and
the

the

Pali

Vutti.
Pali
that

Was,

therefore,
?
was
a

na I

Buddhist
stated is

Grammarian
K^tykyana

is not
All

pupil

of is,

valkyana.
'

that

alleged the

in

respect

(jf the
books

former,
of

at

he,
his

having

mastered
composed

thirteen
books

Saunaka
What
;
nor

nd

of

pupil,

several

himself.'
not

ime,

therefore,
any
rs

elapsed
reason

between
to

them

does

appear
'

s there

valid
large

admit
een

between teacher

them and
was

only pupil,
or

an

terval

as

that

betw

tween beKJbt-

father
may,

and
for

son.'J
the
reasons

If, however,

such

the be
in

fact, placed

kyana

already
testimony
to

adduced,

fore be-

Gotama
antiquity

; for,

all the

adduced
Ektyayana.
argument,

favor

of Pani-

i's

applies
for

equally
the sake

But,

suppesixLg

of

that

Katy^yana's

li

expression
the

for

the

Sanskrit
of all words

Nairuktatf
the

'

or

Etymologists,' principle
in the
text

ar

large their

'

class

who

de

verbal
to

origin
another

leading

of

all
the

researches,'
or

opposed

school
to

also

mentioned Max verbal

be

yiz.
'

VaiytJcaranas
the

Analysers,'
the

who,

according

Professor
the

Mailer, origin
of

p.

164.,

following
only

lead

of
an

argyo

etymologist,

admitted

those

words

for

which

dequate
*

grammatical
The system
science of

analysis Atheistical
teaches

could

given.'

philosophy
of
the

taught
or

by
fortune
sa^s

CharvtAa,
of that
a

which
The oi

temper
on

person,

and
was
a

of the
work
on

line,

entsof

his

body.

Commentator

the

text,

there

the

ubject,

consisting

16,000

heads

of

instruction.

VarttikJ^
chkyana

were

post-Buddhistical,
that the it is very

and

after that

the the

age former

of

Kachavailed
:

; and

improbable
of
a

himself
to
In

of

language
hypothesis

Buddhistic
does
not

Pali

writer the

I beg

submit

that
to

this

shake
with

testimony

regard

Maha
;

Kachchayana's
for

identity
may

the

author in that

of
case,

Sandhikappa
is, that the the

all that

be

fairly

inferred
like the subsequent

VvMi Grammar,

in

the
were

Pali

work,
at

Varttikd,

to

Sanskrit
by
a

written

period

and
In

different this

person.
it must
one

noticing

question, in

be

borne

in

mind,

that
authorship Kachas

although of the chd^yana, the

tradition

voice
the
are

ascribes
to

the

Pkli
yet

Suttans
writers been

in

Sandhikappa
divided by
that
very

Maha belief

that

in

their

to

VvMi

having

written,

distinguished

hierarch
of opinion

of the disproves refer

Buddhist the

Church.*
"

This
tendency their
"

difference Buddhist
famous

alleged
of

of
works

later
to
names

writers

to

the

authorship

in

ent anci-

Brahminic

history."
the facts
of

(Max

MuUer,

p.

303.)
with the
to

Such
age
attract

are

and this

circumstances

connected
to

and

authorship public
may

Grammar, It is indeed
more

which

I desire that

attention.

possible

future proofs

researches
upon

enable
or

me

to

adduce
to
so

satisfactory
the inferences

those

points, here

materially
But,

qualify
as

and

conclusions

drawn. extended,
was

far

my

humble
opinion

researches
that this

have

hitherto

I incline by

to

the

Pali

Grammar
of

written
sixth

Maha
before

Kachchdycma

in

the

latter-half
As

the

century
work
of

Christ.
to

already

stated

this

is intended

illustrate

the

grammar may

of the

language
to

Gotama
that
it

Buddha's
was,

'discourses.
some

This

lead
from
of

the

inference
dialect

in
also
as

degree,
the The

different

another

which this

had

received
it might. Nothing previous

appellation
is

M2l"gadM.
the
of of

Be

however,
of

Pali

essentially definitely

language
state

Buddhism. cultivation

is
to

known

the

of its

the

establishment

Buddhism

by

Gotama.

TO

kachchayana's

grammar.

Ixxiii

All that
Buddhist

may
era,

be

confidently
is that

advanced

of times
a

previous

to

in remote Bharat

antiquity
in the
as

tribe

of people
or

tled

themselves
the region of

under
commonly

Aryadesha

Aryd-

ta,

known
the

Central
on

India, between the

to

lines the

mountains
on

HimaUiyd.

North-East traditions
the
war

Vvadhya
in India

the

West.*
were
a numerous

According
kings

the

rent

there
to

from

of

Mah^
all

Bharat

comparatively

very

late

period;
parts
same

the

dynasties,
were

though founded
we

existing
by
one

in

diflFerent

the of

Aryadisha,
people,
of four
"

and
the the

the

whom

m;iy

designate
or

A'i'ians,

sisting tribe

classes,

the
or

Kahestriyas,
the

royal
"

(mihOf
the
a

ry)
the

^the Brah/mobna,
"

sacerdotal
or

class

Vaiaya,

commercial

and
was

the

Sudra,

the

servile."f"
Sahadeva,
Bharat,

eral

dynasties,
chain
at

one

thit

of Magadhas,

It numbers who

nected

of

thirty-five
of reign

kings the of
war

from

gned

the

termination in the
of the
a

of Mahk

to the

dhistical

era

Ajdtdaatta.
people though
was

The

religion

Magadha
period,

doubtless
at

Brah-

ism

from

very

early

the

Buddhistical undoubted
to the

it branched
at

off into
of

different
a

sects.J
proves

Yet

the

stence

this time the

cultivated

dialect, that, the

peculiar
whilst

adhas,
the

called

MdgadJii,
their
own,

sharing had
as

th

Brahmans
of

religion,

Magadhas
the
same

nguage

their

fundamentally
the
nearest

the

nskrit,

and

exhibiting

relation

to

the

earliest

rm

of the

language
there the
a

of the
now

Brahmans.

Although

are name

several

dialects,

including

the

Pali
be shall
of

ich

receive

of Prdkrita,

it may
to
more

nevertheless

thered

from

variety I
the

of circumstances
come

which

reafter

refer, when

to

speak

particularly

relation
British

which

Mdigadhi

bears
190.

to

the

Sanskrit,

"

^that

Asiatic

Societjr's Journal,
Miscellaneous and

vol. zvi, p.
Essays

See

Colebrook's
Ui. p. 814.;

ii. p.
account

178.
of

Also
them

American
in

Orieatal

rnal

Gotama

Buddha's

Bengal

Asiatic

ciety's

Journal, my Lecture

Vol.
on

vii., p. 698.

I See

Buddhism,

p.

5, et seq.

th3

language

which
now

had

at

first

received
or

the

name

of
into

Prahrita other
traces

is either forms of parent

very

entirely

lost,

has

been but

absorbed
few,

speech,
stem"

leaving

behind

if

any,

of the
is

It

also

probable
the

from

historical
and
of

and

philological
are

considerations,
those
forms.

that

Mdgadhi
this view

the the

Sanskrit
question

two

of

Against
of
a

may the

be
Bud-

urged dhistical
The
tical

the

absence

Mc^adhi
undoubted

literature existence

before
of the

period,

and
of
a

the

Sanskrit.
Buddhis;

existence
era,
was

Sanskrit
to

literature,

before
of

the

owing
had

the

pre-existence
in Magadha

Rrahmanism
628 existence
Till

and
we

if Buddhism should

existed have such

some

before of the
fact.

B.

C,

doubtless But, his

evidence
not'

of the

Mdgadhi.

was

the
to

Gotama
it, far

proclaim and

religion,

and
the

sought
kings

disseminate had then

wide,

throughout
a

Asia,

of Magadha
Till

no

ty necessihad there
no

for religious
been
no

display

of their
no

language. animosities. who

their

they

feuds;

sectarian
with
and
any

Till then
an

had
faith.

contentions

held Arian

antagonistic

Both
adorers which

the
of

Magadhas
the
same

brethren books, be

were

the

gods.
of
a

Their

sacred
may

through ascertained

alone

the

existence
were

literature

of nations
mans.

of antiquity, Although
;
to

identical
a

with

those

of

the
own,

Brahthe
from

they they

had

language
to

of in

their it

Mdgadhi
religon,

yet

had

little
of which

record the
a

apart

the

exposition
;

Brahmans literature

had

laid

exclusi

claims

and
they

if had,

they

had

of their the the

own*

which
of

doubtless

its destruction proved

through from

agency

Brahmans,

is

sufficiently

political
century, after
were

changes and, above

which

Magadha
from the the

underwent
fact that
not

in
many

the

fifth
centuries

all,

their

promulgation, from

sacred
to

scriptures

of

Buddha

re-transferred When,
a

Ceylon
the
arose

India.
kings had
not

however,
necessity

Magadha which

had

embraced
before

ne

faith,

existed

and

nd,
by
a

although
the time oppressions the early

they

shared

the

fate

of their into
not

scientific

works"

et

transfer

of the

former

different been
some

countries

when
of

the the

Buddhists
Brahmans,

had
we

subjected
means

to

he

have and

of

nowing

existence
the

of the
refinement advent.*
of of
a

Mdgaf^hi,
it
now

that

it
at

had
the

ready altime

attained

possesses,

Qotama
The

Buddha's
absence,

again,

literature language
of
a

is

not

proof

positive
as

the

non-existence
of
era,

tne

itself,

just

the the the

bsence

Sanskrit
is
no

Inscriptions evidence
The

data

anterior

to

uddhist

of

the

previous
moreover,

absence

of

anskrit
literary
or

language. records,
the

non-existence

of historical than the

no

testifies
of
a a

nothing
people, for

further
who

imbecitaste

ity,

apathy
or

had
or

for

iterary

pursuits,
This,
as

reg
was

ird

history,
case

historical
the At
early

proceeding Brah-

indeed,

the

with

ns,

well

as

the

early

Magadha
ond possessed

princes.
in

first
a

both

ad

common

interest,
was

conmion

ture litera-

which
common

inseparably both; and,

connected
therefore

with
was

their
no

religion

lso

to

there

inducement

raise times

monumental
were

erections, the
result

which
a

in
of the

comparatively
those
ties

ater

of

rupture
"

which
of
a

ad

formerly
faith

boimd
work
a

them
of

together
vain
kings,

consequence
to

"the of

wishing
and
to

proclaim

th

upremacy
of
a

particular

princedom, creed.
however

disseminate

the

enets

newly

embraced
fact,

The

most

important of
a

which

demonstrates
the

the
era

xistence

Mdgadhl
by
at

literature

before
itself,

Buddhist
{^

s that

furnished

the

language
above

viz."

high
This

state

(yaUvvatwn
it had
not

the
in

period
existence

mentioned.
a

proves For
must

hat

been have the

for
its

long

time
in
of
a

previously.

t could

attained
of time,

perfection

day.
the

It
slow

ave

been
of

work

the

result
A

ages,

progress
too,

innumerable

changes.

considerable

period

must

have

intervened

between

the
at

time

when it
was

it first
so

started

into

existence,
as

and induce
original
two

the Pali

period
scholars

which
to

much the

brat cele

to

designate

it

M'"la,

hhdsd,
There

'

the
are

language
theories of

'

current

with

regard
Pali. latter
as

to

the

comparat

antiquity
the from

the

Sanskrit

and
the

Some
a

regard

farmer
it ;

as

the

original, aflSrm
to

and
the

derivative
Pali
over

whilst and

others assign

superiority

of the

the
of

Sanskrit,
the
on

it
all

an

origin

before
and

the

language

Vedas.
the

But,

nearly
are

Brahman

European

ters wri-

subject,
which

agreed
generally

in

considering designated
and,

the
the

several

dia In-

dialects,
inferior
in

are

Prdkrita,
as

as

structure

to

the

Sanskrit,

therefore,

being

deduced
These
;

from
are

it.
questions

which which there prevails of

are

involved

in

doubt

and

obscu

and

upon

is still great
on

misapprehension. appears paying

"

The
to

uncertainty originate in

which the
to
a

the who,

subject,
without

to

me

minds
most

men,

cient suffi-

attention
of

important of
its

consideration
the

^the

history

Buddhism
to

and swayed
the

language,

Pali,

sufifer viz., the

their
superior

judgment
structure

be of

by

two

circumstances,

Sanskrit,

and

the

comparative

|intiquity

of

its Those

records.
who
so

assign upon
"

to

the

Sanskrit
that

superiority
the former

over

the
more

Pdli

do

the

grounds
than its ^whereas of
a

is the
to

finished"
be before

and

elaborate"
through
"

the

latter;
or

and

that

Pali
a

cannot

traced,

literature
the

religion,

period

Qotama
are

Vedas
anterior
as

and
date.
"

the

Mahk

Bhjkrata*
I

confessedly
to

much

readily and

accord

the

Sanskrit,
the

to

its

wonderful which
one

ture" struc-

"refinement,"
and it to

superiority,

of

its

ost

accomplished he

able
be
"

students,
'

Mr.

Colebrooke,
tongue, in the

assigns,
which classic

hen

declares

most

polished fixed

as

gradually

refined,

until

it

became

tings
have
I

of many flourished
also

elegant iu the

poets, the
century

most

of

whom

are

supposed CJhristian
to

preceding
of the
positive

the

admit

existence

evidence
it

ve

that
been

the known

Vedas,
before MagadhL

and

therefore

faith
his

proclaims*
religion

Gotama

established

by

of the But
these

admissions, ablest
pandits,

presume, viz., that

do
at

not
a

affect
very

the
remote
can

theory

of

of

our

period,
no

one

Prdfyrita
or

[* mother']
may
was

dialect,
now

which in tongue
at

longer in its
;

identified,

not

be

existence
of the present

ginal that
or

development,
the

the the

principal spoken
of

Arians
in

PdU
nor

{not
the
are

dialect

Ma-

dh

Behar,

Magadhi both

the
of

Indian

Grammarians),
same

the

Sanskrit,
stock.

branches

the

unknown

iginal In
the

investigation
to

of
to

this

it

^subject,
extent

may

not

be

un-

profit

notice,

the

of

our

limited principal

information

means,

(1)
(2)
the
;
men

the

subdivisions of

of the

Indian in
by

languages the

number

dialects

comprehended
of
that
term

rm

Pr"krita
literary
as

(3)
;

the

acceptation its
correct
;

nations

(4)

signification

(5)

the
to

con-

jectu
the

to

its

identification
its

(6)
of

its

relationship

nskrit Asia.
I.

and

(7)

high

state

cultivation

and

dedine

As

to

the

classification
passage

of

Indian in
the

languages,

we

have
or

following
it is

interesting called,

Dandialankdra^,

otherwise

RdbvyadarahcL tadvinmayan Prakritan

bhtiyas tatha
*

Tade

Sanskritan
Apabhran^a^cha

mi^ranche

Tyahuraptaschatur

vidham. daiviva
;

Sanskritan

nd"ma

GanvakhyS,ta

mahJtrshibih

"

Tad"va

Tauma""a

vidyat"

Lftssen

p.

83.

am

indebted

for

the

text

to

Sloha*

TadUiavaD
Tf an^kab

Tatsamaai

DeA

Prakritakramah.

Maharilshtiidiaykn
PrakriBhtam Siigarab
9"kti

bhasbJkm

Prikkritam
ratndknikm

viduh

Setubandhiuli Saurasenlcha

yanmayam.

Laftcha
jtpi tidri^ mityiva
;

"kyw"lkfaji"'ny Yiknti Prikrita

Vyavahikreshii

sanTiidhifn,
iArje

'AbhirJwii SbVapabbtansa

girah

itiamritah

Sastrefibu
lyapabbiaosa Sanskritam
Priilaitaiii

SanskriU

danya
"

tayoditam
"arga

bandbiuli

skbanda'

kidiyat

Oushari^-ny'apabhransQ
NUakk

ditu

midrakam.

Eatbiuli

sarvabbitoshkbib

Sanskiitenacba
Bbutik hlAsbk

baddbyate
mayim
pri^ur

Atbbtit Tbat
is to

iurtbam

Yribatkatblkm.
declare

say"*

Preceptors
of four

that

the

(above)
;

compositi

consist

kinds

(of language)
The
is named

Sanskrit,
gods,

Prkkrit,
which Prtkrit

Apabbransa,*
is defined is of

andMisra. by
great orders
sages,
;

speech

of the

Sanskrit.

The of
the

various

viz.

TadbAava
or

(bom
to

Sanskrit,)
krit),
and

Tatsami
De"i

(which

is
or

equal

similar The

the

Sanscurrent

(provincial
is
ocean

local).
as

language Prikrita"

in that that
:
mature
t

Maharisbtra
is which
an

known
to

the

principal

which
in
Tht

gems

of
"c.,

beautiful
ate

language,

and

Sfetubandha,t
saja-'

composed.
pm

The
and.

Commentator
of these with

pure

Sanskrit,

put

Prakrit,

Apabhrwisa.

the

Paisochi in the

Ac.'"
introduction
the
to

Professor

CoweU

his

PhJnit

FrakosB, h" dwlw

that
*tMa

this

states

Prakrit

poem'

knowledge

Dr.

of

which

nguages

of

Sauratsena^
the
are

La^
very

GowcEa,
name

and
of

such

like,*

are

under sually-f* treated ke the AbhiriLiJ:"a,

; butm

Pri^krita.
as

Dialects
in

(alone)
ail

reckoned hnguages

Apabhransa
the
are

etry

the that
are

Shdstr"U%
name.

besides which
;
aa?e

Sans* divided

it

receive

Oompositions Sanskrit
one

to

chapters,

in

the in

language body,

those in the

which Pritkrita
and

are

skandaka)
like
are

composed
the

entire
in the

ose

Aushra
in
in
a

are

Apabhransa; Historical
as

the

dmas
are

(mi^a)

mixed

dialect.

writings
in

composed
;

the

Sanskrit,
of

well

as

(other)
is

alects
be

but

the

VrihaJthatkA
speech division
of the of of
into

marvellous

import,

said

only
"

in

the
The the

demons.*

Obs.

(a)
upon

languages Brahman
four
;

iere

spoken

of,
and

is

ounded

authority
is
"

writers,

their

ages.

That

division
and

viz.,

Sanskrit,
certain languages
the the
are

Frkkrit,
meanings,

abhransa,

Mi^ra
are

epithets

whidi

have

and

which
are

descriptive
The
the

of the

difierent
is
'

for
of

ich

they
gods'
"

names.

Sanskrit language
the

language Brahmans,

that

is,

sacred
and

of

which

historical

writings,

Shastras

composed,

ving

subdivisions. Prakrit
or

The

is

various,
and

or,

in
is

other

words,
into first

has
three

several classes,

rders'

'dialects';
tatsamoy

divided The

iz.,

tadhhavay

aad

desi.
have

com^prehends
the
course

derivatives,"
have

those

which

q["rui^
mutations
to

from in
parent

Sanskrit
of time

hich

undergone
may

various

nd

which

yet

be

traced

the

stem.
are

The
tatsama
to

econd

includes
or,

'sister-dialects,'
'similar,' which
in
or

tliose
a

which

oo,-equal'
;
"

*bear

resemblance
connection
from

the
the be-

anskrit

and
7U)t

stand relation

in

fraternal
of
descent

with
it
"

anskrit

the

Thot

The

Commentator

understands

by

'

such

like,'

the

laoguag^es

of

Magadiri

(Pali)

ft
"

PandhtJa
*

(Zend.)
is
'

Usuallj'-^that
dialect

in

practice/
of

'"by

custom'

or

'usage.'
lowest
tribe.

AhfUri^^tL

of

herdsmen,

people

of

the

otteu

by
is
a

it ;

"

but

eprung tor,

from

the

same

shoot
or

with

it.

The'

hird

name

provincial
cannot

dialects,
be evidence
or,

non-Sanskrit
to
a

anguages,
or

"

^those
do
not

which exhibit
to
a

traced of
as

Sanskrit
to

rigin,
are

any
a

fraternity

it-

hey

disi,
'

peculiar
bom
in

country, and

the

Sinhalese local.
is in

eaXk

hem,

nipari
these

country,*

therefore
the
best
wrote,

Of

various

Priikrit
authority,

dialects, the

MahJUrltstri cultivated
which

the

estimation it
been
to
*

of
was,

my
at

dialects
is supposed
*
'

Perhaps, have

the

time

Dandi
century

to

in

the

twelfth

of the
"

christian dialect,

era

"

aii

cean

gems

of beaviiful
abounded expression, like
in

language^
in and the gems

^a

which, expressions

like
"

the

vast

profound'

of

lofty
as a

(that

is ; rich
by unlike
are

copious

language),

as

evidenced

works

S^tubandha
works,

"c.
are

Prakrit subdivided

sitions, compo-

the
only by

Sanskrit
in entire

which

into^

chapters,
Although

books. such languages

*

Prdkfita
; yet

as

the
of

above

are

alone

indicated

(says Dandi)
like

the

dialects
the

Saurasena
says

li"tsi, QowdsL, Mdgadhi

the
name

and and

such

(by
were

which

commentator
are

the
under

Panchdli

meant)
languages
;' such

usually

treated

very

name

of Prakrita!

The
*

of the

third
"

division
*

of

is
as

A Ipabhransa

or

the

ungrammatical'
"

jargon
herdsmen,

the

Abhiri

and

Chanddli
lower

dialects

used
for

by

and in
which,

by

persons

of the

orders.
to

;f

"

compositions

Dandi

refers

the

reader Mlsra
dialect

Oushra,
is the
name

of the
a

last

division
of merely

of

languages, other

"

that

which
"

contains
not
a

Mixture

all the

classes

language
passages
as

mixture languages

of

words,
with

but
the

entire

of

different

interlarded

Sanskrit

in

the

dramas. division
to

Another

of

languages, of the

as

stated

by

Dandi,

and

according

the

Shdstras

Brahmans,

is into

Sanskrit

"

See

Professor

H.

H.

Wilson's

Preface

to

the

Dasakamura

Cbarita

p.

4,

Apabhransa,

the

latter

including
are

all

dialects in

besides
all

the

skrit.

Historical comprised under

compositions

written

the

guages lan-

these
the

two

heads;

but
are

Vrihatkatko,
to

ne

(which
speech

abound
of
or

with

'marvellous')
by whom

be

found

in the

the the

demons,
aboriginal peopled
above

I of
Arian
are

understand
those
race.

barians,
were

inhabitants by
the

provinces

ch

afterwards

Oha.
the
his

"

(6.)

The

inferences by

which

forced
the

upon

us

phraseology

adopted authorize

i)awrfi
five become be

and

by

explanations
1st,
assum*

Conunentator,
the

important

conclusions,
or

taJthough diverse
a

PraJcrita
;

has
may
to

manifold,
as

has

forms
fraternal

yet

it

regarded
Sanskrit.

tatsama,

or,

as

ing

relation
which
to

the

That
or

the

cipal prin\i e

Prakrit
not

dialect,
pause ^is rich

(whether
is

rightly

wrongly
as

ll

here
"

consider)
in

generally and
there

regarded
copious
was as
a

the

arBstri
;

expression, originally have

guage lanPra*

3.

That many

although

but been under

one

ta

dialect,
of

tongues improperly
4

nevertheless

by the

the

agr"

Brahmans
of

comprehended
all dialects
'

appell

Prahrit;

That

except

the

Sanskrit
;*

by

them
the
m

designated Pali
be

Apahhranaa and
two

the

ungrammatical
of

That

(Mdgadhi)
as

the

language

Punjab
some

(Pancular parti-

itla)

"y

regarded
to

dialects

bearing

relation

each

other.-(which
;

IT.

The
are

dialects
many
writers.
fact

receive

the
to

designation
generally

of found

the
in

krita
dramatic

and The

they

are

be

Commentators,

Grammarians,

and
Prakrita,
to

This
I

last

aucoaats

for refer.

the

common

acoeptatioii

of

the

term

Bb"U

hereafter Wilson, still

or

Professor remark,

speaking
nearer

of
to

the

Pali,
and the

says

"It
have
and
in

is,

as

Messrs.
more

Buniouf
to

and
North

sen

Sanskrit,
part
cf

may

prevailed
ike

the
more

Behar,
to

in

the

npper dialect,
of

Doab,
of

Pu:^ab,
Delhi,
to

being
although

analogou

the

Saurasent
the

ihe
to

dialect
snch
an

Mathnra
as

and
not

not to

differi
those

from

dialect
and
his

Behar

extent

be

intelligible

whom

Sakya

successors

addressed

themBelves."-"-/o"rnai

of

th$

B"yal

hetoricians,
the

who

have

written

on

the

language with
to

contained

Hindu
of

plays the

variously
;

define
there

them,
seems

reference

he

patois

drama much

and
more

be

much

misappr

and
1
.

confusion

in Stenzler

their
in

classification.
hia preface

Monsieur Play
entitled

AdoJphus

Fredricus Mritcha
:

the
a

the
states

Katika,

after

quoting

from

Commentator Dialecti
non

Sanskritce,
aut

quoe

in

dramates Prkkritoe
Apabhransicoe

adhibentur,
dialecti
sunt

sunt

aut

Prafcrite Avanti, Cmdhli, The indebted

'

apoLbhransiccs. Mi^adhi. Dhakki/*

to

Sausunt

raseni,

Prachya,

dialecti

Sakixk,
2.
was

Sabari,

same

Commentator,
for
the

whom
states
:
"

Monsieur

Stenzlir

above,

also

Miigadhyavantiji^
D^kshin"tyacha
is
'

Prachyk

Saurasenyardha
sapta that

MJigadhi prakirtitith.'

BklikJl That

bh"sh^
there
are

It

is declared Mjigadhi, and

seven

dialects

Dramatic

works)

Avanti,

Prachy)^

Sauraseni,

Ar-

dha-MJigadh),
3.

Bahlikii,,
was
a

DakshinUyJl.t
current,

There

tradition
six

in the dialects

thirteenth which of
in
;

century,

that
name

there
of

were

only and
to
one

Indian the is
a

received

th

bhdehA;

hence who in
the

appellation
proficient

Shobd-bhdAA
six

pa/ra/m^eahvara,
These
are

languagesl
they
are
"

enumerated

RatnOrJcosha

and

Mr.

Colebrooke
as

oa

the

authority of Saoraaena,

of

KtUUka
another

Bhaiia
name

on

Menu
the

ii.
country of

19,
of

ideatifieo
Malhum*

Saunseni

the

langaaflre
or

fur the

ATahti
to

is

(h^jin,
the

as

the

Siogiilese
is the

call,
the

Udeni

and
on

laogasge
of India.

whieh

is sup pos

be

Ifatera.
or

Prtuehya
by
or

language

the
the
a

East

It is identified
Magadh.
the ancient

with

the

QowcH

Beng^dt Magadh

Gommentaior
It
is at is

on

Sahityadarpana.
of

is the guage
Sakuri, herds
note.
4

language
of
tha and
men

of
t

Behar.
original
been

present

eorrnption

la

country.

The
not

alone
;

preserved

in

Ceylon
to

and be

Burmah.

Sabari of
the

haTS
lowest

identified
; and

Candali

is supposed

the
;

dialect
see

tribes

Dhakki

is probably

Dhaktkutatya

nei

Ardka-Mtgadhi

is Prakrit

corrupt

dialect

of

the

P"li.

It

may by

be

identified

with
to

Magadhiof Hie
ed
on

the

Grammarians.
in the
"

Bhslika
a

ia supposed
country famous by

BIr.
its

Colebro"d[e
horses
and

langnage
the

oiBalkky

Trmntoxmuty
Dakshinatyo

for

sHuat
of

Korth

of

India

is identified

the

Commentator

'The

Sanskrit,

Prikrita,

Migadhi,

Sauraseni,

PaisacU,

and
4.

Apabransa.'
In

the

SelAlihini'Sandefia aCeylonese,
been
p*y The
so

the

philological
lived about
1415

acquireA.D.*^
him

entBof

Totagamuva,
to

who that
due

re

said

have
to

vast

Brahmans
to
a

visited

from

India

the
six

homage b^bsas
*
"

Shadbhaahdrparo'
he
was

Tneshvara.f
enumerated

with

which

acquainted

re

thus

The
and

Sanskrit, Apabhransa.'

Pili

(Mkgadhi),

Pri-

krit,
5.

Sauraseni,
Hemachandra,
in
as
an

Paiskchi,
a

Grammarian
century,

of the

Jaina
wrote

sect,
a

who

lourished

the

thirteenth

and the
also

Prdkrit
of

Grammar
Sanskrit
are

eighth

adhydya
enumerates

after

seven

adhydyaa
baskets;

his

Grammar:^
bhdsha

six

and

they

Prikrifc
the

(which
Magadhl,

Mr.

Cowell

calls

'principal

praknt')
the 6.

Sauraseni,

Paisachi,

Chulika

Paisach),

and

Apabranaa
Mr.
in
a

bhashsi.
gives

Colebrooke
work
a
*

the

following

translation for
the
use

of

pas-

8age"

on

Rhetoric
of

compiled

of
the

Mcm%work
are

kya

Ghcmdra
given short
:
"

king

Tirhat,

but

the PaisackC The

name

of

is

not

SaTiacrita,
paths
genii, tribes chief

Pracrita,
of poetry.

and
"c,
demons

Mdgadhi
speak

in

the

four

gods,

Soma*

erUa;
men

benevolent
of low the

PrdcHta;
and
of

wicked
rest,

Paiae^chi;
But
It is sages

and

the these

Mdgadht,
languages.

deem

Sanscrit
ways
;

four

used

three
*

in

prose,

verse,

and

in

mixture

of both.*
to

Language

again,

the
the

virtuous

have

declared

be

four
vul-

fold,

Sanscrita

(or

polished

dialect)

Prdcrita, Miara
jframed

(or the

gar

dialect) Apabhranaa
is the
;

(or jargon),
of the

and

(or mixed).
in grammatical

Sanacrita

speech

celestials,
to

institutes

Prdcrita
and
are

is similar
otherwise,

it, but

manifold

provincial

dialect

and in their

those

languages

which

are

ungrammatical

spoken

respective

districts.*

"

Sed See
See

my

Sidath

Saogara

Intr.

p.

clzxxviii.

Introdnctioii

tol'ttdav^'s by

Selalihini
;

Sandsa.
p.
xi.

Prakrit

Prakaaa

Cowell

Introduction

7.

Vararucbi
supposed others,
of

in
to

his

Ptdkrit
been

Pf(ikB,sa
the

gives

principal
enume*

Prkkrita, three

have

Maharastri,
and
a

and

rates

the

Sauraaeni,

MsgadlA
but

Paisvchi,
small

fo

the

elucidation his
work.
"

which

he

assigns

very

portion

of

Obs.

^From

the

above

authorities,
notices may
one

taken
on

in
the deduced.

connection

ivith

the

foregoing
important
was

historical
facts but

PkH

languag

several

be

First,

that

there
the
as a

originally
of

language since
has it became

which
*

recei

name

Prakrit,

and its attested

of

that
name

fold maniapplied

provincial
:

dialect/
this in is

been

to

other

tongues

and
go

by in
of

another

fact,
of

that

the

farther fewer

back
are

we

point

time

search authors

the

Prakrit.,
that

the

the

dialects
Vararuchi,

treated
the
treats

by

under
of

ame;

and
of

that

Prakrit of

Grammarian
one

the

times

Vikram^itya,
principua"

chiefly Professor

Praknt
From

dialect,
the
an
an"

the

'dialectus
too,

of

Lassen. of

ames,

given
it may works

to

the

Shad-bheLsha,
that
name

comparatively
varieties
are

cient

date,

be

inferred
the
a

the of in

many

givefti
"

in

modem

under
of

Prakrit

merely

the

subtle

refinements diflferent
some

later

age,"
"

order
in

to

distinguish
respective and that

the

fifty-six*

languages

spoken Miara
were
or

their
;

trict dis-

")f them

being
languages

mixed

philological viz

speaking have and

originally

three-fold,

those

which

been

designated

by These

the

epithets the
language Mr.

Sanshita,
of

Prdkrita,

Apahhransa.
above
"

in
upon

the

Brahman

Rhetorician
were

quoted speech 2nd,

a

Colebrooke's
fi-amed
to

authority,

1st,

the
;"

of
"

the

celestials

in the

Grammaticnl
;"

Institutes 3rd,
"

dialect

similar

last

and

language

ungammaticaL"

From

the

Sanskrit
of which

are

usually
the
a more

enumerated

fifty-six
the

dialects
and

as

kuuwn

in

Indi
of

lie

principal
;

are

Pali,

long

since

dead

sacred
an

tongae
dialect
;

the;
of

addliists
part of

tha

Magadht,
also
a

recent

form

of

Pali,

and

ancient

i'eat

of

Behar,

dead

language

; various

forms

of

Praknt
the

besides

nine-

enths

Hindi.

Bengali,

Maharatti,

Gujarati,

and

the

rest

of

fifty-hix

dialects"

The
the

first, it would

seem,

became
was

early

fixed, language

as

the

dialect the rude of

Vedas" -the
of

last

the
"

spoken the

of
the

origines

tb^

Dekhan

and

second,

speech

fferent

Arian
as

nations,

which
of the

underwent Sinhalese;
kings; the

different

mcdificd.of of th" and whom

;

ions

; such

the
coins

Pali
of

Bactrian-Pali*
the idiom

he

bilingual
;

the

Greek
of the
mass

ndavastd
;

f the
speech
in

dialect
of the

Nepal of the

Buddhists, people
with

the

ains

the
came

the
guage lanthe

reeks

contact

after

Alexander's
;

invasions the

the of

of
.

Asoka's

Inscriptions

and

Frakrita

ays

Although in which

the

original
count)

Prkkrit
ies;

has
yet

thus

undergone

different

hanges

different
at

it is clear
several

that
Pr"krit
any of
one

the

diMer-

es

first
were

distinguished
not

dialects
of them

om

each

other,

such
to
t he
reason

as

to

render
mass

ltogether
his
was,

unintelligible obviously,
Brahmans
the

great
why

the

people. "the
as

the is

Mllgadhi,
represented

eech

of the been

and

the

Aryas"!
to

ving

generally

intelligible

Gojbama's

varied

congre-

"

Several

inscriptions,
firom within

as

obtained
ancient

from

the

Topes

excavated,
were

or

as

forwarded
86

travellers
very
PaU

the
to

limits this very

of

Bactria,
also,

nearly
to

deciphered,
that
over

little remained
language,
or

perfect

discovery elosely
Jonmal
of the

and

estahlish

tba

iunt

somethiDg
Asiatic

resembling
vii. p. ix.

i^

prevailed

all

ose
f

coQntries"^Bengal
It
ia
a

Society's
the
in attention the
:

question
in ?

well
of

worthy
the
Max

learned,
extract

whether
if not

or

not

every

stated
the

respect Professor

Zend
Mnller remarks

foUowtng
"

equally

appUcabla
worka,

Pali
from

says

It

is

clear

from

his

(Bomouf's)
that

fiopp's and

vsloable
dictionary,

in
to

his

comparative than into

grammar,
-any

Zend

in

its

athmar

is
words

nearer

Sanskrit

other simply

Indo"Enropeaii
by

ngfiiage.
Zend words

Mnny
into
or

Zend

can

be

re^translated
in

Sanskrit

changing
differs

their

corresponding

forms

Sanskrit
the

Where

Sanskrit
of
same

grammatical

peouliaritles
coincides
with
for of

from

Korthem
mimerals

members
are

the in

Arian all thesa

to

ily,

it frequently
np
to

Zend.
thousand, the

The

the
is

guages
and

100.
occur

The

name

however,

(iahotm)
dialects

peculiar in
Zend,

Sasa" whera

t,

does

not

in

any

Indo*European facts
are

ex"iept

becomes

Aajranra

These

foil
tliitt
the

of historical

meaning;

and

with

ird

tOiSend

and
after

Saiiskn^"
they
were

tbeiy

pvoire

tbaae
common

twd

laAgaagea
Indo-Rapean

oootio""d

gether

long

separated

froil

itQio||*'""^

gtihtiQQi
books*

why
the

the

ancient

Translators that
to

of sevend

Sinhalese
they of
a

into render and

Fali
a

say,

by
both

such
the

tfansposition inhabittots

''would
island,

facility

this

of

other

lands

;'

and 5th

why

BuddhaghcMia,
preferred

consummate

Sanskrit
to

scholar
in

of the

century,

the

PdXi

the
III.

Sanskrit As And
to

translating
acceptation
men

the

Sinhalese
term

Atthiikathlt. Prdkrita ainongst

the

of the
"

nations
1.
'

literary

Mr.
most

Colebrooke,
common

according acceptation

to

forced
word
a

etymology,
is outeaeU it
or

s^ys
men

the

of this
to

of

the

lowest

dass

as

applied

language

signifies

vulgar,
i.
**

f
Cowell,
is the the
common

translator
name

of the given
in

Prdkrita
to

Prakdaa, various the

says

PAkrit

the
fiom

dialects corruption

which of the

sprang Sansknt,
'

up

in

early
as

times

India is used

and

the

word
to

by

grammarians,

i
the

signifies,
original
3.

derived,

thereby

denote

its connection

with

Sanskrit" Tke

J
upon

authority
from

whichtheaboveopinionsare
who

founded;
Prakritih
"

is

taken

Hemackandra,
tata

disfines

"

Sans^
'Pi-akrit
or

iritam

tatra-bhavam
source

dgatamvd^
and

ptdkfitam which
springs

has
from

its

in Sanskrit,

is that

comes

it.'
"

Obs,
tation

^Though
of

willing word

to

admit the

the

above

to

be

the

accept

this their
we

amongst

Brahmans

generally,
religion from

to

distinguish
dialects
caution,
;

so-called

heaven-derived
receive for
we

other

cannot,
even

however, distrust
themselves,
;

such

opinions
from and
''oonmion

without
writings

and

perceive

the

of

the

Brahmans
in this of

both that the

unwilling so-called

prejudiced
the

witnesses

respect^"

tation'" accepparticular

the

term,

does

not

accord

with

fectfl, and

opinions

expressed
to

by

learned thd^^

For,
;

if the if

Prikrit

''equal"

(or similar)
"
m

the

Sanskrit

and,

moreover

the

"''''''

bis

ii.

S.

rmer

"

is

an

p"^i^
it

to
can

gems it
"a

of lofty

expressions that the

"

;'* with

what,
is
av

stice

or

propriety
"

be

said

Prkkrit
or

ut-cast"

that
a

is

vulgar destitute the the the

dialect"
of grammar

that
?

it

is

apabhransa),
of the
of the

"jargon"

rison compathe
when with

Sanskrit

uith
\

Pali,
result

clearly
is not
axe

disproves
different

sertion

Sh^dstraa
passages

and
in

n
"

the

Prilkrit
of the

dramas

compared

e
4.

speech
Sir

gods."
Jones describes language the
of
to

William
more

Pr"krit
the the

in

the

plays melted
of
the

be

little by
a

than
distinct

the

Grahmans,

own

articulation,

softness

talian.*
5.

Professor
Dramas,

H.

H.

Wilson
by

from

the

testimony

contained
'

the

written

Kdlidasa,
the

and under

in

several the

finished
of

odem

imitations',

treats

Pali
he
''

designation
'three
are

rakrit
or

(under
less in

which

appellation and all

are

includes
the

varieties

ore

refined',)
all, and

adds

words
the
same

essentially
with and
Sanskrit,

the

same

essentially

the
than

difference
the

affecting

the

pronunciation

spelling,
to

rather

radical
and

structure,

and
a

tending
soft for
a

generally

shorten

the

words,
an

subtitute

hard,

and

slurred
6.

for

emphatic

articulition/'f
defines the
are

The

Eavya

daraha and

the

Sanskrit
to

to

be

'the

speech

of the of

devas,'
some

Prakrita
of the

consist
;

of and

several
some

dialects,

which

bom

Sanskrit
it ;

which

stand
native
or

iix equal
vernacular
aware

relationship
"

with
to

and

others

which

are

^peculiar
some

certain

countries. put
a

Oba.

"

am

that
this

writers}
:

have have

different

construction
mean

upon

authority
'

and

interpreted
of
a

it

to

that It

the is

Prakrits

are

composed
with
are

three-fold
deference, of
entiie

element'
the

however

submitted by Dandi
says,

much

that

differences
or,
as

noticed
commentator

differences

dialects^

the

entirely

'pure

dialects

"

Prefttce

to

SakantaU.

Hindu

Th"iitre

1.

\x\f,

and
context

not

differenoeQ
sets

of
at

words
rest
;

in

the

same

dialect
enumerates

The

this
or

for

the

writer of
the

'several
not

orders', words
to
"

the

'varions'
they
are

dialects
composed.
:

Triikiit,

i"D

the
But

of which

return

from

this
to
''

digression
meaning

7.
says

In

reference

the

of

the
that, in its

word
among

Prakrit,"
the
sense

Dr.

Stevenspn,
the

it may
term

be
is

observed taken language

sense,

Ma-

rathi

Brahmans,

often

widest
any
any

to

"signify
in

the

natu,ral

or

vernacular restricted

of
it
means

province

India.

In
dialects

more

of the

Ancient
most

of books

the

different
till lately the
the it

provinces,
to

and
written

which
in it,

as

of their

used
of

be

obtai

in the
8.
cent

South Sinhalese
and
be

India, give

appellation
name

Orontha,'^
Oiaviha
1
to

The

also

of

anci*

languages,
as

doubtless
seen

is identic

with

the of the

Indian

Prakrita

may

from

the

enumeration III.,

ficatio qualian
ex-

of
tract

King History
are"

Parakkramabahu given
says
:

1267,
Sangara

A.D.,

in

from

in

my

Sidath
Rig

p. clxix.
measured
nre

9.

"There

the these

Vedn,

"four

grades quainted.
grade

of language
Three speech

with

intelligent
make Dr. quoting
"

Brahmans
no

bc-

hidden
is uttered

in
by

secret
men'^

sign.

The

fourth
Sans*
and

of

Muir the

in
nbove,

his

krit

Texts

p.

163,

et

seq.,

after thus

its
two

comment^ sorts

which
of language
of

concludes
;

"

the

Br.ihmans and
are

speak
of
men

both
ancient

that

of

gods which

that

"

says^ the

"three
current

the

schools

quoted^ the
fourth spoken

assert

language

(vyavaharika
to

vak)
text^
as

to

be

kind
by

of speech

alluded
after

in

the

Yedic
a

being
that

men

;'' and,

expressing
''

conjecture,
that
a

this

was

the which

Sanskrit
author

(?) he

adds

"

It is true
cites,

in the

Brahmana
is

the

of the

Parisishfa that
and

remark

made

ed (connecttwo

with

what

precedes)
of the
as

the

Brahmans

speak and this

was

Ian*
seem

gtKl"g*8f Uiat

gods,
in later

that

of men
a

might drawn

to

prove

that,

times,

distinction

at

he

time

when

the

Brabn)aaa
of the

was

composed,
the

between
the

Sana^
language

it,

the

language
p.

gods,

and

Prakrit

men.**"

165.
the

Obs,
may

"

From
be
or

foregoing
that

facts,
an
"

deductions, "ancient,"

and

inferences

concluded
vernacular
to

"cultivated,''
to

natural

dialect," retain dialects,

the

similar
nume

the

Sanskrit"
along i^itb
under

as

continued

of
are

Prkkrit,

everal
jsiame

provincial
name.

which

usually

treated

the
IV

Like

all

the

above
primary
i

grounds

of

evidence,

the

testimo*

derivable is
;
us

from the

the
so-c

signification
"

of the acceptation"

word
of

pro-

rita

against

lied

common

.th^"t

ord

and
a

invests
name,

the
with
a

language, character higher

Professor

to

which
for

it

was

originally
and

iven

originality
the

inde.

endence
I
am

equal

to,

if not
that

than,

Sanskrit.
agrees

glad

to

find

Lassen
"somrce"

with

me

in

elieving

tho^tprakriti
;

is

the

from
that

whence
I
am

Prdi^

rita
to

is derived differ from

but

I
as

am

equally
to

sorry

ed constrainassigns
to

him

the

meaning

which

he

at

word.
the

In

his

InBtitvtianea
'"

Li/nguoB
:"

Prakriticoi vocabuli
unde
est

pp
a

learned
i.
e.

Professor

says

Notatio

.25, Prw
genor

riti,

procreatrix,
;
una

genetrix

natura,

PrdJffrita,
a

tus,

derivatus

derivatur
per
"a,
a

enim
quo

hae
sensu

linguae

Sanskiiticit prakriti
cu-

directo
linguae

aut

aliam,
qua
agaiam

dicitur
:

usvis

esse

deducitur

Prakritih

Sanahrir
Hemach
est
;
:

rn,

tdtra-bhivain
viiL

tata
*

vd,
origo in

Prdkritam.

p.

"

1.

Prakriti
ex

sive

Sanskrita
e"i,

in
s,

ea

ingua

ortumvel
est'
et

eaprpfectum

quod

id

prd,krita

desibi

vatum

Opponuntur PrdJcHta,
ut

praeterea
de

in

aliis qui

juncturis
quum

nskrita
vitae

hominibus,
sint,

justa pulsin
notet

ioris

institutione
dicuntur,
Pr
unde

imbuti
fit, ut

Sanskritici,
etiam etiam

minuA, homi-

likritici

prkkrita

vulgarent rusticae,

iikritic8e

igitur

linguae

sunt,

vul-

ares,

provinciales."

'

reatrix,
stated

genetrix by
"
"

uatura)
learned

nature',

the
"

former

cannot

mean,

the
the

Professor
or

derived,"
and,

but

its

very
to

pposite

radical,
orignal

the

root,"

when

applied

anguage,
*'

**

the

language

from
are

which

another

springs.''

hat

the

several
''

Prakrit

dialects
of

regarded'
either

[by

modem directly

Brahmans*]
mediately"
the
'

as

derivatives
nothing
more

the
;

Sanskrit
and
the
cannot,

signifies question
any

I
of

apprehend, the

ffect

than

dictum radical

Bud*

dhists,

that*

the
by

Pali

is

the
we

[rm^la
may
as a

bdsA]
scertain

language
correct
meaning

The

only

mode

which

the
Lassen primary,
the used.
sense

of

Prdkrita
by tracing

is, I submit,
the
sense,

Professor
r

himself

ha

done,

word
we

to

its

idical,

tion, significaof

in

which

may,

considering
was

usages

th

East,
By

reasonably any

believe

it

originally
the

other fail to which,

mode obtain in
the

of

determining
any

of
the

this

word

we

shall
sense,

information
usage

beyond
of
to

ry seconda-

arbitrary age,
is

the

modem
word"

Brahviz.,

mans

of the is
a
name

dramatic
for
"

assigned
rustic,

this

tha

it

vulgar,
acce

and

provincial word,
it into

forms
is indeed

speech."

The in
an

modem
inquiry
are

ptation
as

of this
language

i a

to

what

was

ab

initio

name

? Words

like

men.

They
original

grow forms.

various

shapes.

They
process
we
*'

gradually
of time,

lose
so

their
many

They body and

undergo
sense,

changes

both

in

th

cannot
common

ofben

determine
at

their
the

original present
old

meaning

by

the

acceptation^'
of
we

day.
Romans

If, for preserved of writing

instance,

desirous -writings,
volumen,
on

ascertaining referred
would give
or

how
to

the

the
the

the
us an

modem idea like

above

acceptation
'

term

it

merely
our

of books
another.

preserved

paper

folded,

bound

(volume)
But,

wi if

number

of distinct

leaves

one

"

*'

is in

the

period

with

which

we

are

now

concerned
Qnpta Kings,
forms

(uys
that

the

ajutie
names

write

^.,
krit

that
for

between the

Vikrmnuiditya

and
and

the

later

the

San

classical

langnage,

Prakrit

for

the

of

ced

the
that Romans

word it
meant
'

to

its
'

original

(prakriti)
'

sotiro""

we

should

folding/
their Suppose
as

roll*

"

^and,
*

therefore,

that
or

rolled
of in
ka
a

up

writings*
again,

as

scroll/
we

lik
were

he

folds

snake.'

for
the

instance,

aged

inquiry
we

to

whether
of

Kandians
same

and
;

the
we

itime in

Sinhalese
the
course

re

originally

the

stock

and

of
to

our

inveirtigations other,*
and from

furnished
by the

with
the

two

thets,

'opposed natives
were

each

which

time mari;

distinguished
'

Kandians
By
or

vi

he

high
of the
to

Sinhalese*
meanings

and

the

low

Sinhalese.' ignorance
we

the

tion adop-

which
among
some

either

prejudice
conclude

has

igned first
'

them
'

people, strictly
or

must
so

that

meant

the
'

Sinhalese
the
'

called* Brahmans

and

the nate desig-

ond,
the

the

low*

inferior,' vulgar.'

(as
But

the

Prakrita)
from"
the

the

nothing
of these
'

could
terms

be
as

more

tant
to

original

signification The first

meant

ap^

ed the

the

Sinhalese.
of
the the

those

who

occupied

Ai^/Ulands who inhabited

Kandian
flat

country,'

and maritime

the

second
ces.' provin-

ose

Uvth

of

the

In

considering,
claims their
of

therefore,
the

the
and

question
the

as

to

Ihe
we

comparative

Ptdkrita
not not
sense

SanahrUa,
sense

should which by words

'

j^nmary,

their
that

secondary, which
be it

--that

radically In
''

import,
a

has

been

assigned
those

e.

primary
to

also,
;

remarked,
conveying

opposed
and proof

each
*

other^'

Sanakrita
:

ment' adornwould
form
seem

Prdkrita of the

the

natural'

and

this
'

it

lso

PrAkrUa
in
a

being secondary
the

the

original'

of the

uage,

and

therefore,
expressions

sense,
'

(to
the

adopt

emptuous
'

of
'

Hindus)
idiom
to

uncultivated which the

ge.'

the

rustic,'

or

the

vulgar'
arisen

from

uage

of the

Brahmans

has

the

development

of

the

Sanskrity
I have

the

highly that

polished',
the

or

'

the

ciyiUzed.'*'
Pr"kfitt
by several

Already
was

shown prakriti.

word
is

from

whence

is

derived,
:
"

It

thus

defined

writers
1.

According
means

to

the

Amarakoaha
'

(see
*

pp.

32.

55)

kriti pra-

in

the

Sanskrit
it also
to

nature'

the

natural
r.

stat^.^

2.
".

Bopp

defines

be

naiara

kri

fiusere prcsf

Pr"t
3.

ti

"

Oloasanum
H.
H.
;

Sanseritum Wilson
'

p.

225:
to

Professor
the
cause

gives

it among

othw
the

significations,

following of the

Nature,
as

in

philosophy,
to

passive
or

or

material
;
"

world,
or

opposed

the

active

spiri*
radical

tual

^the natural
or

state,

condition
;
cause,

of

any origin,

thing
a

; a

form

predicament form
of
a

of word
pra

being

mother,
oases,

the

radical

before

the
'

affixes

forming
'

t"c

are

subjoined.
*

E.

implying

priority^

or

precedence/

kri
4.

to

make*
same

aff

tV
are

The

meanings

assigned

to

its kindred

sions expresp.

(paJcati)
in the
"

in

the

Pali,

(see Abhidanapadlpika
and which
is
state correct

11.

and

Sinhalese

(see Clough
that

the

Sidath

Sangara)^
or

Oba.

Prakriti
a

is therefore,

is natural,
"

thenawhich made.

ture

itself of
the

thing"

T-that which quiescent

that
"

pre-eminent

^that
'
"

is

natural
it

and dear

of any
and which

thing primary
was

not
sense

Hence

is

the

of

the

word
to

Prdkrita,
it,despite
'

^indeed the so-called

that
'common

originally
was

assigned
original,' first

acceptation,'-*Prilkrit
was

'

root/
meant

natural'
original,

By Indian

the

therefore,
distinguish-

at

the

language,

as

Colonel
to

Sykes,
the

after

allading

to

certain

doubts oottld
lia?ft

expressed

by
so

Professor

Wilson

how

descendants
in

f the
Plays,
the

Prakrits)
parent
tha
of

been

exqoisitely

refined

h*

found
he

them

the
was

if the

(the
age
of

SanskrU)
the

was

oomparatiTely

tndt^
the

whioh

believes
"

fact

before

jclassical

langt^ge doubts
say^the
p"rfeei

of

Hindis
to
com

literature,
the

says;

simple

solution

Professor

Wilson's
I shall
of rather

would

be

aider

Sanskrit

e"lanatiflg
whieh
has

from

the

Pali,
the

[?

oiia original
firom
At

Frokrii

Isnguage
the

assumed
tha
rude,

form

Pali]"-tha
fromtha

tha

imperfiaet,

polished

from

and

th^
with

exproaalfa

simple; /mctmU

least

such

is the

natural

progress

oilaogoages

growing

Boi/ak

from

the

Apabransa

'the
*

ungraramatical/
*

a;nd

the

skrit,
*

signifying
done'=
that
* *

[from
altogether'

mm

altogether'
or'

or

together/
done,
by

and
or

ta

completely
composed
or

made, formed
or

rmed*]

which

has

been

art

rned,

embellished, inflected
then
to
was

purified,
as

highly

cultivated

polished,

regularly

language/ original
V*
It

V.
*'

What
similar

this
Sanskrit

Prdkrit
would
of
the

language
be in vain
; for

Which
to

the

look
an

it in

any

of the
fact

living

languages
that

world

it is
*

ablished of

in

philology
without

all
the

languages
introduction
I

change
of

in

se

time,

even

foreign

ements.

It of
to

can

only earliest spoken.

be

discovered, writings
of

presume,

by

the

amination

the
be

those

languages

which

ve Let

ceased
us

first
precepts

examine of

the the

dramatic

di"locts with
and

reference

the
1.

Qrammarians
by

Commentators. and
others

It

has

been

found
these

Professor

Lassen

who
that,

ve

examined
great the still
a

writings,
for the

(says
errors

Mr.
of

Stenzler) f
ignorant

king

allowances

copjrists,

unauthorized

alterations
in

of

learned
the

transcribers,
of

there
marians gram-

difficulty
with the

reconciling of
the

doctrines

the

language

dramas.

2.

Much

discrepancy'

says

Mr.
and

Cowell
that

exists
we

between

he

Prkkrit

of the

grammarians,

which

find

in

he
3.

plays.' Professor
the

Wilson,
of the forms, the
term

who dramas,

was

intimately
from
his

acquainted
translated
grammarians
the spoken

ith

lan^^uage
that

having by
with may

hem,
to
a

says

Prkkrit,
only

applied in
naTne
name

variety
'

of

agrees

dialects.'

The which

MdgadJii
is
more

by

which

be

considered
by Prdkrit,
or

that

dialect
very

ordinarily

understood language of

is

different

from

the

vemactdar

Magadh

SubodhalankarH
See bia

oa

Rhetoric,
the

to

MritchakfttiJka.

Bebar.

The
of

Saui'oaem
Mathura, and
avail of

is

by

no

means

the
and
the

same

with

the

dialect

Vrindavan, in

Makarashtri
the species with
*

would

be
or

of

little

communicating The
.

with
other

Maha-

rattas,

people
are

Maharastra. inapplicable
might be

enumera

equally
they

for supposed
are

identification
to to

th

dialects
4.
*

to

which

refer/
be

Highly
are

finished

specimens

found

in

plays

which

modem
consists

productions.
more

The
than

Vedagdha
of high
"

Madhura, Prakrit, ib.

for whose
by
age
wrote

for
was

instance,
written
"

half

and

it

less

than

three

centuries
may

ago/

Oba,

^This

discrepancy
The
at

be

accounted
writers,

th

following
by
great

conjecture.
Professor bulk
of

dramatic
400"100

fixed

Lassen their

B.

C
,

and,

who

the

plays

in

Sanskrit,
the affinity
for

were

eminent

krit Sans-

Scholars.
even

They
did

indeed
not,

studied the

Prakrit
of
a

languages

and,

if they they

from
no

the

Prakrits
of

the

Sanskrit,
by

found

difficulty
several
to
"

display
existing original choice

their Indian

learning

improvii^

upon
so,

then the employ

dialects.

In

doing
it
was

according
to

aphorism

of

Bhdrata,

necessary
Hud
an

and
style,
xytl.m." best

harmoni

terms,

elevated
of

and

polished and the*

some

embell

with
be

the

ornaments

Ehetoric

ay

then

believed they
were

that

they
;

imitated
that for

writers
gave

ith

whom
to

acquainted
as

authors and
others
the
same

reference
others authors in

some

writers
that
some

models

imitation,

others

and
for

selected
;
"

old,
perhaps,

and

mod-

tn

their plays

guide

whilst, the
'

ter wri-

different

adopted
Hence

language exceeding
its

of

both

ancient
of the

nd

modern
in

books.
some

the
and
same

richness'

Prakrita

of

th^

plays, the
same

comparative

inferiority exhibited

otherft,"
works
the

and,
of
one

perhaps,
and
the

differences
pers(Hi.

he

The
whom

Grammarians,
we

other

hand,

especially

Vararuchi,

regard,

cording

to

Hindu

traditions,
and
were

as

one

of
a

the

'

nine
of

gems* tively comparaThe

kramaiditya's
after times

Court,
;*

therefore led
by

writer lights.

different the

Pritk-

passages
them whole that
a

scattered
sufficient
extent
one

throughout
means

Hindu
an

dramas, acquaintance

did

not

ord

to

obtain

with

of
dramatic

those

languages.
writer

They
one

found,
of

probably

made

class put

persona into
even

ak

particular of
other
name

dialect,

when thus

another
rendering used. It for,
it

that

the
to

th
a

clas33s"
to

difficult probablfe

ign

the

dialects in

is

also

that

Grammarians
traces
as

sought

India

and
which

haviug

fouud

bui
represented

of,
a

th6

principal
which
as

Prakrit,
"

tradition
in
gems

language

abounded stated
in the
took

of

lofty
"

ressions,"
most

and
excellent

wiiich,
form of
a

Pr^kiritadipikJt, for their guide

ig
a

of

speech"

existing
was

dialect
probably
of

Maharastra.

This

Tnolification
it
a

of
seem

the

Pali.

For,

from

account

Fa

Hiam,
from the

would
very

that period
early

Buddhisn*
;

had
consequently,

urished

in

Mvutra language,

early been having

not

and,

its
that

Pali

had its

introduced amalgamated fixed

as
a

to in-

country.

Yet,

from

been

other

Prakrit
as
was

dialects,
the
great
case

and
with

become
in

dead

o-uatye, presents

Pali

Ceylon,

the

Maharashthe

many

corruptions,

of which

Pili

is-

free. following comparative Prakisa,

paratively

The

Table
will

of

the

first this

thirty
manifiesL
*

words

in

raruchi's

PrJJkrit

render

riddhi

samiddhi pakata

samiddhi
paac?am
*

prosperity*

kata

manifest"
'family'
*

hijJ^ti
"

abhijati
\

ahijki
manansinl pkdivak
*

vini

manassini pktipada
sarikkha

wise

woman*^

tipad

Istdayl^moa
*

rikksha

sarichchham

like'

Having

once

identified
nearest

the
to

principal

Prttkrit,
dialect
of

with
the

that

ich

approached

it,

viz.

Maha-

ttas,

diflferent
greatly

from

the.

language

which,
also

like
from

the the

Pali,

was

admired,
in
to

and

different
the

language

prevailing
but in
use

that

country, for the

too,

Grammarians
in different the

had
speech from

no

terna almen

seek

M^gadhi
was

of

ving
in

Magadha.
there,

This and
also which

that
the

which

greatly
was

at

variance

with

original

lkgadhi
the

(the

Pali)

only the

preserved

in

Ceylon.
and
the the

nce

discrepancy
"

between
also
the

Grammarians
between

amatists and

hence

difference

lon Cey-

^and Indian

writers it
as

in

respect

of

Magadhi

"

^the
text

lese Sinhabooks

treating

the

Pdli

(or the
an

language
retreat
a

of the
in

Buddhism)
Brahmans
greatly

which

found

early

Ceylon,
of the

and
same

identifying

it from

with
its

modificatior

alect It

deflected
seem

original

constniction.

would dialect,
in

also

from originally of time,

the

foregoing
the
a

observations
name

that

he

which
course

received undergone dramas,

of

the
in
us

Pro-

crit, has
that

vast

change furnish
with any is
a

India, with known

nd

the

patois

of the
for the

does

not

ufficient

materials

its

identification
of the

ialect.
of the

Probably PAk;
and
is

Prakrit
very

Plays
that the

tion modifica-

it is
a

probable

principal of the both

have for

Frd-

it
the

of

Vararuchi

still greater
w e

modification
sure

Prakrit
many nality origi-

plays.
of

But

of this
and

may

be both

"that
less claims

aces

corruption,

that my

have

than

the

Pali.

[See
which

comparative
may of
to

Tables
attention

infra.]
here,

Another

language Odthd
the

demand
the its

is

so-called

dialect
as

Nepal
origin,

Buddhists.

A given
what

lution

of

difficulty
the
to

will
to

be

reafter. gather

In
as

meantime its style,

it
from

is

sufficient
the writings

notice of
a

ed learnthe
tures Scripis in

Hindu

gentleman*

and of Nepal, and

of

M.
from

Burnouf,
which
have

viz.

*that

ddhist
of

literature

the
been

Sacred
compiled,

Tibet,

Tartary,

China

"

Ani"U

by

Baba

B"}"Bdralal

Mittra

Esq.,

in

Um

Bengal

R.

A.

S. Josrnal

lor

an

ugly
gramm

Sanskrit
itical

dialect, forms
have
a

destitute
of

of

the

niceties

of

the

krit Sans"c.

declension grammar
of
to

and
to

conjugation,
the and
exigencies

that
metre

the
;

authors
that
a

sacrificed

it is in

mixed

style

prose

OAthaa
of that

that

it
to

bears

strong

resemblance
of
the

the
era
"

Tantras ^and

the

4th

the
be

7th
the

Century
production without

Christian
to

it appears

to
was

of

men

whom

the

task
at

of compilation

assigned
view
of

sujfficient

materials
Buruouf
'

their
has

disposal.

In the

these

peculiarities, scriptures
of

Mons.
to

pronounced

Nepal
the
to

sacred
forms be

be

barbarous

Sanskrit,
and

which appear These the the

all

aged,

Sanskrita,

Pali,

Prakrita

confounded/*
establish its

peculiarities
of the

inferiority

to
were

the

Pali

and

dialect third
to

Pillar
of the of

Inscriptions
christian

(which
era,)
being in

recorded
rior poste-

century

decidedly
search

the

language
ne^t

Gotama,
myself
came

I shall,
to

of

this
a

origina

Prah^ty language of

betake which

the from

Ceylon
Magadha,

Pali,

dead

antiquity,
in

and Buddhis-

has

been

preserved
era.

Ceylon

from
with

the

time

almost

of the
remote

tical

Its only

identity

the by of

Mdgadlil
the history
terms

of
of

ty, antiqui-

is

not

established
use

Buddhism,
and given,

and Magadh
of

by

the

promiscuous
;

the
the

Pali
above
p. in

in

Ceylon

but
of

also the

from

extract ante

the

enumeration

shidbhashA,
state

Ixxxiii.

Its
are

great

antiquity, from

and
a

high

of cultivation

Ceylon,

made

to

appear It

variety
a

of

circumstances.
fact that
of

is indeed have

remarkable

all
study

oriental

scholars,
to

who

made
though

Pali

the

subject

according
they have

the
out

different,
this the

imperfect,

opportunities
to

had

of

island, Pali,

have
which

not

failed

perceive

something
from

peculiar

in

distinguishes

it

every

variety

of

Sanskrit-idioms.
1.

Professor p

Benfey 194,

in

his

Frach the

and

Chrvher'a
'

Oerman
sacred Ian-

Encyclopcedia

characterises

Pali

as

the

uflge

of

the India,

Buddhist

writings

found
is

in shown the

Ceylon
both
vernacular

and
by

Transinternal

angetic

which
to

external central

indications,
India, and

have
was

been

dialect

which the
countries

diffused ahnve-namedi

alortfj where

with
it

the
soort

ddhist

religion
the
same

in

quired

sacredneas

in
and

the

eyes

of

the
for

Bud
the

Ihists

ich

Sanskrit
This
yet
of

possessed,
language,' he of

still possesses,

l^rah-

s.

continues the

(' though
is
one

distinct
of

proof
very

nnot

be

adduced

assertion,)
and
was

the

dest
at

tho

Indian
of

vernaculars, the rise

already

in

popular

the Dr.

period
Muir little

of
the

Buddhism/
list
"

2.

after

citing what

authority, province in
we

states.

But the
some

matters
to

in

particular
whether

suppose
or

li

have further

originated,
to

Magadha,
the

in

untry

the

westward
it represents

as

fact of the

remains

in

any

indubitable, of
"

that

one

oldest p.

Tr.ikatic

alects

northern here
it

Indin." remark

"

Sanskrit in
passing,

Texts
that

79.
if the

Obs.

T may
as

Pali
;

represe

undoubtedly
Maharashtri
"

does, dialect
the
root

the
is,
as

oldest
st

FYiikrit by the

and,

over,

if the

ited

writer

Prakrita-kalpataru,
those
not

of
any

the

other

[ Prakrits]
or

;**

e.

of been

which
lost

the
in

Indians
India found
;
"

had the

knowledge,

which that is the But few Pali

inference
retreat

is inevitable in

Pali, of

which

had

an

early

Ceylon,

ent

all
:

Prakrits,

including and have of

the who

Maharashtri.
had

proceed
within
nearest

M.

M.

Bumouf reach,

Lassen,
not

but
to

ks

their

however,
to

failed
Sanskrit. them
in

perceive
Though the

relationship

the

Pali differ

the from

reluctantly,
the

but

respectfully, is immediately those

belief
;

former
which
or

derived
writers

from

the
are

latter
not

yet

facts

learned

record,

without

ortance
3.
'

value. the

When
le

Pali, p.

[say
as

those
a

learned

writers

in

their
is

ai

sur

Pali,

138]

derivative

from

Sanskrit,

found
to

to

approach
common

far
source.

more

closely It
stands,

than
so

any
to

of

those
on.

hers

that

speak,

th

fst

step of

of
the

the

ladder of

of

departure

torn

Sanskrit,
up

and

is th

irst

series

dialects

which

break

that

rich

and

rtile
4.

language.'

Dr.
the

Muir,

after
and
it

subjecting
Prakrit,

the concludes

Pali

to

comparison
*

th

Sanskrit

by the
more

saying,

from

his

comparison
to

will
and of

result
represents

that
a

Pali ancient
than is

stands

arer

the

Sanskrit,

phase

the

vernacular
in the

speech
'

Northern

India

exhi bite

Prakrit
'

And

he

adds
in

It

has
is

been
more

demonstrated
ancient

at

length

that

(the

P^li),
than

its

turn,

in

its less

grammatical
widely

orms

the the

Prakrits

are,

and
"

departs

than

hey

do

from

Sanskrit.'
that

p.
entire

1 37.
sentences

I may

hIso
whole

remark

may
in, the

be

given wherein

nd

that
eveiy

passages
every
most

may

be

composed form,

Pali

word,

grammatical closely Brahmans.

Kavya,
the

and with

every
even

cal philologithe
extracts,

development
idiom from
of the

socords
The

SanS"

ritized

of
the kind,

the

following

xample,

Bhatti

which above

abounds
statement.

with

mens speci

authorize
ramane

Charu

samirana

Harinarkalanka
Abaddha Veli
'

kiran"vali
Ukma

saviMs"

mohk

mile

vibhavari

parihink"
with
masses

p.
of

77.
moon-beams,
was

Tiie

evening,

radiant
RkixA
which gentle

a
on

which

filled
of

(bound)
the

with
was

affliction, rendered

spent

confines

shore

delightful

by

rea son

of the

(sweet)

breeze.* tiran

Gantum

Lank^
mahli

Baddlia
Taruharin^

salila giri

sancharena

sahelan

j^lan

Let

the
convey

monkeys,
the
to

able

to

sustain
rocky

the

weight
so

of that
we

moun-

inSy
one

heavy-bodied the

chain,
on
a

may

line, get
vast

shores

of La^ii,

bridge

constructed

the
To

profound.'
facts,

the

above
of
the

all which
question,

are
as

important
to

in

the

consideration

general I shall
notice

the

relationship
of eminent Pali
from
the

(tf the

ali

to

Sanskrit, who
is

add
the
to

the

testimony

tal Orienevery
ancient

scholars, which
;
"

difference
have

of the

ialect

supposed difference

arisen

from

agadhl
1.
''

^its
the

From

dialect

of the

rook
that

inscriptions
some

;*

Now

it is curious

enough
are

of the
as
are

distinguishing pointed
the
out

raits

of the Grammarians

pillar

diMect
of
a

just
as

such

by

he

later day
Pali."

con"titutii^
^'The

differences

etween

Magadhi
adds idiom and the
are'

and
in
:

[same]

language/
from

r.

Prinsep written

another
it is
as

paperf
it
were

'^differs

esfientially

very

intermediate

between

he 2.
'

Sanskrit

Pali*' Buddhist
writings Bumouf,
"

From

of Nipal intermediate

They

says

M.
and
to

between

the
and

egidar

Sanskrit,
posterior

Pali
the

"

dialect

entirely

derived,

anifestly

Saujskrit.

3.
'

From

the

Prakrit
do
not
nearest

dialects;
represent
to

The

Prakrits
which
stands

the

derivative
;

form
we
are

of in

peech

the

Sanskrit

and

position
to

to] point
the
latter

out

dialect

which

approaches

yet the

more or

losely

than of the in

the

PnUcrits

do.
a

mean

Pali, whidi books

acred

language
in India,

Buddhists;
which
numerous

language

is

xtinct

but

canonical
Burmah and

of

he

Buddha written.'

religion,

still

extant

in

Ceylon

"
se^n

'

We

have
these

(p. 72) that

the inscriptions

the
;

Pali end
vol,

has
vke

some

grammatical
Mulr,

forms p.

which
137,

u%

l4erthaB
^

of

""r"a.'"*Dr,

Benipd
L'

A^siatio

Societ"'s
Rnddhisme

Jonroal,

vi, p.

567,

Histoixe

dn

Xadien

105,

4.

From
are

the
written
;

Magadhi

dialect

in

which

the

works

of

the

Jains
'

On

comparing sacred
books

the of

Mahawanso the

(says
with

Dr.
the

Stevenson)
Jain
two

one

of

th^

Ceylonese

writings,

I find

considerable

dissimilarity
much having
nearer

between
to

the
the

dialects
of the

the

Pali

approaching

standard the

general

Prkkrit,

and

few, the
*

if any,

of

peculiarities
them

of by

the

M^gadhl
means

dialect,

while degree/

Jain

works

exhibit

no

in From

slight

5.
'

the says

present
a

language
in

of Magadha the the of

or

Behar

The

Pali'

writer
known

Asiatic
name

Journal, M"gadhi,
or

xviii.
was

p.

764f, *being
with

generally the

by

compared

modem
that

dialect they

Magadh

Behar,

and In

the

";omparison in
or

shews

essentially

differ.
it

those the

respects

which
the from sacred the

it differs language

from
of

the

Pali,

approaches

Prakrit

the

Jains.* Indian
grammarians
:
"

6.
The

And

Mkgadhi

of
view the

the
of

following
by Vararuohi

comparative
under

the of

Pali,

with wiU

the

rules

given

head

ftJkgadhi,

render

their

difference
The is

evident.

(i.)
Pali

first
no

rule

of It has

Vararuchi
only
the

is Sha
dental

soh

sah.

In

the
The

there

S.
of the

sibilant in the

S.

inapplicability
of

rule

which Mdgadhi^

states
*

that is

peculiar
for

Prkkrit

"dialect

termed

-substituted

sh

or

S,' is therefore,

self-evident.
The occasional

(ii.)
more a

Jo

VAH.

substitution
than of

of

for
or

is

no

peculiarity
e.
'

of the

Pali

the

Sanskrit
y^ma
in
or

lese Sinha-

g. yiLmi/nl
night.'

"rjdminl
usual yviUan
the rule,

in

Sanskrit,
is

jama
the

hale Sin-

The

Pali
*

nija
in

written

Suttans
these But

with
are

y,

as

niyan
not

own

son.'

Instances
two

like

exceptions,
in

those by

languages.
nor

neither
great

the

instance of

given
words

Vararuchi, with
of
a

in
changed given

the

majority
a

Sanskrit
Pali.
The

j,

is
is

it

into

J/

in

the

reverse

what

by

araruchi
is

may

be
is

regai-ded
the
same

as

the in

rule.

Thus,
and

jdyate
is and
not

he

bom/
into

the

Pali,
is

hanged
*

ydyade.
;

So
is

Kkewise,
but
not

raja
'

raja,

not

^Aya

king'
but

gaja
vayara
the

gaja
*

gaya It is true

elephant

/ vajra
in words
not

is

vajira,

not

diamond/

that and

like

aryibshaTia,
as

Pili
common

form

is payyijisana, Prakrit. This

a

pajjauin
to

a/fia,

in

the does

peculiarity
from

the

ali,

however,
the The
:

not

indicate
of

change

y.

It

simply

reduplication
next
seems

y.
tathoch-

(iii.)

rule,
to

chvargasyasprishtata

HaRanaH

refer
we

to

nicety
not

in

the

pronunciation in the

of and

he

palatal

letters,

which
to

do
;

perceive

Pali;

herefore

proceed

the

next

(iv.) HridaYasya
the

Hadakkah.
*

This
never

is equally becomes
'

inapplicable

Pali.
in
;

Hridaya So hri
'

heart*

hadakka,
is not

but

adaya,
rassa

Pali.
and

likewise shame'
tyah.

hriava
is not The

short*

hadaava,

ut

hida

but

hiri.
here

(v.)
for

Eyarjayor

substitution
as

spoken,

of that

yy

ry
rare

and

rj
'

may

be

regarded rather

the the

exception
rule in

(and
the
;

of very

occurrence)
to

than

Pali*
and Pali.

Thus

kdryan
*

be

done,'

is not

kayye

but

kd/riyan
in the

durjana likewise

wicked'
'

is not

duyyana, becomes

but

dujjana,
;

So

virya

exertion'

viriya

bharyai,
also

hhariy^
garja/na,

'wife';

aiavarya,
*

issariya
noise'.
SKAH.
'

'prosperity';

and

becomes

gajjana
KSHASYA

(vi.)

This does
clever'

is again
not

diflferent
hxskaae

in the but

Pali.

Thus

rdkshaaah
;
nor

demon'
'

become but
in

raklikewise,

khaso

dakshah
'

daske,

dakkho.
the
*

So
;
;

vriksha
'

tree'
;

becomes

rukkha

Pali
south'

kshama
kshit/ra
will

kama

forgiveness'
razor'

dakshiTia,
khetta
another
'

dakkhina
field'.
of
our

khura
found

'

kshetra,
in

This

peculiarity

be

explained
x.

part

observations,

vide

infra, "

(vii.)

AsmAlDAS
*

SAU

HAKE

HAGE

AHAKB.

The

Sanskrit
;

ahah

bhammi

I speak',

is the

same

in

the

Pali

and

does

(viiL)
eehah
and
8U

Ata

nxETAu

LUK"HA.

The
in
;

Sanskrit
the

etad

(root
eea^

(nom
being
the
a

:)
in

is said

to to

be

dbADged

MdgadM
latter This

into affix
is not

added esA Pcdi,

is

it=e0d-"u

and
i,
or

the
e"

being
a

elided, culiarity
""a

is changed
in

into
eta

pe-

of the

which

(root
in

tso^^nom

:)

becomes
-

rq/a
as

(which
the

eaha

rdjd
becomes

Sana
2aa

not

in

so-called Sanskrit,

MJtgadhi

"ai
eao

;) this (1 !) and ;
in
*

'

king',

and

similarly

eaha
not,

puruahahy
as

pwiao

the
man.'

Pali,

but

in

the
Etantad
as

Frltkrlt
uscha

Magadhi,
:

eaA

puUae
is

this
by

(ix.)
into

which
is

rendered

Dr.
the
also

Cowell affix
s^

English
a

follows ending

substituted
affix
we

when
;

follows
infer
^ or

word
the

with
the

the

kla

and

(as
use

we

from
e

cha

of

S'dt:)
Siit,
or

may

optionally the affix

;

the

of the

preceding

even

elide
'

as

hasi-

du

or

hasidi,
to

hande,
state

hasida,
here

for

basitah
the Pali
is

smiling.'
knows
no

It is only

sufficient and that

that

such

thing,

the

Sanskrit

haaitah

in

the

f("iner

simply

liaaito,

(x.)
is

Naso

ho

va

dibqhatwamoha

That of the vowel

is to

say

*ha

optionally

substituted
at

for
time

VAXSy

the

affix

genitive
is

gula sin-

and
as
*

the

same

the

preceding
for

ened, length-

puZiadha

or

puliaaaaa
The

dhane
form inflexion

puruahaaya
is

dhanam

the

man's-wealth.' wherein
the
reason

Pali

of this
aya

puriaaaaa
taa,

dha-

nam

Sanskrit
that
the

assumes

for

the

simple

Pali
It

dislikes
is

the

union

of two

consonant

of different

classes. Prikkrit-Migadhi
and

further becomes

remaikable

here

that

dliane
in
n

of
the

the

dhanam
moreover

(neuter)
the

both
"^rebral

Sanskrit
used.

Pali,

in

which

is not

(xi.)
the

Abibohas
given

Sambuddhau.

It is to
this

be in
in

inferred
the

from

examples dialect

under
vocative

rule

that
a

Prakrit
singular nation termishort.

Magadhi
and plural

the

inflexion
In
the

both

the

number

is long.

Pali, be
;
as

however,

the

of the

vocative

aiTigular
p.

may

^either

long

or

(See

Clough!a

Bdldvatitra

19,)

puriaa

dgadhchha

(xii.)
the

Chitthasta
from

chishthah.

In

shewing
it is

the
here

difference
sufficient

PaK
to

the
the

Prakrit-Magadhi,

ly

exhibit

Pali

forms

of
*
"

the

given

examples.

Puruakah JPuriao
Puliae Krinmbingamam the difference
than their by

tiahiJiati titUtati chishihadi

"

Sanskrit.

Pali.
"

Mag

Prakrit
Here from again
the
we
can^

(xiii.)
exhibit

Ktasya
of placing forms.
'

dah.

the

Pili given

MAgadhl
in

rit

better^
with

the

examples

positi juxta-

Pali mritah
mato

Kritah
Kato

'done'
"

dead*
"

gatah
gato.

gone.*

Sans.
Pali

Kade

"

made
The

"

gade.
comparative

Mag-PraJc.
view
of the

(xiv.)

Ktvodanih^
given

following
rule, shews
nearer

mples
to

under Sanskrit

this
to

the

relationship
than that

of the

the

be

far

of

the

rit-M"gadhi.

Sodvdgatahf
Sahitvd
8ahid"ni
gato
"

San.

'^kritvdgatahX
katvdgato

Pali oade. Prak

The
the
of

gade

"

karidsmi
sialasialssialakah.

M. difference
is,
r

(xv.)

Sbigalasya
the

een

Sanskrit
by

Srigkla the

and

Pali
the

sigala
Sanskrit

simply
in

occasioned
language.

absence

the

er

But
that

Vararuchi
word

gives

the
in

three

following

into nidld,

which

is

changed

Magadhi-Prkkrit

siskk,
From
it

si^aJce.
the above, be and
many
a

06"."

fact

in
are

the few

history
traces

of

hism,
genuine

may

inferred
in
the

that existing

there

of that

Prikrit Prakrit,
of

Indian

dialects
to

principal
corruption

which the latter

distantly
;

approaches
the

the

Pali^

that
the

patois

of

the

dramas subse-

an

exhibition

of

it ; and

that

Grammarians,

who

ently
not

framed
the

rules Pali,

for

the

formation
had been

of

this

corrupt the It may

idioih Magadha also mixed

;

which

banished religion.

untry

along

with

the
in

Buddhist
very
as

ence

inferredthat with
pure

early
in

times

the
Nepal

Pali

became

Sanskrit,
the
to

the

version and

that
at

xt

assumed reduced resembles in

a

form
the the early

of the
M^gadhi

pillar
of
of

dialect,
the the of

that

last

Jains,
grammarians.

^hich

di ta

dialect
period
to

Buddhis doubtless,
soon

very

its
; where,

history,
having
to
to

ought
a

the
dead the

Pali

language
its

Ceylon
was

co be

language,
homage

use

confined paid
it
to

the

priesthood;
as

nd

from
of

the of

Ceylonese
religion,

it

the
in
a

gu la

the

founder
by

their

remained
as

sland

unaffected
it
was

those

changes
in

which,
in

spoken

anguage,

subjected

its

migrations
which

India. be
still
Indian
to

Thus noticed

ts

philological
"

peculiarities, great
"

will
"

ereafter

its in

age
the

in absence
of

this

Island

its

higher

ntiquity which

Asia
bears

and

of

any
an

other

le di

traces

so

close into and

affinity consideration

anskrit
facts,

as

the

Pali,
'the

when Brahmans
a

taken

wit for

he

that

Aryas'
to

had

thei

yavahdrika
and
a

vdk,
that
Brahman,
a

dialect

similar
is

the

krit Sans

that
to

dialect
be the

declared

by
;
we

Buddhagosa,
may the
was

himself

Pali
grounds
viz.,

[Prakrit]
upon that
*

indee

iscover

few

at

least

of

the

which
the

trad tion

of the

Buddhists

is based,

Pkli

m^la

basd*
VI. This

leads
we

us

then
set
out"

to

the that

consideration
the

of
is
"

the

theory

with

which of
same

have

Pali

sister-dia^
one

lect

the

Sanskrit,
source."

being

probably

derived

from

an

the In

considering
the

this
to

subject
be
of

we

notice origin,

that

the
as

Brahmans
a

regard

Sanskrit

divine

and

dire

or

the

Pali
*

an

antiquity
root

so

remote

that

they which

affirm
was

it to spoken

be
by
who by

language by

the
men

of

all

dialects,

rahmas,

before
nor

the uttered

present

kappa,
accent,

by

those

ad

neither

heard

human

and

also

upreme

Buddhas'

"

Sa

Magadhl
ya

mula
ykdi

hlAsk
;

NarJt

kappika

Brahmanochassut^kpa

Sambuddhk
The above
;

chkpi by
to

basare.
Tumour
same

is found

quoted

Mr. the

from effect,*

the
occurs

Payo-

asiddhi

and

the

following,

in the

VlBHANGA
Tissadatta
'

AtTHAKATHA. Bodhi mande katara

atthato
;
suvanna

there

kira

saUkan
katemi
"

gaiti'
;

etv^

at^hkrasasu Tan

bhasisu
tena

bhJbs^ya
i^ggahetv^

pana-

kresi.

pana

pavaritan
tan
evan

atisambhid^ya
kathapetv""
nama

^hitena ugganhi
satt^

sohi
:

mah^pannataya uggahe"atva vatvacha kUe kumkrake

mknk

tan

bhk-

Tato

pav^resi.

hasan

ugganhantiti

panettha

idan

athitan.

Matkpitarohi

dahara
tan tan

manchevk

i^hev^

nipajajpetva
karonti
;

kathaya
tan tan

tkni

tkni

kich"

hani

dkrakk

tesan

bhksan

vavatth^pentu

imink

idan

vuttan

imink

idan

vuttan'ti

gachchante pitk Andhako

sun^ti,
sunati pana

kkle
tesan

abbampi
dkrako

bh^an sache

jitnanti.
mktu-kathan
sache

Mktk

Damili pa^haman

kto

Damiia
Ankathau

h^an

bh^issati,
bhksan

pitu

kathan

pa^hamah

haka

bhksissatl
bhksissati. natthi sopi

Ubhinnampi
Yopi agamake

sunanto

Mkgadhikan
nkma

mahit

ran-

kathento

attano
meva

dhammatkya

vachanan

amu^ha

pento

Mligadha

bhasa

bhksissati.
loke tattha bhkskdika yathkbhuchcha-Brahmabhli.sk
eva

Niraye
loke-tisesa

irachchhkna

Yonian Mkgadhika

pettivisaye bhksk Yonaka

e\ra

manussa

deva

abbattha

ussannk^

0^

irkthk

Andhaka
parivattanti

Dami{a
eka

a^harasa

hks"

Aya'meva

ohkra-Ariya-vohkra-sankhJbtk

Mkgadhika

na-pa-

Pari^attesi

sabbapi

Sihala/Zhakatha

tada,

rivattati.
tantin

Samma
M

Sambuddhopi
Jigadha
sukhan vachanassa
sotena

tepitakan
eva

buddha
;

vachanan
Kasm^
evan-

aropento

bhasaya

idropesi

hi

atthan

iiharitun

boti.

Magadha

bhitsiiyahi

tanti

or{l/has8a

buddba

patisambhidappattanan
sangha^ta
;

.sot"-

patbagamane-nevayanche
satena

matte

yeva

naya

naya

sahassena

attho

upattlAti uggahetabban

^Siya

pana

bhaai-

ya
'

tanti

^u/hakan
thera

pothetv^
took

hoti. in
the eighteen

Tissadatta
and he

up
to

tbe
know
so

gold in

broomstick which
of

Bd

compound,

requested
speak
?

the

bhdsaa
of
but, knew of those by

should

He

(spake)
not
a

from

(a

knowledge

languages)
actual

acquired
;

through
very
:

inspiration,*

study

for

being

wise

personage being
is

he
one

those

several

dialects
he
men

by
so

learning inquired
a

wherefore, This

(such)

acquirements

said

here

(to illustrate) that

*

acquire

hhhak
when

(by study.)
young,

Parents
a

place
and

their

children,

either

on

cot

or

chair,

speak
words

different
are

things

and

perfom
by the
by

difterent

actions.

Their minds,

thus
'

distinctly
such
was

fixed

children
him

(on
such

their
by

thinking)
;

that

said

and
the

the

other'

and
a

in

process
bom
first of

of
a

time

they

learn
mother,

entire
an

language.

If
father,
the

child, should

Damila'f
his but

and
speak" first

AndkakaX
would
his

hear
;

mother if he

he

speak
father
he

DamUa
he
not
a

language would

should

hear

speak, should K,

speak
them in
an

the

Andhaka
he

language. would
speak
forest,
to

If however

hear
person

both,

die
which

IQgadhi.
no

again,

uninhabited attempt

in

speech
words,
he

(is heard),
would

should
the

intuitively
very the
;

articu

speak

Mdgadhl,
animal
the

It

pre*

dominates
the

in all regions

(such as)
human

Hell;

kingdom; of
the

I^etta
The

4^here
rest

; the

world

and

world

devas.

otihe

eighteen
"c.,

languages" undeigo

Ottd,
changes
;
"

Kirdthd,
but
the

Andhaka^
4*.^i*"iBi*i

Y"makaj

Damiia,

Fstisambhidaya"
of

the including

four

Bnpenmtiiral

aUainments

peeoUar

to

the

highest

or-

4er
^

Arabanta,

inspired is the

knowledge.
form

Patella
Andhaka

(or Tamil)
is the

Pali

otDramida,

or

Dravida.
name

Pali

form

of Andhra,

the

Sanskrit

for

the

Taloga*

adKi
be the

does

not,

which
of

alone

is unchangeable,
and into
?

and

is

said

speech
his

Brahmans

Ariyas.
texts,

Even
did
so

Buddha"

rendered
the very

tepitaka
;

words
why

by
doing

means

MdgadKt
to

and
their
of
the

Because

by

so

it

as)
sense

easy

acquire

(true)
Buddha Magadhl

significations.
which
are

Moreover,

of by

the
means

words
of

rendered
is conceived

into
in

trines

language,
by

dreds

and

thousands
so

of
soon

ways
as

those
reach them

who
the
;

have
ear,

attained
or

piii'Samhhiid,
the
ear
comes

they

the

stan in-

in

contact

with
are

but

discourses

dered

into

other

languages

acquired

with

much

ficul dif-

Now
a

it

is

fact and

that
turgid

all

rude

nations

are

distinguished fables
them
speak
to

boastful
their

vanity.*

They records
They

invent

lt

nationality, credulity
or

and
of

leave

behind
cannot

to

use

the
race,

after

ages.*
languages
in

of
to

ir

of

their the

sacred
remotest
'

without

assigning

an

origin

the

world.
them
as

In
high
va

'

spirit
as

adulation
of

and their

hjrperbole adoration

they

exalt

the

ject
case

and

worship.

This

peculiarly

with

Eastern such

nations.
extravagantly

Although
of

high
when
some

pretensions, of

are

by

mselves
partially
we

no

value

^,

yet

these of

traditions
mony, testiin

supported

by

the

concurrence

other

may
fact

by
from

judicious
fable,
to

exercise

of
from which

our

judgments
fiction, they
are

arating I

and
extent

reality
to

receive

m,

apprehend,

the this

confirmed

Let
The
'

us

examine
as

confirmatory
already

proof.
seen,
'

term

Prakrita,
;'

we

have

means

root'

original In
greater
is

and
this

the
point

l*ali is the
of
if not

earliest

exhibition
the the
Pali

of

the
may

krit.

view,

therefore,
than
*

im

originality,
a

antiquity,
'

Sanskrit,,
In
other

ch

confessedly

dialect

made'

or

done.*

hibition

of

the

aboriginal
the
a

tongue, Sanakrita
to

there
to

is

nothing
the the
source

in language

the

signification which
the

of it is

teim
name,

entitle

for

be

considered

from

whence

former
too,

is derived. which
we

The

facts,
causes,

glean

from

history

or

find
of

from

natural

accord
we

wonderfully
above

with
given, idiom
are

the
and

import

the

terms

which that

have

with of

the

belief

Pali
both

is

Vyavaharika
languages

the

Sanskrit.
the
same,

For,

whilst

the

fundamentally

the

Pkli
vocal

is simpler

in
of
men

its

formation,
a

and
state
a

is of

more

adapted
who,

to

the

organs
avoid
by

in

rude
of

society,
of

like

children,

the the

sharpness

union

heterogeneous
reduplication

consonants

elision

of

the

first,

and

the

of the
These

second.
can

scarcely
a

be

pronounced
tongue.
and

to

be
we

peculiar know
that class, from full
a

characteristics
many

of

derivative of the beautify

For,

nations

both
to

North

South-Indian
draw
use

iu
the of

their

attempts

language, and the

the

largely
a

krit. Sanskrit Sans-

The
words

Tamils
;

Hindus

dialect
with

and

modem
not

Sinhalese
assimilate

view

beautify

langtiage, but

do

soimds,
simple

and

shorten

expre

Sanskritize
the
case

our

ancient

language.*

This
has
no

was

probably
to

with

the

Sanskrit

itself,

which

claims The

originality.
of the
the
non-use

simplicity
by

grammatical
of
of

system

in

the the

Pali,
absence
number

as

is indicated certain
of

the

dual

number,

of

elaborations

simple
*

tenses,"|-the
like

small

verbal
of

classes,^:
practical
it is
a

"c.
to

look

the

spontaneous

substitu

theoretic consistent

perfection

in

actual
events,

speech'.
the

"

For,

fact

with
system

natural
is

that

less

finished

and

elaborate

usually

ante-

*
,

See See
Also

speoimen
Notes

in

my

Sidat

Sangara,
of the of

p.

xxxtI.

my my

at at

the

end
end

First

Chap,
ii.

on

Verbs.

notes

the

the

Chap.

rior

to ^not

that that

which
the

is

more

so.*

The
an

presumption
anterior
not
"

therefore
to

is

"

Sanskrit
I here
mean

had
the
in
a

origin Pali
"

the

Pra-

krita,
name

by

which of

that
not

it
that

received the Pali-

the

Sanskrit
derivative finished from
theory

when of

rude

state
;"

PrJi.krit
only
a

is

the

Sanskrit

but

that
or

the
of
some

latter
unknown

is

more

exhibition
both

of the have

Pali,

idiom
to

whence of the

sprung.
add,
may

I may, many

tice injusof the

the which

Buddhists, languages
e,

that
be

laws

by
not

certain

derived

distinguished,
not
not

do

govern

the

Pali,
for

g.

The
;

Pali and
is

has has

ed rejectadopted Sanskrit

case-terminations

particles
It

uxiliary may

verbs
be
to

in

conjugation.
with
using For,

indeed

the forms

hich

charged
the

auxiliary

altogether, of
the

nknown

PaJi.f
all

"the

Sankrit

verbs

enth

class,

and

derivative
by
*

verbs] periphrastically
one

express verbs,-"

he

reduplicated
'

prsBterite
as

of

the

auxiliary

ri

to

make*, fact,
as

and

bh'A/
by

to

be.'

J"
Bumouf
in may

The
no

remarked
form
not

M.M.

and the
not

Lassen,

that which

grammatical

is to
some

be

found

Pali,

of

he

origin
in the

[why

say, far mind

traces]
proving

be
to

ed discovera

Sanskrit,""
to

from

the
is, like

Pali

be

ter, daugha

establishes
Sanskrit.

my

that also
between

she
seem

the
no

Zend,

sister
can

f the

It

would

that the
the

inferences the and

of away

drawn
the
*
'

by
one

comparisons hand,
to

Pali

and

Sanskrit||
the Latin
and
from

and,
concede

for
that,

instance,
bj its

Italian

I feel

boand
of

greater
may

simplicity easily
bear

constraction

nperior
as

facility
a

enunciation, polished tongue

the

Prakrit harmonious

the

palm

its

ival

simple,
to

yet

and

vehicle

of

human

thought,

bly admira-

fitted

be

the
p.

spoken 137.

of

great

and

refined

nation.'"

Dr.

Stevenson's

alpa
i

Suttra,
Paniniiii,
Bopp's

].35.ff.

X
S

Conip. Sur
tho Texts
le

Grammar,

ii., p.

841.

Essai
"

Pali,

p. 138.

{|

From

facts
ii. p.

detailed

in

the

preceding
that

paragraphs
compound
that
roots

(says Dr.
have

Muir
been

in

his by
or

anskrit
Indian
in

274.)
for
or

which simple
in the
cannot

piove
ones,

taken modified

he

grammarians

and

old

forms

have
that
a

been

ost

the
in

modem,
its

even

Yedic-Sanskrit,
always Latin
be

it is clear

that

language

peciall (esaccording

modem the

form

regarded
Greek

as

fixed

standard,
tht

to

the

[I

PaU'\

on

the

other

because
and of

the

Sanskrit

itself

has

undergone
contribute
both

great

change,
corruption

the

various
are

influences
not
must

which
same

to

the
and the

languages

the be

in Europe
between

Asia.

And

the

differences

great

indeed
who

languages together

(e,g. Sanskrit
for
the

and

Pali)

of tribes
in

had
same

continued
country,

several
same

thousand
of
have their

years

the

subject
clime,* and and

to

influences
separation
to

literature, changed

religion,

and

who have

upon ceased Latin

as

their religious
languages who have in
;

faith,

speak

respective
of other tribes

and
been

of those
'

(e.g,

and
many

Italian)
thousands
under

separated
f%r

for from

of years^

living

regions

apart
and

each

other,

different
are

physical

condition

whose

vernacular

dialects
social,

subject
and

to

the

modifjdng

action

of different

political,

religious

stitu in-

.'"IYet the
it is
a

singular
forms

fact

that,

in

some

particulars
from

in

which

grammatical agree
and of the with

of the
structure

Pali cf

differ
the
e,

the

Sanskrit,

they

the

Indo-European

languages
'

of the

Prilkrit

dialects,
the

g.

There

is

rence concur-

Prikkrit

with in

old point"
to

High

German
that it

and
in like

the

Latin

of
has

the

2d

conj.
the I honor",

this

manner

contracted
'

affix aya
Pali
*

A'X

Compare

Sanskrit

md-

ndydmi

mAnSmi

PAkrit
Latin
moneo

mdnimi,

Old-High

German Sanskrit

var-manim

I despise',

:""
Oer.
Latin*
moneo

Pail
mknemi
mJLnesi

Prakrit,
manemi
mknesi

Old

High

mkna^mi
mknayasi

var-manSm man^s
manSt
manemes

mon^
monet

manayati

maneti
miinema

mknedi mli.nemha manedha mknenti

that chain,
in
Trarm

miLnay^mas xn^nayatha
xnanayanti
"
"

mon"mus
monetis
monent
when
a

mknetha
mlinenti
it appears

man^t

manSnt
IsQg^aages,
downMl
Comp. and Vol,
with they far
more

In
the under

general
old
our

regions
to

hare

onoe

hurst than
"

grammatical
milder

hasten

their

rapid

step

European

Sun."
are

"

Bopp's
to

Oram.

p. 711.
at

"f

Closely
of

related

dialects
Pr.

known

develope

change
v.

very

different

rates

progress.""
see

Whitney
Grammar,

4vt"

Orienlal p. 10.

Journal

p,

352.

Also

Bopp's

Comp.
Orapmar,

701.

Comp.

In

regard have
give
to

to

these

weak
the
as

verbs,
first vowel
we

(adds
of
here

Professor

Bopp)
aya^
at*

hich

suppressed ya

the

Sanskrit
recall
occur

nd

therefore
the

affix,

will which

further

ntion

forms

iga
and
thus,

(ige),
Anglo
that

occasionally
whose connection

in with

ld
a

High
is to

German
be
to

Saxon,

traced
g

the
and

semi-vowel
the

has
ei

become

ardened

(comp.
the

" 19.)

preceding
'

weakened
*

i/

Hence

Prakrit

padhijjai

is

read*,

gamijjai

is

one/ K
the

Pali
sure

was

immediately
those forms

derived
only
any

from which other the

the

krit, Sans-

it is
;

to

have

Sanskrit
which
from

dopts

and

cannot

possibly
taken
away,

know
at

forms

er

Sisters Indo-Ariyan both

forms

had

their

separation

he

speech. known
to

The
the
as

existence

however and

in

the

Pali her

Sanskrit,
in the

forms
cited

which under
of 'the the Dr.

uropean-Sisters
form
to

adopt,
of
the
verb,*

instances
the

the
ber, We-

ausal

"

establishes
call
the

belief
;
"

which

I shall

hereafter

attention

contemporaneous

development
from also
none, one common

of both
source,

Sanskrit

and

Prakrit speech.' ancient

to
source

ialects I may

viz., the among their

Indo-Arian
the
more

here

observe

that

Brahmans,

notwithstanding expressly

partiality
or

the

Sanskrit,
dialect

have

stated
of do

the

locality^
the
at

the

of

the

called
later

by

way

eminence,
point

Prakrit.
Mahkrashtii
nor

parativel Comas

writers

indeed
neither former

that

principal
has
so

Prkkrit
it.

;{
The

but

Vararuchi
who
treats
are

Bah"ma-

ha

stated
that

of

four
from

lects, diathe

says

Paisachi
the
as

and

Mdgadhl
had

derived
source

Sauraseni;
;

and
he

Sauraseni
to

its of iJie
largest

in

krit Sansto

but

is silent

the

origin
the

Prakrit,
portion

the his

elucidation

of which

he

devotes

of

work.

See
*

my

notes

at

the

end

of

the

Cap.
to

iii. iftfra,

No

province

is assigned

however

the

principal

Prakrit

dialect'

"

^Lassen'*

Inst

Prak.

| 3.

It is however
or

stated

by

those
is
a

who

maintain

that the

the

Pali,

the
the
*'

prii^cipal end
of

Prakrit
ix,

derivative,
Vararuchi
rest"
or

that

Siitra
the

(1 8

at

Cap.

in
"

which the
the

refers

student grammatical its

origin

to

the

Sanskrit"
implies

for

the

remaining had
only

forms,* in the

that

principal
is
not

Prakrit
the

Sanskrit.
from the

This, which
belief
is
a

however,

inference.

The

fact

that of the

inference Buddhists of the

is drawn,

is the

also

tent consisor

with
principal

Rlli
if they

"that

the
were,

Prakrit

sister the
a

Sanskrit.

For, of
the

like
two

the

Sanskrit
which each there

and
had
other
was

vifava-hdrika
simultaneous
some

vdk

Brahmans,

dialects
from

origin,

and

merely

differ the
twice,

in
no

respects necessity

like whatever

the
to

Attic
treat

and

Ionic; the
a

of

grammatical

forms
complete
to

which
grammar

were

identical
one

in

both.

Having
it
the those
was

full

and

of

(the
only

Sanskrit),
by which
from
"

surely

sufficient grammatical

shew
forms

the
were

differences

Prkkrit
of the
"

distinguishable

Sanskrit.
to
'

Hence Sanskrit
to

the
for
the

simple ihe
rest.'

reference

Seskah

Sanskritdt
I have

the

already
a

alluded
of

fact

that
it
*

the

Sanskrit
fixed
clearly
as

had
the
to

been

in

state

transition of
'

until

became
It

classical
says
to
a

language

the the
we

Brahmans. adaptation

shews

be'

late
state

writer,

of

some

vernacular
to

dialect
characteristic of
transition

the

in

which
'

find

it, in

order

form
traces

language.'
from
the

Its

style of

exhibits

all

the
to

first efforts
and

expression
and
its

the

highest
al)

ments refinethe

of grace

inflection,
to

literature from

gradatio
to
a

from
refinement.' of the

barbarism Some

sublimity,
older

\ind

sublimity such
as

of the
prove

compositions,

portion

Vedas,
is

this

; for thier

style,
*they

unlike
are

the written that

poetry
in
now
an

of K^dasa
form

rustic
of the

and

irregular,
so

and

ancient

Sanskrit,

different

from

in

It is indeed
terms

remarkable
from but
to

that

the

Pali
does
not
as

Grammarian,
refer the
same

who

has

even
'

borrowed
remainder' discourses

technical
the

the
the

Sanskrit,
Pali

Student
is

for

the
the

to

Sanskrit,

language,

the

developed

in

that
can

none

but

the

more

learned

of

the

Brahmins

selves them-

understand
the

them.*
were

That

Pali,

if it
a

not

the

vyavahdrika
existence

vdk
with
to

of
an

the

ahmans,
of

had language,
the

cont

emporaneous has
been
not

old

rm

which

cultivated
only

the
a

ment developcomparison Vedas,

bet. alpha-

of the

S mskrit,
with
a

appears
oldest

from

Pali

the

available

Sanskrit,
of the

viz., the

also

from

careful

examination

oldest

Pali

To

treat

of the

latter

first
in by

The
an

\rliest
of

records
the

are

by

li-speaking
and,
impress

Buddhists

old

type

Nigari *it

phabet albears

judging
of

its

internal

evidence, and
local

ery

indigenous

organization
age

matura-

ion.'J

Although

the

of
;

this

character the before

same

is identical character date,

may

with

at

of Asoka
in
use

(235
for
a

B
.

C.)

yet

that

had be by

en

considerable

time following in

that

sily

believed.

Indeed
of the
was

the

description the
shews letter

given
of the

ing

Pukkusii.ti friend
the

characters

which

hisroysame

Bimbisara
Hiagadhi

written,
used
'

clearly
in the
vata

that
of

alphabet paskritv^

time

Gotama

Budsamasl-

ha."

So

tan

mankpani

akkharani patthkya

kni

samapantini That
X

chaturassknVti is,
'

kdito unfolded
was

vkchetun

rabhi.

when
the

he

had

[the

gold
he

plate

eet

J,

on

which

epistle

written]
"

(observed)
(the
forma-

hat
"

the

letters

||were
India,
by by vol. which

indeed
i., p.
name

pretty

exact

in

Elpfainstoae's

72.
may

"f

Or,

"

Magadht,
uuderstood

be

coasidered
Hiiida

that

dialect i,
p.

which

is

more

dinarily

Prakrii""

Wilson'd ii. p.
as

Plays,

Ixzii.

X
"
'

Friasep's The
later,
of

Indian

Antiquities,
which
we

43.
used by the Buddhists been written of
a

alphabet
was

possess,
their

couple by
the

of

oen-

nries

tliat

in

which

sacred in

works

had
B.

contem-

oraries

Buddha

himself,

who

died

543.

C,-^Prinsep*s

Indian

AntiquitUSf

i. p.

39.
This the

]]

proves Buddhist

that
era

the

citrsive

departure the
latter suited
"

from
was

the
not,

square
as

form

should

be

dated

fler

; and

that

supposed
purposes.
a

by

some,

confined the
if
to

Inscriptions,
of

from
was

ita

being

better
with

for

lapidary

For,

tle Epis'the

IB riubisara

written
was

pure
in

vermilion",

material,
no

which,

known

his

time,

'

difficulties

tion

of)
the

their
lines the
to

heads
were

"

and
of
even

quadrangular
tenor
"

(in
and he

shape),
commenced

"

and

that

to

read
In
western

it from

beginning/
the Mr. specimens

Papanchasildanli/a.
from the

alluding
India,
to

Buddhist
"The Deva
the

caves

of

Prinsep
vrototype
;

remarks, of

old

alphabet* Nagari and

appears
Dakshini
tongue

be

the

very

all the in

alphabets
has
yet

and

nothing

pure this

Sanskrit character

been

discovered,
impossible the
to

preserved that
it

in should,

indeed
more

it
than

would

be

because, in
many

stil letters

the

Pali,

alphabet

is deficient

absolutely Col.
claims

necessary,

Sanskrit*

Syntax."!
advocate
for the which
set
'

Sykes,
of the

that

enthusiastic
has

superior
may

PMi,
the

drawn
facts
;

all the

inferences
to
:

be

drawn
the

from

above
own

and

I prefer
language the
a

them
It

before ble,' incredi-

reader
he

in

his
'

expressive
suppose that
or

is

states,

to

modern character
How,

Sanskrit
to

could

have

existed

without

symbols
and

express
are

it
we

present
account

richness,

force,
fact

beauty.
modem letters, and but, solving the

then, Nagari

for
the the
see

the

of the

Deva
those
the

resolving
expressing Pali? than in

it se

into

ancient

Pali

letters
ancient

onZ;/,
cannot

not

Sanskrit
other
at

language,
way

any that

of

the

question,

the

supposition,
was

the
old

period

primitive
*

Deva
* *

Nagari
*

expressing

the

Pali

language

the

Sanskrit
was

itself,
same

if it existed

independently with the

from

the

old

Pali,

in the

rude

state

Pali.*J
for

"

This
bo

primitive

character the
of

may

well
was

have

proved
upon it to
to

sufficient
embodj
been

all

purposes
as

record,

longf

aa

language
which
we

it may
of

called
suppose

remained

simple

that

for

expression

have

originally
was

designed

and

adapted.
to

On

the

introdaction

the

Sanskrit
and
which
under

element,
this
and

it

necessarily
process, have
even

subjected
perhaps"
retained
the presence
in

previously-needless
some

combinations,
of

other

lost

of

the
its

stiflfhess

outline,

it

may,

nevertheless,
the

t g

with of
an

original
style of of

literal

simplicity
suited for

among
more

vulgar,

in
as

improved

writing,
Hindi,

polished
the

literature; of

the

ex

iBtii.-g Orthography
al
4

contrasted
Indian Journal,

with

elaboration
Edward

Sanskrit
vol.
ii.

alphabetipp. 43,

definitions.' Beng. Asiatic

Prinitep*s

Antiquities

by

Thomas,

Society's

vi. p. 1043.

return

to

the

language

It
forms

is indeed of
the

very
which

significant
may

ct

that

many

grammatical

Pali,

be

stinguished

from
some

those

of

the

modem

Sanskrit,
This in

are

identibe

al

with

of
by by
me

the
a

Vedic

peculiarities. contained
of
my

may

rendered

evident
taken

few

examples the
more

the
:

following
and with I have
these

tes,

in
a

course

studies

doubt

that,

with than
Vedas"

intimate
the shall
"

acquaintance list may

languages

I possess,

be take

greatly
an

enlarged.
from
to

(i.)
portion

The
which
rule

and
not

here

example

is

in

metre

contain
a

exceptions

the
or
o

neral
not
;
case
as

in

Sanskrit,
with
*

by
a

which following

word
a,

ending
should This
cause

in

en

combining

its

eli.

on

Vasishteadhi
in
'

over

Vasish^ha.'
in the

is frequently dussVo'

the
a

Pali.

Thus,
free

VhaTnTna-Pada, meditation/

amahito
that

reprobate
to

from

It is remarkdo
not

ble

owing

this

peculiarity in vowels
this
are

Pali
case.

Grammarians

ke

elision
I

imperative short

(ii.)
s.

believe

rendered p.

long
453.

in
This

the
is

da Vealso

See
case

Wilson's
in

Sanskrit
Thus,

Grammar,
aan

the

Pali.

rajjati
p.

becomes
14;

aA

rajjati
para-

reatly

attached.'
tapj

See

BMavatdra,
khantl
"

khantl

(instead

of

short)
Kachchdyana.
dwell

'Forbearance
Evan

is

the
muivi

ghest

religious
*

austerity'
may the is

game
"

are.

Thus,

muni

in

the

village'
short

Kachchdthe Pali.

a,

A in
*

long
the

frequently

rendered

in

us
Yo

Attanagnluvanaa,
gunavi sirl

Chap.

i.

"

2.

bodhisatta
known
'

Sanghabodhi.'
stanza

Again
of the

in

the

ll

Ye

dhamm^
vcid^

hetuppabhava
;

dhists Bud-

vMl

is written
'

thus, maha

Evan

vMi

Samano'

us
*

also" He

in

KachchayaTicCs
Bho

Pali

Grammar

Bho*

yJldi

nkma

so

ti

is named

vadl'f
used
*

"

Sir'"
a

term

in

the the

vocatire,
firahman"

amongst
venerable

the

Brahmans

; and

Tarfi"

'

speaker'

nce

name

for

speaker.'

(iii.)

In

the

Pali

as

in
the

the

Vedas

the I which

cerebral

is

very
in

requently Tlius

changed gfdha irudha

into
'

Yedic
;

is
*

also
;

found
and
the

the

ali.

concealed' becomes
the

daiha
"

hard'

mon com-

Sanskrit

aril/ha
form

See

Bilavatara,
is in is

p. 110,
conso-

(iv.)

Adukshat^
the

Vedic wherein

of

adhuhhat
dental ida

anc3

with
the priests

Piili,
;

the

aspirate
or

changed
'

nto

unaspirate
'
"

as

idha

bhikkhave

bhikkliave

here*

See

fialavatara,
would
;

"
le

24.

(v.)

Auge
the

ange,

quite
in

correct

in

the

Pali,
the
'mem.er,

and

it is in

Vedic vowel

although
be

modem
as

Sanskrit
angenge

low fol

short

should

elided,

member.*

(vi.)
be
an

The

Pali

ay

an

so

agg'i, ^which is found

in
to

modem
agree with

Sanskrit
the

should
ay

written
80

ayaiisogitih,

dic Ve-

agnili,
the

(vii.)
is
more

Even in

phrase

Hari
with

Hari
the

ydhi
Pali

in than

the

Gitagovinthe modem

da,

accordance

Sanskrit.

(viii.)
bhis

As

in

the

Vedic

Sanskrit, retained
after

wherein

the
of
the

person

plural

is not

unfrequently
is

instead
nouns
*

substit

aia

{ailt) which
takes
the
;

enjoined
;
as

in
with

a,

the

Pali

invariably
'

former

devebhi
*

god'

Bud-

dkebi

by
*

Buddha
The Prakrit

rukkhebhi

with has

tree.'-ffully and in

(ix.)

(says Bopp)
the
Veda

followed

out

the
e

path of

commenced

by

dialect,
as

changed
the
locative

into

the

cwnid-bhiSy
of aavid'SUy

yushmd-bhis, yushmdsu tiiiiiliem.

pronouns
as

also,
hence

plural,

that

amhe'hi{n)y
in

tumhe-hi
all
other

(n)^

avihesuy
as

Moreover,
substantives

Prkkrit,
and

bases,

well

adjectives,
;

nate termi-

the

instrumental

plural

with
answers

ehi

(u)
to

and
the

thus

kusmehi

(n)
Ihis:

*floribus',

(from
Gram.

kusma,)

Yeiivikusurne-

Comp.

"

220.

"

The

same

foim

of

sandhi

frcqaently

occurs

in

the

Kig

Veda;

e.

g.

deoa.

so

apl

rah,
+

p.
1

74.

he

bh

is

iato

in

Pali;

as

devebhi

or

devefU,

(x )

The

substitution
case

of

ya

for

before
be
"

{a)
in the
as

the
the

sign

of
as

instrumental the

singular,

is to

found
^that
;

Pali

Vedas,
in ydguya In

but

with

this
to

difference

^ibstitution
*

confined
;

the
'

Pali
with

feminine

nouns

dhdnuyd

by

cow'

gruel/
Veda, which
.

(xi.)

the
The

Rig Pali,
the

p.

60, does

nard
not

is

given
recognize

for

the the

dual
dual,

cative. this

opts

in

plural.

(xii.)
modem

Again

mitravarund

(see

Rig

Veda,

p.

63)

which
is

in

Sanskrit with
The

is

changed
*

into

mitra

varunau,

in

ordance

the

Pali.
is

(xiii.)

gender'

found
with be
p.

changed
nectar.'

in

the

Vedas, is
or

as

%dhos
;

triptdh
and

satisfied

Here masculine

madhu

masculine

similarly See

it may

either
51.
neuter

neuter

the

Pali."
The

Bilavatkra, of
is
as

(xiv.)
the

curtailment
of

the

plural
the
;

of
as

nouns

in
the

a,

omission
Thus
"

ni,
for

frequent
*

in

Pali

in

das. Ve-

khettd

khettdni
p.
'

fields'

chittd

for

chittdni

minds.'

See
In the
as

B^lavatara, Vedas if belonging in voice

mri

44.
to

(xv.)
inflected

die',
same

of

the

sixth

to

the

cla'^s,

conjugation (the first) to

ich

it belongs

the
is

Pali.

(xvi.)

One

used

for

another
'

in

the

Vedas;
the reUgious parasmai
is

as

ahmachdrina
As

michchate
the

(for ti)
of in

he

wishes

for

udent.'
is not

distinction

dtmane
the

pada
the

and

da

strictly
in
that

observed language,

Pali,
same

above

equally
serve

missible
an

and

the

sentence

will

example. In.the
in

(xvii.)
is

dtmane
the

pada, Vedas, So
as

the

initial

td

of
saye

a,

tion termina-

rejected
on

dahshina
in thus
p.

tah
the
;

(sete)
the
to

'

he

eeps

his may
or

right
be

side.'
correctly
"

likewise

Pali

above
saye

ntence

rendered

dakkhina
104.

sayeyya

sayetha,)
In
the

See

Bal^at^a,
Sanskrit
forms,

(xviii.)
the

modem different

the amongst

infinitive
which

is
we

turn

Vedic

shows

have

dic

kdrtave
p. The the
p.

'to

do'

becomes

Icdtave

in

the

Pali."

See

lavatara,

121.

(xix.)
nearer

Pali

'

past

participle
"

pitvana

having

drunk' mar, Gram-

Vedic

ja^tvdnan.

See

Wilson's

Sanskrit

477.
"

(xx.)

From

the

researches

of

M.M.

Kuhn*
Texts, p.

and 168,,
are

Ben*

ey/'t

observes that
two,
as

Dr.
many

Muir
words,

in which

his

Sanskrit
in

pears
one,

modem
have

Sanskrit
in the Veda

only
to

or

three, three,
in

"c.,
or

syllables,
four,

b
one

ad

of

two,

"c.
np

syllables,
the by
;

i.

e.

as

of
of

yllable

longer, required
tvam
as

order
the
metre

to

make

full

length Vedic
as

th

ines

by
has

employed
tuam
as

the

poets.

hus

to

be

read martydya
as

vyushtan

vlushtan

uryam

tariyam;
;

martidya
;

varenyam
as

areniam
;

amdtyam
svastihhih

amktiam
as

svadkvaram Now
as

auadmode

ram

and

suastihhih.
in

this

engthening

words Prakrit the

is

common

Prakrit,
in

it

would
respect the
more

apj"ear

hat

the
of

pronunciation Sanskrit,
in

agrees

this
to

with

hat

old

contradistinction

re ce

Such

are

the
us,

relations
bears
to

which
the is Pali
a

the
;

oldest and
it

Sanskrit
must

now

acce

to

be

borne
sorts

ind

that

the the

former

(1)
the
"

modification

of

two

anguage,
or

Vedic

or

sacred
that

Sanskrit,

and
vemaculrtr, in
course

the

vyavaor

krika
current'

the

Vernacular;
of their
have

(2)

the
was

th

language
to

the

Brahmans
Sanskrit tampered

of

time

ssimilated

VedAc
been

;"

and
so

(3)
that of
a

that

th

edas

themselves

with,
in point

whilst

hey

received
language in

additions itself

and
has

mutations indeed

substance,

the

undergone
thus Vedic that
no

considerable evidence

hange the
we

point

of

form.

We
of

have

truthful

of

normal

development might, perhaps,

the

Sanskrit,
many other

and

which, forms

had,

exhibit

"

Zeitschrift

tux

die

Kund"

des

Morgenlande*,

iii., 80.

Pali,
in

which the

are

distinguishable
were

from
one

their
as

corresponding much

ms

Sanskrit^
as

at

time

identical
Vedic
may

th

the

Anti-Vedic,
the
same

several in
the in

remnants

of the

forms

decidedly

P^li. support

A
of

few the

words above

ever howpropositions

be
;

deemed
and That
known

necessary

1.

the

Brahmans
fact
in the

had

two

kinds

of

language.

It
every Take,

is

well

East
and

generally,
a

that

nearly
speech*

tion

has

book-dialect
the Sinhalese. the

vernacular vernacular of
Sandhi
are

instmce,

Our

language
and compounds
cannot
cases,

is

neral ge;

without
the

contrivance in much The which

our

ereas

dialect without

books and,

written in
some

be

derstood
a

reflection,
case

out withwith
that

Commentary.
Its

was

doubtless
development

the
are

same

Sanskrit.
one can

refinement

and

such the from

use

reasonably

conclude
of

that the

it

was

ever

spoken
several

nguage
passages modified

(vyavaharikavkk)
in the

Brahmans
the
may
was

yet

Sanskrit of the

literature,

colloquial

of
It

form
seem

Sanskrit
their language

be

concluded. A

uld

thence
that
we

that

two-fold.

sage pas-

have
sets

already
this

quoted

(ante
doubt. existing

p.

Ixxxviii.) from

the

rliest
2.

Veda,
The

beyond
of

development

the

Sanskrit,
Vyavahdrika
language,

other

than has

VediCy
so

indeed

proves,
to

that

the

vdk
that

en

assimilated
eundo
"

their received

sacred
additional

--vires

quirit

has
^it

refinement

in

its

ogress.
"

The

language varying
character
run

of the
very

Vedas

(says Pr. Whitney)

both
in its

is

an

older
and

alect,

considerably,
the

grammatical Its
grammatical

xical

from

classical
all

Sanskrit.
:

culiarities

through

departments
declension,
any

euphonic

rules
tax. syn-

rd-formation Without

and

composition, into

conjugation^
of limits, them,
it charac

entering

specification its propei

which
wiQ be

uld

extend
to

this
here

paper
that

beyond
they
are

ough

say

partly

such

as

terize

and

the
is

like, still
by

and in the
other

partly bloom
rules
the

such
and

as

characterize of
of

languagir

which

vigor
those

life,
common

its

freedom
usage,

un-

tr
f

than

which

has

not,

like

Sanskrit,
become
among

passed
merely
a

into

oblivion

as

native
of

spoken

dialect,

conventional

um medias

communication
into
a

the

learned,
by
a

been
long

forced,

were,

mould
treatment,

of

regularity and

and

exhausting

grammatical
some

received
and
were

development
If it been
may it

which
may

in

respects that
that

fc-eign

unnatural."*

established

the
the

Vedas
anti

altered,
forms
to

indeed

concluded

Vedic
This

had

greatly

ent differ-

from
8.

the

Vedic.
the his

leads
altered

the

consideration,
f

Were
in
on

Vedas
Review

hy

Brahmnns Max

Professor
valuable

Wilson,

of

Professor thus

MuUers the
to

work
"

San9hrit

Literature^
thost

notices

subject.
be

The

first
of whether

and the

obvious

conclusion
may

drawn
relative

from
an-

he

hymns

Vedas,
twenty

whatever
or

be

their B.

tiq

twelve is not

Centuries
that
of

C,

is that
of of

the

eligion

which

they
The
as

inculcate
Brahman, have
upon

the

Hindus
time

the

resent
of

day.
Munu

who

from

the
to

the

ode

we

it, had earth,

priests,

arrogated is
in

himself only
of
among

the

ttributes
or

of
even

god of

the
as a

Veda
sort

even,

sixteen
not

acting with

master

he

ceremonies,

but

invested of
one

any

superior all the

that
tenor

rank

uthority.
famt and

Of

the

distinction
with 10th

caste,

indications of
style
a

re

uncertain, in the

exception"

rema

hymn
place

Mandala,
in"a the

the

and
recent

hich

it indisputably
it
at

comparatively

stage, by which organized. worship formulae,

of

nd

bring
we

least
that

to

Brahmanic
system
nor

period,
had
of
so

ime

know

the
mention

Brdhmanical
of temples

been

There
ceremonial

is

no

public
the

he

is entirely of of the
the

domestic,

and

far the

he

language
rites

Suktas,
Hindus.

still constitute It
,

liturgy

the

domestic

is

very

doubtftQ

if imager

re

known,

although

mention of

of

personal be

peculiarities, by
a

as

of

he

handsome

iws

Indra,

might

suggested
else may,

tured sculpbe

representation
;

of him.
great

Something
of

however,

eant

but
the

the

feature
both
to
a

diflference and degree

is numina,

the

total who

sence abhave

of ages
of

divinities, and,

nomina
great
no

or

engaged,
the

engrossed
of
; Brahma
a

the Triad,

tion adorathe
not

Hindus.

We
and and

have

indications power

reative,
as

preserving,
a

destroying although the

does
nothing
occurs

ppear

deity, the

Vishnu, of

named,
;
no

has

in

mmon

with

Vishnu His

Puranas
as

allusion the
at
nor

his

Avataras. of the As
ever

manifestation
classes, for
some

Krishna,

favorite
least,

ivinity

lower
a

centuries named,
and
a

does
type

appear.

divinity
to.

Siva

is not

is his

he

Linga whom
no

adverted
*

Durga
man

her

triumphs,

and
years,^

ali

the
place
are

blood

of in

delights

thousand

ave

whatever palpable,

the
so

hymns
far
from

of

the
the

Vedas. Vedas
overturn

These

iflFerences

and

being
it.

the

asis

of the be
and
an

existing

system,

they

completely

It

ould

interesting
what
means

subject
the sprring
vast

of
mass

inquiry

to

discover
mythology
a

hen

by

of

the

modern
attained

of the

Hindus

into

existence

and
*

irculation The

throughout

India."*
us
on

Buddhists
extracts

enlighten show that that the

this
were

subject

and

the made
are

lowing folto
to

not

only

additions which
with of

he

Vedas, been

but

Vedas

themselves
in

said

ave

originally
of

composed
Kasaapa,
a

accordance

the

Buddhist

doctrines
in
In after A

so-called
tha

predecessor

Gotama,

re

times

altered

by

Brahmans. declares

the

mbatta

SattaihGotaxaa,

that the

the Vedas
Vkmaka,

mantaa

f the

Brahmans

(which
were

are

identified by

with

by

the

ommentators)
(a)

compiled

Attaka

(a)
Anglrasa,

V^ Bhkra

adeva,

Vessamitta,

(a)

Yamataggi,

(b)
(b) f

vaj", (a)
"

Vase^"a,
Review
names

(a) Kassapa
No.

(b)

and

Bhagu.

Eiliiibuigh All
these
of be

248,
given Max

pp.
in

381-2.
the

are

also

Abhidanapad/pika. p. 44
note.

Some

of

them with

are

the

shid

the

Rig-

Veda."
those

S^e

5Iuller
in

Names

marked

an

{")
for

identified

Maller'd

Sanskrit

Literature,

42

CXXIV

INTRODUCTION

Te

kira

dibbena
sammk

chakklmn^

oloketwk

parilpaghatan
sah^ Brahmana

alcatsansan-

v^

Kansapa
mante

sambuddhassa
Apara
tayo
"

pavachanena paran

dhetvk

ganthesun. pakkhi pitva

pana

pava-

nhii

patadini saddhin

vede

bhinditva

Buddha

"jhane
*

viruddhe after
thri

akansu. obtaining* ugh

Sumangala
the
supreme

VMaini.
discourses divine of
eyes,

Those

sages

Kassapa

Buddha, the
Manta

the

medium
to

of their
those

compiled the
course

conformably
tormenting times,

discourses,
The

out with-

mention

of

(sacrifices.)
however,
set

Brahmans
the three

in

of subsequent

aside by

Vedar!,

and

ide

(a

different
and

compilation)
introducing

departing
authority

from

the

words

of

Buddhism, "c/
adisu
:

(an

for)

life-slaughter
Tisu

vedesil'-ti
tesu

Irubbeda
tnyo
eva

Yajubbeda
kira
veda

Sama-veda
Attakadihi atthaya vedo pana
atthiya

san-

hktesu

vedesu lokassa

dhamkathk
;

ikeld

isihi

sagga

magga

bh^van'

enevahi

tayoti

vuchchanti.

Athabbana
pana

pachkato,

hha

adhammikehi
tisu

Brahmanehi
vedesu teheva

v^dhadi

urimesucha vadjbdi
Tlsu

dhammika
sakh^ Vedas

yajayo
Irubbedda

apanetva

^ga
'

dipika
i.

adhammika
e.

pakkhittk-ti

veditabba*

Vedesu

the

three

called

(Big.
three for the
are

eda.)'
were

Yajubbeda
made

(YMJur),
Attaka,

and
and

Skma
other by

Veda. religious
mankind

These sages
:

edas

by

tainment

of the
*

path

of

heaven

they

herefore

called
was

three/

The
by

Athabbana

(Atharvan)
(wicked)
(animal

Veda,

owever,
with

since
view
be

madef

irr.-ligious life-slaughter

mans Brahsacrifices).

t.) introduce

Moreover,
the

it known,

that

they

themselves

introduced
hes which moters pro-

nto

first

mentioned
torments
"

Vedas, "c.,

irreligious after expelling

branc

roclaim

sacrificial of sacrifices.

virtuous

Vimata
over

Vinodana
the

Tlka,. ies
"

I have
the

thus

glanced
from

peculiar! Sanskrit

which
the

guish distinof

oldest

the

modern

structure

Lit.

'behoLUng.'

See

also

Edinburgh

Review,

No.

288,

p. 376.

latter

being
and

that

which

may

be

regarded
ever

as

the
attuned

most

pressive

harmonious

that

has

been

to

man
An

utterance."

examination doubt
"

of

Pali which

Grammars it
only

establishes
bears
to

beyond
Sanskrit
as

the

affinity

the

i.)

from

which

it differs

in

such

modifications
are

are

xhibited

by
derived

those from

European
the

dialects
unknown

which idioms of

most

immediately

antiquity/'* Grammar similar

He

In (li.)

review

of the for

Revd.
p.

B.

Clough's
the writer

Pali bears
the

(see
testimony

iatic
to

Journal
the

1827,
of of

663)

identity
part

Sanskrit
it

with

Pali.
in the
roots

says,

every

essential

(the Pali)
and is also

is found

Sanskrit.
are

vocabularies
same.

of its

nouns

of its verbal

nearly

The

Grammar
simple."

formed

on

the

same

model,

ut

is

much

more

(iii.)Professor
two

Bopp

also

thinks
and of that the

that

"

the
is

relation
nearer

between
than of
to

hese

idioms

(the
between
system,

Sanskrit
most

Pali)
distinct be
to

that
the

hich

subsists

branches compared
the
the

ndo-European
of affinity

and

it may

the

egree

which
in the

the his

Latin

bears

Greek.**")*
Dhammapada
or

(iv.)

Fausboll
states

Introduction
,

to

6.)
the

relationship
**

of literas
numero

the

Pali

M"gadhl
sacras

Sanskrit,
librum

thus

Inter

buddhisticas habendum
qui multis abest,
et

unc

antiquiorum
quo
et

in
elucere

esse

sermone,

utitur,

videtur,

in

rebus

sanscritico
eo

quidem

antiquissimo differt,
Hue quo

prope
utuntur
:

multum
et

dicendi

genere

Sutta
nora.

prosaica

choHa
"

Buddhaghosae.
am,

pertinent
;
a.

prses.

participii
in"
ar^,

ut

ganayam^

rodam
;

pers.

plur.
ut

praes-medii
netave

aocarey

upapajjare
formae, quales

dat.
sunt
:

gerund.,
karoto

pahktave

rseterea

etkubbato

(karontassa)
sahbhi

ihiii

(kai'issati) aL,
vaddha

arahatam klesa

(arahanthnam),

(sante-

i),

(vuddha),

(kilesd), cetya

(fietiya)etc.

See

Asiatic

Jonrnal,

z?ii.

p.

763.

The

weightiest however,
to

and which
ol

most

conclusive
wish
to

authority
attention,

on

the

subject,

call
of

is and

contain

in

the

following
seen

servations

Dr.
of

Weler,
the valuable

which

I have

only in

through

the

medium

translations
were

Dr. for

Muir's
the

Sanskrit

Texts,

since

these

sheets

prepared Speaking have

press. the

of risen,

way
Weber

in

which
says
:
"

he

conceives

the

Prakrits*

to

Dr.

(v.)

'*

1 take
a

this

opportunity
received

of

declaring
It
has

myself
been

distinctly concluded

against
the

commonly

erro^l

from

existence
immediately

(in inscriptions)
preceding
out
on

of

Prakrit
that

dialects the
were

in

the

centuries

our

era,

Sanskrit

language
we

had

died
must,

before
contrary,

these

dialects
the

formed

whereas
the

the
the

regard
dialects
as

development
one common

both

Sanskrit

and

Prakrit speech, fuller

from

source,

viz.

the

Indo-Arian
For
a

entirely of this

neous contemporaview
;

statement

I refer
in proof

to

'

my

Vajasaneyi
I have
laws

Sanhitse
there,

specimen,' I ndduce viz.

ii. 204-6
here the

and, fact

of

what

ur^ed
of

that

the

principal fondness
of i.
p.

Prakrit

speech, and

assimilation,
are

hiatus, in

and

for which 46,

cerebrals
the

aspirates
are

prominent
:

the

Vedas,

following

examples

kuia=krita,

R.

V.

4. ;
;

kata^ckarta,

(above,

p.

30)

; geha=gnha,
;

(above,

40)

guggulu=sgungulu,
Taitt,

Katyay.,
x.

5, 4, 17

vivi^ai

==vivishfyai,
i. 3.

Arany. Rik.
;

68

krikalasa,
;

Vrih.

Ar.

Ma.

22.==krikada"u,

i. 29.

puroda8"],=purolasa
;

(comp. dasru=:lacryma)

paclbhih==padbhih

kshullaka=: 6.

kshudraka;
;
or

bhallaksha=bhadraksha,
vikirida=vikiridra

Chhandogya,
p.

(gloss)

(above

31)

gabhasti=^ab;

hasti,

garbhasti

nighantu=nigranthu
;

ghas=gra"
.
.

bhanj=bhranj=bhuj=bhruj
philology

bhas=J3ras.
.
.

Comparative

exhibits

similar

phonetic

prakriti-

"

"

once

conjectured"
dialect of
not

says

Mr.

Colebrook,
Brahmans
by

'*

the

Prakrit bis Essays

to

haye

been ii p.

formerly

he

colluqoial

thfi
been

Sarasvata
confirmed

[see

Vol.

21]
it

;
to

hat

l^is

conjecture

has

further

researches.

belicTe

gs

mthin

the
one

circle with the

of the

Indo-germaDic
I'he
same
"

languages
wiiier
8a;ys
to

as

compared

the Sank

other."

in

his

jas.

specimen who
ever

ii. 203.
thiit
common

ff. ;
the

^^^

I incline Bhasha,

the

opi-

of those called,
was

deny
the

Sanskrit
spoken

properly
of the
whole
as

language alone.

an

people,

and
high

assign German,

it to

the

learned
out
common

Just

modem
the

arising
what
was

of the
to

andent
all
to

dialects universal

Germans,

reduced laws,
of

rules

and

and

by

the
;

power and

of
as,

analogy
on

obliterated other often

recollection

varieties

just

the

hand

se

dialects,
at

while
same

they
time

gradually fuller became and

degienerated,
more

served pre;
So

the

ancient combined
was

forms
in
lo"t, and

the

Vedic in
the

dialects,
their

partly
existence

one

eam,

which
regular

individual

so

med

Sanskrit
own

Bhasha,
original

and

partly

flrwed

on

dividually
continued
of

in

their
to

(Prakrita)
of different
The

irregular
provinces,

force,

be

the they

idioms

in

the

rruption

which Prakrit origin

participated.
had,

Sanskrit
a

guage lan-

and
simultaneous
but

the

dialects
:

therefore, did
not

common

and
of

the

latter

spring
a

out

the

rmer,

rather,
lan^ua^e,

being
have

connected often shaped sacrificed The

a

by
more

natural

bond

with than
by the

e"ncient

antique

fashion

Sanskrit,
of
sake

which,

being
has

and
the

circumscribed
truth

les

grammarians, of

of

analogy
are

for

regularity.

Prakrit
in
a

tongues
state

nothing

se

than
the

ancrent

Vedic

dialects

of
sum

degeneracy
of
the

iile

Sanskrit
constructed

(or Epic)
by the of
two

bkdshd
labour learned facts
by
:

is the

Vedic

alects
po

and
men.

zeal

of

grammarians,
this
way
we

Ushed
an

by

the

skill

In
That

tain

explanation

of

1st,

the
to

very

same

ceptions

which

are

conceded
are

grammftrians

the

Vedic

nguage in

(dihandas)
fact
nothing

often

found

in
forms

the
; and

Prakrit

dialects,
That

ing

but

original

2nd,

in

he

Vedic

writings,
than rules
any

forms

and

words
word

occur

which
ever

axe

more

rregular
fixed

Sanskrit

could

be

for

as

ye

of
were

euphony,

orthography,

or

formation

existed,

rules

which

eventually

deducted
irregular
be

in forms

part which

from

those prevail

ery

irregularities.

All
are

the
to

the

Prakrit

tongues latter, the

found

throughout
creates

the

Ye*

as.

In

the

faculty
power,

which
while

language former blown weakness.

een

exuberant it is

in
seen

its in

early the

in

the

(th
license

Prakrits)

degeneracy
at
a

of

full

uxuriating

wantonness,

and and

last

of

senile for

Assim

the play
an

hiatus,
important

fondness
in

cerebrals
not
so

and
much

aspi*

ates,

part
are

the
to

Yedas,
the
to

hose

portions
a

which
transition initiating
a

pec'diar
from

Ynjur-veda
the Epic

(which,
period,
a

forming itself of

the

Yedic

ather

the

Epic
cast,

period,
and and

has adapted

also
to
a

style grammatical

anguage

more

modem
the older

ruL),
of

as

in
were

forms
to

words

of
in

the

Rig-veda,
age
:

any

which

difficult

underatand

the

of

th

itareya p. poems

and
li.

Satapatha

Brahmanas
There

(paroxavrittayah
occur moreover

comp.

oth.

Nighantavah.)
many

in have

th

pic

words

which,

however

corrupted,

been
sometimes

eceived
with

into

the

Sanskrit
little, part

sometimes
the the
the

with Prakrit

no

change,

very greater thus

from

languages

in

use

mong
I have

the

of

people."
reader,

laid
"

before
^men

the quite
system

facts
as

stated
fully

by
a

nent emi-

philologists,
of
the

who
as

enter

into

compari

Grammars,
"

of

the

of

words the
seem,

in Pali
go
we

th

wo

languages,
Sanekrit
merely
;

to

shew those

the

diflTerence it

between
would

an

he

and

statements,

th

ength
out,
an

of establishing that

the like
;

theory
the

with

which
is the

have

et

viz.,

the
language
at

Pali,

Sanskrit,
the time
or

offspring

unknown commenced
stands

and,
the

whether
same

cultivation
not,

oth

one

and

that
"

**

th

ormer

in

fraternal

connection

with

the

latter

^not

Before
be
out

however of

dismiasiug
here
the
to

this advert

part
to

of the
a

subject,
its

it

may

place
out

few

circumstances
origin in

ich

point
or

that

Magadhi

(Pali)

had

the

unjab,
Dr. the

Bactria. remarks
that
"

Stevenson ruder
was

it

seems

highly

probable has under

at

dialect
the

from

which
tongue

the of

present

Sanskrit
who,
upper

en

formed
as

spoken

the

tribe,

arat,

they

themselves
gave

relate,
name

settled their

in

India,
to
to

afterwards
country,

the

of
from

Sovereign

the
the
was

ole

which

extends
The

Cape

Comorin
language
It

malaya Pali,

mountain."*
also
trace

Magadhas,
to

whose

their

origin

Bharat.
to

is
we

hence
can

pro* only

ble

(for, in
with

questions

relating
that

languages

al

probabilitieBf,)
oft from the
same

both

the
stem,
"

Pali
^the

and latter

Sanskrit
taking
its

ranched
lead in

parent

comparatively
refinement,
tongues
was

civilized
so
as

country,
men

attaining
to

esent
n

high

to

tempt

mix

it

with

eir

on-Sanskrit
the
to

on

the
from

South the
where

of land

the

Yindhya
whence

ilst

former

banished

from
it

it
th^ Ma*

se,

different
forms of
the

Indian

countries,

assumed

rious

exhibited

by

the

Jaina
to
our

dialects
'*

and
utmost

the

rastri:^

Grammarians,
where

and
alone

own

Indian
language.

le"

Taprobane,'*

it ixas become
of

dead

Another
is that

circumstance
after
the

is deserving
the
was

attention.
on

Tradition,
matters,
on

ich

all

best the

evidence language close

upon

these

ys

Mkgadhi of the

of

Saura8ena,"
Mathura.^

banks

Yamunli,

The

Kalpa
"

Satra,

pp.
no

1.32^3.
from

There

are

dbta

which
all xxL,

the

original
on

fonpation
the

of

an

one

langange
reat

can

be
on

rtained

and

consequently Journal,

opinion

subject

must

entirely

jecture.""
**

'Asiatic
la
so

p.

653.
the primary
dramatic

There
M

dose
scarcely

an

affinity
any

between

dialect,

and

the

i,

to

leave

doubt

of

their

being

originally

identical.""

P^M"or

ten't

IntiUutioMM
Prak"sa,

Prakrithm,

Prakrit

Sec.

xi.

3.

language
;

of
and

Paurasena*
they
treat

is

also

called
under

Prkkrit the
or same

by

the
name,

Brah-

ans

MdgadlA
with

an

place

it in

the

same

class
we

Panchdla,
the als
in
o

the It from

language
is

Punjab,t
the that

by

which

understand had found

and the her

Zend
come

also

clea

that

Sanskrit
several

Brahmans

Bactria,
for instance

and

languages

that

locality,
are

he

Persian,
to

the the

Phelevi,

Zend,"

more

nearly

re l

Sanskrit
the

than

Indo-European
of

sisters.

On

his

subject,
Journal
been

erudite

editor
p.

the
:

Bengal
"The

Asiatic

ci So

(see
back
had
;

vii.
to

x.)
the

remarks
period
at

history
the

of India

ad

traced

before
each
step

invasion

lexander,
inscriptions the period The

and

been

verified
language
was

by and

coins

an

bat
that

the

of

Bactria
still

of

Persia,

of

Conquest,
alphabet the

insuflSciently
more

ascertained

Bactrian

was

already
of letters

than

hal

iscovered

through

comparison

upon
as

coins

with

ilingual
the

superscriptions. Topes

Several
or as

inscriptions,
by

obtained

rom

excavated, limits
remained
to

forwarded
were

travellers

from

thin

the
very

ancient
little and
very

of

Bactrim,
to

nearly the

deciphered,
also language,
over

that

perfect

discovery

[b

Prinsep],

establish,

that

the

ancient
it,
seem

Pali

something

closely It closely

resembling

prevailed that
even

ose

countries-''^

would
to

hence
the

the
some

Pali

hich

approaches

Sanskrit

in

of i

"

(i

These

two

(Sauraseni

and

Maharaehtirt)
older
th

dUlecU
an

stand
are."-L"wn'*

tbe

fiearest

to

l,

though

it

rthe

Pali;

decidedly

they

Indian

AhU

itief.
*

Sec"

Note, oldest
the

ante seats

p.

Ixxix.
of
the

The in the

Indians
Jvula,
was

of

which
I
p.

we

find
"

any

mention
seat

made,
of

are

to

ed

Pnnjab"-5pi"p,r.
of

6.

The tcdly

earliest
the

the

Hindns

hin

confines H.

Hindustan

nndoub

Eastern

Confines

of Pun

b'^^Professor
"
See
"

H.

WUson. Discourse
not

Professor learn

Spiegel's
that

referred pervaded

to

in

the

last

note.

ir

We
no

PaU
or

only

India,
is
*

but

Bactria by

and the who

rery

Persia
hi^h
"

and

th

is

wUd

theory

hazardous
Lassen,

speculation
of
or

attested
"

authority

the

Pali the

Scholar,
Bactrian

Professor

Bonn,

says.

the

legends,

Coins

are

in

Pali

Pracrit/'-Coi.

SyJcu

TO

kachchatana's

grammar.

cxxxi
in
**

oldest
which
or near

forms,

had cradle

originally
of
the

started

from

the

same

country

the

Sanskrit

Brahmans

is

placed,

in

Bactria.''

VIL Buddha,

That 628-543. and

the
B.

Pali
C,
a

was,

at

least,

in the

time language

of Qotama of Ma-

highly

cultivated

gfidha

several

adjacent
We

countries,
from
numerous

does

not

admit
extant
at

of

reasonable
Ceylon,
it
IS

doubt. that
very

find

works

in least,
too,

in

grammatical inferior

structure to

and
Sanskrit.

precision
A
so

but

little

the

language varied

which
as

is capable
the
cannot

of enunciating

discourses
the
voluminous

and

stru ab-

Fitakattaya
but be

and deemed

Commentaries
It is rich
in expression

thereon,
;

copious.
are

and
from

its force the

and

harmony

but

one

degree

remov

idiom in

that
his

has

been

Sanskrit'tzed.
to

Professor
vasi, thus

Wilson
speaks

Introduction
regarding
of

Yikrama
it
as

and
an

Ur-

of the
*'

Prakrit,
richness in

exhibition
play,

of

the

Magadhl. in A
structure

The
and

the

Prakrit code, of the

in this

both

its

metrical

is very
fourth

remarkable.
act,

very

great

portion, in that
act

especially
a

is in

this

language,

and
It

considerable
that this

variety
form

of metre
of Sanskrit

is introduced.
must
was

is clear

therefore

have

been

highly

cultivated

long

before

the

play

written."

If such three ought

the

is the

case

as

respects

the

Prakrit
era, a

of

period

nearly

centuries certainly
time

after
to

the

Buddhist
to

higher the

refinement
language

be

accorded
The
highly

the

Pali,

of

of Gotama.*

presumption

is therefore
very

ble, irresisti-

that
age of

it had

been

cultivated

long

before

the

Qotama. already
which
an

I have

adverted

to

the
from in
the

dynasty the
war

of

the

Miigadha
''Maha

kings, Baharata,"
the past

commenced
event

of

the

involved

Mythological be

obscurity
that

o their

and

it is also
Bnrmah
is

therefore

to

presumed,

"

The

Ber.

F.

Masob
* *

*'

of

says

:"

I do

not

tliink
than
Or.

that

the Savans

Pali
are

is

quite
aware

understood
though
not

yet.
to

Pali

nnch

more

copious

the

be

compared

with

the

SAnskrit/'^^mer.

Journal^

ii. p.

896.

language t"inly
"

is of

as

great
the truth"

an

antiquity

as

their

kingdom

is

cer-

older
But
in

than
very

written

Vedas.
Hodgson,
or
*'

says

the

extant

records both
be
true

of

Buddhism,
in
a

whether

Sanskrit
of

Pi^krit,

exhibit

lan

guajres

high

state

refinement."*
so

If
Pali, which its
"

this
**

the and

Prakrit, poetical

it is undoubtedly

of the

rich,

refined,
as

language by S^kya
highly
or

of

the

land

in
had

Buddhism origin,
at

pro mul

Gotama and

which

pe ri

it

was

refined
we

classical
the early

language."i*
state

When
to

therefore the
"

consider
in very

h^gh
times

of

refinement,
as a

which

Pali

had

attained
harmony,

gua lan

its

copiousness,
antiquity,

elegance,

and
comparative

combined

with

its high and

of

and
"

its

simplicity,
to

both

verbally langui^e has

Veen

grammatically, the Brahmans,

"

its

relationship which
to

the

oldes

from
its

their

present the

dialect Vyavarefers,
"

Sanskritiz^d,
vkk of the

claims
to

be

considered the

h^ka
its in

Brahmans with
some

which

Rig

Veda

concurrence

of

the

Indo-European
the

languages,
"

some

forms
the

which only

differ
original
"

from

Sanskrit, dialect,
of
any

tion its identifica**

with
to

Prkkrita

which
statement

was

lar simi in

the

Sanskrit",
writers of
to

the the

absence
effect
"

Brahman
a

that

that

Pritkrita improbability Pritkrita,"

in the

dialect
of the
a

was

derivative

the

Sanskrit,

^the great

d r

beingdenominated inaccuracy
it is
"

the
the

[prakriti]
by

ble palpa-

of
the in

definition

which
or

modem

times,

"

called absence

derived, it
of

the
many

vulgar,
a

ungrammatical"
which

^the ^guishes
,

peculiarity
the
seat

distin

derivative from

tongues,"

and

probability

that
or

had from

issued
whence

the the

same

ancient

(Bactria
taken that
an

Punjab

Sanskrit
it

itself had
be

easterly

rection,-7l Sanskrit
are,

believe
at

may
two

concluded
of

the

Pali

and

th

least, derived

dialects
from
at
a

high
of which

antiquity, few,
if

conte

source,

any

traces

can

be

discovered

the

present

day.

"

Bengal

Asiatic

Jonrnal,

To

the

above

remarks I had

on

the

relationship intended
to

of
add
along
a

the brief with

Pali sketch the

to

Sanskrit,
progress with
great

originally

the

of

Buddhism the

in
former which
to
reserve

the

East,

Pali

uage, the have

which

is
I have

inseparably
experienced

connected.
in for the
a

difiSculties
me

printing,

compelled
For
characters. the

the I have

subject
given

future

ication.

same

reason

Text

in

halese

If, however,,!
of
the

should remaining

be
seven

permitted
books engaged, in
has

to

lete

the

translation

of

ch"yana's
to

Qrammar,
able
edition,
to

with
to

which
my

am

now

be

forward including

publishers
matter

England,
been

lete

the
Text,

which

reser

together
the

with
now

the

in

Roman
great
say,

characters. diffidence,
to

Of

work

submitted,
I

with
to

the

pean
that
at

public, they

have
not

little
severely

beyond
of

expressing
my

will

judge
Pali
into

this

first and

attem

translating
what may be

from termed
I

the
"

English,
aphorisms'" that

transferring

algebraic
am

into
are

intel

phraseology. of
are

sensible
in

there

many
;

omission
such
as

and
I

commission,
not

the

translation though

but

could
of
a

avoid.

For,

living nevertheless,

at

he

very

fotmtains
to
or

Pali
single

literature/'
friend,
of my

I have,
as

unable language

consult
the

either

to

the into

choice
English.

of

correctness

renderings from
native

have

indeed
I
shall

had
have
a

much

assistance
to

Pandits, but
none

of

occasion

speak

hereafter, of the English

of

possess
able
to

sufficient
an

knowledge incorrect

language
numerous

be

rectify

translation.
to

The
have

as

and

Comments,
in derived
in

again,

which
not

I afford The

had greater

access,

entirely
I have

Sinhalese,
from the

could

any
only

help

Pandits.
mean

European

i
the

Scholar Wesleyan

this

Island,

the
"

Bev.

D.

J.

Qoobbly
to

Mission,

who

had

cheerfully"

promised

XXIV

INTRODUCTION

fortunately,
to to

removed avail
myself

by

death,

at

the

very

period

when

sired

of

his

invaluable

advice.
I believe
I have
no

As

the
to

deficiencies oflfer
any
w'U

of my

language,
"

it is

unne*

ssary

apologies,
make
cannot

^for,

doubt,
the

the

ropean

reader
of
one

gr"at
claim

allowances

for
as

comings short-

who

the

Engl^'sh

his

native

ngue.

The

errors

of the

press

are

far

too

numerous

to

be

passed
are

in

siknce.
of the

I believe

few

persons
an

in

this
has

Island
to

ig*

rant

difficulties his

which
on

Author

contend
in

th
"

in

publishing
the

works

Oriental
whose

literature

lon. Ceywas

^Witness
to

Mahavansa,
no

learned

translator

b'ged

append

less

than

thirty-five
to

closely
my
own

printed

arto

pages

of corrections.
to

Referring that the

a

work,
in Ceylon

be

peijnitted
an

remark,
to

Compositors
containing

tertain

aversion

handling
'n

MS.

Pali and
great

or

anskrit
with
that

passages

written

Roman

characters,
it
was

ally especi-

diacritical
the
men

marks.
in
one

Indeed
of
our

with

culty diffi-

printing work,
or,

establishments when

uld

be
to to

induced
continue

to

undei
it.

.ake From of

this the

taken, underin

universal

inattention and
set
names,

eylon

the

orthography took

Oiiental
themselves
:

words
to

hey

sometimes

it

upon
own

aside

my
remark,

pelling,

and has

to

adopt

their
much

and
in

this, the for six such

I need
correction the
or

hardly
of

entailed

labour

the

ress.

It wiU
errors,

scarcely

be

credited, had Even

to

that

correction

of of

hese

I have
same

often
sheet.

revise

seven

proofs
and

and

the

with it

labour,

with
to

ll the
a

vigilance great
rather

I could
many
a

bestow,
which

has

been
rendered

impossible
it necessary
too,

void add

errors,

have

copious
my work
my

list of Errata.

My
the

absence
whole

from

olombo,

and which

from

library,
w?""

during

of the
press,

period has

uring
not

this

going

through

the

ded ad-

little to

difficulties.

These

remarks,

however,

apply

to

the

Introduction.
from
errors,

The

mar,
in

which
the the

is comparatively

free Press, received

has

been

ted and
of

Wesleyan
Appendix,

Mission have
the

whilst
the

its

tion, Translavision super-

invaluable
at

Mr.
they

Skbbn,
were

Government

Printer,

whose

lishment estab-

printed.
and
of the

In

the

Introduction
scheme

Translation,
which
by

have
be

adopted

following

orthography, adopted Vowels.

will

found
JoNE"L

to

oach

closely

the

system

Sir

WiLLlAM

a
.

a;

i;
.u

u;

CONSONAKTS.

Gutturals

"

Q ^

kh

(55

"3

gh

"

Palatals Linguals

"

" Q

ch

chh

CJ

^i)

jh

^S^

"

t(Sth;S)dfidh;"^n
" " "

"

"

Dentals

"

"

t"9th;
pdph;"b^bh;"m Q
1,

^dadh;"n

Labials

"

y,

d'

r,

"

V,

CO

s,

CD

h,

1,
o

Owing

however
such
to
as

to
t,

the
1,

absence
"c.,
the

of

some

of

the
in

accented

ters,

d,

I have

been

obliged
;

printing
to

work
in

deviate

from

above
substitution printer

system

and has

adopt been
have

lics

their

stead.
to

This

again,
;

not

formly
to

attended

by

the
to

whilst

I
of

myself
n n
n

iled

pay

any will remains

attention be found
for
me

the

difference
by
an

and
n.

all which
It only

expressed
to.

unaccented
the

acknowledge
of this

assistance
;

ch

I have

received

in

the

course

publication

and

XXXvi

INTBODDCTION

TO

EAOHCHATaNa'S

GBAMMAB.
"

my

Pandit,

Batuyantubave,

who

has

assisted
been

me

during
to

considerable

period
of the

of time

which
sheets,

has

devoted
extracts

the
the

anslation

following with
own,

and

the

in

troduction.
a

I have,

his

permission,

given from

expression religious
differences

few

opinions and
the

of my

upon
of

which,
our

dissimilarity
was

education,
But,
not

and
whenever

other
we

ses,

agreement

found
to state

impossible.
that my

ffered,
views

it is but without
to

right

I did
best

hastily
most

reject
attention

first devoting

and

serious

them.
collection

In

the

of materials
will perceive

for this from

rather Notes
have

lengthy
and

introduction, tations, Annofrom

the

reader
extent

the
I

the

of assistaQce
of Colebrooke,

which

received
Muller,

published

works

Wilson,

Max

Bal-

ntyn,

Muir,

Bumouf, I

Lassen,
must

Weber,
not

Spiegel,
also
to

Goldstucker,
st^lte

ausboU, been

"c. ; and
greatly

omit several

that

ave

assisted

by

learned
to

Buddhist whom
my

iests,

especially
are

Sumakgala
due.
to

of

Hickkaduwa,

st

thanks

It is impossible
the useful
Blakb,

pass and

over,

without I

due have

acknowledge*
obtained
conferences

nt

hints

information
course

from
on

J. B.

in the

of

frequent also the

me

subject

of Oriental

literature,

and made

still from

more

valuable

translations

which

he

has

for

several

erman
I cannot
one*

and

French conclude

writers.
more

appropriately
in

than

with

the

words

in the has sine

same
reason

field of labour
than

which
to

I
''

am

engaged,
nunc

who
non

less

myself

say,

et

haec
om-

lia

justo

timore

in lucem

emitto, operae

quae,

si

non

no

displicuerint censebo.''

viris

doctis,

jam

pretium

factum

se

JAMES
*"

ALWia

Ptofessor

Spiegel's

Kammavacha.

KACHCHATANA'S

GEAMMAR.

LIB.

VL-On

Verbs.*

Learned
cross

sages,
the

by
ocean

the

ship
of

of verbs

comprehensive

om,
water

(filled with)
with)

of

radicals

(abounding
and

the

fishes

Vikarana,*f
current

Augment,
Elision, billows of of and

Tenses;

(having) ing (foambounded

of

Anubandhas;J
;% (and ||
words
on

with)
the

the

Ajjatani

shore
ye

Investigation.

Hear

my

comprehensive
with the

Verbs,

h,

diffused

beautiful
perfect
so

adornments,

I infinite

saluting
do

Buddha
that

of

ledge,

declare

they

may

be

easily

ered.
-

'i

.
-

"
-

"

"

"

"-

^"^^"

"
, _ , " " "

"
-

II

In

the

Grammatical
as

systems
as

of
most

the

East,

the

Verb
I
added
to

constitutes have,
a

the

important

well

the
;

difficult have

section.

therefore, few
notes

ed

this the

for

translation in

and

occasionally

ng
The

relation

which

the

Fali

Verb

stands

the

Sanskrit,

and

Prakrit.
vowel
or

syllable

intervening
classes

between
the Pali.
denote

the

base

and

the

Affix

several Certain
the verb

conjugational
supernumerary

in

letters

ich

verb is
"

is

inflected,
in

or

which intimate

the

class

or

conjugation
to

the

peculiai'ities

which

each

subject
See
note

its
at

inflections. end
of this
;
so,

Aj

iatanl
frequently

the
the
more
wave

Chapter.
of the past

As

the
tenses,

present the Pah.

tense

(Ajjatanl)
denominated, p.

used is

than of
*a

past

frequent in
the

occurrence ocean

in
of

the
"

present' It

verbs.*

See

Clough's

at^ra,
Attha

106.
*

ILit.

vibh^ga

"

investigations

of

sense.'

CAP:

I.

1
.

Now,*
Parassapada.

of

the

terminations

the

first

a.

Now named

of

all the

terminations,

everj

first

six

terminations

Parassajiada.f
anti
;

JEx.

ti,

si,

tha

mi,

ma.

Q.

Wherefore

the

terra

Parassapada?

'

The

Parassapada

mark]
2.

J the

Agent.

'"
Attanopada.
last

The
Of

last
the

are

a.

all

terminations

every

six

terminations

med
JEx.

Attanopada
te,
ante ;
se,

;|| that
vhe
the
;

is
e,

to

say:

"

mhe,

Q.

Wherefore

term

Attanopada?
the

*The

Attanopada

(mark)

the

action

and

object.'
a

The be
the

stanza

given interpolation
which

in

the
a

text,

as

note

to

*atha/
explain

is

of
this
a

Commentator
opens.
"

to

supposed force the

seem are

by

som

ticle
has

with

chapter

It
^

would

also and atha

that

t of Kityaused

na

also

given
of

similar

beginning
of
a

Chapter,
text:

explanation Indische "c.,' is used in

Otn

both
103.

Studien,
the beginning

iv.
of and

p.
a

In

rds

the of

Pali

^atha

Chapter,
an

word

benediction,

completion,

emphasis,

as

inceptive

rticle.* t ' Words

for words
sources.

another.* within

The other

brackets

have

been

supplied

from

Commentaries

" "Sesh"i.t

kartari for
one's

parasmaipadan
self.*
of par

"

Pdnini,

lib.

1,

Cap.

iii.

"

78.

jj'Words ^ The
the

two

systems passing and the

inflection
assa

"

the

first

conveying
and the
*to
one's

transitive

sense

action
sense,
as

'to

another;*
attano

second

bearing
"

flexive

action

garded this
the

Voices.
-Although
to

reverting Pali, the

same

like

the

Prakrit,
modern

self* does

may
not

s p

distinction

the this

extent

that
the

the

Sanskrit Sanskrit,

doe

former is

agrees
used for for

in

respect
: as,

Voice
wishes

another

with brahiuachdrina

Feiiic-

wherein

michchhate Psili

(for
change
an

He

the
and

so

ain

admissible, in the
as

religious student,* foregoing the sentence the

"aye

In

the

the
serves

above
as

equally
of
a

"ltmanepada

initial

ta
*

termination
on

is
his

rejected

example. in

das,

dakshinalah
in

(*ete)
the last

He
sentence

sleepj
may

right
thus

side.*

kewise

the

Pali,

wherein

be

rendered

3.

Each

two,

the

Pa^hama,*

Majjhima,
both
in
the

and

tama.-fa.

Of

all

the

above
each

terminations,
(set

Parassapada
third,

Attanopada, first
J5'x. person
"

of)

two

is named
That

the
say;

second,

(respectively.)
Third Second
"

is to

ti, anti
si, tha mi,
ma
"

persons,

persons,
persons.

First

In

the
te,
se,

Attanopada
ante
"

likewise,

[thus

:]

Third

persons, persons,

vhe mhe
"

"

Second
First

e,

persons.

likewise

every

where. the the

terms
'

Q,

Wherefore
shew
a

third,

second,

and

first

'

persons be
used, the

(To

that

afiixes

of) the
expressed

third

person

should
agrees

n^raa,j

[whether]
of)
the

(or not),
persons,

with

b;

(the

affixes

second

when

tumha;

and

hose
4.
".

of) the

first,

when

amha." of all by
the
three
one,

In
In

speaking
of

the

first person.
viz.,

speaking

all
one

persons,

the

first,

cond,

and

third adopted.
"

by

(verb)

the

highest

(or

first)

person

ould
*

be
-"
"

||
" " -

"

"

Eastern pa/hama
or

writers
or

begin
they

with
treat

the

third

person,

and

therefore and
uttama
name
*

'first;' middle,* above

ajjhima
chief.*

Hhe

and

the

the next, of second first they designate

to

it call it the highest

used

the

In

the

translation,

avoid

confusion,

have
third,

the

ms

t
a

ordinarily employed first persons. In P^nini, this same

dual
I.e.

in

European'

systems,

viz.,

the

second,

number;
4.

thus,

rule Tinas

is merely
trini trini

adapted
prathama

to

the

Sanskrit

which

maddhyamottam^ih."

b.

$
to

101.

J
"

Here

7idma

is used
tumha
note

as

generic and
5.
"

term

for

noun

of

the

third

person,

opposed Vide

(2
to

p.)
rule

amha

(1 p.)
^When
the
former
one

infra,

I This

may

be

thus

explained: persons,

verb takes
be
no

governs the

two

or

more

inatives

of
to

difierent
the

[plural]
of
:
"

tion terminathe first

proper
the
1.
2. 3.
4.

first should
tvan

son,

verb

person; be made
ahan

but
to

if there
agree
="

nominative second
as,

with
'we

the cook.*

So So
Tvan

cha cha

pach^ma
=

ahan
cha
tvan

pach^ma
pach^ma

'we
*we

cook.* cook.'

ahan

==

So

'ye

Ex,

Socha
*

pafhati He
'

reads

"

and

techa
*

pafhanti
They
'

read
pafhasi

"

and
=

tvancha
*

Mayan
*

pafhama^

Thoureadest
"

and'

We

read.'

tumhecha

pafhatha read
"

*Ye ahancha
'

and'

pafhdmi
I
read.'

also

So
te

pachati
pachanti
:

Mayan
^

tvan

pachama"

pachasi

We

cook.'

tumhe ahan

pachatha

pachaml.
the

like

manner

highest

person

should

be

used

in

her

tenses.

5.

The

third
the

person

when
is

n^ma,

which

grees
a.

[with
(A

verb,]
proper

expressed,
person

".*
is used
is

termination

to) third
exercises

when

noun

(nominative),
or

which

government,!

eithe

pressed
JEx,

not.
'

So
Te

gachchhati,

He

goes.'

gachchhanti,

'They

} "^^^^^
.^^.

e^P^essed.]

go.'
^
_^,

Gachchhati,
r^

'(he)
\they; x-\/xL
'the

goes.'
5

"

When

(iachchhanti,

rii

not

expressed,

go.

Q.

Wherefore
distinguish

Nominative'?
the
agent
or

[To
*

it from

the

Instrumental

in

F^Dini
the

lays

down
to

the

same

rule
thus
;
1.
"

thurd

the

first,
"

changing Yushmadyupapade
4

but

by

the

order

of

persons

dninyapi
Seshe

madhyamah

Lib.

Cap.

"

105.

sam^n^dhikarane Asmadyuttamah

"

107.

prathamah
"

"
lit.

108.

Tulyidhikarana

*that

which

has

common

property,

or

agree

ce

like]
thou

Tena
art

hanhase

tvan

Devadattena.

By

that

atta

killed.'

6.
(A
the

The

second

when
proper tumha

tumha.
to) the
is

a.

termination nominative
'

second
expressed

person,
or

is
not.

used

either

Ex.

Tvan

ydsi,

Thou
^

goest.'

Tumhe
Y^fii,
xrv.i

yatha,

Ye

go.'

| ^^^'^ /
*) "_, " When

.^^..c".^

^^P^essed.]

*(thou)
.r

goest.'
*

Yatha,

*(ye)

not

expressed.

go.
*

J
Nominative between
*By
thee
'

Q.

Wherefore
mark
the

the

?
and the rice

(To
Tayd

difference
odano.

it

Instrumental

pachchate

is

cooked.'

7.
(A

The

first,

when
proper

amha. to) the

expressed
first
person
or

fl.

termination

is

used

when

nominative Ahan

amha
^

is

either worship.'

not.

Ex.

yajdmi,
yajglma,
' '

I
*

Mayan

We

worship.'

"^r^j^^^^ 3
^ttti
"

expressed.!

Yaj"mi,
-^
.^

*(I) worship.'
,.
,

When

not

expressed.

Yajama^
Q.
Wherefore
mark
a

*(we)
^

worship.

the

Nominative'
between

?
it

[To
in

the

difference

and

the
^

Instrumental, By
me

sentence

like]

Mayd

ijjate Buddho,

Buddha

worshipped.'

8.
Know

As

to

time.
this

a.

that

Hime'

exercises

an

authority

(adhik"ra.)*

9.

Vattam^n^
The

(are)
affixes gachchhati,
*

the
are

present.
in

a.

VattamS-njl

the
goes

present
to

Tense.

Ex,

Pd^liputtan

*He
He
enters

Pdfeiliputta.'

Sdvatthin
Viharati
This

pavisati,

8S.vatthi.'
in

Jetavane,
is

'He

dwells

Jetavana.'

Sutta

supposed

to

exercise

an

authority

over

the

succeeding

10.

In
time,

commanding

and

blessing,

in

fined* unde-

the
sense

Panchaml.-f
of

a.

In

the

both
the

commanding
terminations

and
are

blessing^
Panchami.
acts.'

without

y
Ex,

distinction Karotu

of

time,

kusalan,
te

*Let *Be

him

do

meritorious
to

Sukhan

hotu,

happiness

thee.'

1 1
.

The

Sattaml,

in

the

sense

of

assent

and

nclination.
a.

"
sense

In

the

of

assent

and
is
*

inclination undefined.
mayest may

the

terminations

Sattami,
Ex.

where

the

time

||
go.'

Tvan
Kimahan

gachchheyyisi, kareyy^mi,
*

Thou

What

do.'

12.
a.

In
The

the

unperceived
(which
are

past,
signify)

Parokkh^.
time

terminations the

past,!

ceived unper-

(by
Ex.

narrator)
kila**
eva

Parokkhd.

Supine
a

m"ha,

*[He,]

it is

reported,

said

so

dream.'

^^

Since

these

moods^o of
to

not

comprehend
"

other past,
tenses."
"

tenses

under

them lead

are

susceptible

all

times,

^present,
as

and

future,

it S.

can

embarrassment

consider the

them

William's

Gr.

p.
of

This

answers

to

Imperative

and

the

Benedictive

Moods,

anskrit

Grammarians.
is great misapprehension
and
as

There the

to

the

or

Imperative

Benedictive

Moods.
chariya

origin The
that
in

of

the

name

Panchami
says,

B41avat^ra
it is
a

cha [Pa

(Sattami)
teachers.
that

tyiyan
But

ormer

the

pubb^ Mahk is
so

saiiD^]
Kiti,
some

name

given
this

Sadda
after

reference of the

to

ays,

the
such

Panchami
as

named

Sanskrit

passage, maria Gramas

the

K^tantra,

ense

of

hich

the verb. Professor Bopp

In

Pinini
says,

which place Let, likewise the

"c.,

the

Imperative

Scriptural
and
a

Imperative,
is

is

he

Classic
tenses;

Sanskrit
and,
to
case,

[Comp.

confined II. Gr.

to

the

Yedas,

f s reasonable s not the

if the

of appellation believe Sattami that

p. 951] Panchami
has
had

takes
has
a

fifth
been

place
thence

wanting in the

for

Lin.,

the

Potential,
not
a

which

is

attami,

" This if See

occupies is the

an eighth, and Potential Mood

seventh,

similar origin. identical with in Pdnini's place

Grammarians.

coined, But su
the

List.

of

the

Sanskrit

B^vat^a,

p.
is

104.

\
**

Apachchakkha
Hhe This

interpreted
or

to

mean

that

which

the

senses

cannot

iscern,

unperceived,*

'the

indefinite.* la
or

aptate

answers

to

the

Singhalese

lu

see

my

SidatsangarA,

Evan

kila

por^nd

dhu,

Thus,

it is

reported,

the

ancien

said.'

13.

In

the

perceived

from

yesterday,

Hi-

ani.
In

[the

sense

of]
or

time

past

from

yesterday, the

whether
terminations

(the
are

be)

perceived

unperceived,

ttani.

Ex.

So
Te

maggan
agamu

agamd,
*

He
They

went

to

the
to

road.' the

maggan,

went

road.'

14.
In

In
[the
day,

approximate,
sense

Ajjatani.
time
same
*

a.

of]

approximately

(or recently)
or

past

this

whether
are

(the

be)

perceived

unperceived,

terminations

Ajjatani.
*

Ex,

So
Te

maggan maggan

agami, agamun,

He
^

has

gone

to

the
to

road.'
the road.'

They

have

gone

15.

When
Hiyattani

mk
and

combined,

all

times,
when

".
combined

a.

Ajjatani.
tenses.

terminations,

ma,

are

in

all
or

the

Ex.

MdgamS
MavachS.
"

Magami, Mdvachi,

*Let
*

him
him
an

not
not

go.'
say.'
'

or

Let
of

Note.

By

the

combination

*and

[to

the

Sutta]

the

hUmi
Ma

terminations
*

[are
Go

also
thou

understood.]
not.'

Ex.

gachchhahi,

16.
In

In
the

the
future

future,
tense
*

Bhavissantl.
the

a.

terminations
will
go.'

are

Bhavissanti.

Ex.

So
Sa

gachchhissati,
karissati,
*

He

She

will
'

do.'

Te
Te

gachchhissanti, karissanti,
^

They

will do.'

go.'

They

will

17.

KM^tipatti

in

an

action

past

going

beyon

a.

Kdldtipatti

only

in

an

action

past

going

beyond.
^If
he

Ex,

So

che

tan

ydnan

alabhiss^
would have

agachchhissa^
gone.'

had

th

vehicle,

he
tan

Te

che

yanan

alabhissansu
vehicle
they would

agachchhissansu,
have

they

had

that

gone.

18.
te,
a.

The
ante;

Vattam^n^
se,

ti,
e,

anti;

si,

tha;

mi

;"

vhe;
Vattam"na

mh'e.
is
ma;

This
"

appellation ti, anti; si,

for
"

these
ante;

twelve
se,

nation termivhe;

tha;

mi,

te,

e.

Q.

What

does
time.'

Vattamdna

imply

Vattamand

[express

present

19.
"

The
tan,
This

Panchami
antan;
ssu,

fu,

antu
e,

hi,

tha:

mi

;
a.

vho;

^mase.
these
antan;

appellation
antu;

Panchami
tha;
mi,
ma;
"

is for
tan^

twelve
ssu,

tions terminavho;

"

tu,

hi,

ase.

Q.

What
and

does

Panchami
in

signify

^Panchami

[expresses]

mmand

blessing

undefined

time.'

20.
;

The

Sattaml

eyya, eyy^ma
eyy^mhe.
Sattami
;
"

eyyun etha,

eyyasi,
eran

ey

tha

eyy^mi,
;

etho,

yystvho,
a.

eyyan,

The
;"

appellation
eyyun
;

is for

these

twelve

tions terminaeyyama;

eyya,

eyydsi,

eyyStha; eyyamhe.
?
^

eyydmi,

ha,

eran;

etho, does
assent

eyyavho;

eyyan,

Q.
sense

What
of

Sattami
and

signify

The

Sattami

conveys

inclination.'

"

Kiriyitipanne

kriyitipattau.
to

Panini

lib. this

3.

Cap.

3.

"
to

139.

Sinhalese

Commentary
doubtful
"

the

Bilavat^ra,
of
an

is defined It
may

be

the or ertain * Conditional.'

See

assertion Laghukaumudi,

action.' p.

be

translated

161-2.

21.
ttha,
The
"

The
re;

Parokkhi;
tlho, vho;
Parokkh^
a,

a,

u;

e,

ttha;

a,

mha;

i,

mhe.
is for

a.

appellation
u;

these
re;

twelve
vho;

tions; terminai,

a,

e"ttha; does

mha;

"

ttha,
?

ttho,

mhe.

Q,

What

Parokkha

signify

Parokkhk

(implies)

unperceived

past^

22.

The tthun

Hiyattanl
;
se,

", li
;

o,

ttha

a,

mha

ttha,
The
A,

vhan
Iliyattani
a,

in,

mhase.
these

a.

appellation 6;
o,

is for

twelve
se,

tions terminavhan;

"

ttha;

mh";

"

ttha,

tthun;

in,

se.

Q.

What

does

Hiyattani
from

signify

*Hiyattani

(expresses)

perceived

[past]

yesterday.'

23.
^,
11

The
;
SPj

Ajjatani;
vhan
;
a,

J,
mhe.

un;

o,

ttha;

in,

nihsi;

The
"

appellation
un;
o,

Ajjatani
in,

is for
a,

these
se,

twelve

terminations;
a,

1,

ttha;

m\\k\

il;

vhan;

mhe.

Q.

What

does

Ajjatani

imply

'Ajjatani

(expresses)

ap-*

imate*

[time.]'

24.
;

The
ssami,
ssan,

Bhavissanti';
ssama

ssati,
;
"

ssanti;
ssante

ssasi,
;
ssiase,

tha

ssate,

he;
The

ssamhe.
BhaVissanti
ssasi,
;
ssan,

appellation
ssati,
ssanti;

is for
ssatha;

these

twelve

nations; termi"

ss^mi,

ss^ma;

ssate^

ss'ase,

ssavhe does

sssimhe.

Q.
the

What
future.'

BhaVissanti

signify

'Bhavissanti

ses) (expres-

25.
;
ssan,

The

K^l^tipatti; ssanih^;
ssatha^

ss^,

ssaiisu
;
ssase^

sse,

ssatha

ssinsu

ssavhe;

ssamhase.

a.

The
ssa^

appellation
ssansu; ;
ssan^

Kalatipatti
sse^

is for
ssan,

these

twelve
;

nation termi-

ssatha; seamhase.

ssamha

ssatha^

Bsin

ssase,

ssavhe

Q.
action

What
past,

does

KaUtipatti
beyond.'

imply

'KdUtipatti

(expresses)

going

26.

Hiyattani,

Sattam), Sabbadh^tuka.*
is the

Parchami,

(and
four,

attam^n^,
a.

(are)

Sabbadhdtuka
"c.

appellation

for

the

Hiyat-

ni,
Ex.

A'gam^,

^He

went.*
*

Gachchheyya,
Gachchhatu,
Gachchhati,
*

He

may him
goes.'

go/
go.'

Let

*He

Q.

Wherefore
the

Sabbadhatuka

[To
i

distinguish
as
an

then

rom]

Asabbadhatuka
End

[which
the

take]
on

augment.'f

of

First

Chapter

Verba.

Notes.

Whilst

in
remain,

the

Prakrit
seem
'

"

the

only the

tenses

of
the

the

active

voic

hich
the Pali

to

be

present,

second
p.

future

nd

Imperative
has nearly
2

[Cowell's
the
tenses

Prakrit
know^n
4
8

Prakdsa,
to

xxix]

he

all

the

Sanskrit,
5

vi

Vattamana,
6

Panchami,
7 Bhavissanti, Tense;

Sattami,
and

Parokkha,

Hiyat-

ani,

Ajjatani,
to

Kalatipatti. fifth, The

;

The
and second eighth, sixth

fi

nswers

the
and
;

Present the
the

the the

fourth,

he

Past

seventh

to

Future.
and
the

is t

Imperative

third

is the
the

Potential
differs

the

Conditional.
the

Thus,
of those

Pali

from by
"

Sanskrit
the

merely

in

absence

elaborations,

which
"

Imperative
and

is distinguished
*

into

"commanding
Sslrvadhs^tuka
between
the
*

and

blessing,"

Panini,
For
the

III.

4.

113.

"

coincidences

applicable Rules, "c.,

to

all

the

radicals.'

of

this

chapter,

also

the

Future

is divided

into
some

the

**

definite"
in

and

the

ndefinite." the

There

is, however, with

diflSculty
three
use

ing reconcilin
at

Sanskrit
This three
arises

Prasterites
from the

the

past

Tenses
two,

the

promiscuous in
the

of

least,
;

the

praBterites,

both

Pali
of

and

Sanskrit

and

from of
to

the
these

confused

definitions
Lit.
place is

Grammarians.

One

Tenses,
what took

defined before
'

[see
the

Panini,

III. day,

5.]

be,

current

and

rceived

(by

the

narrator.)
The
introduction
we

[Dr.
of
find

Ballentyn's the
in

Laghu

udi,
current not
as a

" 417.]
day," little *the
as

words,

"before
definition,

which
to

do

not

the

Pali

this of in

confusion.
any

The

Parokkha

(paroksha.
agreement
may,

s.)

past
as

period,'
construction

and
by

from

its

ort,

well

its
with

re-duplication, of
Dr.

ver,

be and

identified

the

Second

Prasterite

Wil-

s,

Professor Praeterite,
commencement

Wilson. Lang, of
which

Another

is defined
current

to

be

"

the

past

ore
Ill;

the

the

day" with
the and
;

[PS,nini
First
is

III. Prse-

Laghu
of

Kaumudi,

" 450]
and

agrees

te

Dr. PMi

Wilkins
Hiyattani
not
seem

Professor

Wilson;

identical

the

[hyastana.
to

Sans,]
as

although, by

I must
several

erve,

it does

convey,

remarked
them

opean

Grammarians,
past,

and

amongst

by

Pr.

Wilson,

ction
112.

but

not

perfected."

See*

Wilson's

Grammar,

The

remaining

Praeterite,

Lung,
can

which only

is

the
to

Third
the
as

in

opean

Sanskrit
but

Grammars,
definition in

refer

P^li
^what

jatani;

its

Sanskrit
IIL
2,

Grammars
110;

past

(indefinitely)'
does
not

[Pjlnini
with

Laghu
nor

Kaumudi,
with
past

62]

accord kala,
651.

the

Pali
Dr.

definition,

the
time

tana

bhilta
"

given

by

Wilkins,

as

the

to-day'

p.
to

According

Pdli

Grammarians,

the

three

past

tenses

in the

KACHCHAYANA's

PALI

GRAMMAR*

exist

In
p.

the

modem

Sanskrit.
Although
in
are

[See
the
for

Bopp's

Comp.
three

Gram-r

II.

729.]
past;

former,
three
is
*

all the

tensea

press past,

the

yet
to

they
"

different
Hirae

periods
past

that

is

say;

The Hiyattani
the

Ajjatani
is

within

current

day.'

The
And time
a

for

time the

recently

pa

fore

yesterday.'
is past

Parokkhi,
unperceived

or

rc-dupHcate

aeterite,
action
;
or,

*for
at

past of

(by
the
senses

the

narrator)'
no

time,

which

have past.

perception

in

other

words,

action

indefinitely

See

not

at

p.

6,

supra.

As

the
;
so

PS,li, likewise
'

like

the

Sanskrit,
the

loves
past

the

use

of

the

present

nse

in in

using the
sense.
ocean

the

former

prefers,

what

called
a

wave

of

verbs,'

the

Ajjatani,
lays down

whicl

present-perfect limit
of

The
time
yamo
as

B"lavatdra
follows
:
"

rthest

this tita

past
rattiya

Pachchhimo'
Kttlo
siyd

addham'amussa dassinan.
is previous

va

tvajjatano
tense

Veyyakarana
the

The

Ajjatani
last
5

of
3

Grammarians
of

[commences
night,
or,

from

Ydma
'

[from

a.m.]

the

its ha

rom
Thus
*

A.M.]
the

Pali

Ajjatani
of
to-day day,' in English
to

(adyatana.
'

Sans.)
action
to
me

which
has

is

regarded

the

prseterite the
current

or

which
to

taken
**

plac

ring

appears
the in

be
I
:

the

presenti

rfect,"

(amavi\
it into

Latin;
my

and

have
and,

accordingly
in view

ndered

translation
1
have

other

distinctions
in regarding
as

which
the

adverted,
"

believe,

justified
the

Hiyattani indefinite

as

the

definite

past;

Parokkhd

*^the

past."

CAP:

11.

1.

At

the

end

of

verbal,

and

nominal

roots.

ixes.
The
affixes
are

a.

at

the

end

of

these,

(viz.) verbal

and

nal

roots.

JEx.

Karo-ti,

He

does.* *He
goes.'
to
or^

Gachchhati,

[But]

kdreti, the

*He
doer,
"

causes

do

'

[where]

one

does, the

and
doer.

an-

er

bids

do

[where

one]

causes

Pabbat"yati

[as

where

Hhe

Sangha

conducts

hlmself-as-

mountain.'

Samuddayati"
Likewise

[as

where

one]

*acts-himself-like-the-ocean.'
*

Chichchifa-yati

[as where]

the

Sea

(roars)

acts-

e*

chichchife.*
"

V^irtho other

[to express]
should
s,

the

-son

of

Vasif Aa.'t

In

like

manner

affixes

be

employed.

2.

K.h,

chb,

optionally

after

tija,
optionally

gupa,

ta,
a.

m^na.;]:
The
radicals

tija,
kh

gupa,

kita,
and
s.

mdna,

take

er

them

the

affixes
^

chh
endures.'

Ex,

Titikkhati, Jiguchchhati,

He
^

He He

reproaches.'
cures.'

Tikichchhati,

Vimansati,

He

investigates.'

Q,

Wherefore
other
affixes, M3.neti,

'optionally'
e.
'

[Because
'

the

roots
;

sometimes

g.]
He

Tejati,
offers.
by
as
a

He

sharpens'

Gopati,

*He

tects';
'Making Gotama
'to

'"
chichchi7a.* Rishi who

the

noise

indicated VasiWha

mentions

composed

the
cure;*

Vedas.
and

} Tija,

endure*/
with
these

gupa,

'to

conceal;'

kita,

'to

m4na,

investigate.' } To words different igns

meanings.

exceptional In the

inflections,

the

above

translation

writer of I have

Ri!ipasiddhi
adopted

his

3.

Also

after

bhuja
with
tun.*
ghasa,

ghasa

hara

supa,

"c-,

n
a.

desideratives
The after
and
s.

radicals them,
in

bhuja,

hara,
with

supa,
tun,

"c., the

optionally

ke

desideratives

affixes

kh

h,
Ex.

Bhottu
sense

michchhati
*

Bubhukkhati.
eat,'
= ==

In

the

of]

He-wishes-to

Bubhukkhati.

Ghasitu
the
sense

michchhati
*

Jighachchhati.
==

In

of]

He-wishes-to-eat,'
=

Jighachchhati.

Haritu
the
sense

michchhati
*

Jiginsati.j
=

In

of)

He-wishes-to-take,'
=

Jiginsati.

Supitu the
sense

michchhati
^

Sussiisati.
=

In

of]

He-wishes-to-sleep,'
=

Sussilsati.

Pitu
the
1st
sense

michchhati
*

piv"sati.
=

In

ofj
Wherefore
in
to
an

He-wishes-to-drink,'
^optionally'?

pivasati. the
same

Q.
used

[Because

words

infinitive

form,

thus]

Bhottu'michchhati,

He

wishes

eat'

2ndQ.

Wherefore* do
not

in desideratives take
those

with
as

tun?'

[Toshewthat
*

rimitives

affixes,

in]

Bhunjati,

He

eats.

4.

After

nominal ^ya
(in the

root

denoting
the
of)
a

comparison of
treatment.
comes

the
a.

nominative,
The
affix
root,

in
sense

sense

dya

treatment

aft

he

nominal

when

it denotes

comparison

to

the

Nominativ

Ex,

Pabbatayati,

He
*

conducts
It
roars

himself
like

as

mountain.'

Chichchi^ayati,
Note,
"

chichchi^a.'

In

like

manner

should

others

be

employed.

5.
*

And

lya
the is
111.

denoting

comparison.

The This

sign word

of

Infinitive. in
"

written

all

the

Pali it not

dUvaiiLra,

p.

Qy,
1,

Shonld

Jiginsati, works be JiAinsati?

also

see

CloughV

Panini,

III.

11.

t.

And
a

the

affix
root

iya

(in

the

sense

of)
a

treatment,

comes

nominal

which

denotes

comparison.*

x,

Achhattan

chhattamivaicharati=chattiyati,
an

*He umbrella

treats

which

is not

umbrella,
miva
a

like

an

==^chattiyati.' *He
treats
as

Aputtan him

putta

S,charati=puttiyati,
==

n,

who

is not

son

puttiyati.'
denotes likeness
case

Ist

Q.
the
to
a

Wherefore

that

which
exact

comparison?'

(To
ation conformnot

difference
model,
in

between
which

and
rule

mere

latter

the

does

apply;

Dhammamacharati,

*He

practises

dhamma.'f
?

2nd

Q,
may
a

Wherefore denote
an

^treatment'

(To

shew
;

that

although it does
rule
not

verb

identical

likeness
or

yet

if
the

ey

continuance
;

of
miva

the

action,

usage,

does

apply umbrella.'

as)

Chatta

rakkhati,

^He

preserves

(it)

like

In

like

manner

should

other

(affixes) be

used.

6.

After
After becomes
Attano
*

nominal
root,

root

implying
desire for

self-desire.
one's

nominal

implying

selfj

the

iya.

J
ti for
^
"=

Ex.

pattamichchhatidesires
;
a

pattiyati,
'
==

He

vessel

himself

pattiyati.
for
for for

So

likewise

vatthiyati,
*

He

desires

raiment

himself.'

Parikkhdriyati,

He

desires

Parikkh^ra"
robes
for for

himself.'

Chivariyati,
Dhaniyati, Pa/iyati,
* ^

He

desires desires

yellow wealth

himself.'

He

himself.'

He
the

desires

clothes

himself.'
'

Q.

Wherefore
where
the

words
expressed

'desire

for

one's

self?
one's

[To
the

shew rule

desire

is not

for

self,

In

the

B^avat^ra
to

this

is explained

to
*a

be

camparison Accusative. i.e.

'
"

[dutiyantan
himself p.
297.

nikman]
to

noun

nominal in the

root

which
case'

not de-

second

He

conforms

the

duties

of

religion.'

See

Laghu

Kaumudl,

does

not

apply

as]

Annassa

pattamichchhati,

He

desires

vessel

for

another.' should others

sense
ne

So

likewise

be

used.

7.

lit

IhiB

of

the

Causal
ii^pe

Agent

the

Causal

(affixes)
In
ne,

naya

n^pay^

after

the
a.

radical.
tlie
seiise

of
nape,

the

Causal
;

Agent*
and they

all

roots

take the

th

affixes,

naya,

napaya

receive

lation appel-

of
Ex,

Karita

the

Causal.^

K^reti,

karayati,
one

kar4peti,
does,
and

[or]
another

karipayati,

"

He

causes

do

'"[where]

bids

the

doer

'do

';

[where

one]

causes

the

doer. karapenti,

Karenti,
to

kdrayanti,
do^
"

(or)
others

kir4payanti,
bid
the

^They
*do,
causes

ause

[where]
pdchayati,

some

do,

and

doers
*

do.

Pdcheti,
cook'
"

pdchS-peti
one

(or)
and

p"chapayati,

He

to

[where] one]
causes

cooks,
the

another

bids

him

'cook';

[where
Pachenti,
to

cook;

p"chayanti,
'

pdchdpenti
some

(or)
cook,

pdchd.payanti,
others

They

ause

cook
'

"

[where]

and

bid

those

who

ook,

thus

cook-cook.'

So

likewise,

Haneti,

hanayati,

handpeti,

(or)

hanelpayati,

'He

causes

kill.' Bhaneti,bhanayati,bhanApeti,
utter.'

(or;

bhan"payati,

^He

causes

to

In

like

manner

should
'

also the
sense

others of karoti,

be
the

used"

Q.

Wherefore
primitives,

in

Causal
does'

Agent'
;

?
'

[T

exclude

such

as]

'He

pachati,

He

cooks.'
Note
"

By
;

the as)
cause*;

insertion

'

of
'

the
causes

sense,'

the
to

affix

la

may

(understood
*

Jotalati,
but it Also light

He

glitter.'
so

Hetu

the
"

means see

here

[yo
1,
on

kireti
4, ^^.

hetu]
Clough's

*He

who
version

oes

the

act

the

agent.'
no

Pinini,

B'^Iavat^ra

throws

whatever

the

He

translatfes

8.

After naya,
After
a

crude

noun

with

the

sense

of

b,
a.

".
nominal
it is named
=

root

with

the

sense

of

verb,

the

aflSx

naya;

and

K^^rita.* hattinS. atikkamati the

Ex.

atihatthayati

maggan,
way.

^By

s-of-the-elephant
=

he-goes-beyond-f
vinslya upagdyati, *He

upavinayati

plays

music

with

lute.'

dalhayati=

dalhan
=

karoti

vinayan,

^He
ratti,

excels 'The

in

vinaya.

visuddhayati

visuddha

hoti

evening

is

ht.'
"

Note.
are

By

the

addition
;
as

of

the
^

^and'

such
incurs

aflSxes danger
;'

as

S-ra, upak-

admissible
^

antararati,
a

He

"lati,

He

devises

plan.'

9.
In

Y4
the

in the

substantive
and

and
passive

passive
voices,

voices.
the .affix
ya

cu

substantive the
radicals.

after

all

Ex.

#hiyate,

*(it is) standing.'

*

bujjhiyate,
*

is known.'

pachchate,

is

cooked.'

labbhate,
kariyate,

is

acquired.' done.'

'is

ijjate,* is
uchchate,

sacrificed.'

'is spoken.'
is

Q.

What
?

the

force expression

'

of

the

substantive
active
*

and
is
;

passive

es'
in

[By

that

the
karoti,

voice

excluded
'

the
;
"

following
'

examples]
he reads.'

he

does'

pachati,

he

s'

pa^hati,
By
in

Note.

the

insertion than

of

yo

[in

the

rule]
and

the

affix

ya

is

issible
daddallati^
See
i.e. This
"

other

the

substantive
intensely.

passive

voices

*it illumines

'|

preceding

Completes
exception

rule. his
so

journey.
far
as our

observation

extends,

is confined

to

verbs

10. ch.

the

substitution it, lor class

of and

y.

tlie

the and final letter

v

letters
of

the

radi

a.

As
V.

exigency
may

may

require
for

the
it

letters
i.e.

of

the

ch

class

y.

(or)

be

substituted
to

[see
the
*are

preceding radical. said.'

rule
i

the

affix Ex,

ya,

joined

the

final
;

letter

of

Yuchchate,
uchchate,

^is
Ms

said'

vuchchante,
*

said';

uchchante,

are

paid.'
^are

niajjate,
pacbchute,

Ms

intoxicated'; Ms

majjante,
pachchante,

intoxicated.'
cooked.'

cooked';
known';

^are

bujjhate, yujjjhate, kujjhate, ujjhate,

bamiate,

Ms Ms

bujjhante,
;

^are

known.' fought.'
'are

fought'
provoked'; abandoned';

yujjhante,

'are

Ms
Ms
Ms 'is 'is

kujjhante, ujjhante,
hannante, kayyante, dibbante,
'are

provoked.'

*are

abandoned.'

killed';
done'; played';

killed.'
done.'

kayyate, dibbate,

'are

'are

played.'*

11.
a.

Optionally
When
the
are

the
ya
comes

augment
after
a

of

class.
the

affix

radical,

vowels

the

i Ex,

class

optionally
'is done,'

augmented. kariyanti
'

kariyyate

'are

done

';

gachchhiyate

is gone,'

gachchhiyyanti

are
'

gone.' ?

Q.

Wherefore inserted
in

'

optionally
a

[To
the

shew

that

the

augment
'

is not

word

like

following]

kayyate

done.'

12.
a.

And
When
the

assumes

the
ya
comes

previous
after
a

letter,
radical, it.

affix
into

the

same

optionally
Ex.

changed
vurftfbate,
'

the

letter

preceding

'is

increased';
';

'phallate,
'

'is

fructified';
';

dammate,

is

subjugated
'is
'

labbhate,

is

acquired

sakkate,

'is

abled;'

dissate

seen.'

Q.

Wherefore
'

optionally'
is
""

[To

mark

the

exception

in]
'"'"'"

damyate,
"" " " "'
"

subjugated.'
" "
,"","-

.ill

"

1^

"

""!"

""

.,

"

M,l

"

^"^

..ll

^1.

"""""

13.
a.

And
As

likewise

in

the

active
take place

voice.

(different)
rules]
to

substitutions affix
same

[according
and
the
affix passive
yamay

to

ious
so

the
the
active

ya,

in

the

substantive
for

es;

likewise
in

substitutions
voice.
*

adopted
"^x.

the
'

biijjhati,

he
*

knows'; he

vijjhati,

he

pierces,'

mannati

thinks,'

sibbati

stitches.'

14.
a.

A
In
the

(after)
active
"c.
*

bhii,
the

"c.*
affix
a

voice class.

comes

after

the

cals radi-

of
jEx.

the

bhu,

bhavati

is' ;

'

partiati

reads

';

pachati

cooks

';

yajati

acrifices.'

15.

After

nidh

"c
,

with

niggahita-^the

fore,
a.

".
In
the "c.
active class, the

voice

the
a

affix

comes

after
augment

radicals

rudha,
letter

with

niggahita

before

[the

al
Ex.

of

root.]
bhindati
*
' '

rundhati
"

'obstructs'; the
insertion
o,

breaks';
the
a

chhindati
rule,

*cuts.'

Note.
as

By i, i,
e,

of

and

[to

other]

affixes

and

are

admissible

with

niggahita rundhiti,
or

before
run-

[final letter
'

of
';

the

root];
^

as

rundhiti,

ti,

obstructs

sumbhoti,

shines.'

16.
a.

Ya
In the

after
active

div,
voice
class.
';

"c.
the

affix

ya

comes

after

the

cals radi-

of "!r.

the

diva,
*

"c. sports
';

dibbati
'

sibbati
'

^stitches';

yujjhati

^fights';

j^hati
17.

pierces

bujjhati

knows.'

And

nu,

nA,J
rules

and

unA,

after

su,

"c.

This

and
roots.

the

following

are

in

reference

to

the

several

classes

verbal t Name

for

the

Sanskrit

anusvsLra.

a.

In the

the

active
of
or

voice

the
"c.

affixes
class.

nu,

nd,

and

unjt

come

after
Ex.

radicals,

su,

abhisunoti
*

abhisuD"ti
dvunoti
or

^well-hears';
"vun"ti

sanvunoti

or

san-

vunS,ti

obstructs'; 'obtains.'

'strings';

p"punoti

papundti

18.
a.

N^
In
the

after
active class. 'buys'; punati

ki,
voice,

"e.
the affix
nk
comes

after

the

cals radi

of
Ex,

ki,

"c.

kindti
'cuts';

jindti
'purifies.'

'conquers';

dhunati

'shakes';

lunati

19.
a.

And
In

ppa
active

and
voice,
"c.

nM,
the

after
affixes
ppa

gah,
and

"c.
nha
come

the
of

afte

the

radicals
Ex.

gaha,
or

class.*
'takes.'

gheppati

ganhati

20.
a.

O,
In
the
of

and
active
tanu,

yir^
voice, "c.

after
the
class.

tan,
affixes
o

"c.
and

yira

come

afte

the

radicals
Ex.

tanoti

'stretches';

tanohi

'stretch

(th"u)';
'do

karoti

'

does'

karohi

'do

[thou]'; Ne,
nay
active
of chura,
or

kayirati

'does';

kayirahi

[thou],'

21.
a.

after
the

chur,
affixes

"c.
ne

In

the

voice,

and

naya

come

afte

the

radicals
Ex.

"c.

class. 'steals';
'

choreti

chorayati
or

chinteti

or

chintayati

thinks';

manteti

mantayati

deliberates.'

22.

Attanopada

(mark)

the

action

and

th

object -fa.

The the

attanopada

(affixes) are

used

to

mark

the

action

and

object.|
by
the that the

"

Although
to

ble

ascertain
of
ante

6rrectness

"c.
1

appendix, is the such here ; and

*"c.'
case.

class Some

is meant; grammarians
the rule
to

have

not

been

dispute gaha.

they

limit

See

Cap.

"

Q.

Ex,

uchchate

is

spoken
acquired';

';

uchchante labbhante
';

are ^are

spoken.'
acquired.'

labbhate
*

Ms

majjate yujjhate
kayyate

is intoxicated
*

majjante
'are

are

intoxicated.'

is fought';

yujjhante
kayyante
^are

fought.'
done.'

Ms

done';

23.
a.

Also
The

the

agent.

attanopada

(affixes)

also

mark

the

agent

[in

the

ive Ex.

voice.]
maniiate

^he
^it
*

respects'

[himself.]
[of
itself.

rochate sochate

brightens'

it grieves.'
it illumines.'

sobhate

bujjhate
jfi-yate
24.
^

*he
he

understands'
'

[by
[by
his
own

himself]

produces

effort.]
radicals
and

Verbal

terminatiens

after

fixes.
a.

Verbal
affixes

terminations

come

after
"c.,

the and

radicals
ending

ending
with the

[beginning]

from

kh,

ita.*
Ex,

titikkhati ^he

^he

endures';

jiguchchhati

*he

reproaches';

ansati

investigates.' miva

Ta^dkan
lake

samudda
conducts
^he
to

att^nam'"charati
like

samuddslyati

itself
treats

the
as a

sea.'

Puttiyati
causes

(him)

son

of

his

own';

p^chayati

cook.'

25.
a.

Parassapada,
The
karoti
^

the
mark pachati

agent.
agent, ^he

parassapada

the

f
*

Ex,

^he

does,'

cooks,'

pa^hati

he

reads,'

hchhati

he

goes.'

26.

Bhft,

"c.,

are

radicals.

"

See

ante

" 7.

a.

Classes
of

of

words

such

as

bh^,

"c.,

receive

the

lation appel-

radicals.
*

Ex.

bhavati
pachati

is '; bhavanti cooks

';

are.'
^

pacbanti

cook.'

charati chintayati

walks.'
*

thinks.'
*

gachchhati
"nd

goes.'

of

the

Second

Chapter

on

Verbs,

Notes.

In

the
in

Pkli,
the

the

roots
;

dhatu)
and
as

are

nearly

identical into

with

hose

Sanskrit
the
same

are

distinguished Sanskrit,
them. be
one

different

conjugations,

in

the
to

by

anubandhas,

haracteristic The
;

letters

aiSixed
seems

Prakrit
for

verb former

to

far

less

complete equal

than
to

th

Pali

the

has though

but

Conjugation,
of

th

irst

in

the

Sanskrit,

fragments
occur

forms

belonging works.

ther

Conjugations
Cowell's
Pali
the

frequently

in

the

Dramatic

(Pr.
The

Prakrit
forms

Prak^,

p.

xxix,)
generally,
ones

of

verbs
than

and
the

participles, Prakrit

depart

ess

from

Sanskrit

do

(see
In
are

Tables

Dr.

Muir's there
of
are

Sanskrit
ten

Texts,

XL

p.

97,

et

seq.)
Pali and

the

skri San-

Conjugations.
to

To 2nd,

the
3rd,

unknown
6th in

three

them,

answering

the

th

Sanskrit. True
it

is

that
at

Kachchayana

gives

(see

"

19

supra
But,

another

class, is the

the

head
in

of

which
of

he this

places

ffah.

no

only the

existence

the

Pdli, the

[eighth
of

| class

ignored

in

Dh5,tu

Manjusa,

but

writer

the

Mah^

Saddaniti

ve

notieed,
gah
comes

is

mistake^
to

"

which
discoyer
and
ki

is indeed
any

probable;
other

since^

ept

it is difficult

Pali

radical
may

ch

under
as a

thia

class,
of

since class.

aUo

gak

itself

conjugated
The

verb

the

seven

Conjugations
fifth, seventh, thus:

known

to

the ninth,

Pali,
and

answer

to

the

st,

fourth,

eighth,

tenth

classes

the

Sanskrit

verb;

The

writer

of

the

Dhktu

Manjusa
of the

remarks

that

the

second,
are

rd,

and

sixth

Conjugations
in
the
place first

Sanskrit
Pali
verbs,
classes.

Grammarians
which
It
may

prehended the
readily
same

of the

also

occupi

in

Sanskrit
three merely

indeed

believed
over

that

the
are

classes

which

the

Sanskrit
of verbs

sesses

the

Pali,

the

elaborations
primitive
yet it
not

marians. Grammay

For,
to

although
one

in

the

Sanskrit,
classes;

ong

any

of far

the

first

nine

is

significant
to

fact second second

that

by

the

greatest

number
is

do

belong

and

third:
a

and
of
p.

the

third

only
in

distinguished the
special

from
tenses.

by

syllable

reduplication

opp's
In

Comp.

Gram.

107.]
of
like
the of about the
130

considering
also
root,

the

characteristics

the
the

Sanskrit
first,

classes, adds
nearly
a

is

remarkable
"

that

the

sixth,

to
one

the
roots

difference

between

first

class

of

usand
sixth

(almost
which

the
contains

half

entire
roots,"

number),
being,
as

and
re-

class

mark

KA^CHCHAYANA'S

PALI

GRAMMAR.

ise

the

vowel
*^A3

of
a

the has take

root
no

by

Guna^
adds through

while the

the
same

latter
writer,

retai

pure."

Guna,"
place

**n

scrimination
1

can

this
roots
are

vowel
which

between

asses

and

6;
a

but
as

nearly

all

the

belong
in

ther,

having
class."

the

radical

vowel,

reckoned

rst

may

also

here

observe

that
are

in

the

Vedassome
as

verbs,
if

iy

of first

the
"

sixth
a

conjugation,
from
not

inflected it may

belonging

circumstance
roots
were

which

be

inferred
ten

th

Sanskrit

originally

divided

into

classe

The the

correspondence remaining

between

the will

Pali

and

Sanskrit
seen,

affix
the

Conjugations
very

be
The in of
a

readily

ences diffe

being
the the
consonant
an

indeed
two

slight

distinction, the Pali,

however, is, that

in

tween

first takes

Conjugations
an

cond

root

augment p.

niggahita

before
the
frequent

nal
is

[Bopp,
which
in
the

108.]
however of
the

In

the is not

affixes
very

Cerebral
in

anubandha, The
n

li.

affixes

seventh

class

denotes
for

bstitution
^

of

vriddhi

[see

Balavatdra,

p.

88]

the

radica

ement. Although
the

the

Grammar
verbs

before known
of
to

us

does

not

distinctly and
of

name

derivative the

the

Sanskrit,
form

has the

ewn

peculiarities
at

the

Frequentative

verb Pali

ee

note

p.

17,) yet
on

the
this

existence

of

them

in

the

doubted. third

More

subject

hereafter.

See

notes

Chapter

infra.

CAP:

in.

1.

Sometimes
radical*

the
is
letter

primary

letter

of

monosyllabic

reduplicated.
of
a

fl.

The

primary

monosyllabic

radical

is

sometimes

reduplicated.
JKr.

titikkbati

forbears.'
*

jiguchchhati
tikichchhati
*

reproaches.'
*

cures.'

Yimansati

investigates.'
'

bubhukkhati
'

wishes wishes
to

to

eat.'

pivasati daddallati

drink.'

^illumines

intensely.'

jahati

^abandons.'
*

chankamati

walks
*

repeatedly.'
?
^

Q.

Wherefore

sometimes'
*

[To

mark

the

exceptions

as] 2.

kamati

walks';

chalati

shakes.'

The
The
first

first

abbhasa
of
a

-freduplicate
root

a.

[letter]
'holds.'

is

named

abbhasa.

Ux.

dadhkti

Ogives.'

.dadati babhiiva

'

became.'

3.
a.

Is
The

short.

X
in

(first) vowel
Ogives';

the

abbhasa
'holds';

is

short.

JEx,

dadjiti

dadhkti

jahati
become

'abandons.'

4.

The

second

and

fourth

first

and

ird.
a.

When

the

abbhasa

is

either

the

second

or

fourth

flettet

Lit.
Same

"

root

having
"

one
see

single
1-4.

vowel,

in

Panini

vi.
4-59,

Same

in

Panini,

vii.

in

class]

they
of

are

(respectively)
class.]*
*

changed

into

the

first,

and

hird
Ex,

[letters

that

chichchheda

He

(it is reported)
to
eat.*

cut.'

bubhukkhati
babhuva dadhkti
^
'

^wishes

became.'

holds.'

5.
a.

Ch.
When
is changed

class
the

for

k
is

class.
a

abbh^a
into

[or

another letter

of

that]
in
*

class,

th

ame

[its corresponding
*

the]

ch

class

Ex,

chikichchhati,
'

cures

';

jiguchchhati,
*

reproaches walks ly'; repeated-

jighachchhati, jiginsati,
6.
a.
*

wishes
wishes

to

eat';

chankamati,

to

take';

jangamati,
t.

frequently

goes

Optionally
Optionally
the

v.

and
of
v.

for
the

m^na
radicals

and
mdna

kita.
and

abbbasd
into

kit

re

respectively
Ex,

changed

and

t.
^

vimansati

^investigates';

tikichchhati

cures.'

Q,
the

Wherefore

^optionally'?
^

[To
cures.'

mark

the

exception

in

example]
J
The

chikichchhati

7.
a.

for
h

h,
the

in
*

abbhasa

is

changed
or

into

j.
^sacrifices';

JFx.

jahS-ti

abandons';

juvhatif

juhoti

h^ra

*(it is said) he

abandoned.'

8.
a.

Optionally
The

{%
the

and

for

the
i;

last.
optionally
to ';
a.

last"

of

abbhasa

becomes,
piv^sati
*

jFa:.

jiguchchhati
investigates';
';

^reproaches';

Svishes
wishes
to

drink';

vimansati
*

jighachchhati
*

eat

babhii-

became
Or
a

dadh^ti

holds.'

in

other

words

nto

verbal

non-aspirate/ diflference-"
the Pali

when This

the
rule
too

abbhiksa

is

an

accords
4-54.

with

aspirate, Painini ;

it but

is

changed
a

with

slig

See
the
v

Panini,
and h
vanna

viii.
change is

In

positions

in

composition.
a

Whenever
text

the

word

the

(ivanna)
'last*

the

long

vowel
rassa

mentioned with is included.

short

The

vowel, Balavatara

as

sajs

vannaggahanan " By the

sabbattha
is

digha inherent

sangahanatthan. in

Q.
the

Wherefore

^optionally'?

[To
^

mark
to
eat.'

the

exception,

as

example]
And
Optionally
a

bubhukkhati

wishes

9.

niggahita.
an

a.

augment

of

niggahita

(anusvslra)

after

abbh"sa.
^

Ex.

chankamati
';

walks
^

repeatedly
frequently

';

chanchalati

ly frequent-

shakes

jangamati

goes.'

Q,
in

Wherefore
the

^optionally'?
^

[To
wishes

mark
to

the

exceptions
';

instances]
intensely.'

pivasati

drink

daddallati

lumines

10.

After
sa,

pa

and

ma,

v^

and

man

[before

e
a.

affix]
When
receive

the after

roots

p^

and

m^
the

take

the

affix

sa,

optionally

the

abbhasa,

substitutions

va

and

man

ectively.
pivasati

Ex,

^wishes

to

drink';

vimansati

investigates.'

1 1.
a.

Tif"ha
Optionally
ti^Aati stand
*

for
ti^Aa
stands
';

thk,
is substituted ti^^hatu
*
*

for let
may

root

such
';

as

riia.

Ex,
may

him

stand

ti^^heyya

';

ti^/heyyun
*

they
'

stand.'

Q.
the

Wherefore

optionally ^hiti
^

[To

mark

the

exception

as

example] Piba
Optionally
'

stands.'

12.

for
piba
drinks

p^.
is
';

a.

substituted
*

for him

the

root
';

pa.
^

Ex,

pibati drink.'

pibatu

let

drink

pibeyya

he

Q.
the

Wherefore

'

optionally
*

[To

mark

the

exception

as

example]

pdti

he

drinks.'

13.

J^
Optionally

jan
*

and

na

for
nfi. are

n^.
substituted
*

a.

jan jfi,
knows
';

and

for
';

the

root
*

nk, naay

Ex.

j^n"ti

j^neyya

may

know

jdniyS.

28

kachchayana's

pali

gbammar.

Q.

Wherefore
^

'

optionally

[To

mark

the

exception]

viiinfi-yati

is well-known.'

14.

Optionally

passa,

dissa,

and

dakkha

for

disa.
a.

Optionally
root

passa,

dissa

and

dakkha

are

substituted

for

the

disa. passati
'sees';

JEx,

dissati

'sees';

dakkhati

'sees.'

Q.
addasa*

Wherefore
'he
saw.'

'optionally'?

[To

mark

the

exception]

15.

Ch by

for

the

final

consonant,

[when
becomes
ch,

followed

the]
final

afiixes

chh.,
of
the

k.-f
radical

a.

The

consonant

when

it

(the root) takes the aflSx chh. "x. jiguchchhati reproaches';

'

tikichchhati

'cures';

jighach-

'

chliati

wishes

to

eat.'

16.
a.

And
The
final

ka,

when

k^a.
of the radical

consonant

becomes

ka,

when

it

takes
JEx,

the

a"Bx

kha.
'forbears';

titikkhati

bubhukkhati

'wishes

to

eat'

17.
a.

Gin
Gin
the

for hara,

when
for

sa.

is substituted
affix
sa.
'

the

entire

root

hara,

when

it

takes
Ex.

jiginsati

wishes

to

take.'

18.

^ha
Aha

and

bhiiva,

for bru

and

bhii

(before)
for

parokkh^.
a.

and

bh^va
bhii,

are

Trespectively)
parokkha he said.'

substituted

the

radicals
JSx,

br^
aha dhu

and

before

terminations.:^

'(it is reported)

'(it is reported) they

said.'
it became.'

babhilva babhilvu
*

'(itis reported)
'(it is reported)

they

became.'

This The

Vutti

is sometimes addas^. written is deficient in explaining

the

"c.

Q.

Wherefore
see

parokkha?

[To
" 14]
b"forc

mark

the

exception have

as

ia

Ajjatani,
19.

Cap.

1.

abruvun

'they

said.'

0^"tionally,

all.

chchh.

for

the

nal
a.

of

gami.
the

Optionally
all

final

in the

root

gamii,

becomes

chchh

ore
"Jx,

the

affixes

and

terminations.

gachchhamano
going.

gachchhanto gachchhati
*
*

he

goes.

gameti

gaehchhatu
gametu

'

let

him

go.'

gachchheyya
'

he

may

go.'

gameyya

agachchha
*

he

went.'

agama

agachchhi agami gachchhissati

gamissati

he

has

gone.'

he

will

go.'

agachchhiss^
"

'

he

would

have

gone.'

agamissa

agachchhiyati

he

is

gone.'t
?

agamiyati

Q.

Wherefore
to
^

'

of

gami

[To
that

shew
it does

that
not

the
apply

rule
to

is

ited

the he

given

verb

;| and

is]

chhati

wishes.'
a

20.
"

The

in

vach
gameyya brackets.
these

[becomes]
my be

before

Ajjatani.
of
the

Gameti,
with

gametu, them within

seen

and

also

the

causatives

forms

en

It
Even

will

be
were
a

that
no

examples
statement

do

not
to

illustrate
the effect

the that
the

there

ter

had

previous

express knowledge the

fact.

parokkhi. Pali this

vutti
was

ld,

clearly
the

establish between difference

the
same

Sanskrit of For obviously Pali the and

.

Grammar,
the

object
in
3,

above here

to

Sanskrit

come

the

See

Punini

which 77; and

latter

ish

Laghu

a.

Before
o.

Ajjatani

terminations^

the

in

the

root

vac

becomes
Ex.

avocha
Wherefore
in

*he

has
*

said';

avochun

^they
'

have

said.' the
examples
*

Q.

before

Ajjatani
*

[Witness
spoke
;

the

hiyattani,

as]

avach^

he

avachu

the

spoke.'

21.
a.

Before
Before gachchh"hi the

hi

mi

and

ma,

the
and

is
the go

long.
a

terminations
'

hi,
';
^

mi,

ma,
^

is

long

Ex.
*

go

thou

gachchhami
go.'

';

gachchha-

we

go
"

';

gachchhdmhe
reason

we

Note.

By

of

the

insertion

of

*mi'*

(in
hi ;
as

the

rule)

th

is

sometimes

short

before

the

termination

gachchhahi

go

thou.'

22.
a.

Optionally
The
termination for

hi
hi

is
is

elided.
elided. thou.'

optionally
*go

Ex.

gachchha
gama gamaya

gachchhahi
^go

for

gamehi
for

thou.' ^go thou.' the rule

to

gamayahi
^hi'?

Q.

Wherefore

[To

limit

that
^

particular he
is

ermination;

23.
in

as] gachchhati, in And ssa,

*he

goes';

gamiyati

gone.'

bhavissanti;
eha, oha,

[whenj
e.

the

vowel
a.

hoti-f- [becomes]
the
in the
ssa

Optionally
the

in bhavissanti
hu is

terminations

is eha,

elided,

hen
Ex.

vowel

radical!

changed

into

oha,

hehiti hohiti heti

hehinti hohinti

rhewiUbe.'
hehissati

J"^^^'
hehissanti
^.

rtheywUlbe.'

hohissati
hessati
*

hohissanti hessanti
I

am

not

sure

whether

have

correctly

rendered

the

above

note.

is not

intelligible.
Grammarians strictly
the
root

Eastern
when

frequently
should

give
be

the

inflected

verb

in

the

third

rson

given.

Q.
the

1st.
same
^

Wherefore
import^
to

hi?

To
the

exclude
rule
*

the

radical
apply
;

hhii

which
';
*

does they
'

not

as]

vissati

he

will

be

bhavissanti
in

will
?

be.'
shew
^

Q.

2nd.
is limited
are.'

Wherefore
to

bhavissanti
tense^
as

[To
hoti

that
is
'

the

the

future

in]

he

honti

hey

24.
a.

K^ha
Before
foi
is the

for
bhavissanti radical

kara

including

its
optionally its

affix.
kaha
is

terminations
kara including

sub"

tuted
ssa

affix,

[when]

always

elided. kdhiti
^

Ux.
';

kahati,

^he
do
';

will kahdroa

do';
*

k^hasi,
we

kahisi
do.'

Hhou

wilt

kS^hami

will

will

Q.
do
"

Wherefore
'

^optionally'?
^

[Witness]
do.' the
'

karissati

^he

karissanti that may

they
force

will
of
to

Note

by be

the

words
roots

including

its

affix

he

rule

extended]
the chhdmi,

other

before
the

bhavissanti
substitutions
radical relate
';
*

minations,

when and I
"

radicals chh^raa,
';

take
e.
*

mi,

khama,
*

g.,
we

the shall

vas,

khdmi
vasa

shall

relate

vakkhama
^

the
we

ical

vachchhdmi

shall

dwell

';

vachchh"ma

ll

dwell.'
JEnd

of

the

Third

Chapter

on

Verbs,

Notes. Although
derivative
the

Grammar
verbal

before
forms

us

has
to

not

distinctly the Sanskrit; first

is not

defined
yet,

known
to

will

be
this

observed

(see

examples

the

very

rule

with

ch
any

Chapter
It and

commences),
has
the the

that

the the

Pali

deficient

of them.

Passive, Intensive

Causal,

the

Nominal,

Desiderative,
The
to

forms.
receives
y

Pali,
the

like

the

Sanskrit
ii.

Passive,
Although

the

syllable

root.

Cap.

"

9.

is

frequently

lost

own';

it

is, The

nevertheless, Pali
ia
as,

retained
in

in

words

like

kariyate

is done/

is,

this

respect,

different

from
generally

akrit,
ia

which,
or

the

formation
or

of

the

Passive,

kes

ij^ja ;
Pali
the

pa^Iai
^is

Vararuchi pacfhijjai [

vii.
ai,

,] for

the
see

pa^^hate
Dravidian of
its

recited.'

In
ei,

the which

Prdkrit
runs

early

termination principal videi

'to

through
e.

entire

body
talei
*

dialect,
sow';

the

Tamil;

g.

av

ose';

head';
In the

irukkei

(the

verbal
may

nouns

or) 'being.'
the

termination
of

ijja, however,
the Sanskrit
y,

be
g
or

vered

representative
y

viz

j,

in

ich

the

passes

in

different

forms

of Bopp's

the

Prakrit

and

do-European
17,
110.

languages.

See

Comp.

Grammar,

In

the
kpe,
are

Pali
and

there apaya;

are

four

forms ii. the the

the

of

the

Causal
of
g.

verb, these,

viz

a,

[Cap.
found
answers

"

7,]

whilst,
e.

tw

one

generally

in
to

Prakrit,
Pali
p is

karedi
and into the

or

vedi.

The
as

first
in

kareti, changed
as

second
to

in which,
These

the

Dravidian,
may

v)

kkra

ti.

again

be

regarded which
are

the known

vernacular
to

forms

karayati
which,
aflSx, in
aya

and

karapayati,
moreover

the

Sanskrit,

it is
the
k, the

remarkable,
pay
a
a

the

first
to

aya

is the
roots
a,

ing prevail-

second
or

being

confined
to

'those into

which

ding

in

diphthong
of
a

be

changed

receive
to

fore

aflSx

p,'
p.

as

in

sthapay^mi The

*I

make

stand.

pp's.

Comp.
Prakrit,
"

Gram.
and

1002.

difference
may

between
be
thus

li,

Sanskrit

causal

affixes

exhi bite

(i.) (ii.)
(iii.)
It

kareti

"

karayati

"

kar^peti kkr^vecfi

"

karipayati.

karedi

"

"

"

"

karyati

"

"

sthEipayati

is indeed

very

remarkable,

as

stated
as

by the

Professor Pali
and

Bopp,

at

the

contraction is
also
to

of be

aya

into

e,

in

Prakrit

nemi,

found

in

'

the

Old-High

German,

an

ith

regard Lassen
form p

to

the the the the

Pr"krit following

form

of

the

Causative,
"From
k,

fesso Pro-

has
of

observations,*
roots

the
insert

rit

Causative
termination of the

in the

which

le

between
another
root,
or

of

root

and

the

addition adds
The

arises
the

form
to

Prakrit
of
in

Causative
present

which
active. ab;

to

the

theme

the ^p

ative

inflects

this

dissyllable
that

(whence
just
been
of and

Comp.

37)
form

entirely

like

which
the

has

mentioned.
one

is derived

from in the

Sanskrit

discourse

of
in

the

orders;

for,
we

Vetdlapanchavinsati,

other others

ian

tales
kind.

read

jiv^tpayati,
observes,
i.e., if

mochSpayati, vii.
1 7,

and
that

he

Vararuchi karabeyi,

kdrslbeyi
vowel of

called

Ap

be
then

added,
shortened.

the

the

rit
are

Causative
thabehi
Mai.

is

now

and
10; 10;

Examples
58,
5

o lubh;
9;
mo

Vik.

6,
44,

lohabedi

Sak.

from
55,

bedu
abehi

Vik.
153,
6;

mariskbedha
13, 14; 1 4,

JSak.
3.

Sak,

Vik.

Fut.

modbissam

may

here
has

refer

to

peculiarity
by
the
a

of
of

the
the

Pali

Causal

verb,
viz.,

been

noticed

writer

Bklavatkra,
a

Intransitive
e

verbs
g.,

with

causal

affix,
diisakan path

convey

transitive bhkveti,

fication;

bhikkhu
the

rdgkdi

maggan
of the

priest

contemplates

defiling

passions

'f

Akammak^pi Tan
yath^

hetvaiihappachchayanl^l
bhikkhu

sakammakd rig^di

bhAveti

raaggan

di!lsakan.

he

affinity
of the

between,

what

I
and

conceive

to

be,
is

the

cultivated
The
exists

Causal

affixes
which

the

Passive,

obvious.
forms

relationship

exists

between
of
the

these

between

them

and

the

affixes

Nominal

verb,

which

Lassen's

Inst.

Pr^k.

p.

360.
108.

See

Balavatara,

34

kachchatana's

pali

grammar.

takes

"ya

and

ija

in seyeral

different

senses,

as

in

the

krit Sans-

[Laghu
kar! kdra

Eawmudhi

297.]
ja-te

Thus,

".Passive.

.,....fya) (ya)
...(ftya) (iya) Oya)

ja-ti

Causal.

pabbat

ftya-ti ijra-ti iya-ti aya-ti..

.1

(i.) (ii.)

Nominal,
do. do.

Cap.
do. do.
do.

ii.

4.

chatt
chatt

"5. "6. "

8.

(iii.) (iv.)
Intensive.

...(aya) dad-dal...(ya)
Of
the

upavla

do.

(y)a-ti

Intensive Lassen

and

Desiderative
that

forms
only

in
of

the

Prtlkrit,
verbs verbs whence
11,
etc.''

Professor
are

remarks
in

^^reliques

these

extant,

and,
over

truth,
common

these

kinds

of

derivative

rarely
the

pass

into

conversation.

Jugutsa,
M.

Fr"krit Inst

jugutcha.
p.
367.

It is extant

in

M.

36,

Prilk. The indeed

Desiderative
no

and
in

Intensive

forms

of

the

verb,
3;

are

strangers
are

the

Pali.
as

See
in the

Cap.

ii.

"

also

iii.

"

1.

They
of

both

formed,

Sanskrit,
root.

by

the

plication redu-

the
as

first syllable
in the

of

the

The
in

Intensive signifying

form
*to

appears,

Sanskrit,
*to

generally, lament.'

verbs

shine,'

*to

be

beautiful,'
has learn
a

Where,
as

however,
in

the

primitive
not,
as

verb
we

reduplicated
from

form,

titikkhati,
a

it does

Moggallkyana, the Desiderative; *he

same

undergo
as

reduplication

in

its formation
to

into

titikkhisati
to

*he

wishes
these

endure,' the

jiguchchhisati
affix
s*

wishes
as

reproach.'
the

In

examples this

is the

in

krit. Sanskh,
or

But
chh.

is

sometimes

changed

in

the

Pali

into

See formed

Cap.
into
a

ii.

""

2,

3.
e.

The

Desiderative

verb

may

also

be

Causal,

g., bubukkhkpeti.

See

Moggal-

Ikyana's

Pali

Grammar.

CAP:

IV.

1.

Before
Before
root

mi,
mi,
and

ma,

an

for

the

final
for

of
the

d^.
final
letter

a.

ma,

an

is

substituted

the

d^
*

Ex.

dammi

give

';

damma

'

we

givej"'

2.

Before
ending
to

causal
a

affix,

(the

radical)
is

when

with

compound

consonant,

subject

vuddhi.
root,,

a.

The is

when
to

not

ending

with
a

compound

consonant,

subject

vuddhi*
\

before

causal kdrenti

affix.

Ex.

k"reti
k"rayati k"r"peti kd,rd"payati

^
f ^they
cause

I
(

*he
to

causes

k"lrayanti kir^penti

do.'

to

do.'

)
*

kdrapayantij
not

Q.

Wherefore

when

ending
'he

with

compound mantayati

consonan

[Witness]
to

chintayatif

reflects';

*he

deliberate.'

3.

Optionally
When
ghata,
not

Ghata,
ending with receive

"c.:J;
a

a.

compound vuddhi

consonant

the

"c.,

optionally

substitutions

before

al

affixes. gh"teti
ghateti ghdtayati "-*he ghd.td.peti ghsltdpayati ghatdpayati
causes

Ex,

to

unite.'

Vuddhi
k
for
a;

is the
e

for

change i and
causal

or

! ; and

substitution for o

to
u

and

which i]i.
seen

the

vowels

are

subject.
in such

Can

this

be

the

form?

I have

not

this

word

used

nse.

giimeti
gameti gamayati gamayati
.

" *he
'

causes

to

go.

Q.
e.

Wherefore

*ghata,
^he
causes

"c/?
to

[To
do.'

exclude

roots

sucfc

ara

g.]

kkreti

4.
a.

And
When
vuddhi
not

others.
ending substitutions
*he
the
conquers';

with

compound
before bhavati
other
or

consonants

all roots

eceive
"x.

affixes. hoti *is-' the

sutta

jayati
"

Note

by
down
as

insertion

of affix
*

an

'and'

[to

it may

laid

that

the

nu

also

takes

the

vuddhi
'he

substi^

utions;

abhisunoti

he

hears

well';

sanvunoti

closes.

5.
a.

Guha
Before
long:.
gihayati

dusa
causal

long,
affixes^
the

vowel

of

the

roots

guha

dusa

ecomes
Ux.

'he

causes

to

conceal';

disayati

'he

causes

pollute.'

6.

Before "c.
Before
"c., the

ya,

for

(v)a
in

in

vacha,

vasa,

aha,
a.

affix
u.

ya

the

(v)a

the

roots

vacha^

vasa,

aha, "x,

becomes

uchchate
,

7.. J 18
1
^.

said.'

vucnchati

vussati vuyhati

'is

inhabited.' borne.'

'is

7.

Before

(changed
a.

h is transposed; y, into) 1.
the
affix
ya,

(and)
h

optionally

Before
ya is

the

letter
into 1.

is transposed;

and

ffix
JEx.

optionally
or

changed
vulhati 'is

vuyhati

borne.'

fl.

Before
gaha.

the

affix

ppa,

ghe

is

substituted

for

the

entire

Ex,

gheppati

*he

takes.'

9.
a.

Before
Before ganhkti
the
'

nh^,
affix

ha
nhk,

is
the

elided.
ha in the
root

gaha

is

elided.

Ex.

he

takes.'

10.
a.

Before
Before
for the
or

Ajjatani,
terminations^
root

k^sa

for
the

kara.
of

Ajjatani
entire

form

kksa

is

stitu sub-

kara.
has

Ex.

akasi

akari
or

'he

done.'
have
atta

akksun

akarun
expression
e.

'they

done.'

Note*

"

by
in

the

'the

form,'

sa

may

be

mente aug-

others,

g.,

ahosi

'has

been';

adasi

'has

given.'

11.
the
The
are

The

mi is

m^
elided.

of

asa

(become)

mhi,

mh^;

d
".

last

terminations

mi

and
into

ma,

which

come

after when

the

root

optionally of

changed
is
asmi
asma

mhi

and

mhk;
^

the

final

ter
Ex.

the

root
or

elided. 'I
'we am.'

amhiy
amha,

or

are.'

12.
a.

Ttha
The

for

tha.
tha

termination

of

the

root

asa

is
root

changed
is

into

ha,
Ex.

when
attha

[as before]
'you
are.'

the

final

letter

of

the

elided.

13.
a.

Tthi
Ti, the the final 'he
like
*

for

ti.
of the the
root
asa

termination
letter
is.'

is

changed

into

tthi;

n
Ex.
*

of

root

is

also

elided.

atthi
note

This
the

expression
an
*

several form of
can

others kftsa,' a be
can

is

not

intelligible
of
I
to
sa

to

my

mind.

substitution
do

may

be

how

iatth"pi

augment in
other

understood,

not

perceive.
text,

implied Again
refer
to

places*
than

minations

other in

the

according Ajjatani ; yet from it tense,

the

only

to

the

examples

given

the

14.
a.

Ttliu
Tuy
when

for

tu.

the
the
*

termination final
him
letter

of

the

root
root

asa

is

changed

in

tthu;
Ex.

of

the

is

also

elided.

atthu

let

be.'

15.
a.

Also
Also

[when]
si is the

si.
termination
of
the
root
asa^

when

its fin

letter
Ex,

is
ko

elided.
nu

tvam'asi

'who

art

thou'?

16.
a.

Ttha
When
the
same

tthan,
terminations
are

for

1 im,
i
into

after
im^
come

labha.
after
tthan
;

the

and

the and

roo

abha^

changed
root

ttha

and

final
Ex.

letter

of

the

is

elided.
';
'

alattha

'he

has

got

alattham

have

got.'

17.
tts

Chchhi
When
the is

for
termination

i,

after
i
comes

kudha.
after
the final
root

kudha^
of

he

same

changed

into

chchhi

and

the

letter

th

oot

is elided.
Ex.

akkochchhi^he

has

angered.'

18.
a.

Optionally

dajja
'

for

the
for

root
the

d^.
entire
or

Dajja

is

optionally
or

substituted I
give
';

rootdSk.

Ex.

dajjkmi
give.'

dadkmi

dajjejya

dadeyya

'h

ay

19.
a.

Vajja
Yajja
is

for

vada.
substituted for
';

optionally
or

the

entire
or

root

vada.
'

Ex.

vajjiimi
speak.'

vadiimi

'I

speak

vajjeyya

vadeyya

ay

20.^
a.

Ghamma
Ghamma
is

for
optionally

gamu.
substituted for
the

entire

root

amu.
*

In

the

Dbammapada
Trans
:

this
The

word
iv.

is

used

to

'

simiify
it
means

abused,*
!

(s

gerley*s

in

Friend

p.

21

When

abused,

k.
*

gfaammatu
let
me

Uet
go.'

him

gg';

gfaammclhi

^go

thou';

gham-

Q.

Wherefore
^

^optionally'

[To

shew
^

the
thou

regular
';

forms]

chhatu
me

let

him

go

';

gachchhd^hi

go

gachchhkmi

go.'

21.
ma

Before
ha,
Before

ya,

1 for
"c.
ya,

d^,

dlia,

m^,

^h^,

h^,

matha,
the affix

the

final

vowel i.

of

di^

dhcl,

mky

t\\k,

psL, maha,

matha,
*is
*

"c."

becomes dhiyati *is hiyati

Ex,

diyati Aiyati

given'; is

hold
4s

en';

miyati
';

*is

measured'

stationed';

reduced
Ms

piyati

*is

k';

mahiyati

'is

adored';

mathiyati

churned.'

22.

I
Before
root

for
the

the
affix

first
ya,

of
i is

yaja.
substituted
for

a.

the

first

letter

the

yaja.
may"

Ex.

ijjate

Buddho

'Buddha

is

worshipped

by

me.'

23.
The

Imsu

for

um

of
of
'

all.
all radicals,
is changed
';

a.

termination

um

into

imsu.

Ex.

upasamkamimsu
have
sat

they

have

approached

nisidimsu

ey

dow^n.'
*

24.

Optionally
and
mara.

jlra (or) jlyya,

jara,

and

miyya

jara
a.

Optionally

the

roots

and

mara

take

the

tions substitu-

jira
Ex,

or

jiyya,
or

and

miyya.
*

jirati
*

jiyyati

he

becomes
';

decrepid
miyati
or

':

jiranti
*

or

jiy
dies

nti

they
or

become
'

decrepid they

marati

he

yanti

maranti

die.'

25.
a.

And
Before
root
asa,

the

initial

of
and

asa

is
affixes,

elided
the

before
initial

all.

all terminations
is optionally

[vowel]

the
Ex,

elided.

siyfl

*it

may

be';

santi

'they

are';

santo

'being';

Q.

Wherefore
^

optionally
art.'

[To

mark

the

exception

g.]
26.
a.

asi

thou

For
In

asabbadh^tuka,
terminations^

bhu.
the
very
root

asabbadhatuka*
becomes
*

asa,

optionally
Ex,

bh^.
he
*

bhavissati
Wherefore

will

be

';
'

bhavissanii
?

they
the

will

be.'

Q.
g.]

optionally

[To

mark

exception

dsum

they

have

been.'

27.
a.

Optionally
lya,
eyya

iy^,
are

and

anna

for

eyy

after
the

na.

and
after 'he

aniii

optionally
nk,

substituted

for

termination

the
may

root

Ex.

janiya
Wherefore

know';

jann^
'?

'he

may

know.'

Q.

'optionally

[Witness]

jslneyya

'

he

may

now.'

28.
a.

N^
The affix

is
na

rejected [or]
of
the
root

changed
is
sometimes

into

ya.

n^

elided,

and

sometimes
Ex.

changed

into
may
'

ya.
'

jann^

'he

know';
optionally

nayati
'

he

knows.'

Q.

Wherefore
'

[To

mark

the

exception

g.] jknkti

he

knows.'

29.
fl.

A
The

[becomes]
affix
a

e,

and

is
is

rejected.
sometimes

[see Cap.
into
e.

ii.

" 14]

elided,

and

ometimes Ex,

changed

vaj^emi
...
"

or

vademi
ix
"

\
^
"

speak,

vajjkmi

or

vadarai

30.
a.

O
Optionally
kurute

becomes
the
or

u.

affix
'

[see Cap.
does.'

ii.

" 20]

becomes

u.

Ex,

karoti
'

he

Q.
is.'

Wherefore

'?

[To

shew

the

exception

as

inj

hoti

t
asabbadhsituka
see

The

comprise i

all

the

moods

and

tenses

except

the

bbadh^tuka,

Cap.

"

26.

31.
The

And
a

also
of
the

the

of

kara.
optionally
becomes and kairati
*

radical

kara

u.

JEx,

kurute,

karoti,

kubbate,

kubbati^

he

does.' such

Q.
sarati

Wherefore
*

^kara'?
';

[To
^

exclude

other

radicals^

walks

marati
a

kills.'

32.

Before
Before
ava.
a

vowel
the

becomes
o

ava.

vowel,

final

of

radical

optionally

com be-

"x,

chavati
1st.

quits Wherefore

';
^

bhavati before
before
^o'?
a

is.'
'

Q.

vowel
a

[To
e.

show

that
'

the

does 2nd.
*

not

apply

except

vowel, limit

g.]
the

hotl rule,

is.'
e.

Q.

Wherefore

[To

it to

g.]

ti
33.

conquers.'

E
Before
aya.

becomes
a

aya.
the

vowel,

final

of

the

radical

optionally

mes

JEx,

nayati

Meads';

jayati
'before
a

^conquers.'

Q.
not

Wherefore
apply

vowel'?
a

[To
e.

shew
neti

that
*

the

rule

except

before

vowel,

g.]

leads.'

34.
Aya,

Before

causative,

they

become

dva

Before
dva

causative fiya.
causes

they,

viz.,

and

e,

take

the

tutions substi-

and *he

Ex.

l"veti
"

to

cut';

nS;yeti
aya

*he
is

causes

to

lead.'

ote,

By

analyzing
e.

the

suttan,

admissible

before

affixes,

g.,

gayati

'he

sings,'

35.

I
Before

is

augmented

before
terminations,
go
';

?tsabbadhA-tuka.
i is
^

asabbadhatuka
'

augmented.
do
';

S*T.

gamissati
will

he

will

karissati

he

will

labhis-

*he

acquire';

pachissati

*he

will

cook.'

Q.

Wherefore

^before

asabbadhatuka'?

[To

shew

that

the

rule

does
^

not

apply karoti

to
*

sabbadfa"tuka
does';

terminations^
*

e.

gachchbati

goes';

labhati

acquires';

pachati

'cooks.'

36.

In
and

certain

instances,

radicals, long,
take

tions, termina-

affixes

become and

ations, transformelision

augment,
a.

substitutions, "c.
certain

receive

and

In the

instances, voices
of

which
the

are

not

here

treated

nder

different

verb,
and

the augment,

elongation,

transforma

substitution,
and
to

elision,
receive

which should

radicals,
be of

terminations,

aflSxes

[or undergo]

ed adopt-

according
JSx.

[the models
*is *he

furnished

in]

the

word

Buddha.

jayati*
kareyya

born.'
may

do.'

janiy^
siyk kare

^he

may

know,'

*may

be.'
may

^he

do.'
may go.'~
or

gachchhe

^he
*he
may

janfi^
vakkhetha dakkhetha

know'; speak.'
see.'

*know

thou.'

'you
*you

dichchhati
agachchhun
'

*he

sees.'

'they been.'
been.'

have

come.'

ahosi

has
^

ahesun

have

f
.

Note,

"

In

this

wise

should

others

be

used.

37,

The

attanopaddni

[become]
(terminations)

the

very

arassapada,
a.

Sometimes
parassapada.

the

attanopada

are

changed

nto

JSx.

vuchchati
'is cooked';

*is

spoken';
'

labbhati
is done
';

*is

acquired'; is

pach-

hati

kariyati

sijjhati*
shew

accomplished.'

Q.

Wherefore

'sometimes'?

[To

that

the

change

optional;

as]

yuchchate,

labbhate^

pachchate,

kartyate,

jhate.
38.

is

augmented

in

the

hiyattanl,

ajja
Hiyattani,
the

),

and'k^lsitipatti.
Sometimes
when Kkl^tipatti,
^te
went';

the
a

terminations
is augmented

are

the

atani^

[or]

[before
gone';

root.]
*he

Ex.

agamk

agami

'he

has

agamissk

go.'

Q.

Wherefore
is optional
;

sometimes'?

[To
gami^
gamissa.

indicate

that

the

ge

as] gama^

39.
i is
is

after

brii,

when
the

tl.
root

a.

augmented

after

bri,

when

the

tion termina-

ti.
braviti
^

Ex.

he

speaks.'

40.

The

final

of

root

of

many

vowels

ded.
Sometimes
the final

a.

[vowelj

of

root

of

many

vowels

elided. gachchhati
';
'

Ex.

'goes'; kills

pachati
';

cooks';
'

sarati

'remembers

marati

[or dies]
'

charati

walks.'

Ist

Q.

Wherefore
roots,

of
'

many

vowels'?
';
'

[To
goes

exclude
';

mono'

syllabi
gives

as]
';

p^ti
*

drinks

y"ti

d^ti

ti
2nd

'

shines

vati

wafts.' 'sometimes'?
'

Q.
such

Wherefore

[To
';

mark

the

exceptions,

as]

mahiyati

adores

matiyati

'churns.'

41.

Optionally
changed
Optionally

the

finals

of

isu

and

yama

re
a.

into]
the

ichchha.
of isu
and
are

finals

yama

changed

into

chha. ichchhati
'

Ex,

wishes
'

';

'

'^

niyachchhati
'

regulates.

Q.

Wherefore

optionally

[To

mark

the

exceptions

42.
a

The
The kareti
n

of

k^rita
affixes

is

elided.

of

kdrita

is elided.

JPx,

karayati
'
. .

f
"
.

, *

causes

to

do.

karapeti kar"payati

For
f

the

advancement

of

rehgion,
by
own me

the
:

verb

ha

een

thus)

briefly

illustrated
to

may

th

earned,

according

their

respective

ments, attain-

reflect,
End

(hereon.)
of
the Fourth

Chapter

on

Verbs,

Notes.

Some

modern the

writers
principles of Pali

on

Pali
of

Grammar

follow,

in

the g.,

lustrations,

Sanskrit
are

Grammar.
classed
the

E.

ight

conjugations
from
seems

verbs

by

Moggall"yana by

ifferently

Kachchayana;
to

and in accordance

classification
with that refers

ormer

be

nearly He also,

adopted
the

anskrit
certain

writers.

like

Vararuchi,
*to

student

parts of

of

his

Grammar
which has

the

Sanskrit,'
omitted.' the Kachchstyana
he

for But
less it

xplication

^that

been
the

ery

remarkable
identified
one

that the of

the
with latter

older
the

grammarian,

as

Pali
the

Sanskrit
Although

ertainly,

class.

has

borrowed

few

technical
p.
as

terms

from

Sanskrit
has in
even

Grammarians*
adopted
notes,
us

(see
language the
has

t I

XXV-

),

and

the

dnini,

we

have
yet

shown

the

and

in
that

tion Introducnot

(p. xvii.);

he

has

referred

for

all

bee

ted

of,

in

his

work, This

to

the

Text-books
clearly of

of
that the

Buddhism
he,
at

"

not,

the

Sanskrit.
the

indicates
an

least, It

did

regard clear
of

Pali
the Pali

as

emanation
tenor

Sanskrit.
that
the
he

from

whole
as

of

his

work
from

wished

treat

the
my

dialect
to

distinct
the
may

Sarfekrit.
which in
port sup-

ining

observations
two

portion

of
here

Grammar
adduced

published, of
this.

circumstances

be

(i.)
finals

That

where

the

Sanskrit
ish aflSx
*to

takes
wish,'

the
gam

substitute
^to

chha

for
yam
s,

of

these,
^vhen
'he

viz.,
an

go,'

and

restrain,'

follows

having

an

indicatory

as

chhati
it

goes.' in

[Laghu
verb
gam

Kawmudhi,
Ho

p.

187]
clearly

the
to

Pali
show

ives

only

the

go.'

It is
us

difference

that

Kachchayana

gives

the

Vutti

in

Cap.

"

19.

(ii.)
he

It
calls

is indeed
attention

with

the
to to

same

object
existence

that
in

little
the

farther
of
hu;
on

(" 23)

the
the be

Pali
is

Substantive
a

unknown
remarks
may

Sanskrit.
out

This
here.
states root

few

not

of

place

Vararuchi,in
are

his

Prakrit

Prdkjlsa
forms would

(vii. " 3)
the

that

ho

and

the

substituted substitution
of

of

verbal be

bhft.

If
found

this

so,

the

indeed But such

invariably
the

in

the

variations

the
xii.

root.

is not

fact.

When ing speak-

Vararuchi
of
with the
ex.

cap

"

12

and
bhuvo

Hemachandra
bhah,
a

"
commentator^

269,

Sauraseni,
bhodi,

give
hodi;

adds
liavadi-;

bhuvadi,

huvadi;
both
forms

bhavadi,

ing

clearly
is the
case

the
in

existence
several

of

in

the
e.

Prdkrit,

Prakrit
the of
bhu

languages,

g.,

in
as

the

ltha,
to

which supply

also

possesses

Pali
the
to

Am,

the

Sanskrit
of
the

the

deficiences
takes
root

paradigm fill
up

the

root

hu.

Pali

likewise

in
Aw,

deficiencies
use

the

uncultivated
kUy and
as

and
the

the alleged

indiscriminate
substitution.

disproves

It

ifferent
e.

modifications g,

which is
not

are

not

found but other

of

in

the

forms is
not

hi^;

bhavati
ahuvd..

havati^ the

hoti;
forms

abhava
of hft,

no

hava^

but

So

likewise with the

on

Tj^ich

is identical

forms
forms

bhil.

Take,
hit
;

for and

tance"

the

principal
is manifest:

Ajjatani
"

in

bhii

and

thei

ifference

abhavi

}ahu
ahosi

abhavinsu

{"j"""
\
ahosittha
ahosi ahumha ruha
^

abhavo

ahosi ahosin

abhavattha

abhavin

abhavamhd
ahun

Again,

if

we

regard former,

hft
like without
in
so

as

the is
a

substituted
so

form

of

bhA,

ho

s it that
not
as

the
many

as,

irregular?
as

wherefore
why

hav

forms
forms it take alleged

with
except
as

it?

is it deprived

Attanopada does
the form,

all
many

Tenses
forms

the

Hiyattani?
the
it of future, has other

wh

ndeed

six for

in

when

ithout

substitution
?

of the

bh,

but

on

ingle

bhavissati
the

For

illustration

ences diffe

subjoin

following

COMPAKATIVE
OF
BHU,

TABLES
AS,
HU.

Present

Tense.

Parassa-pada,
Singular,
bhavati bhavasi
atthi asi hoti hosi homi bhavanti Plural. santi attha

honti
hotha
a

bhavatha (
bhavama

bhav"Dii

{asmi
amhi

asm

homa

( amha

Attanopada.
bhavate
bhavase bhave

bhavante bhavavhe
bhav"imhe

Definite
Parassapada.
abhava abhavo ahuv^
ahuvo ( ah
u

Past.

abhavi!^ abhavattha
van

ahuvu ahuvattha

abhavamhsL

ahuvamha

Attanopada.
Singular.
ahuvattha
ahuvase ahuvin

Plural.

havattha

abhavatthun
abhavavhan

ahuyatthun
ahuvavhan
...

havase

havin

abhavamhase

ahuvamhase*

Present

Perfect.

Parassapada,

(ahu
asi

havi

abhavinsu

j*^'""
(
asun

ahaTun

( ahosi
"si
( ahosi
ahosin

( ahesun
ahosittha

havo

abhavattha abhavamhsi.

^sittha ksimha

havin

4sin

( ahun

{ahosimh
ahum
ha

Attanopada.
abhavii
abhavavhan abhavamhe

bhav^

havase

bhava

Indefinite

Past.

Parassapada.
babhuvu babhiivittha

abh^va

abhuve

abhuva

babhuvamha

Attanopada.
babhiivive babhiivivho

abhCtvittha

bhuvittho

bhClvi

babhClvimhe

Future

Tense.

Parassapada.

f heti
hehiti
I

henti

I
bhavissanti

hchinti

bhavissati

)"
I

j
]

hohiti

hohinti

"
i

hessati

hessanti

! hehissati
[
f
hohissati*
hesi

!
I
I

hehissanti
hohissanti

J
:
bhavissasi

1
V
I

I
J

hehisi
hohisi

fhetha
hehitha hohitha

I
bhavissatha

hessasi
hehissasi

I
I

-{ hessatha
hehissatha

J
.

hohissasi

hohissatha

The

Attanopada
to

forms

of

the

radical

ht,

bo

far

as

my

observation

goes,

are

ned
The Rev.

this

Hiyattani
with of
iv.,

Tense.

forms

ho, the
p.

such Baptist
280.

as

hohissati

;
as

hohissasi,
those
no

hohissami.
*.the

"c.,
Future
this.

are

given

F.

Mason

Union,

of

Second
for

Tense.'
some

See

Or.

Journal

But

can

find

authority

For

of

th

KACHCHAYANA'S

PALI

GRAMMAR.

1
1 bhavissami

f hemi

hema

heh^mi

!
bhaviss^ma

hehiiua hoh^ma
""

y I
"

1
I

hessami
hehissami

"{ I
I

hessama

hehissslma

faohiss^mi

hohiss^ma

Attonopada
bbavissate bhavissase

bhivissante
bhavissavhe bhavissdmhe

bhavissan

The

Imperative.

he

text

books
form

of

Buddhism. in

We Maha
this

have,

however,
lib other

found

ifferent

huveyya accordance
follows:
"

Vagga
the

i., /huveyya

"vuso.'*

In
as

with

persons

should

formed

huveyya huveyydsi
huveydmi

huveyyun
huveyydtha
huveyydma

"

avuso

"

term

servations

thereon

of address. C. in the

This
B."
A.

is, I believe,

not

found p.

in the 247.

Sanskrit

; see

M"y

S. J. for

1856

--8.,

The

Conditional.
Parassapada.

avissa

ahavissa

abhavissansu abhavissatha

avisse

ahavisse
ahavissam

ahaTissansu issat ahav

ha

avissam

abhavissamha

afaavisamha*

Attanopada.
abhavissante

avissatha

avissase

abhavissavhe
abhavissamhe

havissam

Participles.
Present.
T)

I
'

bhavam^na

santa

( bhavanta
bhOyam"na

( sam^na

Passive.^^

Past.
Decl.
Indec,
"

bh"ta,
"

huto,
or

hut^vi

hutvsL

hutv^na

Future.
Decl.
"

bh^vi
bhavissanta

bhavissam"^na

From
the

the

above

differences

and
treat

the
of

confused bhavadi
to

mode
havadi,

Prclkrit
inferred observations and

Grammarians
that
they for
were

"c.,

may
own

be

indebted
of

little
the

beyond
of

the

elucidation

laws
a

the

rit;
for

that
modified

they

consequently form
of another. of
to

mistook

distinct

cal

the

The

Rev. remarks^

Henry
with

Ballantine
reference

the

American
in the

Board Mar"thd,
most

this

radical

substantive

verb,
between

especially, the
we

exhibits Sanskrit
the and

the
the

ing strikMarslthi of

dissimilarity In verb.

uages.

Marstthd,

have

following

forms

the

tantive

For

these

forms

of

h^

in

the

Conditional,

am

indehtedto

the

writer

of

th

iddhi.

Singular.
1st

per.

2nd

per.

3rd

per.

Ind.
form ndu

"

ihe ...^hes
hoy

...^he
...hova
...hai

"

...hos

fm

"

hii ...hai
"

.In.ma8

hoto

...hotds
"

...hot4
is

The
Hebrew

root

of

this

verb
or

evidently
ah*

ho

or

he,

reminding
root

us

havah

hay

The in

Sanskrit
to

of up

the
the

st su

verb
of
formation

as^

is

employed

Marithd
original
tense,

fill

de ci

the

paradigm of also
*

of
present

the

root;

being
and
e.

used the
asato

the
of

habitual
conditional

of
g. ;

pa
^

bitual,
habitually
are

and
;'

the
was

mood,
asala

ase

he

habitually,'
introductions,

if he and

were

;'

ese

evidently
the
hu

later

required considerably

employed

ly
That

when

language
a

had
distinct
of

been

cultivated."
appears
not

is

radical
mention

from it,
as

hhu

on

om

the

express and

such

(cap,
;

iii

" 23.)
also
and

chchdyana,
existence

other
in

Pali
Indo-

Grammarians
European

but

fro

both

the

languages

in

akrit.
Although, and
idioms do'

of

the
'

Sanskrit
to

auxiliaries
all

as

^tobe'
in

bhii Pali,

come,'

kri

do,'

which
for the

exist

the
a

"

erman
^to

alone

substitute

third, and
two

verb

signify*
some

[Bopp's
European

Comp.
dialects

Gr.,p.
possess
es

843];
the
is Teut.,

although
first,
esti

other and

both
ist

sepa rat

conjointly
and
in
be

[e.
wEng.
we

g,

Lat.

Gr.,

Germ,,
remarkable

Eng., that
same

and
last

"c.,];
find

it

is,

nevertheless,
have^

the

another

form

which
he

renders and

assistance

to

the

principal I
verb

verb
conceive,
substantive

that
no

(bh{l)

*as') do.

There

is,

therefore,
as a

objection
of

toi

^ have')

being

regarded
the

that

language

om

whence

Prakrits

and

their

Indo-European

sisters

hav

**

Some
from

would the

derive

this
as,

root

from either of

the

Sanskrit
derivations

bhu

*to

be,'

hers

Sanskrit

but

these

is far-fetched

unsatisfactory."

g
'

up" is simply

Moreover,
that

the

difference
exists

between
*

have

'

and
'

which

between
as

possession the

and
honen

tence,'
'

Possession
entrance
on

itself the
.

conveys,

Murkthi
Dr.

the

state

of

existence,'

Stevenson's
is

hi
far

Grammar,
removed
one

p. 86
from

The the
grown and
be^
are

signification idea
out

of existence

again

of

possession.
of

The The

power
two

he

has

clearly
have

the

other.
a

iary
in

verbs
English than in
the

which
indeed

play
not

most

important different
writers

Syntax,
the
as^

more

in

fication both
nouns

bhu

and

Are,

which
and

Sanskrit
in

Reduplicate

Praeterite,

composition

(Wilson's
auxiliary Indo-European
verb

San.
which

Gr.,
has

p.
h

350.)*
for
e.

its

radical
habeo

consonant

the

languages;
is intimately
is

g.
to

Lat,

kaban

have

Eng.,
aiid

related clearly Eng, the

hu

(va)
to

Prkk.,
the

?i huy
va

Murk.,t
the
va

therefore

traceable
heo

Pali

hich

inflexions,
are

[ve
in

Lat.,

ban

Goth.,

Sin.,]

found
nor

praeterite. other

either
to

Vararuchi
have would been
struck
not,

the

Pr"krit
suchas traced

Grammarians
the the following;

by

coincidences
have

they

apprehend,

Prakrit

hu

hui
Mur.
hoya
hosi

Prik.

Lat
habeo

Goth.
haba
...

Eng.
have hast
...

hos hoja
hvo

habes
,

habais habaij9
...

Choi

habet
habemus...

has have
...

( huvai

habam

hv^
.

habetes
.
...

habaip
...

have

( honti
i

^^'
'""

^*hent
"""
...

habant
"..

have

hu

ant

e.

g.

"ukli-karoti=:=seti-karoti

"akli-bhavat2="seti-bhavati

"ukH-

eti-siyj^.
^'

At

Cuttack

we

have

hoti,
p.
336.

atthi,

as

in the

modern

Pali."

"

American

tal

Journal,

yoI.

ii.,

KACHCHATANA'S

PALI

6BAMMAB"

On

the

supposition^

however^ my
even

that

^^

the

simpler
to

thefonnthe
that

der

is its
form

origin",
hu,

Pandit
more

is inclined ancient

believe
its

li

is

than

fuller

for

sumed

by

the
sisters;

Pr"krit
and
fact

in
for

common

with
belief

some

of

her proof

Indo

ropean
found

thid

confirmatory

ma

in

the

that
such the
this
a

the

simple

PslU
class

hi

is

found

in
as

dical

elements

of

different

of

languages and the

the

inese

[(8)hee],

Burmese however
as

[(8)hi],
it
may,

Tavoy

alect
in

[hi.]*
some

Be the

existence and
no

of in
to
some

European
as

dialects
in

is

manifest;
furnishes for lost kan, vaksh, also
we

sence

others,
being

the
as
a

Sanskrit,
radical;
not

val

bjection

its

regarded

have

sati fact

proof
are

that be

the

Sanskrit
in the

has

only g.

several ink,
turv,

roots

ich

to

found

Vedas,
maud,
radicals

[e.
ves,

ubj,

#a

sach, but the

moreover,

myaksh,
that
some

thsar,

dhraj,

bharv

c.,]

primitive

had othu

disappeared

om

Vedic

Sangirit.t
not
more

The

absence

in that

the
the

Sanskrit

surprising which
bhu.

than
possess

Greek,

tin,
not

and

the

old

Slavonic
the
fuller

the

defective

ve

borrowed

Am. See

Oriental Dr.
Muir*s

Journal,

vol.

iv,,

p.

279.
272.

Sanskirt

Texts,

p.

APPENDIX.

Note
had
year

at

page

xxxii. from
the

Scarcely
in

century*

elapsed of
were

death

of

Gotama,
K"Usoka^

the

tenth of

Susind^ga's
disregarded
contrary

successor^

teachings of

Gotama
and

in
to

the
his

strongholds

Buddhism^
even

usages

doctrines
self himfrom

iled
**

amongst

the

priesthood.
to

The
who

Sovereign
deviated

extended

his

protection"

those

the

dox

doctrines. is therefore had of

not

sui^prising
much

that

many

thousands by
openly
is
a

of the

priests
rigid

been

doubtless
in the

inconvenienced

discipline

Buddhist
the

Church,
following

introduced
condensed

ain

innovations,

of

which

nt.

The
for the

order
more

by
than where

which
seven

priests

were

prevented construed
in
a

from
not
to

keeping extend allotted inches

days,
was

was

case

salt

preserved
meals,
was

horn.
to

The
"two

for

their

morning

extended The
to

ow"

a/ifer the

meridian
was

sun.

general

prohibition

nst

enjoyments
which
to

restricted permitted monasteries.

upon

the
in

Viharas.

Certain

monies, extended
the

were

only

the

Uposatha

hall,
was

the

Consent,
which
certain

which

condition be
performed, confirmed

precedent
was

religious where

could
act
was

considered its completion.

dispensable,
The

after

doctrines

Dasa

dasaka

vassamhi

Sambuddhe
dipenti
had

Vesiliyan
is
"

Vajjiputt^
"when
a

parinibbute dasavatthuke.
elapsed from

hat

century

the
ten

date

of

Buddha*s
"

ibban,

the

Vajjians

of

Vesili

declared

the

innovations."

Di-

sa.

ddhism^
set

for
at

which
upon

Gotama the
of

exacted
example the of

implicit
preceptors,

obedience
or

naught the

th

thority
was
"

of

fathers
after

Church.
day,
was

Substantial
thought
not

food
to

ich whey,

forbidden
a

mid
part

extend

component
was

of

iwiVA."

Fermented
did
not

liquor,

inking

whereof include the

to
use

totally

prohibited,
water.

in

thei

inion

toddy
y

resembling

Costly

coverlets,
were

ainst

of

which
only

Gotama
fringed
from
and

laid

his All

Canon,
precious
were

considered

comprise
were

cloth. receiving,
silver*

metals,

ich

they all

inhibited
besides

construed
were

metals

gold
ten

Such

the

i n

of Sangiti
1.
"

body
or

of

thousand

priests

which

led

to

tiya

second

Convocation. ubbinayancha

Uddhamman
Apagatan Atihan

Satthu
dammancha dipayinsute.

S^sane

bhinditvsl.

Viloman
2.
"

Tesan

niggaha

natthaya savakd;

Bahiibuddhassa
Dva
dasa puttd
sata

sahassd.ni

Jina
S.^Etasmin

sam^gatil.
sannipatasmin

Pslmokkh^

a^^ha kappa sada maha cha mahd

bhikkhavo
n^gtl gani.

Satthu
Durd
4,
"

Sabbakslmi
Revato

Salho

cha
;

Kujja

Sobhito
Sumano

Yslsabhagkmi
Sana
5.^Yaso

vllsecha

Sambhuto;
puttocha
ime

Kd,kanda
di^^h^

Jinan
Papanan

isi ;
hatth^ya

nigga

Veskliyan
'""""

samdgat^;
""
'

"

'

!"""'""

"

'

'

6.

"

Vasabhagkmi
Anuruddhassanu
Avasesa

cha

Sumano
vattakk;

d^nandassa

Dittha 7.
"

pubbst

tathitgatan.
putto

Susundgassa
Asoko
Pa^aliputta
asi

mahipati;
nagaramhi

Eajjan
8.
"

kdresi

khattiyo.

Tanoha
A^^ha

pakkhan
thersl

labhitvdna
;

mahiddbikd

Dasavatthunan Fdpe
9.

ninditvjl

nimmaddayinsute.
metv"i

"

Niddha
Madditvd

pdpa

bhikkhii

Y"tda vada
thera

p"pakan;

Saka
A^^ha
10.
"

sodhanatthslya mahiddhikst.
satta
satan

Arahantdnan

Uchchiaitv^na Varan Akansu

11.
"

bhikkbavo;
gahetvana sangahan.

varan

dhamma
salayan
puruttame; masehi

Kil^igara
Vesaliyan Atthsi

ni^Aasi
ay
an.

Dutiyo

sangaho

They
the

(the
sense

sinful and of

priests)
phraseology

made

melange dhamma

by
and

departing
Vinaya,

of

the

doctrines

Buddhd.^*^

With

view

(therefore),
(in
In
principal

to

degrade twelve

them,

many

priests, thousand,

ples

of

Buddha, together.^

all)
this

hundred

bled

congregation
who had their
a

there
large

were

preeminent
were

bhikkhus,
i.

retinue,

(unapproachable,
to

e.)

without

equals,

and

not

ior

Buddha

SabbakAmi,

Sdlha,

vata,

Kujjasobhita,
and Yasa,
at
eon

Vasabhagami,
of

Sumana,
all
a

SambhAta
had
seen

^na/*^

Kakanda,

who
to

Buddha. the

ey

assembled

VesS-li

with

view

reproach

sinf

iests/'^
*

y^bhag^mi and
the
rest

and
of

Sumana
Ananda.

were

the

disciples
all
seen

of

Anurud-

a,
*

They the
son

had
of

Budd^/"^
a

[At

this reigned

time]
in

Asoka,

Susiniga,

Khattiya

ince,
*

PstftiHputta/^ eight side,

pains pre-eminent

The

(abovenamed)
to

theras,
the
ten

having

gained

this prince) (oppressed)

their

censured
and
overcome

indulgences,
on

inflicted
Having
their of

penalties
the
illustrious
own

the

sinf

novators/"

(thus)
heresies; purifying arahats
"

sinful

bhikkhus,

suppressed the
seven

these their

eight

priests
assembled

th

object
hundred

discourses,^^
MtM/*w5;

pre-eminent

and

he

Council
*

of
second
at

dhamma/"^

This

Sangiti the
Kiitagara

was

brought
Hall,
in

to

close

in

eigh city

nths,

the

renowned

The

account

given
not

of

this

convocation

in that
as

the
in
the

Tibetan
Mah^-

nals*

does Both

precisely
accounts
to

accord indeed

with
agree

sa.

the
"

to

the
at

number three

nvocations,

as

their

having
first

been

holden been
second

f d

places,
death
of

"

as

to

the
"

having
to

immediately
having

aft

Gotama,

and

as

the

been

See
Here

Asiatic
too, ;

Researches, there
is is
a

xx.,

slight
probable
10,

p. 41. difference
that may
as

often
the

years,

which
arose

is too by

trivial

noticed
numbers

and
100,

it and

mistake
occurred date

confounding
as such Convocation.

lowing,

conveying dasaifie Ati'te

which information
vasse

have
to

in

passage

the

of
;

the

second

KsLlasokassa
evan

rdjino
vassa

Sambuddha

parinibband

satangatan.

KACHCHAY

ana's

PALI

GRAMMAR.

57

from

the

last

date.
in

The
that

difference Tibetan
the

between writers

the

two,

er,
to

consists have taken

the
in

allege

the

place and
of

reign
during

of the
of

the

celebrated
of
a.
one

of

Pataliput.ta,
on

the

third

reign
years

hka

the

North

India,

upwards
represents

400

b.

as

the in of the

Sinhalese
the
reign
reign of

version

tiiat the

the
in
b.

second the

red

Kalasoka, which

and would
upon

third be
325

17 t

of

Asoka,
in

c.
*

rof.
as

Max
his

Muller opinion, introduced

commenting

this by
a

point,

mates inti-

that

the
into

Ceylonese,
their
history

stretch

of

their

nation,
and

an

intermediate there
a

an

intermediate

Council.
That
of
on

But

is

no

ground

for

such
of all

supposition.
first
accounts

Council
era,

was

about
enough
not

the

close

the the
as

century

the

Buddhist
;

from have
of

the Tibetan

subject
Annals,

and

this

been,
Asoka

stated

in

the

during which

reign

the
us,

Great,
proves
c,
or

for
that
218

the

best that Buddha.

evidence
monarch

iory
to

furnishes
reign
was

commenced

325

B.

after

In
sat

whose about that The

sup
to

then,

the

Second

Council
The

held,

which

century
in

after

Buddha?
^

Sinhalese
son

affirm

the

reign

of

one

Kalasoka^

of

Susinslga.'
fully

nu
this

PurAna^
statement.

and It

other
is

Indian
indeed, the

traditions,
that

clear
with

according
of

the

er,

the

king

who

agrees

Kaldsoka

the

Ceylonese

See

his

History Mahaw^msa

of

Ancient with

Sanskrit,
the

p.

271,

et account

seq. in the

Compare

following

Vishnu

a.
next
v.
v.

The

Prince

and

m.)

will his son

be

Sisunaga;
will
be

his

son

will

be

Kdkavama

(3

Kshemadharman,

(Kshemakharman
son

20

Kshemadharman
;

36
or

years

m.)
36

his
years

will
m.

V. son

Ksheraajit
will

Kshemarchis,

Kshatraujas, Bh. Ksbetrajna,

v.;

be

(4

r.

be
28

Vidmas^ra,
years,
m.

(Vimbis^ra
Vidhisara ;

28

years,

Vindusena
be
24

yasena
son

Bh..);
25 years,

his
v.

son

will

Aj-Atasatru,
years,

will

be

Dharbaka,

(Harshaka

Vansaka, ;

m.)

s called

Khhavarna against

but

this

diiference
of

is

not

sufficien
accounts;

bjection
both

the
names^

correctness
as

the
case,

Ceylonese
may

ince

the

is

often

the is,

stand established

for

me

person:
fact,

and

their

identity

moreover,

he

that
having

both been therefore, scriptures, long

historians
the
son

agree

as

to

Kahavarna

alasoka

of
the
were

SusinagaJ*

It

appears, of the
and

that
which the

authors

of

the

Tibetan
after they
the

ve si

recorded
to

lon Cey

after the

events

which
surnamed
;

relat

istook

Asoka
perhaps, the

Great
they liad

for
never

Asoka,
heard the reign

Kalasoka,
having the first

whom,

and,
of

onc

rown

second
they

Council
had
no

into

mentio

Monarch,

alternative
as

but

to

fix place

the

thi

nd

posterior
reign

Convocation
ofmuch
a

having

taken

during

subsequent
reason

celebrated
to
name

sovereign. For,
may

There
next

indeed

Kanishka. Kanishka

soka

Hushka,

Jushka

and

be

regarded

son

will
also
43

be
will
years,

Udayksva,
be
v.;

son

(83 years Nandivardhana,

and
43 years,

v.

Udibhi
his

or son

Ud^sin,
\vill
ten

3^
be

years

and

MahsLnanda,

and

40

m.)
of
a

These

Saisun^gas

kings
'The

of
son

the of be

earth
Mahapanda

for

362
will

years.

be

born

woman

of
he

the will

Sudra
be

class
exceedinglj

will

Nanda,
another

called

Mahapadma;
he
of
one

for

aricious.
race,

Like
for

Parasur^ma,
the under who
a

will

be

the

iya

after

him
earth

kings

the

earth

ing

the

whole and

mallya, will
out

govern the the

others, for

will

reign

after years.

umbrella, Mahkpadma
The

will he

annihilator of be sudras.
will
;

the

Ksha

He

have

and

hundred

Brahman

eight he and Kau/ilya

so

nine

Nandas.
of will
son

'Upon
earth.

cessation

the

race

of

Nanda,

the
on

Mauryas
the
throne;

Kaufilya
his
be

Vindiisira;
son

will

place be his

Chandragupta

will his
be

posses
son

Asokayardhana;
son

his Sangata;

son

will
son

Suyasas;
be

ka,

will his son

Dasaratha;

will will the

be
be

Somasarman;

will his

be

his
be
ten

will

S'U

son are

will
the

Sasadbarman,
Mauryas,
who

successor over

Vrihadratha.
for 137 years.' dsi

These

gn
*

earth

Su!9un"gassa
K

putto, hattiy
o.
"

Asoko
Dipdvansa.

mahfpati,

Pktaliputta

nagaramhi,

j j ankslresi

the

only who reign the

Asiatic
founded the

princes

who

were

imbued

with
and
were

the

virtue during
greatly

merit,

Colleges
in

and

Chetiyas^
of

regions control
**

the
of

North

India

spiritual
piety,
correct;

Buddhist
too,
was,

ascetics

preeminent
account

fo

rigid
respect

Perhaps
and the

the in

Tibetan
point of

is
a

there

fact, of

fourth

cil

held knew of the

in

territories and third of

at

of
the

KanisAka,

which
a

the

onese

nothing,
second and

Tibetans

had

but
they

confused

Sangitis^

which
and the

jumbled
of

ther,

taking
who

the

date

the

one,

name

the

reign
above
by

reigned
supposition

the

other.
great
*
"

The

derives
himself,

support the

from
of

the

fact

ced
not

Pr.

MuUer the

^that

Buddhists
either

Ceylon

borrow
or

outlines
the

of

their
of

history Magadha;' which

from
also

the

mans

from
of

Buddhists
and
of

and

"om

pecularities
from
a

language Pali
digests
^

style
the

distinguish

the

tan

the

Sinhalese.

rom

paper

entitled
A.

the

Peculiarities
we

of

the

Gdtha

style^

the

Bengal
of

S.

Joumal,t
from have

gather
sacred compiled,

that

the

Buddhist
of

rature

Nepal, China

which

the

scriptures

Tibet,
ugly

ary,

and dialect,
forms have

been
of
the
and

is

in

an

krit

destitute

niceties

of the

Sanskrit
"c.
;

Gram*
that of
metre

al

of

declension

conjugation,
to

the

ors

sacrificed
a

Grammar
style
to

the

exigencies

it is in

mixed

of

prose

and

Gstth^
of the
^o

that

it bears

rong

resemblance

the that
of

Tantras it
appears

4-7th

centuries production

the

Christian
to

era,

and
task

be

the

en

whom

the

compilation

was

assigned

without

Journal

of

the

Ceylon

Branch

of

the

Asiatic

Society

for

1856-8,

99.

^y
Mons.

Babu

Regendralal
Burnouf

Mittra
this

;
as

volume
a

for fact

1854,

p.

604.

regards

conclusively

demonstrated.

f"cient

materials
Mons.
to

at

their has

disposal. pronounced

In

view the

of

these

peculiari

Burnouf be
a

Nepal

sacred of

riptures

barbarous
Pali,
and

Sanskrit^
Prakrita, of language

in

which
to

the be

forms

es,

Sanskrita^
to

appear
of

confounded.*

ferring
the

the

difference
or

the

different

part

Mahavaipulya

'the

highly

developed it indicates

sutras/
in the

the

same

stinguished
that

Orientalist
there
great his
was

remarks^that
another

clearest

ner,

digest

besides
of

the the

compilations

the

three
in

ecumenical the
as

convocations Nepal
scriptures

Buddhists,
vl

that

opinion

comprise of
and

fourt

gest,

which the
to

he

regards
was

the
no

crude longer

composition familiar, they

by

writers

whom

Sanskrit
in the

who

voured endea-

write

learned

language

ill

understood
use

ith

the

freedom

which

is imparted

the

habitual
This the
seems

of

pular

but

imperfectly

determined
and,
to

dialect.
assuming

appears

exceedingly
reign
to

probable;
Kanishka but Burnouf
many
"

compilation
to

he

of

be

fact,

there
to

be

no

son rea

doubt,

circui]()stances

confirm,
were

the

conjectur

Mons.
out

^that

these

sutras
on

committed
of

riting

of

India

in
"

countries
countries

the

west

the

Indus,
language

or

example,

Cashmiry and

where
would

the
be

learned
cultivated

fBrahmanism
success

Buddhism

wit

ess

than

in

Central
critical

India,

(p. 105.)
and
a

Mons.

Bumoufs
by
place
were

observations,
demand
know
"

the remarks.

doubts

xpressed
first

Babu
it is

Kajendralal,
necessary
to

few
the

he

how

discourses
in
"

uddha
in
*

originally

written thus

whether

altogether Buddhagosa:
in it

pros

verse.

They
whole
are,

are

described

by

The

of
the

the

foregoing,
Suttan,
Jatakariy

comprising
Geyyan,
Abbhutadhamma

the

ni

ivisions,

Weyyakarana,

GathoL and

Uddnauy

Itivuttakariy

the

attan.

The

Suttariy

be

it
Niddesa,

understood,
the
Mangala the
Tuwataka

contains, Khandaka
suttan;

the
and
Parivdra,

two

iariga

and the

(two)

in

SuttanipAta,
as

the
as

Ratana
suttan,

suttan,

ka

suttan

well

and

all

the

discourses

of

TathAgata

bearing

the

signification

an.

Be

it

understood
in

further,

that

the

Geyyan with
consists
Gctthd,

contains

every

composed The description The

Gatha
of the

(metre)

together

(its prose
throughout
with

portio

whole

Sanguttaka
6^"z^

(of

composition be the
it

together

prose.
whole
Gathh,
'any

Weyyhkaranay Pitaka, of
Buddha Angctni.

understood,
Suttanta
not not

consists

of

the
in

hhidhamma the

composed classified

words other
it

which

are

under

the

eight

Be

known

the
Therigathity

Gatha
and
any

consists
those
the

of unmixed

the

Dhammapadani

agathhy comprehended

(detached)
named
Suttanta.

Gatha

in

of

above

The

Udinan, delivered

be

it known,

consists
in

of

the
of

eighty

two

Sut-

(by

Buddha)

the

form

hymns

of

joyous

ration. The
Itiwuttakan,
ten
suttanta

be

it

understood,
commence

comprises with
the

the

one

ed
was

and thus

which

words,

said

by
be

BhagavS-.' it understood,
of comprises the five

The
fifty

Jdtakan,

hundred
with

Jhtahxis

(incarnations
^

Buddha)

commencing

Appanakajsltakan.
The Abbhutadhammoy

be
the
as

it

understood,

comprises

all

the

antd,
such

containing

miracles
bhikkhus.
are

^nd

wonders,

commencing miraculous
to

expressions
dhammd

These

and

ous

(powers)
be
it

vouchsafed
consists

Ananda.'
the

The

Vedattan,

understood,
the

of
the

Chulave-

n,

the

Mahdwedattany

Sammddhitthiy

Sakkapanha

Mdhapunndmauy

ole

of
those

those
who

Suttanta

which

have

conferred

wisdom

and

heard

them.'*
extract

The

foregoing

shews compositions identical

that

the

sacred

compilation

Buddhists^
which
was

like

the

of the

Brahmanical date
of
the
or

Sutr

riod,

is indeed partly
in

with
partly Gdthd
eastern

the
in

Buddhist
verse;

itings,
some

prose
are

and
in in

Ghthd

at

of This the

the
is
a

suttans

(metre)

together

wit

ose.

peculiarity
to

compositions,
to

esp cia
attention

Pali,
this the

which chapter

I of

wish

invite

re.
a

Of

fifth

the

Attanagaluwansa

se pr poetry
to
to

complete

illustration. by
the prose,

Where,
the
latter

indeed,
is intended

mediately

followed
more

express

mething
owing
nature

than
to

writer
of

has

been

enabled

do

se,

the

restraints

versification.
are
.

Again, of
*

fro

of
also
with than

the
seem

subjects
that view
to
or

which
was

treated
for

in

Gathd.s
hymns,*

would

poetry
create

selected

joyous
of

also

better their

impression study
against

certai

tters

of others,
furnishes works.

to
no

render
argument

easier.
the other

Thi

one,
of

therefore,
the Mons. Nepal

ness genuinetraits

But
refers,

the

various
in

ich

Burnouf
extracts

taken Dip"vansa,

connection

with

llowing
the
same

from

the

satisfactorily

explain

ay

difficulties

raised

by

Babu prove

Rajendralal,
the
owes

whilst
of
to

time
that
the

they the

conclusively Nepal

correctness

onjecture
of

collection
literature

its

origin
of

another

gest

Buddhist
or

besides
Benfey,

those

the
of

thre

nvocations,

in the

words

Pr.
sources,

*it consists

merely

anslations
in

from

Buddhist The

which
says:
"

were

originally

mposed

Pali.'t

pipS.vansa

Translated
by the

from

Buddhagosa's

Atthakath^ Tumour, and

entitled

the

Sumangala BL
A.

asini,
vi. p.

Hon'ble

Geo.

published

in

the

S.

526.

1,

"

Nikkaddhita Therehi
Annan

pdpa

bhikkhil

Vajji
pakkhan

puttaka;

labhitvana babu

AdhammaTadi
2.

jana

"

Dasa Akansu
Tasmayan

saliass^ dhamma

sam"gantvsl
sangahan. sangiti

dhamma aangiti sangitika akansu

miila akansu

Mah"

vuchchati.

8.

"

Mahd.

bhikkhii
sd^sanan
;

Yiloman
Bhindit\^ Aniian
4
"

sangahan
sangahan.
suttan

Annattha
Anfiattha

sangahitan akarinsute
"

Atthan Niktlyesu 5.~Pariyayadesi

Attho h

dhammancha cha panchasii.

tan

bhindinsii

vApi

nippariydya

desitan
neyyatthan

itatthancheva

Ajdnitvdna
6.
"

bbikkhavo. bhanitan
;
"

Annan

sandhdya

Annattha

Aapayinsute

Vya^njana
Bahun

chhdyaya

te

bhikkhu

atthan

vin^sayun.

7.

"

Chharfifetva Suttan
Patiriipan
Tantin
cha vinaya

eka

desancha

gambiran
vinayan

sutta

akarinsute.

8.

"

Parivaran Abhidhamman

atthuddharan chhappakaranan
niddesan
;

Fadsambhidancha
Eka
Etta

desancha
kan

Jdtakan

vissajitvana

9.

"

Nania

linga

parikkharan
;

'Akappakarananicha

Pakatibhavan
Tancha
10.
annan

vijahitva
akansute.

"

Pubbangama
Maha
sangiti

bhinnavadA
k^raka
;

Tesancha Bhinna
11.

anukdrena

vada
apara

bahii
kalamhi

aim.

"

Tato Tasmin

bhedo

ajayatha

Gokuliko
Dvidhd
12.

Ekabbohdri

bhijjittha
dveva

bhikkhavo bhed4
;

"

Gokuliksknan
Apara

kdlamhi cha

jayatha
Pannatti

Bahussutika Dvidha
13.

bhijjittha
puna

bhikkhavo. vadi
;

"

Chetiyachu
Maha
Pancha sangiti
vdda

bhedaka
ime

sabbe

Mahd Atthan
"

sangiti

inulakd. bhindinsu
sangahan
;

14.

dhammancha desancha

Eka

Ganthancha

eka

dcsanhi
akansute.

Chhar^e/etvaniian
15.

"

Ndmalingan
'

parikkhdran
;

Akappakarananicha

Pakatibh"van Tancha
aniian

vijahitva
akansute.

16.

"

Visuddha
Puna bhedo

thera

vadamhi

ajayatha; Vajjiputta

Mahinsasaka

17.

"

Vajjiputtaka
Chatudha
Dhammuttarika bhedo

vS-damhi

ajayatha;
Bhadraytlni

Chann^garikdcha
18.
"

Sammiti.
dve

Mahinsakdnan
Apara

bhedst

kalamhi
T$td^

j^yatha;
Dhammagutta bhikkhavo.

Sabbatthi
Dvidha
19.
"

bhijjittha
vada

Sabbatthi
Kassapikenapi

Kassapik^

Sankantika; Suttavadi

Sankantito
Anupubbena
20.

bhijjatha.
dasa thera yMk
vadato,

"

Ime

ekk

Pabhinna Atthandhammancha Eka desancha

bhindinsu
sangahan;

Ganthan

cha

eka

desamhi

Chha"f"^etvana
21.
"

akansute.

Namalingan
'Akappakarand

parikkharan
nicha;

Pakatibhavan
Tancha
22.
annan

vljahetva
akansute.*

"

Sattarasa
Eko
vado

bhinnavada
abhinnako; dasa
honti

Sabbe

val^hd

BhinnaY"idena
23.

tesaha.
inah"t
muttamo,

"

Nigrodhova

rukkho

Therovadana An^nd'n

adhikancheva

It

is

remarkable
same

that
stanza
"

the
a

repetition circumstance
was

of

an

act

is

conveyed the

by truth
to

tion repetiol

of

the

ion,

that

the

Dip^vansa

compiled

which by royal

proves

th

chroniclers,

whom

Kevalan
Kan/aki Nibbutta
24,
"

Jina
viya

sdaanan;

rukkhamhi
sesaka.
sate

T"da
yassa

Pa/hame Dutije Bhinntl

natthi

vassa

satantare;

sattarasa

vsUla

Uppann^ 'Many
individuals

Jina

Sasane.
ten

(viz.)
been expelled

thousand

sinful
thenuy

Yajjian

ikhhus

who
and,

had having This

by

the

assembled
a

formed
is thence who

another

party,
Maka

held
SangUi^

council

amma.
*

called

The
into

bhikkhus

held
set

the

Maha

SangiH first

reduced

the

gi re

confusion,!
S
in

aside:^
placed
in

the

compilation,"
places and

de

another.

They

different
places, nihhya.

the distorted
did
so,

Suttans

ich

occurred
and the

different
of

other
fire

se

wordsjl
difference
on

the

They

rant igno

of

(the

between)
particular

the

general and
They

discourses,

ose

(delivered)
natural and
sense

occasions,

also

(between)

eir

implied
that

significations. which
was

expressed**^
declared,

different
various

otherwise

and
authority

ide

significations words,
of

under omitted

the
one

unwarranted

shadow
*

of)
"

ft
Behar

They

portion

of

the

Suttan,

Vajji

portion
not

in

is however distance this fVom

stated the

where

the which Council the

of

Lichchavi
was

Princes
Doubtless and

were

held.

settle it was

principal
at

seat
or

Government
Allahabad.
'ruffled,'

Buddhism,

whic

period Viloman

was

VeioJi
'made

modem
to

akan$u

bristle,'

crossed,'

'reversed,'

confused.*

}
"

bhinditvd

"

'having
"

broken,' the
The
context

Sangahan
not

from

split,* I here
oniy

^set

aside.'

would

render

this
in

word connection and

'compilation'
with
not
a

'rehearsal.'

acts
can

related,

taken
to
a

iginal

import

of

the

word,

refer

written

ment

llection.

Akarinsu
sentence,

'

'

made,*

done,*

effected.'
rendered

The

same

word

is used

in

ollowing

wherein
means or
*

I have

it 'placed.'
the

I Dhamma
*

here the
sense'
'
"

heir
**

atiha

phraseology import.'
to

of

Scriptures,

as

opposed

Thpayivsu

They

made

stand.* of

tf

Vyanjana

'

letters,'

and

in

some

the

Buddhist

"

writings,

words

Vinaya

of
them

deep

import,

and

substituted*
They

(their own)
out

ver-

of

and
six

the

text.!
of
a

left

the

Pariviiran

tations,"
the
any

booksjl
and in
of the

the
portion stead.

Abhidhamma,
of

the

Pati*

iddy

JNiddesa,

the

Jettakas^
moreover,

without

cing

thing
nature
as

their
nouns,

They,

disrer

d**
as

the

their

gender,

and of

(other)

acci-

s,tt

well
the
same

(various)
different

requirements forms.

style,|:|:and

pted

by
of

The

originators

the
their

Mahd

Sangiti

were

the
then,
were

first

sece-

Many
in

followed
that
"

example.

Since

there
divided

was

reach

association

and and off

into

the

Priests

into

sections

the

Ookuliha

Ekabhohari,
two

Subsequently
viz.,
arose

Gokulikas
PaHftati,

branched

others, there

Bahmutiki
a

Subsequently
Chetiya.
sprung
up

still,
there
were

schism

lled)

the

Then
from
a

altogether Sangiti

five
"

schisms
same

had
was

the

Maha

the

the

first

(being

sixth^.

Patirupa
From
a

"

placed

another
of

figure

or

counterpart.'
and

ngs

c("mpari8on latter I find the

;

the three

Ceylon
sections,
to

Nepal the

Versions

of

the

sacred
and

has

Vaipulyafihe
discourses. with The ;
twelve
; 7

^idan,

the

esa

wing

all which list taken

are

additions

the

from

HodggorCs
ante

original lUustrationt^

Compare
the
list

the

from

agosa's
are

a;

of Vyakarana;
10

twelve

atthakathd, kinds
4

p.

61. by
6

Hodgson

says

Bauddha
names,

known

the
Udan
11

following
; 6

1
;8

tures scripSutra

Githa;
dharma;

Nidan

Ityyukta

Jataka

ipulaya;

Adbhuta
text
*

Avadan;

Tantin.
Atihuddkdran

The

; see

my

explanatory
*

hereon remarks discourses.*

12 Upadesa.* and in the Introduction.

II Pakarana
composition.* The version
'

compilation/
of

'something

made
is, I

methodically/
believe, deficient. niceties

*an

gin ori

the
"

J4takas
also
of

in

Ceylon

Akappakarani
or

'decorations,

embellishments,

of

style

sition, The

figures

peculiarities diahct of the

Miira

speech.* here noticed, Scriptures Nepal

when

(See
for 1854,

compared Essay
p.
cwie

with thereon
et

those
by Babu

of

th Ra-

rcUal

in

the

Bl.

A.

S.

J.

604,

seq.)
Buddhists
by

there

can

doubt

of

\h"

identity
The

between

ihiA of

fourth
style of

version.
correspond

di^Terences
with
*

therein composition
"

of the illustrated
here

and

the

Mr.

Mittra

ly

the

defects
*

described.

Parikkdrem
"

decorations/

These

heretics
the

(also)

distorted
omitted
a

the

sense

and
of
the

the

phraseology

(of

scriptures);
of

portion

(origina (in
nouns^

mpilation^and

the

^^/^a^^

and

substituted
the
as

others
of various

lieu

hem).

They
and

(further)
other

disregarded
as

nature

the

ender, style,
^

accidents^
the

well

the

requisites

and

corrupted
of

same

by

different
priests

substitutions.* there
was

In

the

doctrines

the
in

orthodox the

again
two

each

(which
the
sects,

resulted and
Dhammuttankay

establishment)
From
the

of

sect

lled

Makinsaka

Voffiputta,

latter

arose

ur

called

Bhadrayani,
two

Ckannaffarika,
the

Sammiti.

Afterwards,
Dhammagutta

(more)
out

schisms,
the

tSabbat-

ivada

and
the

arose

ot
up

Makinsaka; Kassapika,

om

Sabbattiha

gradually
the Sankantika.

sprung and

the
it

an

om

the

latter
These

from

the

Saltavadi

hism.

eleven

emanated
made
a

from
compilation of the' and

the

orthodox by

party.

*They

(likewise)
and
the
a

distorting discourses;
gathas.

se,

phraseol(^y
portion

sacred
of

an

omitting

of
forms

the of

text
nouns,

the

They

disregarded
as

the well
Same
as

their requirements

gender,
of

and

othe

cidents,

the by

various
different
seceders
not

style,

an

rrupted
*

the schisms
of

substitutions.
were

The

of who

the

(thus)
was one

seventeen,
;

ada^

those

had

seceded,
sects.

and

with

ere

were

altogether the
great
are

eighteen

^Like

Nigrodha
supreme

(among)
among

trees,

the
;

orthodox
they ment retrenchfrom

scourses

alone

doctrines

and

ar

eover

the
or

pure

(very)
The
of
says
a

word

of

Buddhd, which

without have
arisen

addition. the
thorns

doctrines
tree.

like

^^In

the

Gath^

Mr.

Mittra,

we

find

the power,

old

forms
and

of

the

Sanskrit

ammar

gradually
expressions

losing

their supplying
to
we

impressive

prepositions

iphrastic

their
vulgar have

places,
slangs
and

and

time-haJllowed

ver

conjugations
f
The
to

juxtaposed
vdda

uncouth

provincialisms."
at

word
convey

ces

which heresy
,

differently
"c.,
means

translated
simply
as

different

schism^

in

this

plac

There
in

were

no

(heresies)
seventeen

in the

first

century

(anno
in
the

Buddhae)
religion

the

second^

sprung

up

dha.'

Whilst

the

above
codes,
writings,

passage

clearly
from
were

indicates

that

there
version
at

several the

different which and

would
"

the

orthodox

sacred

authenticated
the Nepal
that
Tantra

three
is
one

ferent

convocations;

that
also
seem

version

those
question
to

codes
was

it

the

compilation period

made,
in

not

in

the

above

rred

"

not

the

age

of

Kanishka,

but
era.*

"

in

the

early

part

the
style

second is,

century

of
to

the

Buddhist

The
it is

difference
easily

however,
version

be
one

accounted
century

for;

and

done.

Nepal

is by

later
the

than

the

orthodox council it it
may
country,

ion;

but
heretics
who

it is not
was

stated

where

unauthorized originated
*

the

held.
'

Those
'

who and

being

sts,

were

expelled that part

and from they the
went

degraded,' of
the.

be

onably which

inferred
was
a

out

Vajjian

of

Magadha
their

kingdom
a

subject
distant

to

the

hchavi
it

princes,
seem

held

Sangitim

country,

would

the

writings

themselves,t)then
and

subject
himself,

the

influence has examined

passage

of

the
a

Brahmans;
of

M.

Burnouf

portion

the

Pali

Digha thinks,

Nikdya
that been
there
*

and

parallel

in

the

Nepal
two

scriptures,

it i

possible

that

these

versions

may

have

nearly from

emporaneous

in India,

and

have

been

current

the

find
works

Prof.
havfe

Max been

Muller
referred

agrees
by

me with Oriental

in

believing Scholars

that
to
a

although
much ascribed
24.
more

the

period

of

Indian
era.

Literature,
Buddhism
and

yet

it

can

now

nte-Christian Some of the

a

Buddhist
to

sjifely Pilgrims^

be p,

to

Nepal
source

Scriptures
;

appear
as

be

Brahmanical
esoteric

and,

remarked
to tantra,

by

additions unauthorized Upadesa treats Hodgson,

and ceremonies being

doctrines with

equivalent
those of the

the
tantras,
ones

rites
but
are

identical
different,

Hindoo

the

chief
"

object
Hodgson's

of

p,

though

many

of the

inferior

the

same.

rliest

period

of
them

BuddhiBm,
to

before

the

events

occurred
version and

which

nsported be people

Ceylon.
the
and

The
inferior

Pali
castes

(he
the

add

ld

popular
of

among

bulk

Magadha
the Brahmans.*
was

Oude,

while

the

Sanskrit

version

used The

by

Vajjian
Burnouf,
in

code Hhe

not,

therefore, of
a

as

it

was

once

supposed

M.

work

period

when

Buddhism
facts

ceased
in

flourish

Hindustan;'
may

and,

from

the
that

stated
anomalies ^the

pavansa,

it

fairly
the

be

concluded
of

the and and with

mposition

were

result

ignorance,

consequence

of who

haste

and
not
a

inattention,'

of

Sanskrit

Pali ^ther

speaking
for

had
of

sufficient and

acquaintance who

rposes

compilation,
a

therefore It
then the
may

amplified
thence
was

the
also the

Pal

^thas

with
that

Sanskrit
the

paraphrase.
which they

ferred,
the

code

compiled of

bas

subsequent
travelled

compilation into

in
and clear

reign

Kanishka,

which Tibet

since

Nepal,
very

from
to

thence

into
from

an

ina.

This
that the

appears

my

mind,
of

the

stance circumcentury

third

Indian
in the

compilation Tibetan
its

the

third

altogether
to

ignored
directly
the

writings.
in
a

For,
the
as

if

nt

Nepal

after

authentication
not

reig
to

Kalasoka,

Nepalese
and,if

could

make

mistake

of the
the

8avereign\

it

was

taken reign
an

upon

the

termination
the

third
were

Convocation,
not

in
to

the

of
error

Asoka
as

Great

ey

likely
former
any

commit
the
case,

to

date.
were

An

ain,

if
to
on

the
know

were

the

Nepalese

kely

thing
hand,
other

of
fail

the
to

Cashmirian
know the

code,

'and

coul
in

t,

the of

other

of the
facts

Convocation
of

ign

Asoka.

great

distance
which

.In from
were

words,

the

Nepalese,
the

Hindustan,
held
up
to

only the time

recognizing
of the

angitis,

compilation

"

Extracted

from

Dr.

Muir*s

Sanskrit

Texts,

75.

heretics,
that in

as

recorded which
took

in

the

Dipd^wansa
in the reign

of of

their
the
a

altogether
subsequent

ing

place
and

Central
took

India;

of their
west

recording
India
;
"

fourth in

(as
connection

the

d)

which
the

place

in

the

of

taken

with

philological
that

peculiarities

already
not

noticed,

lead
version fourth

the

inference

the

Nepalese

did

receive the

their first

after

it had and when

had

left

Hindustan,
on

between
to

and

ries,

travelled the in
orthodox

Cashmire
were

in

the

reign lost,

hka,

doctrines India.*
in

partly

and

ly

mutilated

Central

he

inferences
without

contained

the proof.

preceding The
sects;"

notes

are

not

to al

confirmatory
^^

Chinese
and
it

traveller is important

nthsang
to

mentions

eighteen

bear

in

mind
the

that

one

of

them

is

called
the

Sarvdstivadas,

is

clearly
of

Sahhattavada

of
which is

Pali
the the

Dipavansa.
Fan,

language

the

Buddhists,

called
not

is the

anical
we

language

(the
For

Sanskrit)
apart

and

Magadhiy

call

the
of

Pali,
a

from in the

other
language

evidence,
here
Brahma.

such spoken

the

existence
same

dual
is

number used
the
to

the

word

Fan

designate
of
the

The
estabFan
et

Fan

(Brahma)
rules
et

and
conformed

king
to

heaven
times.
"

(Indra)
Le
dieu

hed

and
le
an

ahma)

roi

du

ciel

(Indra)
Although Kalctsoka,
was

6tablirent the
yet

des

regies
have
too
at

se

rmferent

temps.

"f
with

Chinese
the
time

confound

Dharmdsoka sectarians

which

flourished,
viz.,
a

about

the
years

period after
sect

indicated
the is

Pali

annals, when

three

hundred
of

death

ma,

Kdtyiyana
work

Sarvastivida

said

composed

Abhidharma

jilstna Prasth"na.'

Vide

the

discourse

of

Revata

thera

in

the

Mahawansa^

p.

251.

As

an

exercise
at

for

the the

student,

and
extracts

In

support
are

of

the

fac

dvanced

p. xxvii.,

following
1.

here

presented

Mah\

Vagga.
aSna-taro

Tena

khopana

samayena

puriso

chorikan
ante

katv

lajitv^
"

bhikkhusu
*yattha

pabbajito
tattha
so
'

hoti.

Socha

pure

likhi

oti

passitabbo
"

hantabbo'
likhitako
"
"

ti. choro

Manussa handa
nan

pa

i tv"i
"

evam'ahansu
ti.
*

'ayan
e vam

hana

Ekachche
raMst

ilhansu

mdyy

evan

avachuttha

uilnktan

Mkgadhena

sslniyena

Bimbis^rena,
na

anesu

Sakyaputtiyesu Sv^kkhato
dukkhassa
vip"chenti labbhsl kinchi ti.
Hkhita
anta
*
"

pabbajanti
charantu
"

te

labbhd

kinch

ttun;

dhammo,

brahmachariyan

sam-

kiriy"yd'" Abhayuvara katun,

Bhagavato choro

ti.

Manusssl

ujjhjiyan
Sakya-puttika likhita

iyante

ime^samansl

yime

kathan
etam'

hi

nama

choran

abb^jessanti'
bhikkhave

"

attan

arochesun
yo

Na

pabbaje

tabbo;

pabbajeyya

atti
^At

dukkatassa.' that and

of
time
a

certain

person

having
the
"

committed
priests.

theft
was

ed,

became
at

recluse

amongst

It

ten* writ

him

the

Royal
People that

precincts
who

*that

he said

shall

be

punished

erever
"

found.'

saw

hini

(to

each
"

othe
let

us

^This kill by
the

is

{recorded)
Some
"

proclaimed

thief,
not
so;

erefore

him.' powerful ordained

shall

said,

Sirs,

say

it has

bee
"

creed
person

Bimbisara
amongst exempt the

king

of

Magadha,
of
the

be he
dhamma

priests
acts

Sakya

aternity, the let

be
has

from well
to

all

(of

punishment).

For)

been
view

defined
the total

by

Gotama:
of

fore) (where-

them,

with
following

extinction

trouble

From

the that

extract

which

speaks the

of

'leaf

inferred pubbe

the

bhikkhunf
datvi
a

was material wnting hutvsL panna-siichiyi

Talipot saddhin
patthanan
a

pin' leaf.

or

stile^

it ma

Vide

infra,
'She

pattkancha
^hapesi
"

padi

atelancha
been stile

jatissard
ascetic, and
a

bhaveyyanti
having

ing hav

female

given
and

together

with

[blank]

book,

panna-siichiya for the also oil

[a
lamp,

leaf-pi
aspired

ue

(unmolested)
People
speak
thence

the

duties

incumbent
to

on

Religious
the

student

began

enlarge

(upon

feubject
hood, priestare

contemptuously
^
"

and Priests
from

disparagingly of
the

(of

the

saying)
"

These
exempt

Sakya

fraternity

less how

they

are

the into

infliction the

(of punishment*)
a

is it that

they

admit
they

priesthood reported

(recorded)
to

laimed

thief

This,

(the priests)
^Priests the
or

Bhagavfi-,

thereupon shall be
shall

decreed:)
admitted commit
into

no

(likhita)
if

proclaimed should

f
so,

Priesthood:
an

any"

he

dukltata
II.

offence.

"
__

PaPANCHA

SUDANI.

(vol.
dese kira

iii. p.

482.)
Bimbis^re

"'
."

"

ajjhima

Rajagaha
nagare

nagare

rajjan-karente
kdxesi. Atha

chante

Takkasilst

Pukkusslti

kasildto
gahetvd.

bhanc^an

gahetvil

rajjan v^nijd. R^jagahan

raja
^TakkasiU
te

stgatd.,
vatiditysl

pannd.-

an

rdjknan
tumhe'ti

addasansu;

^hite
"

tha

v"lsino

puchchhi

vasino

devsl'ti
nagarassa

ate

rajsl janapadassa
puchchhitvjt
n"ma

khemasubhikkhatd.dini
*ko deva'ti
ndma
"

pavattin
"

tumhd.kan

puchrfi,j^'ti
Ama deva

*Pukkus"ti chatuhi

^Dhammiko'ti?

miko

sangahavatthiihi
^hito,
anke
vaye
sama

janan
d"rakan
?
'
"

sanganhkti,
viya vayan
te

Ipkassa

"i-pitu^^h"ne
*

nipanna

janan

to

i-ti.

Katarasmin
Bimbisstrena

vattatiti
vayo

Athassa
Atha

dchdk-

nsu.

jdto.

rajsl
samdno

dha

ik

tumhdkan

raj^
tumhctkan

dhammikocha

vayenacha
mama

me

kuneyy^tha dev^-ti. ^gachchhatha

rdjd.nan
tesan

inittan

kd.tun*ti;' gehan
man

kkoma

'

Rc^^
bhanc^n

sunkan vikkinitvdr

vissajjetvd;
gamanak^le

etva

vd.

gachchheyydrtha'ti

slba.

Tathsl tumhdkan

katva

gamanakstle

raj^nan
vacha*

asansu;
punappuna

r^J"t^^gachchhatha
drogyan

rijdnan
*

mama

puchchhitva vadathstti
dha.

raj", tumhehi
Te sadhitti

saddhin parisu-

tabhdvan

ichchhati'ti

asankamitv^

vandinsu.
puchchi
tumhe

K"ja
;

kahan

bhane*

tumhe irochesun dese

vase

nadiBsatfaa'ti

te

sabban

pavattin

jst

^s"dhu

tdt4

niss^yamayi

majjhima

rajctmitt

ddhoti

attamano

ahosi.

Aparabh^e
pannak^ran

Rdjagaha
gahetvd.

vdainopi slgate
sutviL

v"nijsl
Pukkusctti
^mayhan

Takkasilan

agamansu.

r"jk

kuto

stgatatthsiti
nagarato
;

chchhitva tumhe'ti.

Rfljagahatoti
dma

sahd.ya8sa
me

atk

dev^ti;
pa"hkya

^arogyan mayhan satthena

\h

sahkyassk'ti
eahayassa

slro

puchchitvk

'ajja
yd.

nagarato

nghasatthena
mama

sakato

vknij^
pa^^h^ya

kgachchhaiiti
yasanatth^sunkan

bbesan
gehani

visayan

payill/ha

kUato

rhja

ko/^hkgkrato
mk

niykpan
karontd'ti tatheya

dentu

viss

ntu

kinchi

upaddayan
attano

bherincharkpesi.

Bim-

sltropi

nagare

bherincharltpesi.
'

Ath

mbiekro
tnani

Pukkusktisna

pannan\
ratanani
y^
ratanan
'

pahini,

Pachchanta
mayhan
me

de

muttkdini
daseaniya^n

uppajjanti^

yan

saha

ssa

rajje

arkyatii'ti,
yan

Pukkuslttipi
tattha
eya

vippajgati tattha deso Majjhima ntoa uppajjati

^Evan
ahesun.
taran

mkmachmahit
me

ja

riipan pannan adisyk

ratanan

tattha
te

sahayo

machchbarltyatii'ti
anna

pahjni* mittit pa^hama

gachchhante
Eyan

le

maiiSan

dalha

tesa

hikan

katyk

yasant^nanya
"

Pukkustltissa
yanne

nltkkro

uppajji,
labhi,
so

rkyk

kira

a^^ha ime

pancha kamballt

anaggha

bale

'atisundar^
a//ha

sahkyassa
likhkpetya
tesu

isskmi'ti

Ikkhlgulama^/e
pakkhipity^
pakkhipity
k

karandake

bale

Ikkhkya

ya^kpetyk^etayatthenaye^hetyk yedietyk amachche

ugge

yatthena
dethk'ti

rkja

muddikkya
pesesi.

lanchh-

k^

mayhan

sab^yassa
^ayan

Sksanan-

adksiy

pannkk^o Te

nagaramajghe
gantyk

amachchkdi
adansu;

["ariyu*

da^habbo'ti.
suty^

Bimbisltrassa

anan
A
a

amachchkdayosannipatantiitibherinchar"pety^;
particle
his
or

vocative
to

term

of

address

by

superior

to

inferiors

King

subjects.

ara

majjhe
pallanka

amachch^di
vare

pariyuto

setachchhattena
bhinditvk

dhariyam^-

nisinno

lanchhan

vatthan litkh^gole

apanet

ggan

vivaritvaanto sahltyo
maltSe

bhan"fikaiimunchitv^
lina

disvk,
mafiSa'-

han

Pukkuskti
pannkkkran tulayanto

vittako

me

sahayoti
ekangulaa

iman

pahini'ti
auto

gahetv^

hena
nian

yoMetvk

dussa

bhan^Zan
Ikkha

aithiti

aliMsi.

pallankap^de
karanc/akan

pahari.
vivaritv^

Tkvadeva
auto

paripati;
ratanan

ena

kambala
ahesun.
sampannk

disvk
ne

epi

vivar^pesi:
te
vanna

sabbesu
sampannk

kambal^
phassa

Atha

pas^-

si^

dighato

aolasa

hk

tiriyan

attha

hatthji

ahesun.

Mahk

jano
raSilo'

disvk

anguliyo

hesi

chelukkhepau adisvkva
mittan
eva

akksi
rilpan

/amb^kan
pannkkkran

adi^ha
pesesi;
"

sab^yo
Yuttan
mekan

us^ti
rupan

k^tun'ti

attamano

ahosi.
ahesun.

Rkja
Tesu
att^^no

eka

alan

aggh^pesi, sambuddhassa chintesipachchhk

pesitun

sabbe

anaggb^

chattloro

li

pesitva
pesentena

^ehattsLro

ghare

ak"si.

pa^haman

pesita
me

pann^k^krato
pajfin"kiiro

ekan

vaf^ti

sah^yena

cha

anaggho
tatQ

to^

kinnukho

pesemiti
No-natthi,
pa^haya samatthan

kinpanalUjagahe
maM ^hapetv^
nitiha puMo

adhikan
kbo
aflfian

nan rata-

natthi!ti.
kklato

rkjk
ratan^m

api

panas8a"
ratanan

paium

tini

ssan

jajieiim
it

natthi.

v^o

ratanan

yichi-

Batanan 'kraddho.

nhm^

saviflfianakan
suTann^

avi!l"Si^akanti savi^^nakan

dfaan

tattha

aviiiaknakan

rajatltdi
to

iya

baddhan.
paribhogan
Savinnanakampi

AVifiHanakan
hoti,
iti imesu

savifiK^nakapseva dvisu
rataneeu

alank^Mi.
saviSSl^nakan gata
ratanan

han.

duvidhan

tirachchhli,na

ssaratanaoiti,

tattha

tirachchh^nagatan
meva

hattbi ass^i
Iti
imesu

tampi

s^an

upabhogattha
sel^faan. purisa ratananti,

nibbattati
ratanampi
rafinQ

dvisu.

saratanan

Mani^sa

duvidhan^
uppanna

itthi

an

tattba
ij^bhoggan;

ehakkavatti
iti imesu

itthi
rataua

ampi

purisasseva

dvisu

purisa

Purisa

duvidhan,

aiia-

iya

catananeha;
fi^ananeran

tattha

ag^riya

ratane

apichakkavatti
vandati^ iti

japabbiajita

panchapati^^hitena

imesu

suaiiagiiriyarataiiaiD'evase/^han.
ratanan

Anagkriyaratanampi
ratanancha, aapltpunkti

d
sahassampi

haiveekha

asekha

tattha iti imesu

sata

hslnan
'

asekkaasa
meva

padesan
Tampi
sata

dvisuasekharatanan

ana

se^han.

duvidhan

Buddha
skyaka

savaka

tananti;

tattha padesan
'

sahassampi

ratanknan

Buddha
ratana

inassa

nap^)unkti^
Buddha
hnddha

iti imesu

dvisu

Buddha

ase^Aan. sabba"an

ratanampiduvidhan,
ratananti: tattha

pacbcheka
sata

buddha

anan

sahassampi
na

hcheka

buddh^nan

sabba"fiu Aabbafifiu*
buddha
ratanan

buddhassa

padesan
ratanan
saman

papu-

i^

iti imesu

dvisti
hi

buddha
ratana

yeva
ratanan

se^han.

deva^kasmii;
tasma

loke

niim

thi)

asadisameva Takknsila dhammo mahdt ikt^i,

mayhan
^

sahkyassa
iktk

pesessk-

chintetvk
buddho
so

vksino sangho-ti

puchchi^
im"ni

tumh"kan

jan

tini

ratankni

dissanti'-ti,
pana

osopi

r^a
rkjk

tattha
tu^ho

natthi

dassanan
^
"

kuto-ti.

ndaran

chintesi

Sakk"

bhayeyya
sammk

ja

ga^hatthltya

mayhan

sahkyaasa

yasanatthknan

sam-

dhan
arunan

pesetun.
u^apenti,

Buddha
tasmk

pana

pachchan;timesu gantua
posettin

jana
nasakkk,

padesu

^atth^rk

Sli

ta

MoggalBiiiMayo
ib pana

irt^bk

6l.yake

sAkkk
manusse

bhayeyya,

'therk))achchanteyiisantitrj9uty^"i
samipan
knikpetyk

pesety^

aitano

upa^hittti
yena

meya

yuttan,
sksane

tasmi

erebipi

nasakk^

gantun^

^pan'kkarena
tenkkkrena

pesit

tthiichamahltsliyaklushagatk'yiyahont^
chintetyit
niiti
tanu

s^nan

inissd^mi'ti

chatiiratan'liyitnian

yidatthi pa^iten sisan

matta

hulan

nkti

bahalan

suyanna

karkpetyli

tha

ajja

akkhark,ni
adhif/hkya

likhisskmki
bhuttapittar^o

p^toya

nahkyityk

osathangkni
suyawna

apanita

gandhamkUihAkyn,
he^Aato

arano

sarakena

jkti
pks^an
""""

hingulakan*
kniyha

thkya
"

dy^ritni
'

pidahanto
""

disitmukhan
-"
"

sih
^"
^"

^"

jaran
:

vivaritva ^Idha
charana

kkasa
Tathagato
sampanno

tale

nisiditva
uppanno

suvannapa^^eakkhatkni
arahan loka
samma

anto

loke

sambudpurisa

vijjk

sugato
va manussanan

vidtl

anuttaro

skrathi
tkva

satthli eka

de

buddho
Tato^evan
matu

bhagava'ti; dasa

bud-

gune

pade

sena

likhi.

pkramiyo

etyk

Tusita

bhavanato
evan^loka

chaTityst

kucbchhismin
matu

pariisankuchchhiyan idan
nkma^

ganhi; idan

viyaranan
ahosi;

ahosi;

ne

n^ma

agarainajjjliie vas^^we
uikkhanto;
evau

maba
evan

bhinikkhamanan
dukkara
pallanke

maha

padhknan
manc^n

hi;

kkrikan nisinno

katva

aiahk
nanan

bodhi

ha

aparkjita

sabbai^uta
evan

pa^ivijjhi
ahosi;

anflutan
loke

pativijjhantassa
afitiian
eva

lok^,
nama

vivaranan

vake

rClpan vittan
va

ratanan

natthi-ti.

Yankinchi

idhava

huranva
panitan^

"""

Saggesu
Nano
saman

yan^ratanan

atthi

Tathkgatepa
panxtan
, *

Idampi Etena eka

desena

buddhe sachchena buddha

ratanan

suvatthi
gune likhitva^

hotUT"

Evan

dutiy^A

dharama

an

thomento^^svakkhato^bhagavat^

dhammo
pachchattan

sandi^^hiko

iko

ehipassiko'Opanaiko
satipa^han^

veditabbo
chatt^ro

viHSiihi/

t^ro

chattaro
panch^balitni sattfatira

sammappadhitna,
^atta

iddhi

.panckindriykni
maggoii

bojjhangk
nama

ariyo

a/

giko

desita

dhammo
eka pariyannayi

evai'ikpocha

riipochkti

sattatinsa Yam

bodhapakkhiye
se^^ho

desena suchin

likhitv^;

buddha

Samadhima'nan

tarikaS^mahu*
*

^am^hinktena^samii
Idampi Etena dhamme
ratanan'

navijj^ti
panitan* hotu
"

sachchena
dbamma ^"upatipanno
gune

suvatthi likhi.

Evan

eka

desena

Tatp

tatiyansangh^,
savaka

an

thomento

bbagavato

sangho

bbagavato

^^yapa/ipanno

bbaga*

to

s^vaka

sangho

s^michiparipanno
purisa
yugani

bhagavato

skvaka
puggalst
esa

sangho

didan
skvaka

chattkri
sangho
anuttaran

a^^ha
p^huneyyo

purisa

vato bhaga-

ahuneyyo

dakkhineyyo
"

anja
nama

raniyo

pufifiakkhettan
kathan
pahkya
sutvit
evan

lokassa/

^kulaputt^

tthu

dhamma

nikkfaamitva kechi

pabbajanti

chi

setachchhattan

pabbajanti,

uparajjan

kech

nkpatk^hknadinipahkya

pabbajanti,
sila

pabbajitv^
sila
mahk

panaimancha

ripattinpiirentitichulla
likhitvk chhadv^ra

majjhima

silkdini

ek

sena

sanvaran

satisampajafiS^n
seniLsaDan

chatu-

chchayasantosan

navavidha

nivaranappahlLzia
kamma/^hknani
knap^na

arikam^majjhanabhiflfik
eka
desena

a/^huppattin likhi.
~

ykva

avakkhayk

Solasakkhattukan
satthu

sa
nama

mma^hkna riipehi

vitthkreneva

likhitva samannkgato; a^ha

etani

skvaka

sangho

cha

gunehi
Ye pu^ala

satan*

pasatthk

Chattkri
Te

yogkni

honti
skvaka

dakkhineyya

sugatassa

Etesu

dinnkni
sanghe

mahapphalani
ratanan

Idampi

panitan
hotu
"

Etena
Eka
desena sangha

sachchena
gune

saTatthi likhitvk mayhan

savanna

^bhagavato
sahayo

sksanan

kkkhktan

niyyknikan

sache
"

sakkoti

nik

mitvk

pabbajattl'ti
kambalena
suvanna

likhitva
sara

pa^^n

sanharitva

hnni^

vefhetva

samugge
suvannamayan

pakkhipitva

ta

muggan

samugge manimayan

rajatamaye
pavalamae

jatamayan

manimayef

pavklamaye^
maskragallamay

lohitankamaye"

lohitankamayan

||masara
danta-

lamayan
an

phalikamayef
sabba'
ratanamaye

phaUkamayan sabba skrakaran^e

dantamaye**
ratanamayan

kilanjamaye
Puna
saraka-

laDJamayan

samuggan

^hapesi.

^tt^

8atan

is

also

defined

as

108.

This

is probably

glas^.

"jor^.

"

ruby.

|| emerald.

**

crystal.

^akan
ratana

euvanna

karanefake

ti

purimanayeneva

haritvii|
^hapesi.

maya

karan^^akan
sJtramaye

kilanjamaye
pel^y^'ti;
puna

karancfake

kilanjamayan
sabba
vatthe

vuttanayeneva

tv^

ratanamayapelan

kilanjamayapel^ya
lanchhetvk maggan

^hapetv^

nivksetvk ^Mama
hnh

r^jamuddikkya
pavattita^hkne

amachche alankkr^petha sodhita

esi:

a^hJLsabba
hotu Tato

vitthato

hotu,

chatfisabha^^h^nan

akameva

majjhe

chatilsabhan
hatthin

rkjitnubhavena
alankarkpetyk
ussapetvit
tassa

pa^iylt"

kti.

mangala

upari

ankan
sitta

pad"(itpetvk samma/^h^

setachchhattan

nagara

vi

samusditadhaja-pataka-kadali-punnak^retvit,

a-gandha-dhi!Lpa-pupphk-dihi*supari-mancfita
attano

at

visayappadeee

eva

rilpan

pjtjan

karontilti^

antara

ikknan

javana

diite

pesetv^sayansabbkkkrenaalankaritv^
pann^kkran
gantvst sahkyo

tUkyachara-sammissa-balakkya-parivuto
attano

miti

visaya
^tkta

pariyantan
mayham

amachchassa
Pukkuskti
iman

mu

asanan

ad^i;
parichchhanto

pan-

ran

orodhk
Evan

majjhe

aparichchhitvk
datvh,

p^skdan pachchanta nivatti. pannk-

ha

parichchhatil'ti.
satthk

sksanan

gachchhatiti
teneva

panchapati^hitena
niyamena

vanditvit
patiyWetvk

ra

bhogi
nayinsii.

maggan
attano

Pukkusatipi maggan pachchuggamanan

uposatha-divase
rafi"a

rajjasimato
nagaran

pa^^hkya

niykmena

patikdetva

alankkr^petv^ Takkagahetv^
tan

kkkrassa
p^punanto

akasi.
papnni
sksanan

Pann^k^ro
pann^k^ran krochesi

amachchopi

vntta

r^j^

sutv^

kkkrena

saddhin
kdJlya

kgatlinan

kattabba-kiohchan
amy

vichkretv^

b-kkran

pks^dan

ha

Mnk

idha
vivaritv^

kochi

pkvisi'ti

a-rakkhan

karetva diapetva
apanetvk
skramaya sayan

sihapanjaran
nich^sane

pannkk^ran
chhin-

chksane
vasan

ilisinno

lanchanan

h,

kilanja
samuggan

pelato
disva

parthaya
*

anupubbena Mah^
pariharo

anto

chintesi.

abbayuttakan

ratanan

uppannan'ti.

Athanan

sarnuggan

varitvar^ja

lanchhanan
pa^^n

bhindityksukhuma-kambalanubhato addasa.
samasis^ni ^rabhi
vskchentassa
;

uhityk
vata

suvanna

So

tan

paskritvk

^man^-

akkharkni ykchetun buddhagune

saiBapantini
tassa

cbaturassaniti
Tathkgato

to

pa^hkya

idha

lok

annoti

balava

eomanassan

uppajj
ahesnn.
:

navuti

loma

kilpa
yh,

safaass^ni nisinna
evan

uddhaggalomkni
yh.

ano

^hitabh|,yan

bhavan dullabha

najltDkti
sksanan

athassa

pakori-sata-sahassehipi
sotun*

sahityan So

skya

labhinti
y^ya

bhiyo

balavapiti

udap^i.

iipar

cfaetun

asakkonto

pitiyegapassaddhiyknisidityk dhammo'ti
dbamma
ykya

parato

kkkhkto

bhugayat^
tatheya
^

gune

^rabhi.

trltpissa

ahosi

so

puna
'

pitiyegapassaddiya
guAe

idityk

parato

supa/ipanno-ti

sangha

krabhi.
^nkpkna

Tatrlt

ssa

tatbeya

ahosi. ylkchetya

Atha chatukka

sabba

pariyanfe

satikam-

^h^nan

panchaka
afifiio
eyan

jhknkni
kochi da^hun

nibbattesi.

jhkna

Bukheneya

yitinkmeti
payisati

nalabati,
mattan

oya

chuUupa^^hako

arf^/hamksa

yit

esi.
*

Whilst

Bimbiskra

was

ruling
was

in

the

city

of
in

Rkjagha
the
some

Majfhimadesa*
in the

Pukkus^ti
foreign
regions.

reigning
At

city

kkasil^

this
entered

time

Traders

th

merchandize

from with
stood

Takkasilaf
presents,
saw

Rkjagaha,
king.

and

king those,
you?'

along
who

them

the
"

He
what

inquired
country

rendering
your

obeisance

*of

^We,
of

please

Majesty,
the

(replied
king,

they)

ar

eidents

Takkasila.'

Thereupon

haying

ques-

This

is

the

Maddhyadesa

of

Sanskrit
or

writers the

"

'the
on

middle

countiy* and

distinguished
or

from
the

the

Dakhhind
region*
desa'
to

Dekhan

the

south,

avanta

'snowy

in
be
"

the

Himalaya.

The

Hindus

describe

celebrated

Maddhya Himayad

Vindhyayormadhyan

Yat which
and

prig
midway

Vina*ana
between

dapi

"

Manu,
and

at

lies
to

Himavad
But

Vindhya,
note
at

to

the

east

^Lsa,

the

west

of

Pray^a.'

see

p.

xxix.

ned

theni and
*

on

the
the

affairs

of

(their)
the

city,
seasons

and

the
of the
*

prosperous
country
"

dition, what

favorableness^of
name

is the

of

(your)
virtuous?'

Sovereign?*
demanded he
is
"

Sire,
the

Puk-

/i

(ishis)name.'
your

*Ishe
replied four

king.

s,

Majesty,'
with
to

they

'

virtuous

"

^he pleases the

on

people
a

the the
'

Sanghavatthu*

occupies suckling
then

position
the

parentf
men.'

world

"

and,
age?'

like

lap,
age.

ses
was

What

is his

They

stated
king

his

as

old

as

Bimbisara.
'

Thereupon
king
can

the

addressed

(and
age
too,

said,)
he

Sons,

your
to
can.

is

virtuous
you

(Uke
your

me),
king

and

is

equal
*

me;

make they;
and

nd

of

mine?'

We
taxes,

Sire,'
gave

replied
a

(when)
said
of
to

the them

remitted
and shall

their

them
and

house,
at

sell your
see me.'

merchandize;
Whep
king
*

the

time

departure

all
the
;

this
of

had
their

been

accomplished,
;
"

visited said
of
to

the

at

time

departure
inquiry

and
as

the
the

them,
king

Go
in

and,

after

repeated
say
to

to

th

your of
your

my

name,t
They,
way,

him,

'

the

king
expressed

is

rous

friendship.' their

(the merchants,)
their goods, king,

assent,

went

arranged

took

their

ing-meal,

II and
said
to

having

approached where They when

account

their

accosted
You the

him.
were

king
seen

them,

*Men,
days.'

(were

you)?
all

for

these

(many)
(to
the !

related
he,

going) (fore-

matters;
*

king),
On
your

greatly I
have

delighted, obtained
desa.^
a

Sons,

Sadhu
person after

nd

(in the

of)

the

king

of

the

Majjhima
who
were

Sometime
went

(some

other)
"

traders,

residents

of

agaha,
The
*

to

Takkasila,

King
four

Pukkusati,
"

befpre
"

whom
"

"

Sangahavatthu
"

are

the
a

pre-eminent pleasing law;'

and

vh*tues conversation;'

of

kings,

viz.

"

gifts

liberality;'
conduct
"

piy

'firuitful

well

vachana' in being

atthacharU

Samdnatthatd

'regarding

all

ne's

self.'

Lit,
Lit.

"father
mama

and

mother.'
'in

1+This

vachanena
a

my

language'
"

"

*in pdta

my
rasa,

name.'

is

bahuvrihi
'

compound

bhutta

*t!xey-who-ate-the

of-earlv-dawn

;'

took

their

breakfast.'

ey

appeared
come;

with

offerings,
he
yon

inquired they
from

of them

from
from

whence

tli

and,

when

heard
come

had
the

come

Rajagaha^
my friend friend

asked

them,
your

*Have

capital
*

of

es,

Majesty,*
demanded

replied the
Prince.

the

traders.
Having

Is

my

ealth?'

made

that
of

inquiry

king
this

caused
day

to

be

proclaimed, traders
come

by

beat

drums, from
the

th

rom

whenever either shall

with

(hither)
beasts,
or

ci

my

friend, they

caravans

of

caravans

ggons,

all and
their

be

provided

with
from into
my

habitations
the

in

the

spective
the shall shall

localities,

with
entrance

batta

Royal
kingdom,

Store
"

om

period
also
they

of

th
in

ey

be
be

exempted
oppressed.'
in

from

taxes,

"

and
also

that

se

Bimbiskra
city. effect,

caused Bimbis4ra

milar
a

proclamation leaf*
as

hiff
to

own

Thereafter
that
*

nt

to

Pukkuskti pearls,
there
etc.,

the

precious

article

ch

gems,

are

produced

in

the
or

Pachchanta\
worth
from

gions.
my

Should
friend's
in like

be

anything

valuable

seeing

kingdom;
manner,

withhold
forwarded
a

it leaf
If
to

not

me.'

kkus"ti,

the similar

effect,

tha

he

Majjhimadesa
are

is

great

country.

preciousnot

ings

produced
me.'

in

it, my

friend

(too)
for other.
a

should of
these,

with hold
were

it from

Thus without
into
terms,

these
seeing

(two)
each

length

time

timate

friends

Of
came

who

ba

thus)

entered
for
a

Pukkue^ti
is
to

first
;"

by

(suitabl

ject

present,

that
of

say

-he

received

eight

inva luab Hhese

blankets
are

five

colours; shall
to

and, them

thinking
to

ankets

beautiful,

send

my

friend
lackered.

'

used

eight

(round)
the

caskets

be

turned,

and

ving
the

deposited lid
with

blankets
They
a

therein,
were

(they (then)
being

were)

secured
in

und

lacker.
in

wrapped

white

oth,

and

deposited

chest,

which

also

covered

wit

Doubtless,
Lit.

the
barbarous

Talipot
"

leaf
wild
"

ia meant.

*the

unenlightened;*

but

here

the

foreign

th,
sent

was

(statuped)
Ministers,
was

sealed
*

with

the

king's
to

signet
my

(This
A
is

done)
mis-

sayii^,
to

Give

this
that

friend.'
present

ve

toot,

given

the

eflFect,

*this

worthy

(inspection)
in

acceptance

of
the

him

who

is

surrounded

by

isters They

the

midst

of

city"'
went

(the ministers)
who,
the and having

tieoordingiy

and

delivered caused Surrounded by

it

to

bisara,
drum,

heard
etc., to

(its contents),
be assembled.
couch,
of

beat
by

ministers,

m,

seated

on

the in

royal* midst

undfer
capital,

the
he
and round has

uplifted broke
the

te

state-canopy,

the

the

l,

removed

the

wrapper,t
and,
"

opened
when he had

the
seen

box, the

released lackered
sent

tied)

its contents; he reflected

the

askets),

*my

friend
that

PukkusS-ti

this

sent

under He

impression took
up
a

his

friend

was

(wealthless)
its
an

r,' his

then

casket;
that

and,
it

feeling

weight

hand,
he

ascertained struck it
on
a

contained
of the dropped
nail,
the

article
when

of

ment;

pedestal

couch, dowa. he
saw

the

ker
had

( with

which
a

it had cas'ket

been

opened
a

sejxmed) (his) with

and

When
that

it
to

tained

valuable
There

blanket,
were

caused
in
to

others

also

opened.
beautiful
sixteen

blankets
and
soft

all

when touch;

spread, and

they
they

in

colour^

the in their

cubits

in

length, this,
their the

and

eight

width.
fingers,

The

multitude,
garments

seeing round

snapped

waived

ir

heads;
unseen

and,
friend of

highly
our

delighted, king,
a

aimed,
a

^Pukkus"ti,
present
even

has

sent

without of
being
every

seeing
made
one
a

him.

Such

personage

indeed

worthy
king
were

friend.'

The
they

caused all

of

the

bilankets
Of
these

to

be

appraised;
sent
"

found

iuvaluable. himself

he reflected

four

Buddha^

and

kept

for

four;

and

^One

Lit.
Lit.

vare

*best,

excellent.*

'cloth;

ho

returns,

should
present

send
has

better
sent

gift

than

the

first.

An

nvaluable send

been Is

by
nothing the
time
save

my

friend.
more

What
valuable in

sha

(him)?
Yes,

What!
there
yet
is.*

there
Though
the

Rs

agaha?

king
he
the

is

fortunate
the

(in
path

pre cio

things,)
no

from

entered
three

otkpanna^
to to

precious

thing, delight
(to

Batanas,X

was

alculated

produce
out
some

him.)
thing. and
A

He

(however)
Ratana
or

commenc

find

precious

precious

ing,

is

two^fold such
is

"

Saviflrtana
as

Aviflfiana,^
etc.;

The
the
one

latte
former

comprises
that

things)
associated

gold, with

silver,
the
senses.

and
The
to

which
as
an

(avi

ana),

(article
other,

of)

adornment,

contributes
Thus from

the

ment enjoy

of
ratanas,

the

(SaviSnana.)
is and
;

among
are

thes

Savinnanaka
viz.. Brutes
etc.

chief.
Men,

Savinn^naka Brutes
exist
are

al

wo-fold,

(such
very

lephants, of

horses,
man.

and

the
two,

same

for
man

the

en

Of
estimable Here

these
man

therefore,
also

is
that

the

chie

tana.

The

is

two-fold;
though of the

is to
born

say

le

and

female.
monarch,
two

too,

the

female,

for

iversal

is for
the
"

the

enjoyment
is

male.

Thus estimable

these
is
to

also, two-fold

very

male
layman

the

chief. recluse.

The

le

also

the

and
a

the

Here
he o(
very
"

again
makes
"

the

layman,

though

he

be

universal
even
a

monarch,
Samanera

tive-menibered||
standing.

obeisance
Thus,

to

singl

ay's

of

these

two

also, is

the

Recluse

he

chief.

The he

estimable

Recluse entered
the

also

two-fold and

Seka

an

seka

(viz.,

who

has

paths,

he

who

ha

No

natthi

"

'"not,

that

there

is
pp.

not

A
and

double
24,
note

negative
1.

to

intensi
which

affirmative.

See

Sakunta^'i,
into

110,
"

f
J

Lit. first
The
or

entrance

^e
the

stream'

'fallen
to

into

the

path,'

that

stage three

of

sanctification,
;
most

leading

final

bliss.

gems
'
"

inestimable
vad

things"
taddhi

objects
ratnam ratna'

as

precious

tana

*gems
is

Jjitau of its

jitau
kind,

whatever

best

that
for

utkrishtam indeed 'the triad

they of

ree

"

is an gems' See Gogerlj's

expression Essay,

call Buddhism.'
67.

prachakshate, Hence *t

in

the

IViend,

vol.

u.

ched the

the
first of

end
cannot

of

the

paths).
the
least

Of

these
of

hundred
one

thousand
the
"

equal
As^ka
is

part

of

latter.
dha Bud-

these,

supreme.
a

He hundred

is

also

two-fold of

and
cannot

Sctvaka*
equal very the

Of

these,

thousand
of

the

Sava-

least is

part
supreme.

(atom)
The

Buddha.

Thus, Buddha Buddha.

cannot

of

se

the

Buddha
^

inestimable

again

tv^o-tolA"
too,
a

Pa

chcheka

Buddha,

and

aZ/-/?er/ecf
Buddhas
Thus

hundred
part

thousand of
the

Pachcheka
Buddha.
supreme.
is

al

the
the

least

all-perfect is

of
the

these
world,

all-perfect

Buddha
the

alone
there

In

luding

(that
equal

of)
to

devas,

no

estimable

object

tana)

Buddha. resolving,
ratana,^

Wherefore
this
very

(the king)
incomparable
*

that

^he

would of
in

send

to

his

end

asked
seen

the

inhabitants
country

Takkasilay
most

Sons,

are

there

to

be

your

the
San-

inestimable

objects,
*the
very

Buddha,
names
are

Dhumma,
not
'

and

They
can

replied
they pleasure

knoAvn;
very

how

erefore)
king
to

be

seen?'

Saying,
*

Sons,
it

good,'

with the

thus

pondered
to

Is

possible,
to

with
the

iew

people's
my
most

propitiation,

send
never

Buddha
remain

dence
in

of
the

friend?

But,

Buddhas

till the
cannot,

distant
The
cannot

foreign
great

countries.

Gotama
as

therefore,

go.
etc.,

disciples, and,
foreign
to

such
since

Saiiputta,
my
to

allS,na,

be

sent:

it is

duty,

on

ing

that hither,
go.

priests and
to

resided
pay

in

country,
;

send
priests

for

attentions
a

them

(other)

also

ot
same

Since,
if Buddha
a

however,
and

missive

seujb

(on

the

dhamma)
thither,
to

is

as

his

chief

disciples

proceeded caused
a*spaa that
through

hall

send of

letter.' four

Thus

pondering,
long,
thin.

he

be

made

late

gold,

cubits
nor

and

about Thinking

wide,

and would

her

very

thick,

very

he
his

the
Lit. Lit.

letter

that
'pupil;
even

very

morning,

he

went

bath,t

'hearer;"
*

there

is not

that

sound.'

made

the

Uposatha of
ail
scents,

vows;*

took
and

his

breakfast,

and
Then

divested

kimself

flowers,
a

ornaments.

taking

eal

yermiiion
entered
the

into

gold

dish,

he

closed

all opening

the

doc^rs the

belQW

nd

his

palace;

and,
points,

moreover,

casements

facing

cardinal

he leaf this
is

sat
as

upon

the
:

upper-most

tory,
"

t and
Tath"gata

wrote}
has

on

the

gold
in

follows

appeared

world.
supreme

He

is

(Arakan,)
He

ighly

sanctified
with

Saint.

He
and

Buddha.
He
is

ndojved has

totb

Vi^
beatitude.
best teacher

Charana,^
He is fully

{Sugatd)
with

on

ho

attained He He
is is the
the

acquainted
is

orld.

charioteer
of He
were

(who
and
men.

able He

to

subjugate
is

n.

gods is

Buddha,

perfect

intelligence.
of

worthy
written

of
on

adoration.'
a

These
portion;
par

ttributes

Buddha

first having born that

small
the
t"n

nd

(he

then

described duties, womb

;

how)
he how
was

perfected
in
Tosita,

amitas,

pre-eminent mother's

and

was

conceived the

n his

event

contributed

to

world's

mancipation;
place

II what
when

happened
was

when

he

was

yet

unborn; departed
how, the

what

ook

he

householder;
he
and

how

he

fo sa

the

world;

how
acts,

greatly having his

exerted; ascended unconquerable how

having region
seat,
a

ccomplished
Bodlii**
to

difficult
and

he

having

sat

upon

tained

the
to

wisdom
the

of

Omniscience;

(such
and

result

ontributed

prosperity
was

of
not

the in

world;
the

that

such

other

supreme
"

being ^FawAwjcAi,
wealth,
or

all

universe,

including

e
**

heavens

8fc.

Whatever
be
"

whatever
that
to

most

desirable
is
to to
come,

object
or

there

iai this the

life,
san^

or

in

which

in

th

avens

is not

be

compared

Tathalgata.

This

These
kkasa

are

tke
'
"

'

Alfliasigasila.'
nearest

f
t

tale

Akkhar^ni

story likhanto, of

the
'

lit.

writing
at

sky.' letters.*

See

explanation
vivaranan.

this

p.

xxxiv.

II Loka

18

highly of
thus

distinguishing
this

characteristic
may there be

of

Buddha.

13y

power

truth,

prosperity!"
virtues

Having

briefly
was

recorded
secondly

the

of
as

Buddha;
follows"*

the The with

timable
is

dhamma

lauded
It
of

ma

well

defined
and

by
without

Bhagav^.
lapse

is

attended

lts

immediate,
of import.

time.

It

is inviting,*

is full wise.'

It
done,
a

should condensed

be

acquired
account
were

individually

by

This

of
giveh
the

the
to

Sattatinsa the effect,

hapakkiya^
they
were

delivered
the

by

Buddha
Satipatthana,

four

four

Sammappa-'

a,

the

four

iddhipada,

the
the

five

indriya,

the
supreme

five

bala,

the
"

bojjhangcL^
buddlia^ 8fc.
a

and

eight

bodied

magga,

am

Is

there
upon;

pure

thing
in other

which

the
is

supreme

Buddha
any Samaiihif

haa

rged

(or

words,

there)

has

been

declared
that
^aw?cfi?/"

(to

be

productive
can

of)
compared.
word.

immediate This By
the

rd;

with
is
a

J nothing

be
the

distinguishing
this truth,
may
wrote

characteristic
there

of

"

of

be

prosperity

T
\
'

Thus

briefly
praised
of

he
the

the

character

oi dhamma
as

and

then,
asso-

dly,

inestimable

JSangha
are

follows

The

ciation
live

Bhagava's
prudently,

disciplesU
and pairs;
are

well

conducted.
They
are

They

ghtly,

peaceably.
or

(classed
f
They and

collecti
are

into)

four

eight

individuals,
of

objects
of

of

charity,

deserving
They

hospitality,
to
men

are

hy

being
a

offered

unto.

(stand)
This

(in
he

the

of) that

merit-prodiictive-field.'
respectable
people
who

done
the

briefly

had

heard

discourse*

Eliipassiko,

lit. that

which

bids,

*come

and

see'

"

it

is

inviting

"

not

.
The

thirty-seven
Attanagaluvansa,
act

Elements
note
one's
*
"

of
to

Bucldhism,
iv.
to

for
7.

an

explanation

of

them

nay

Chap. mind
'

"

The
The The

of

confining
*
"

the

contemplation

of

doing

good,

dhamma words

doctrines
sdvaka

the

word.'
are

bhagavato

sangho

repeated

after

every

plirase.

Buddha,
after

departed

and
thrones;*
;

embraced
"

ascetism;
some

that
leaving

some

abandoning
of

after

(the
Commander

hig

gnity
the

a)

sub-king
;

and

others
when

(that of) Geneitil

they
had of
gave
so

Forces
purused
and

and
the

that

embraced

ascetism^

ey

prescribed

duties

chulla-sila,
a

majjhima
of

ltty

mahd^iila,

etc.f

He

also

brief

account
sanvaran

religious

observances,
;

commencing

from)

chhadvaru
;

ati'SampajanfLa
and

the

four

pachchai/a
;

santosa

the with

nine

kinds

senasana;

nivaranappaliana

together

the

scr (pr

kammatthanani,

and

the

results
of
pana

o^ parikammay

jhana

abhifi^a,
on

until
the

the

extinction
ana

distress.
sati

Having

the

plified
that

sixteen-fold

kammaiihana.X
were

ote

the

Society
like
the

of

Buddha's
"

disciples
^'Ye

also
etc.'^

endowed

th
*

virtues
S6tachcbhattan For
by
an

following:

putgala^
*the

"

*the

white these
overly,
terms

lunbreUn;'
duties,
see

state

canopy.'
suttan,

ted

the
of

exposition D. Rev.
the

of J. G

the A. above

BraJimajala
S.

transet
a

in
in
"

C.

B.

Journal,
passage,
of
to

ii.

p.

22

se

Some

theological

the

require
six
the
avenues;'

bri

planation.

Chhadvdra
organs
*

Sanvara, of
sensation,'

'the wliich

closing
lead
'

't

of six ubjugation Satisampajan n. is ascertained

ur

commission
retention
of

tic

"

memory, wisdom.'
reqiurements

ich

by
iiKi

-discretion,' Pachchaya of
and
an

memorial
'
"

th

santosa

contentment
are

wi in
nmn-

packchaya^' viz., robes,

ascetic,

r,

food,

habitation,
kinds
screens

medicine.
to
*

which Se7idsana

four
"

'habitations,'

are there which nine destruction that of which life,' ading a rehgious of

adapted
;'
are

the

recluse.
the be five,

Nivaranappahana
obstacles

overcoming
stated
to

wliich

viz.,
mind

1
.

against lust, 2. ai^ising

"

sign,

3.

apathetic
and Dhamma,

indiflference,
pride,

4.

perturbation

of
eight of

the

fro

resolution

ddha,

and Sangha, of

5.
a

doubt previous
the

upon
state
causes

matters, religious v future being, a existence,

past-and-future Friend ylon

"

state

being,
and

of
and

continued-existence
doubt such upon
as

[
all
mattei-s.

for forty

1839],
courses

vacillation of religious
rite

mmatihdni
etc.

action,

devout

meditation,
to

Parikamma^
before of the
the
ante

an

initiatory
upon
eai*th,
on

mpleted
one

the four
of

entrance

which ""f ascetism, dliydna. It is tlie fixing

ought

of
as

tlie

on with

the

elements, the

air,

fire

and the

water,

so

to

min impress

r"jaUty

substance
to

which
element attains firom

recluse

also

continuing
p.

address the

the

repeating that degree any four

contemplates its name

of

(S

tract,

xxii.)
the

until

ich hydna

disables
is being
'

sentient meditation,'
a

mind faculties
of

absorjition,

discerning
are

other

subje
each extinction

abstract

which
state
or

there path

degrees,
or

hich

existence,

considered dnapdna

sanctified

to

nibban^ sixteen

the

saH
by

kammatihdna;
means

also drawing
the

modes

breath

of See

devout

Gtrnd

*^

Are
they

there
are

eight
four

beings
couples,
unto.

who

have
are

been

praised
of

by

the

ly,

and

the

disciples
is

Buddha,
unto

thy

of

being

offered
of
of

Whatever
This
too

given
a

them

productive

much the

fruit.

is

distinguishing this
truth may

racteristic

clergy.
"

By

the

power

of

ere

be

prosperity!
thus
to

Having

briefly
effect
very
"

stated

the
'

virtues

of
of
can,

the

Sangha,

and
is well

tten

the
is

that

the
my

reKgion friend
ascetism;'^

Buddha
let he

ined-^it

pure.

If embrace
a

him

abdicate

ecular

concerns)
wrapped
It
was

and
with

"

folded
it in
a

the

gold

te,

it

soft

blanket,

and
a

put

wooden
in
a

ket.

again that
in

deposited
a

in

gold
casket,

casket,

that
in
a

ver

casket, that
crystal

gem*set that casket gems,

in

that

coral
that
in

sket,
a

in

ruby that all

casket, in
a

an

emerald
of in

casket,
ivory, that

casket,
of

made

ther

made

sorts

of

that
box.

another

made the
wooden

of

and
was

that

again in

in
a

wooden

Again,
that

deposited
to

gold above
of
gems in
a

box,

and

[in

other
you
come

boxes]

cording

the

order

indicated,
"

[until
that
in
a

to]
This
in
come

box
was

set

with
again

all sorts deposited order with

same

^and wooden

mat-

box.
the
you again cloth,
same

chest,

and

hers
a

in

the
set

above
all
sorts

indicated of
gems
"

[until
and
that with

chest

in and

t-chest.
with
to

The

being
of
*

then king,
the

covered he
gave

aled

the his

signet

the

[the
within
in

following]
the
;

ders
my

Ministers
Let that

Adorn
be

path

limits

city.
need

path

eight

umbha'*

width

of

which
usahha

ur

only

be

cleared.

But

the

middle

four

ould

be

prepared

Thereafter
and

(the
to

(in a^manner) king) caused

a

befitting
his upon royal
him, also

royalty.' elephant
and
to
set streets

to

be

orned,

place

chair
state.

(over
in

) the

white

canopy

of

He

caused

the

measure

of

seventy

yai'ds.

See

Abhidhdnapadipikd,

p.

23.

the

city

to

be
and

purified
swept;
water

(and
"

cleaned)
with and

by

being and
with be
a

sprinkled
banner",

(with

water)
trees,

(lined)

flags

plantain

and
He

vessels;*

(scented)
to

incense,
sent

flowers,

"c.

caused

running

messengers

the

intermediate within

dwellersf
the

bidding

them respective

hold

festival
Being

directed,

limits
completely,

of

their

abodes. by
view

adorned

(himself)
the
of and his

and
and

escorted
with
to
*

his
tothe limits

forces,

ncluding

band
gift,

of
the

musicians,

transmissio

king

proceeded

the
let
it
not

of

ity,

addressed
in accepting let

his

Minister: this
do
so

Son,

my
the

friend
midst palace/

PukkusS-ti,
wives;
saying,

gift, after
the

receive

in his

his

but

him

entering

(own)

So

and

making
that

five-raemberedj

obeisance,
to

nder

the

reflection
the

Buddha
returned
as

(himself)
home.
were

proceeded
The

th

oreign

regions,

king the
way

intermediate

dwellers

prepared

they

bidden,

and

caused

he

progressive

conveyance

of
the the
went

the
same

gift.

Pukkusati

observing prepared and

on

formalities
from
meet

(which
limits of The

were

bove

described)
the

way
to

the

his

rule
same

ecorated

city,

the

gift.

eached
was

Takkasil^
the

the of

day

of

Uposatha,^
delivered it
he
the
a

The
the
the

minister,

ho

bearer
the

the
had

present,

king's

message

When
to

king

heard

paid

necessary

ttentions palace that

the he

those
it,

who
and

accompanied
placed
enter

present,
at

ascended door

he

with
none

sentry palace. present

the

with

rders

should

the

[This
upon
a

done],
high
the

pened

casement, sat

placed
upon
a

the
one.

seat,

nd

himself the

low

He

[then]

broke
each

seal

emoved the

cloth
chest

[covering],
to

and

opening casket,

gradually
thus
:
"

rom

mat

the

wooden

reflected

Jars

or

vases

filled
between

with
the

flowers,
two states.

and

water.

Residents
See my

Essay

on

Titles

of

Address

in

the

C.

B.

R.

A.

S.

1856

"

261.

here

is

nothing
of
a

remarkable
precious
a

in

this.

It

is

(perhaps)
has

the

eptacle the

thing.
ratana

Doubtless worthy
the
of

there

arisen after There-

Majjhima-desa
he opened soft

being
sealj

heard,'
and^ he

thecasket^
saw

broke the
gold

royal

ing disengagunfolded
that
that

the
he

blanket,
that

plate.
were

When

had

(observed)
were

the

characters

indeed of
lines their
were

pretty,
heads,

exact

in

(the
*

formation)
and
that the had

were

quadrangular
to

the

all uniform;

commenced
on

read

it from

beginning. appeared
thousand in

Great
the

was

his
and

reading
character.
on

that

Tathagata

world, of the

his

The in

ninety-nine
sockets.

hairs

body
as

od

end
he

their
or

He Profound

became
was

unconscious

to

ther
he

stood
on

sat.t
oi
to

his
of

joy
the

to

reflect religion

had

account

his

friend,
even

heard in
a

ch
of

it

was

difficult

attain

hundred
to

thousand
with
;

kalpas.

He the

was

(thence)
and

unable
therefore he

[proceed
sat"
down
to

e]

perusal his

[of

missive,]
had

and,

excited
of

feelings dhamma,
etc.
as

subsided,

resumed

read

the
bha"

racteristics
dhammd

[commencing
Here
also and

with]
king

svakkhhto

ta

the

became
paused

cated [intoxi(for
a

with and
to

joy]
when
the

before; his

[therefore]
had
again

ile):

excitement

subsided,
of the

he Sau'

urned

letter, from
as

reading

the

characteristics
etc.

ty

commencing excited

Supatipanna^ At
very

Again
read
the he

the

king

ame

before.
at

last

having

ctnapdna
entered
was

ikammatihanan

the

end

[of the
II
He

letter]

the

four

and entire

five-foldJAano^.
time
see

(the king)
of
were

thus

nding
one
was

his

in

the

enjoyment
it this

t\iejhana;
a

and
page

able

to

him,

except

young

entered

(his apartment.)

In

manner

he

spent

half-

month.
This
'

proves Whether

the
he

character
on

to

have
or

been
his
an

the feet.'

Ndgarl

See

p.

cxv.

stood
to

his

head,

See
Paused

Glossary

the

Mahavansa

for

explanation

of

these

terms.

for

while.

III. Maha Vagga.

Tenakfao viharati

pana

samayena

sly asmd.

maha

Kachchayano Tena
mahst kho

Avan-

tisu

Kuraraghare

papate

pabbate.
d,ya8iiiato

pana

samayena

Sono
upa^/hd,ko mahk

upd.sako hoti:

kurikanno atha kho

KachchaKadkanno upasankaekanoian-

yanassa

Sono

up"sako

yen^-yasmd,

Kachchslyano
mahk
mantan

tenupasankami, abhivildetva

mitva

slyasmantan

Kacfachayanan
nisinno

an

nisidi.

Eka
mahtl
ayyena

kho

Sono
etadavocha:

upasako

Kurikanno

d,yasmantan

Kachch^yanan
maha sukaran

^Yath^yath^dhamman
desitan
ekantapari-

han

bhante

Kachchd,yanena
agslran

ajstnslmi

nayidan

ajjhavasat^

punnan

ekantaparisuddhan

eankhalikhitan

brahmachariyan
oharetva

charitun.
"ni

Ichchh"m'ahan
vatthani
man

bhante
agarasmet

kesamassun anagariyan

ka

say

achchhadetv^ bhante
ayyo

pabbajitim
ti.

pabbajetu
kho

maha

Kachchd.yano' ekabhattakan
agaribhiito

Dukka-

an

Sona
ingha

yctvajivan
tvan

ekaseyyakan tattheva

chariyan brahma-

Sona
k"layuktan

buddhslnan

easanan

anuyunja

ekaseyyan

ekabhattan Kudkannassa

brah-

machariyan'ti. ahosi

Atha

kho
sankh"ro

Sonassa
so

upstsakassa

yo

pabbajjclbhi
Kurikanno

parippassambhi^-^dutiyampi
as

Sono

upasako
to

[repeated
tatiyampi
ayyo

before

from
as

yma

yasma

pa/ippassambhi.]
yasmk
to

[repeated
mahk

before

from

yenk

bhante

Kachchayano-ti.
updsakan

Atha

kho

d,yasmd.

maha
Tena

Kachchstyano kho
atha pana

Sonan
samayena

Kviti-

kannan
appa

pabbdjesi.
bhikkhuko

Avanti
mahtl kasirena

dakkhina
Kachh^yano
tato

pato

hoti^
achchayena

kho

^yasma

tinnan

vasstinan

kichchhena sanghan Atha kho

tat

dasa

Yaggan

bhikkhu

sannip"td,petvsL ^.yasmato
evau sonassa

kyasmantan
vassan

Sonan

upasampadesi.
rahogatassa
sutoyeva

Yutthassa

patisallinassa
kho
me so

chetaso

pari-vitakko
edisochati
tan

udapadi

bhagavst

edisocha

nacha

mayS,

sammukh^

di^Ao

gachchheyyd.han

bhaga-

pajjhayo

anuj^neyyati.
patisallana
;

Atha

kho
yenayasm^

ayasmsi

Sono

s^yanha

ayan

vu^riiito upasankamitva
eka
mantan

maha

Kachch^yano
maha

upasamkami

ayasmantan

Kachchanisinno

abhivadetvd
^yasma

nisidi.
mah^

Eka

mantan

Sono
Idha maihan

styasmantan

Kachch^yanan patisallinassa

etada
evan

hu.

bhante

rahogatassa
"

tasoparivitakko dassandya

udapadi.

pe

"

bhante .gachchheyydhan
samma

s^avantan

arahantan

sambuddhan

sache Sona,
ma sam-

upajjhayo
tvan

bhante
sona

anujaneyyati
Sona

Sadhu!

Sadhu!
arahantan

hchha

tanbhagavantandassanaya
tvan

sambuddhan

dakkhissasi santindriyan

bhagavantan
uttamadamatha

pasadikan
sama-

adaniyan
anuppattan
mama

santamanasan

dantanguttani^antindrlyanagan;

tenahitvaa

na

yachanena
dyasmd

bhagayato
mahd

p^de

siras^

yanda

upajjhayo
pside
siras^ bhante

bhante
ti'ti.

Kachchsino Ayanti
yass"nan

bhagayato
dakkhina
achchayena

da

Evancha
tinnan

yadehi
me

patho

pabhikkhuko

kichchhena
sannipatapet-

sirenatato
upasampadan pathe

tatodasayaggan

bhikkhusanghan Appeyanama ganena bhante bhagava

upasampadan kan^ttarcl

alatthan.
appa
tarena

bhagaysl

Ayanti

khinst

anujdneyya
bhiimi dakkhinsl dakkhina
appevanama khar^ pathe

nti

dakkhina

pathe
appeyanama

an^akahata

Ayanti
Ayanti

nan

ghanupahanan

auujaneyya;
manussa

pathe

ante

nahana
Ayanti dakkhin^

garuk^

udakasuddhika pathe

gayd

dakkhina pathe
cbamman

dhuyanah^inan
chammani chamman
moragu

anujaneyya;
attharanani

anti

bhante
miga
eragu

elaka

mman

aja

seyyatapi

bhante
"

jjhimesu
nd"ma

janapadesu
bhagaya

majj"rujantu.
pathe

pe

"

.*

eya

Ayanti

dakkhind

chammani

When

the is
words

same

sentence

is to
and

be

repeated,
writers,

the

etition
last

avoided of
is
"

by the

Pali

Sinhalese
is to
the
word of

mode is by

by writing
a...

which
the

the

first

sentence

that

be

repeated peyydla,
our

m.
sense

This
of

an

abbreviation the
gap/

of

with implying books

*p'

pe...
*

between insert'
occurs,

in

*fill up

In

some

alone

attharankni

anujkneyya
#

elaka-chamman
#

aja-chamman
#

miga"

chamman.

Anujknami

bhikkave

eva

r^esu
ganena
*

pachchanti
upasampadan.

meeu

jana
*

padesu

yinaya-dbara-panchamena
* *

[Tatrime

pachchantima
nigamo^

janapadk^

purattbimkya
tato

diskya
pai^

Kajanffalonhma
Pacbchantima
disaya

tassa
orato
nama

parena

Maha-Salh^

janapad^^
Salalavati
orato

znajjhe.
tato

Puratthimadakkhinkya
park

nadi;

Pachcbantimk
Setakannikan
orato

janapadk^
naxua

majjhe.
tato

DakPacbdisaya

khinaya

diskya

nigamOy

para

chantimk

janapadk^

majjbe.
tato

Pachchbimkya
park

ThunannhxadL
orato tato

BrkhmaDagamo^

Pacbcbantima

anapada^

majjhe.
park

Uttarkya

diskya

Usiraddhajonhma,
orato

abbato^

Pacbchantimk

janapada,
Maba

majjhe.]*
lived
and
at

^At

that the

time

the

venerable

Kachchayana
in

in

cliff of

ame

time

-BTttrara^Aarat Sona-kutikanna^
was
an

naountain
a

Avanti;
of

th

lay

observer the venerable

the

ordinances

Buddha"

attendant
to

of
place

Mahk
Kachchayana

Kach-

hkyana.ir
and

He

went

the
to

where

Mahk

welt,

having
him
was

bowed
as

him,
*

took

his

respectable
as

position;

nd

addressed which

follows

"

So
by

far
the
to

have

heard Mahk

the

hamma

propounded
easy

venerable

Kach-

hkyana,

it is not
is the only

for

layman only

observe

brahmachariya\
like
a

hich

perfect,

the

purest
to

(state)
the

turned
enter

onch-shell.
to

I desire divest

(therefore)
of

leave
and

laity, and
a

to

scetism,
*

myself
the it ;
;

(my)

hair

beard,

to

put

I have paragraph

transposed

he

before

above I and omit

passage which its translation

note.

occurs as

little has

before

the

same

been

at p. xxix lreadj given ' t Lit. Osprejr-nest/

vide
in

supra

Kudkanna
lacs;' i.
e.

is interpreted
wearing
an

an

Atthakathik of
that

to

mean

hoU-hama

'ear

00

ear-ornament

value.

" Upisaka.

In

peat

speaking dyasmd,
In

of

the

which
kutikanno.

venerable is disregarded I have

fathers in

of

the

Church,
of

Buddhist
See

writers preceding

speaking
me

kings. frequent

tract.

this

translation

omitted

repetition

no

Upasako

the

yellow

vesture.

Let
me

his

Lordship

the

venerable

Mah^
priest

hch^yana
*
"

admit Sona,
to

into

(the

priesthood.)'
of
hrdhmachariya

(The

plied]

the
one

observance
seat

(which
fore, Wherereligion

fines

man)
be
as

and
a

one

meal

is difficult.

Sona,
Buddha,

thou

art,

householder.
preserve
one

Observe
the

the

and

temporarily

hrahmachariya* meal.'

hich

confines
the
intense

thee desire
a

to)
of

seat,

and embrace

one

Upon
subsided.
Mah^
result

ch

Sona
time

to

ascetism
Sona
with
his

et,

afterwards,]
in
;

second
same

[did
and he make

address
the
same

hchdyana before

the
a

language,
time

and]
the
same

third

[did

application

in

cisely

language;]
the
were

when

Maha

Kachchayana

itted

Sona
this time

into there

priesthood.

At

but the

few

bhikkhus

in of

Avanti, three and

the
years,

thern

province.

At
Kachchkyana,

expiration having
from

ever,

Maha assembled

with
and

trouble
there,

culty diffion

ten

bhikkhus
the

here of

conferred He
upon

venerable the

Sona

ordination
alone,

Upasampadk.
solely
^

who

vassa^'f
of
was

being

and
thus:
not

intent only
face
see

[the
that

rns

religion] {
so

pondered
I have
me

I have him

heard
to

gava

and

so.

seen

face.

If

Upajjfiaya^
the

will

permit

shall

go

to

the

all-perfect
the

dha,

Lord
rose

worthy
up

of in

adoration.' evening
to

So
from where took
the

pondering,

erable

Sona

the

his
M

contemplative

meditation,
dwelt
;

and
and,

proceeded
making his he
"

the

spot

ah^Kachchahis respectful Mahh,

obeisance,

tance.

This
as

done,
follows:
meditation

addressed ^Lord,
a

venerable
who
was

hchkyana
contemplative

to

me

alone,

and

thought

has

occurred

[that

Here
A

the

ordinances, ordinance rainy

season

religious during the

such by

as

the

atihcxsila^ the

are

meant.

which
;

See

Maha

priest Vagga

is

bound

to

reside

in

lib

iii.

Contemplative
The

meditation.
of the

appellation

Preceptor

who

introduces

person

for

admission

should
go

go
and

and
see
*

see

Buddha.]
all-perfect

If

my

preceptor

will
lord

permit,
worthy

will

the

Buddha,
!' (exclaimed Buddha, Bagava

the

adoration.'

Skdhu
see

I S^hu the thou

Kachchayana);' the
to

go

thou

Sona,

to

all-perfect
wilt
find

lord

worthy

adoration,

Sona,
and who has who

be

pleasing
"

(t

the

sight)

producing
has

delight the
to

(in
senses,

the

beholder)
is

(one

moreover,)
who

subdued

who

of

tranquil

mind,

attained has

the

highest who is

self-control

and
covered,

tranquillity who

self-controlled,
of

[decently]

and

is the

highest

those

who

had
unto
"

subjugated
the

the

passions.

Wherefore,
thy Lord,

Sona,
for
me,*

bow

thou

feet

of

Bha-

gav^

with

head

saying

*My
desired

preceptor
me

the
to
*

supreme
my
are

Mah^
unto

Kachchkyana the
feet

has Bhagava.'

bow
Lord

with

head

of
in

Say
the
was

also,

there

but

few

bhikkhus
of

Avanti,
it

southern with from be

well

country.

At

the

expiration
that
my
ten

three

years,
were

trouble
here

and

difficulty there
gavk
country

bhikkhiis
It

assembled

and

for
will

ordination.
permit

will

(therefore)
in

if Bha-

ordination
of of
a

Avanti, number
the

the

southern
priests,,

by
my

the

introduction
the
thorns, ground is

fewer

(of

Since,
is
it
overrun

Lord,

Avanti,
and the

southern with

country,

with
be
as

rough,

abounds
use

gokantakay^
shoes

will

well southern

to

permit
country. country

of
my

thicker Lord,

Avanti, of Avanti,

the

Since,
prize
all

the
highly,

people

the
purity

southern with
more

bathing

and

esteem

water

(above

things),
in

it

will

be
ern south-

well

to

permit

freqtient

bathing
my
as

Avanti, in

the

country.

Since

(again),
such

Lord, sheep-skin,
same
as

Avanti,
goat-skin

th

southern

country,
are

skins for
in
in

and
moragu,

deer-skin

used

coverlets,
the

eragu, it
I

majjaru
"

and

jantuj
-

majjhima
-

country;

will
-

be

Mama The

"j"
hulus
to
mean

vachanena Ruellia

"

my

Longifolio,
But

words.' Rox.

It
is

is also

applied
by print of

by
the
the
nor

some

to

7W-

lannginosus.
'

the

word

here produced in our

explained
by the

commentators

hard

dry

clods
are

of earth

feet
are

of

cattle.

These

Pali

they

ex

li

to

permit

the

use

of
for

skins coverlets,

such
*

as

sheep
"

skins,
"

goat

ins,

and

deer

skins

[^On

the

ve

requests

being
countries
of

preferred, like
five,
one

Buddha
this

declared]
I
permit
in

Priests,
tion ordina-

(all)
in

foreign
an

(Avanti)
versed

assembly

being

the

Vinaya.

IV,
Atthakatha
of

Sanyutta

Nikaya.

Tada

majjhima

desato

sankha

vanijakk

tan

nagaran

gantva

ndikan

pariskmetvs^
gantva

rkjanan

passisskmotipann^kkra-hatthk
gatoti
arochayinsu.
sutv^

ja

kul^'dvkran
dvare

raja

uyyanan

uyy^nan

tvk

tithk
pakkosapetv^

pa^ihlirassa

Atha vanditvk

ra"fio

edite
*

raja
kuto

niyadita-pann^kkre
^

^ithe devk'ti.
^Ama

tata

kgatattha'ti nUfhan

puchchi

"

Savatthito

ti

tumhakan

subhikkhan
tumhkkan
mukhehi desi

dhammiko
kinchi

raja'ti.
sksanan'ti.

a'ti. sakka

Atthi

pana

*Deva
suvanna

uchchi^^ha

kathetun'ti.
te

R^jk

nkarena
mukhan

udakan

d^pesi;

mukhan
"

vikkhUetvk 'deva amhakan Ba"Ho

darabadese Buddhoti

hi

anjalin
nama

pagganhitva
uppannan'ti

dha

ratanan sutamatte
*

ahansu.

hane

sakala
taa

sariran
*

pharamiinan
Araa

piti

upajji

Buddhoti

v^deta'ti"

Buddho
varan

deva'" aparimknan
yeva

ti.

tikkhattun
na

kathkpatva parimknan
^aparan

Buddhoti katunti

an

sakkh, datv^

tasmin
"

pasanno

assan

kin

sksanan'ti Tampi
sutv^

Puchchi
tatheva puna

^dhamma

nan

deva

uppannan'ti.

tikkhattun
'a^an

inSan

gahetva puchchi.

aparampi

sahassan

datvk deva

kin

anan'ti

^Sangharatanan
aparanti

uppannan'ti.

Tampi

va

tatheva

gahetvit ^tH^ amachche parissatha'ti

sahassan santikan
*

datv^

dinnabhkvan
pesesi.
uppanno

ne

likhitv

deviyk

gachchhathk'ti
tkth

gatesu
kin

puchchhi;
"

Buddho kin

loke

he

*Deva

tumhe

k^tukkmk'ti;
Te

han

pabbajiss^mi'ti;

^mayampi

pabbajissamst'ti.

sab-

pi

gharan
;

va

kutumban
nikkha
dassesuD.

va

anopa-loketva-yeva

asse

aruyha santikan

t^

tadaheva
pannan

minsu.

knija ADOJk-"leviylt
rafi^a

ntvit

Sk
tatati

vachetva puchchhi. traders

tumhkkan

bahu

tan
*

tumhehi

kin
time

katan
certain

At

that

chank

went

to

that their
went

ci

Kukkutavati)
and
in

from
saying

Majjhimadesa.
*Let
us

Arranging
King,' Hearing, the
at

bag

ge^

see

the
gate.
to

they

wit

esents

hand

to

the had

palace
gone

however,
they

tha

king

(Kappina)
and
addressed

park, the

proceeded

ither;
was

the

keeper

gate.

When
them
who
to

ng

informed

(of their
him),
with
and

arrival)
inquired

he

caused
of
those, whence

mmoned him

(before
saluting

stoo did

efore

'

presents

"

Sons,

yo

ome?'

'Your
fertile;

Majesty,
and the
your

from king
'

SavatthV

What

"

is

your

ountry

righteous?'

'Yes,

your

ajesty,'

replied demanded
it

traders.

What 'Your

are

the

tidings

of

you

ountry?'

the

king.
to

Majesty
them
water

(returned
impure be

he

traders)
The
in and said,

is king

impossible

relate caused

with
to

ouths.'

(thereupon)
vase;

given

to

them)

golden
their
your

and
to

when
the

they direction

washed
of

the

ouths,

made

obeisence

Buddha,

hey

'Please
has

Majesty,
in
our

precious

(person)*
The
every
moment

calle

uddha,
the

appeared

country.'

eard

word

"Buddha"
said the
king,

joy
'

pervaded Sons,
is

part

of

ody.

Again,
your

he

called

BuddhaT king and,

Yes,

Majesty,'
them
to

replied repeat

the

traders. three wight

the
'

The
times
"

having

hus

caused
define

(the word)

unable
Buddha,

the

supreme

unaccountable
with

called
itself;
gave
e ws

ndbeing(moreover)pleased
(pieces)
;

word

them
'

housand

and

asked
the

them

What
a

other precious

?'

Please

our

Majesty
dhamma

(replied
has
assurance

traders)
When
as

thing

calle

he

appeared.' thrice

he

had
and

heard
gave

this
thenx

als

got

their

before,

another

sand
again
arisen,'

pieces.

He

again that
"

asked
a

them thing this them

in
a

*What
called
he

other
the

news?'
Sangha
re-

replied,

precious

When

he

had and the

to

heard
gave

also,
yet
a

likewise

ed

(their
writing
go

assurances)
the fact of

thousand
sent

(pieces);
saying,

gift
the
to

leaf,*

them After
*

ns,
left

(with
him,
the in
returned
to

this)
king

Queenthe

Consort.'

they

said world;

Ministers, will
^

Sons,
^Please

Buddha
your
it

appeared

the

what

ye

do?'

esty,'
you

the 'I
enter

Ministers,
shall

(we will)

whatever
the

shall

se

do?'

be

recluse,'

rejoined
added
the

king.

too

(shall)

the

priesthood,'
so

Ministers.
homes
very

eupon

all of them,
got
upon

without

much
and

as

caring
away

for their
on

families, The
to

their who when much

horses
went

went

that

traders,

to

Queen
read what

AndLJa^ presented
it, she have said
ye
to

the

er

her; has

and
done

she

had
you;

them,

king

for

done?'

V.
SUMANGALA
ViLaSINI.

Pubbe
ran

kira
choranti

Vajji rajkno
avatva

ayan

choroti

anetv^

dassiti

ganhadenti.

viniehchhaya achorohoti vohkrikanan choro

mahk-matt^nan

vinichchhinitva
attank

sache akatva

vissajjanti
denti.

sache Tepi

choro

kinchi
achoro

vinichchhinitva
n^ma

che

vissajjenti,
Tepi

che

Suttadara
achoro

i,

tesan

denti. che

vinichchhanitvk
denti.

che
tatheva

jenti, vissajtatvk

choro

A/Aakulikanan

Tepi
ranSo.

patissa,

Senapati
achoro

uparajassa,
che

Upar^ja
sache
yena

Rajk
choro
nkma

vinic hoti

vissajjeti
Tattha
likhitan.

pana

ni

Po/^AaAan'

vachapeti. dandoti

idan
tassa

katan
tena

ayan

nama

Bkjk
dandan

kiriyan

netvk

tadonuchchhavikan

karoti.

In

aforetlmes
'as

the
a

Vajjian
thief,'

princeB,

ona'persou

being
the

brought

nd

presented

surrendered 'take

him

to

Vinichchhaya

ahamaita*
upon
a

without
investigation thief,

saying

this
him,
to

thief

(into

custody)/
but, if

hey,

release

if innocent;
the

(found)

surrender

him

Voharika^
Voh^rika)
but,
if

without
too,

oing

anything

themselves.
release
to

They
if
are

(the

upon

nvestigation

him, who

innocent;

otherwise, They

ransfer

him

those the
assign

called
and
to

SuttadaraX
discharge
him,

like

ise

inquire

(into

matter)
him
same

if innocent;

ut,

if otherwise,

the

AMhakulahoL.^
(surrender
"

They

also
to

oing

through

the

process
of

him)
SensLpati
the King.

th

enctpati

(or Commander (or Sub-king),

after
"

the

forces)

the
to

to

th

Uparaja

the

Uparkja
the
matter

The

^and
inquiring
if
into

overeign,

dischaa-ges
Paveni

him*

f innocent;
the
written^

but,
of

otherwise

causes

the

Pottkakan,

book such

Precedents
is the

'f

to
to

be
him

consulted.
who has

There committed
that

punishment

uch

(a

crime.)
of the

The
culprit,

king
inflicts

upon
a

comparing

with
punishment.'

th

onduct

suitable

VI.
Maha

Vagqa.

Tena

kho

pana

samayena
******

Kajagahe

sattarasavaggiya Attha kho

daraka. Upalissa

ahky

aka

honti

'

ata
*

pitunnan
*

etadahosi

"

Sache
upkli

kho

Up^i

lekhan

sikkheyya.
angulio

'Sache

kho
'

lekhan
kho

sikkhissati
gananan

ukkha

bhavissanti.'
*
"

Sache
kho

upali gananan

sikkheyya'
urassa

Sache

Upkli

sikkhissati

"The

t
t

chief FoAdra"*
"

Ministers.'
usage,'
'

"customs'

"

'laws;'
who

and

FoAan^d
the

Hbe
rules
term

lawyers.'
or

Suttadard
Atthakulikd

Tne

principal
a

officers

mautained

axioms.'
not

"

"

probably

Councfl

of

judges.
to
a

The

is

ex pl

Here

is

an

undoubted

reference

*book.'

It

is

the

book

kho
*

bhavissanti*'
*

'Sache
kho Upali
*

kho

Upkli

r"pan

sikkhesyya* akkhini
dukkhk
samanesur

Sache
*
.*

rupausikkhissati
*
*

yissantL'

Sache
kho

kho

Up^li

kaputtiyesu
sukhan

pabbajjeyya; jiveyya^
there
were
na

evan

Upitli

amhakan

ach-^

y"na

cha
in

kilameyyd.-ti.' K"ias^aha
seyenteen

At
wer"

that

time

children/

companions.

UpiU
UpUi^s
parents

w"The
pondered
writing

chief
^

amongst
:

them.
be
he

Afterwards,
that
write,

It may
if

able desir-

Upali
his

should
may

learn suffer

But,

learn?

fingers
learn he

pain.

It

is

desirable
he:

thatf leamr

should

Arithmetic**.^..

utation,

would

sufffer
learn

in his
drawing

mind.

,".^Skovl^ It may

be

desirable:
he learrn

Up^li
his

should
eyes

Should Should
he
not

wing,

might

suffer; S"kyafiratemity,

Upkli
would

however,.

omean^ctf"cinthe
live well

be

enabled

after

our

deaths,

and

would

be

distressed.'

VII.
Atthakatha
to

the

Dhammapapa.

In

the

story
to

of his

Kosambi
natural
sante
nan

Se^Ai,
son,

who Ghosika,
tan

resorted it is

to
:

various
"

mpts
*

kill
*

stated

Evan

pana

setihi

ujukan
mama

oleketun
gamasate

kkoti

kinti

mareyyanti
pesetva

chintento

takassa
me

santikan

m^rkpesskniti
mkretva

upkyan

disvJt

avajataputto,t
ahan

iman

vachchakApe

khipatfl,

kate pannan

matulassa
likhitv^,
iman
Hata

kattabbayuttakan

jknissami'ti'
amh^ikan
gama-sate
vatvii,

"

Ghosaka
haritv^
tassa

tako
tassa

atthi, dasante

pannan

dehi'ti

pan-

bandhi.
kin

So
pana

pana

akkharasamayan etanti
tasmin

najknkti.
niddk-

S^

(setthi-dita)

nukho

(7a22an^"^Mathematical,
"c.
son

or

Astrological

caLciilations

Arithmetic,

ra,
A

bom

inferior

to

the

father,

i.

e.

of

mother

lower

in

caate

ante

mktk pannan

pitunnan
mochetv^

afitlav^hitatkya
Mkja vivaritva

apassantanam
pavisitv^

otBiityh
dvaran

an

attanogabbhan
akkharasamays^
attano
marana

idhkya

v^tapknan 'aho

kusalataya
pannan

pandasante

v^hetvk^

andhabldo
sache
mayit

andhitvk
pannan
^

charati
phkletv^

nadi//h^
vachanena

assa

natthi

jivitan't

an

se^hissa
case,

aparan

pannan
see

likhi
him

Such
the

being

the

the how

Se//hi
he

could
might

not
cause

fu

in

face).*
a

Pondering
viz.

his him by

death,

and

evising
to

means,

^that
of
"

he

would

kill

sending
"

im

the
a

superintendent
follows

his
is

Hundred
my

Estates'
son.

wrote

him
and

leafas
put

^This

unfortunate

Sai

im,

him
I

into shall

the
know

cess-pool. how there

to

When
recompense
a

that
my

shall

have

een

effected,
^

Uncle;

'f

"

nd

said,

Son,

Ghosika,
take the

is

superintendent
give

in
to

our

undred
he

Estates;
tied

this
to
*

letter,

and

it

him.'
garments.

aying,
was

letter
*

the
*

end

of

his

(son's)
then

illiterate.

[The
to

story

proceeds took lodgings

arrate

that
house
that

Ghosika,
of the

on

his

way

the

Estates,
his

the

another stranger
it

Setthi;

and

that

daughter,
to

who

eard

had
be,

something
came

tied

his

garments],
was

hinking

what and

could

down parents,

whilst

Ghosika
were

sleep,

unperceived

by
untied

her

who and

elsewhere
the

ngaged. entered
the

Having
her
own

(the knot),
where,
after

secured
closing in

lea

he

room;

the

door, read

an

pening

window,

she,
she

who

was

clever
*

letters,

th

pistle.

[That
with
not

done],
his
own

exclaimed

Alas!

this
to

blind

idio

oes

about
it had

death

warranty
he

tied

his

garments.

been

seen

by

me,

would

(surely)
and

forfeit

ife!'

So

saying,

she
as

destroyed

that
come

letter,

substituted

(wrote)

another,

if it had

from

the

SeWhi.'"

Ujuka
A
term

straight.*
of respect
even

f
B.

to

an

underling,
p.
238.

e.

g.

'Uncle

dhoby.'

A.
Lit.

S.

Journal
*

for

1856-8.

/"a"na

leaf.'

VIII.
Samantapasadika

ADuj^n^mi

bhikkave

salak^ya
"

\k

partlk^lya rukkha

va

upanibansarairiaydya

tvfitopunjitvduddisitun'

iti vachanato

kayava

viluvilivat^lapannadi-may^yajoattfAaya

vslasukasupanibandhitva,

n"ma

sal^ka-bhattan'ti
yk

evan

akkar"ni \k

chhiyan

chivara

bhoge
pariya

sabba

salakslyo

opunjitva,
panchanga

ppuna

he^Aup

vasena

illol^petv^,

nn^gatena pa^A^ya
no

bhattuddesakena
che atthi
"I thin
terstsanato

sache'pi

^hitika

atthe

Aiti-

patth"ya
you,

salak^
to

databbS^
ascertain

'Whereas
by

it is

said:
on
a

permit
slip

priests,
or

is)

writing

(ticket)
be
tree,

upon

bark,

and
upon

by

ng
made

(the
of

same);"
the
the

"

^letters

should

formed*
or

either
a

woody-part

of
et

upon

strip

of
'

the

u-barky

Talipot-leafy
answering

cetera^

to

the

effect
name.'

that

(this

the

Food-Ticket
all

to

such

person's

[This
basket,
them mixed,
or

e],
fold

the
a

tickets robe;
they

should and, may

be
having

collected
repeatedly

into

of
so

shaken

ther

that

be

[moved
by
the

up-side

down]

should

be

distributed
commencing

Bhattudesaka\
to

of

five

lifications,:^
or,

according with the

seat

the

standing

orders,

ny;

otherwise,

of

the

eldest

priest.'

Kachchayana

Bheda

Tika.

(Note

p.

Ixxii.)

The

following
Bheda Tik^,
the

extract,

which the

we

make

from
as

the
to

yana Kachchawere

contains

Tradition

who

the

ors

of

Supplementary

Notes,

and

examples

in

Kach-

ana's
This
The

Grammar.
is
in
the

past

participle

\ \

The

personwh^
nve

btisinesa
are sense

orifidnal. it is to
1
.

appoint
;

the
of

meals.

ibntion

of

qualifications food a ; 2

knowledge
3

the

of

justice

freedom

affairs firom

regarding ignorance

the
;

Ten^^ha

Kachchayana Sandhimfai
namamhi

Dipaniyan.
eka
pafliiiLsan
satan

dvi
ras^dhi

bhave,

Atthk
karake

kanchena talisan;

pancfaa
sUtha

Samkse
dv^saf^hi Atthk
rasa

visan'cha
matan,

Taddhite
satBikkhyate
satan

kite

Butta

bhave;
paSfiiksan
"

Unnadimhi
ileyyan
sutta

cha

pabhedato;
mknantu

Sabban
cba
sata

sanopiiK/a

sattati
Syslse

dyecha'...ti. kgata
sutta
suttan

Imkni

Butta

sankhykni
che?
eata

sankhykhi
gahetv

nasa-

nti;

kasmkti
satta

pakkhepa
suttani

ganant^
Mah"

sltdhika

honti,

Imkni

suttkni

achchstyanena

katani;
'eva

vutti

cha
"

Sanghanandi
Brahmadattena

sankhdtena

ahelKachch^yanen

kat^

payogo

kato.

Vuttah

ch'etan.

**KachchgiyaTia
vutti

kato

yogo

cha

Sanghanandino,
Brahmadattena

Payogo
fiyiso

Vimalabuddhini''...ti. Kachchdyana

*It
of

is

said

in

the
may

Dipani
"

that
viz,

the

tion distributhere

Suttslni

be

regarded

(as
which

follows,
treats

that)

ifty

one

(Suttfi-ni) in the
and
on

(book
on

on)

Combination;
on

hundred

eighteen

Nouns;
sixty-two

forty-five
on

Syntax;
tives; Deriva-

wenty-eight
one

Compounds;
and
eighteen

Nominal
one

hundred

on

Verbs;
Unnadi.

hundred
aggregate

erbal

Derivatives;

and

fifty
and

on

The

number
"

is) six
numbers
appearing

hundred
of
in

seventy-two.

These

aphorisms the

do

not

correspond
explain

with
wherefore:

Qmbers

Nyd,sa.

To

hundred

and

ten

aphorisms.

These
The

aphorisms
were

were

posed

by

Mahd

Kachchdyana. himself,

Vutti

made

by

a
"

Kackehayana

(who
by

was

also)

called

Sangha-

di;

and

the
"

illustrations
that

Brahmadatta.

So

it

is

ressly

stated
'

The

aphorisms

were

made

by
"

Kachchliyana

The The
And

Vutti

by

Sanghanandi*
by by

illustrations the
fiy^sa

Brahmadatta

"

Vimalabuddhi.'

Netti

Pakarana.

(Note When
Mahk
is is

p.

xxiii.)
advanced
against of

noticed

the

arguments
was

the

belief,

Kachch"yana

the

author
not
seen

the

Pali

Grammar
PakaranUy

ich

named
also

after stated
a

him,
to

I had
been

the

Netti

ich

have
and

written
as
a

by

him.
of its

I
style,

have

ce

procured

copy,

give,
an

specimen

the

lowing
to

selection.
perceive

From
anything

examination
its
were

of
from
written
to

that which

specimen
it may
one

fail

in

style,
not

be
and

cluded
same

that
person.

the

two

works
is,
what

by be,
a

It

it professes

very

full
treats

complete
It

commentary

of
a

the

religious

matters
a

it

n.

combines
said
to

commentary have

with
expressed

Dictionary.
Buddha

It
himself.

tes

passages

been

by
are

The
from
to

metres

of the

gkth^

quoted
of
certain

clearly
notes,

Prftkrit.
make

d^

the
some

interpolations
of
the

which

ererice

distinguished which consulted,

the
are

members
also I
am

of be
more

the
in

dhist Budthe
in

Convocations,
which
expressed
be

and 1
have

to

found

ginals, belief
It

the

fortified

in

Introduction.

will

ntical
the

with distmct
the

that the observed, Mahi Kacbch^ana,

writer*s is not

statement,

that
by

Sangbanandi

was

borne

out

the

authority

ts,

viz.,

mention Grammar,
it
would from

of different its Supplements,

seem

names

for

the

its notes,

authors its and called

of

quoted. different
comment,

principal

the
a

Nj^sa;

that

Sanghanandi
Rachch^vana.

(also

Sankhanandi)

diderent

Mah4

Tattha
'

katamo

vichayoharo?

yan

puchchhitancha
kin vichinati
?

vissa
Padan

itancha

kii

gatha.

Ayan vichinati^ vichinati,

vichinati,

vichayoharo

chinati,

pa^han
assitdan phalan

vissajjanan
"idinavan
upS-yan
nava

vichinati^ vichinati,

pubbaparan nissaranan

chinati,

ichinati,

vichinati,

anattin

vichinati^
Ysitk

ugitin

vichinati, Yatft
"

sabbe

suttante

vichinati.

have?

ayasma

Ajito

P^rtlyane

bhagavantan

pafihan

uchchhati

**

Kenassu

nivuto

loko

[iclicM

yasma

Ajito]*

Kenassu

nappakasati

Kissabhilepanan
Kinsutassa Imkni

brusi

mahabbhayan..."
puchchhi
tsLni.

ti

chattd.ri
eka
"

padani

Socha
aha
"

kho

eko

pafiho

asmk?

vatthupariggaho.

Evanhi puchchhati puchchhati puchchhati: mahabbhayan

bhava loko,
:

^kenassu

nivuto

ko'-ti

lokadhi^Aanan
appakasanan

'kenassu
^

nappakasati'
lepanan

"

lokassa ^lokassa

kissabhi
^kinsutassa

briis

"

abhllepanan
lokassa

mahabbha-

n'ti

"

tasseva

puchchhati.
indriya loko.

Loko

vidho,

"

kilesa

loko,

Tattha

issajjand
^'

Avijj^

[ya]

nivuto

loko

[AjitAti bhagava]

Vivichchhaf
Jappdbhi Dukkham'assa

nappakasati
lepanan

brumi mahabbhayan..."
ti
padehi

Imkni

chatt^lri

padani

imehi dutiyan

chatuhi dutiyena,

vissajjitfil
tatiyena^

^haman

pafhamena,

tatiyan

atutthan
*

chatutthena.

Kenassu

nivuto Nivaranenahi
bhagava*

loko'ti

"

pafihe

'avijjk

nivuto

loko'ti

issajjanL
yathS-ha

nivuto
"

loko,
sattanan

avijjanivarankhi
bhikkhavc

sabbe

tta

Sabba

sabba

This

passage

en

inteq)olated

within in one
word,

brackets
of
"

is

stated

by

the

commentator,

to

hav

of

the

Buddhist It

Convocations. is, I believe,

the

After

this

I find

pamadti."

interpolation

niQan

sabba
yadidan bhikkhave nivaranan
yuttk
"

bhiHtS-nan

pariyS^yato

ekam'eva

nivaranan

slmi,

avijj^; avijj^nivarana avijjkya

nirodhk
"

hi

sabbe

satt^,

sabba natthi padassa

cha

chagk tenaoha

parinissagga, paAamassa

Anan

ti vadslmi"

ssajjjan^
Kenassu

nappakksati'ti"
yo

pafihe

vivichchha,*
nivuto
so

nappakasati'ti
vivichchhati,
vi-

sajjana;

puggalo vuchchati

nivaranehi vichikichchha"

So
viriyan

hchhknkma saddahati,

vichikichchhanto

hi

anabhisaddahanto pahknaya pamada'manuyutto

ati ; tassa
"

nkrabhati

akusa-

an

dhammknan
so

kusalanan

dhammS-nan
viharati; pamatto

sachchhi
sukke

iyaya,

idha
upkdiy

mme

na

te

anupkdiyaman^

nappakksanti,"

hk'ha

bhagava
*^

Dire

santo
va

pakasenti

Himavanto
Asantettha

pabbato;
dissanti yathk
sara;

na

Ratti Te

khitta gunehi cha padassa

pakasenti
yasena

Kittiya

cha".

.ti.
yutta.

Tena
'

cha

dutiya lepanan

vissajjana
^

Kiss'kbhi

briisi'-ti

paShe

japp'abhi
tanha;

lepanan
sa

brilkathan

\.ti

vissajjana;
yatha'ha "Ratto

jappanama
bhagava atthan dhamman
taman
"

vuchcha-ti

ilimpati

na

ja
na

nati
;

Ratio Andhan
Yan

passati
hoti

tada
naran".

r^go

sahate

.ti

S^'y^n

tanha

^ttibahulassa loko abhilitto

yutta.
nama

puggalassa

evan

abhijappkti
tena

itvk;

tattha
padassa
tassa

bhavati

"

cha

tati*

sa

vissajjan^

^Kinsu

mahabbhayan'ti Duvidhan idan

panhe

dukkham*assa
kayikan
yan

mahabcha chetaidan

yan'ti
cha,

vissajjana.
yan
kayikan

dukkhan
dukkhan,

an

chetasikan

omanassan^
sama

sabbe
saman

sattkhi

dukkhassa
vk

ubbijjanti,
tassa

natthi

bhayan

ukkhena
"

kuto

pana

uttaJHtaran.

Tiss

ukkhat^

dakkha-dhukkhatii,
ti^ tattha muchchati,

vipari odhiso
tatbk

n^ma

dukkhatk karahachi dukkhatitya;

sankhkra dukkha

nkkha-t^

loko

kad^chi
viparin^ma pi

ukkhatkya
beta

issa

bond
tslya

loke loko

app^blulbk

digb^yukk'pi.

Sankbkra
mucb*
ti

ukkba

pana

anupitdises^ya

nibbiinadb^tiiyli
dukkban lokassk
cbatuttbassa

bati,

tasmk

sankb^ra

dukkbat^
"

katv

dukkbam'assa

mababbbayan'ti
Tena'ba is

^tenacha
^

padas-

vissajjanli jMtik.
Of
Yan

bbagav4

avij]^

nivuto
tbe

loko.
."

tbe

foregoing

wbat
cha

vichayahhrof
'

[See]
etc.

gl^tbk

puchchhitan

vissajjitan
It

cha

Wbat
parts

does
of

ichayahiro

investigate?

investigates

speecb
answers.

Iwords].
investigates

It investigates
wbat bappy

questions.

It
follows

investigates

precedes

and

[tbe context].
ill-effects.

nvestigates

[results].
non-existence.
means.

It

investigates

nvestigates

[tbeir]

It

investigates
canons.

consequence

It investigates
parallel Wbat by
*
"

It investigates It
as

nvestigates
sultans.

passages. is it ? Just
venerable

investigates
in tbe in
tbe

all

tbe
propounded

nine

odied

question section

Bbagavsl

tbe

Ajita

[entitled

krkyana
*

Say

by

wbat

bas

tbe

world

been

sbrouded?

Wberefore
Wbereby

is it not is its

manifested?

attacbment? fear?'

Wbat Tbese
four

is its

great

sentences
one

were

tbus Wberefore
it tbus

propounded
?
:

[by

Ajita

bey
one

comprise
matter.

question.

[Because]

tbey

tak

He
loho^

bas be
;

stated

By

[tbe

first
cause

sentence
of

nassu

nivuto

investigates

tbe

abiding
kenassu

tb

rld

[living beings]
its

by

[tbe

second]
by

nappakasati

investigates

non-manifestation;

[tbe third]

kissctbhi

nan

brusi,

ht

inyestig^tes
mahabbhayan^

lis

allurements; he investigates

and

by
its

[th
very

urth]

kinsutassa

adful
kilesa,*

horror. world

The of

[loka]
[bhava],

world
or

is threefold,

viz.,
the

world sensible

existence;
of
the

and

ndriya],

world.

The

explanation

question

[is

llows:]
*

say

the

world

is

shrouded
manifested;

by

Ignorance,

'By

doubt desire
its

is it not

'By
*

is its
horror

attachment,

And

[proceeds]

from

Affliction. by
the

The

four
sentences

sentences

[first quoted]
i.
e.,

are

explained first

the

[last quoted],

the

[of
the

former]

the
by The

first
the

[of

the

latter],
and the

the fourth

second
by

by

second,

the

third,
is

the
"

fourth.
is the

world

shrouded
what
an

by

ignorance' the world

yes,

explanation

o
Yes, with

question,
shrouded

*by by
of

has
obstacle;

been
all
is

shrouded?'
are

is

beings
declared

clothed by

obstacle
I

Ignorance.
that

So

it

bhagav^:
have
yes,

iests,

declare
a

all

beings,

all viz.

lives,

all existences
"

rently
are

particular

obstacle,
by
ignorance.

Ignorance; Priests,
I

al

gs

beclouded

declare

that
rance, Igno-

completely

destroying, beings
first

abandoning,
have
sentence
no

(and)
impediment.'

forsaking Hence

(existing)
of
the

the

anation

is

satisfactory.
^is the explanation
shrouded?'

*By

doubt
*by

is it not
what
an

manifested'

"

of He,

the who
term

tion,

has

(the

world)
doubts.

been
By

impeded

with

obstacle,

the

(obsolete)
is

hchha
a

(in
person
of
merit.

the
who

text)

vichikichchha

(doubt)
of pure

expressed.
He

us]

doubts,
exerts

is devoid
not
to

faith.
demerit,

who

devoid

pure

faith,

destroy with good

and

to

ire

He

(thus)
fails

lives
to

clothed practise

procrastination.

who

procrastinates,
-

deeds

[religiou

nd

abstract
manifested.*

nKiditation.]
So
are

He

who

does

not

practise

them,

ot

it has

been

declared

by
like

Bhagavk,
the

tha

The

righteous

manifested the wicked former

/ar-and-wide
are

Himalaya
like

ountain;
at

(but)
night.
renown."

here

unperceived, by

dart

hot

The

are

manifested the
explanation

(their)
of

virtues, second

ame

and

Hence

the

entence
*

is satisfactory. desire, I
say,

By

is its

'

attachment
attachment?'

"

Is the
By is

explanation the

he

question,

^whereby

is its
tanha

(obsolete
How
'

rm

Japp^
forms
an

(in

the

text)

(or)

lust

conveyed.
Bhagavit:"

he

attachment by

Is thus

stated
not

by
causes

ho

is
who

actuated
is

lust,

knows

(of
what
then is

things)
is

actuated lust

by

lust

perceives
a

not
man,

right

henever

enslaves Thus

[lit. bears]
the

there

hick

darkness.'
person

aforesaid if it

lust
a

in

an

inordinately

ustful
it the
^

becomes
world
sentence

(as

were)

glutinous

[substance.
the

the third

becomes is

adhesive.
satisfactory.

Hence

explanation

Afflictionf
question,

is its

dreadful is its
to

horror
great

'
"

is

the

explanation is two-fold; appertains

he

*what
appertains That appertains
There is

fear?'

Affliction
that
to

hat
the

which
mind.

the

body,

and

which

which
to

appertains
the dread
is
a

the

body
All

is

pain,

an

hat

which

mind

is

sorrow.

beings
of

dread

ffliction.

no

equal
greater
"

to

that that?

Affliction
Affliction

dukkha.)
the

Where
abstract is

indeed

than

three-fold

inherent

misery

(dukkha-

hukkhata),

vicissitudinary
misery

misery

(viparinama
dukkhatk).J'

dukkhat^),
Hence

nd

all-pervading
sometimes,

(sankhara
course

being,

in

the

(of transmigration)

becomes

have

rendered
sense

this
of

passage
*

rather

freely,
in the

without passage

reference
"

to

In

the

the
v.

word

trouble'

^Man

is

words. bor

to

trouble.'

Job

7.
to

Sankhstra"

all

states

of

existence,

that

which

comes

from

inherent

misery.*

So

likewise,

from there

vicissitudinary

ry.

t
disease^
from

From
and

what
also

causes? from

[From]
longevity. by
means

being
also

freedom

being
of

becomes
nibban.

all-pervading
treating
the

misery

birth-less
as

ce,

affliction
*

of

being
horror of
the

all-pervading

ry,

(the

reply
Hence

was),
the

Its

dreadful

[proceeds]
fourth
:
"

from

liction.'

explanation

sentence

isfactory.

Wherefore

Bhagav^

has
lake,

declared

Avijjct
say,

nivuto

8fc"

*I

the

world
;
"

is

shrouded
desire is its

by

Ignorance;
"

by
and

doubt
its dreadful

ot

manifested
horror

by

attachment

"

[proceeds]

from

Affliction.'

Note

to

p.

i.

Though
from which

at

the

risk
the

of

being
following
to

charged
as
a

with

egotism,

I cannot of
modern

rain

giving
was

specimen

i,

presented
a

His

Excellency,
and headed
at

Sir
the by
same

Charles
time,

Carthy,
learned

by

large
of

and

influential,
priests, in

ery

body
whom

Buddhist
noticed
1

the

learned

anffala,

have

the

Introduction.

Pafina-ransippabandhk

budha-kumuda-vanan
asesan

bodhayanto

Duppann'anbhoja-pantin
diisayanto
Loken'kchinna sanhatim
samant^;

suvipulam'api

yo

nS-n^-vidha-kalusa-tamodhansayanto

Charles
sAdhu
E.
*Brahmans'

Mak-k
Lank'

aRThi

devo
:

jayati

viya

sasi

ddhinatho

g.

"

says

the

Commentator.

So

vidva

Lankikknan
anatthan atthan nitikkre;

viya

piyajanako

vajjayanto
Esanto
ch'kpi
sangame

idha

sachiva-sabhk-

Tesan

chkrittanitippabhuti-hita-kath^
7*ikpi

chhekan

pasatthan gati-sati-sahitan

Mantindan

ichchhat'ekan
gahetun.

uchchinitvk

Alan

tato

tassa

sam^ja^mantisuvinita-chhekan;
samaggk

TbinsLQ"a.

vifi"un

Nidassay"m'-ekaraank

Mayan

hi

Lankaya

nivks"i-bh{ltk.

James
Ayan

de

Alwis

abhidhkna-nittho dakkho;

vibhdvi

naya-niti

Sak"ya Susikkhito

bhitsky'api

Sihalkya
ch'kpi.

M^gadhikkya

Satthesu

nekes'vapi

Sihalesu
ppabhutisu
chariy'^
sammk;

Chhando-rNighandu Sev^ya
Supktovan
chhek'-k

sabh"nan
yato.

n^na-balena
6

So

Lankik^nam'api
ussahati yadi

niti-paveni-maggan
ve

SammkVa
Lank'kdbipo

tathato

kathetun;

tameva

samuchchineyya hitkya ettba.

Appevan^ma

janatkya

dress

to

Sir
Sfc,

Charles
Sfc,
by

MacCarthy,
Buddhist
priests

Kt,

Governor

of

Ceylon,

of

Ceylon,

"

Translated

from
I.

the

Pali.~\

"

May

Sir
of

Charles
Ceylon,
with the

MacCarthy
be beams exalted of !
his of

the He

moon-like who

illustrious
the
every

vernor

delights who
;

lilylikeway

the
vast

wisdom;

in

scourages
the

lotus-field
of

ignorance which

and

who

de*
may

roys

dark-gloom

wickedness

his

subjects

actise,

II.
"

This
the

learned
ills

(personage),
the

like

generous

parent,

ing obviattheir

affecting

Ceylonese,
of
a

and
this

promoting

good
are

the

Legislative desirous and,

of

Council
selecting

(Island);
discreet, great
tact,

is
wise,

(we
and

ld)

of

Councillor,
for

renown

moreover,

noted
and

his

and

his

knowledge

the

customs

habits

of

the

Singhalese.

IIL

"Wherefore
beg
of

(all)

we,

the
to

(undersigned)
a

natives

of

Ceylon,
membership

nimously

leave

nominate
"

fit who

person
is

for well

the

the

said
viz:

Assembly

one

educated,

er,

erudite;

IV.
de
in
most

"James

Alwis.
and

He
Polity;

is

an

accomplished
well acquainted
"

scholar,
with

highly
Pali,

ed

Law

and his
own

intimately,

with

language

the

Singhalese.

V.
has
to

"He

attained various

eminence

by of

his

natural

talents;

and
as

acquired

sciences

the

Singhalese,

such

Philology,
most

Prosody, and

etc.,

by

(constantly) moving
Professors.

amongst

the

illustrious

renowned

VI. And
he and
the
;

""

is laws

able

well

and

correctly

to

define

the

ancient

usages

of the

Singhalese.
will

Wherefore,
to

if

His

cellency Ex-

Governor
will

be

pleased

elect

this
of the

(gentleman)
people.**
A,

well

it indeed

be

for the

prosperity

( Signed)

Sumangal
"C.5

"c.

Pali
Note

Grammars,
page
xv.

The
not

following the

list
names

is,

I
of

understand,
many

defective

and
extant

does

include

Pali

Grammars

in

Burmah.

Akkhara
Akkhara

Kosalla Sam^ha

Atthaviggahanissaya

Atthabyanjana
fialappabodhana Bitlavat^ra

Pakarana

ChiilasaddaDiti Gantha^ha Ganthabharana

KachchS-yana
or

Sandhikappa

Kachchkyana
Kachchayana

Vannana

Natha

Pakarana

Kachch^yana
Kachchayana

Sara

YojanS,
Bheda

Kachchayana

Kachchkyana
Kdraka Maha
puppha Nirutti

Bheda

Tikk.

Manjari

Mahk

Saddaniti

Moggalllina*
Mukhamatta Nirutti

Dipanif
Pifaka

Nirutti Nirutti

Yojana
Sdra

Manjusa

Pada-s^dhana
Panchika

Panchik^

PadipaJ

Payogasiddhi"
Riipamaia

by
by

Sangha
Vagegoda

Raja

Kiipamala

Kiipasiddhill
Sadda
Bindu

Sadda
Sadda

bheda Vachaka

Chinta

Sadda Sadda Sadda Sadda

Yidb^na

Vutti Sarattha
Niti

JUini

Sam^a Se^hantyadi Sutta Upasagga

Chakka.
Tlka

Niddesa
NipS,ta

Dipani

V^chakopadesa

V^chakadipani Vibhattikatha
Introduction,
p.
xi.
et

As

to

the called

age

of

the

writer,

see

seq*

!Also
By
the

nj^sa.
of

author p.

the

Selalihini

sandesa..

Aii

to

his

age

see

my

Si*

angar^,

cxcii.

CORRECTIONS.

.B.

"

The
in

figures
the

in

the
to

first

column

refer from

to

the
the

page,
top.

those

second

the

line

reckoned

Regard
if
a

an

Italic
as a

amongst
long
letter

Roman
;

characters,
if
a

or

Roman lingual.

amongst

cs,

vowel,
Line,

and,

or

c?

as

ge.

i.

for

these
*both.'

several'

read

^both

these.'

9
20 23

dele
for

'its

composition''
a

read read

''composing
''tvith
'^

in host the
'

it/

for
for

''amongst

host'

25

'q/*the

learned'
read read

read

among

learned/

iv.
"

30
31

for for for for

1
2

's(ivattato'
*gatocha*

*suvuttato.'

'vatocha.'

39
5"

*yattkcha'

read
read read

'yatacha.' 'siyanti.'

40
1?

'siyanti'
'there'

V.

for
for

*theri.'
'thera.'

'three' 'pitakan' 'Atuvk'

'

read
read

22
25

for
for for for for
for )
y

'pitoJcan.'
^

read
. .
.

Attfiakathd.'
'

27
"

'

satthi 'chita'

sangkyetva
'ticha.'

read

sa^^hi

.sangkyitva/

vi.

12 1

read

vii.
?7

'Abhidanapadipikk'
'dhamama' read

read 'dhamma.' in

'Abhidhanapadipika.'

9
25 4
.

Refjard
"

the

initial.n

'Neyyan'
jj

as

m.

J
for

ji.
*^

7
"

'nighandu'
'klesa'
'gnna' read read

read

*nighan"/u.'

30
"

for
2

'kilesa.' 'guna.'
read read

X.

for
for for for

6
11

'sammagge'

'samagge.'

'sambo"fiii'
'p^sMa'
y

'sambiSii.'
'pkskda.'

17

read

27
99

dele
for

in

'yesa.'
read read read 'vihara.' 'radiant.' 'ananda.'

xi.

16
3

'vohkra' 'radient'

xii.
24

for for

iii.

'Ananda'
'siladi'

iv.
99

1 3

for for for for

read
read

'siladi.'
'ananda.' read read 'erased.'

'Ananda*
'scraped 'sukandan'

16
99

off'

34
99

'sukan"/an.'
read

XV.

for for
for

'waragurunan'
'yati'
read

'waragurunan.'

11
"

'yati.'
read

24
"

'principal' 'abhivandi

'leading.'
'

vi.
99

16
18

for

yaggan'
read read read

read

abhivandiyaggan/

for
for
for

'subuddhan'
'buddlik'
'attan'

'suboddhan.'

20
99

'budhk.' 'atthan.'

22
99

for
for

'panchkso'
'let

the
be

first

read be

^panchaso.*
"c.' read fix)m *Let

the

first

preceding
vowel.*

consonan

separated read
'notes.'

[its inherent]

for for
for

sententious*
*a

'sententious.*

note'

read

'Skvatti,
Barknasl.'

PatMi,

Baranasl'

read

'Skvatthi,

Ptoli,

for for

'pa/hama' 'vohara'

read read

'prathama.' 'vmkra.'

insert insert

a) after J before
read

'Vedas.'
'

Asvalkyana'
read

"c.

for for for for for

"6t

'machchan'
'patan'

'machchhan.'

'pa/an.'

'pur^tthima'

read
read read read

'puratthimk.' 'gha/e-pa/an.' 'ghate-pa/b.' 'Manosiik.'

'ghate-patan'
'ghata-pato'

'Sianosihi'
'Kachchajana

for
for for for for

Vannana'
read 'aha.'

read

'Kachchayana

vannank/

'Achariya' 'khk'
'render' 'may
read

'aehariyaJ

read demand' or read read

'afibrd.'
read

'demands.'
composed which.'

for
for

'works 'of

'works 'fix)m

in/

which'

for for for for

for for
for

'attempts'

i-ead
read

'attempt.'

'Grammar'
'had
'samanna'

'Granmiars.'
read

borrowed'
read

'borrowed.'

'samaflgk.'
read

'appelations'
'metta'

'appellations.'

read read

'mettha.' 'science.'

'sciences'
'when'

dele for

before

'disseminated.'
here
as

'Buddhist rehgion.'

thurch,'

elsewhere,

read

'Bmidhist

for
for

'Angutta'
'literary

read and
not

'Anguttara.'
the' read

'fiterary

as

W6U

as

the."

for for for for for for

'vinichchaya' 'Neruttukanan' 'Patkliputta' 'ecumeniar

read read read

'vinichchhaya.'
'Nenittikknan.'

'Pafeliputta.'
'Pakatibhkvan.'

read'ecumemcal.'
read read read read read

'Pakafibhkvan'
'Brahman' 'falcendi' 'mknus' 'dibha'

'Brahmli.'

for
for for for for for for

'falsificandi.'
'mknuse.'

'dibba.'
read

'"^knltn

idhattha'
read read read

'nl^ni

idha^a.*^

'peta'
'j4nas' 'is well'
'have

'pet^.'

'jhkna.'
'are

well.'
read

for
for

embraced'
read

'embraced.'

'Parasi'
'its'
read

'Parasu.'

for
for
for

'his.'
read

'Lessen'

'Lassen.'

Paee.

hxae,

xlii.

30

for

^dvedasa* '^^J^'

read
'^^^

^dvkdasa/

xHii
"

I^^^
for

*'^J**'
read

'sieataranti*
'

'sighataranti/
^Alaaandk.*

24
"

"

25 24 5

for for
for

Alasando*
adduce'

read read
read
mesu'

xliv. xlv.
"

*cite.'
'sutante/

'suttante'

6
15
"

for for
for

'panchante
'ratthan'

read

^panchantiinesu.*

"

16
20

read
read

/rafthan/
'mktito.'
read read

*matito'

"

21
"

"2224

for
for

*puchchchismin'
^dassanattan' *sthupa' read read

'kuchchhismin/

^dassanatthan/

"

advii. xllx.
"

29 6 9

for
for for

*stiipa.'

'Brahman'
'rivalled' 'is' before

'Brahmk.' *vied.'

read

1.
22
"

dele
insert

'Jou-lai.'
before
read

'proper'

'occasion.'

li.
Hi.

for

'though'

'through.'
1.'
"

33 5

insert

'S.

367

p.

after
read

'p.

L'

liv.
"

for

'Chandr^char'
'bhasjan'
'krit'
read read

'Chandrllchkr.*

6
" "

for for

'bhksyan.'

'kritan.'
read
read

31
"

for for

'vykchakshanto'
'vichcchinnan' 'mahabashjan'

'vykchakshknan.' 'vichchhinnan.'
'mahabkshyan.'

32
"1 "1 "

for
Iv. Ivii. lix.
Ix. 33
30 1
29

read

12

for

'BL'

read

'Bengal.'
after
'A.

insert

'himseir
D.' read

'Muller.'
B.'
or

for for

'A.

'after

Buddha.'

'ceceded' 'those

read

'seceded.'

Ixvi.

insert

about'

before

'whom.*
read

Ixix.

for

'kenachadevakaranijena' yena.'

'kenachidevakaranl-

31
n

for
for for

'chatuvannin'
'dhkro'
read read

read

'chktuvannin.'

34
""

'daharo.'
'solasa.'

'sklasa' 'sakkhara' 'pMako'

""

"

35
""

for
1

read read

'skkkhara.'
'padako.'
read

Ixx.
"

for for

'veyjakarano' 'in
one'

"

'veyykkarano.'
one.'

Ixxii.

11
10 33 11

for for for for

for for for

read
read

'with
'date.'
read

Ixxv.

'data'

xxvii.

'mahk^hibih' 'Abhirkdi'
'"astresu'
'

'maharshibih.*

xviii.

read
read
'

'dbhirkdi.'
'^^tresu.'
'

13
22 22 15 3

atbhutkrtham

read

Ixxx.

'Alpabhransa'
'

read
'

atbhAtkrthkm.* 'Apabhransa.'

xxxii.

for
for

BMikk

'

read

Bkhlikk.'

xxvi.
"

'render'

26
xc.

insert dele
s.

'the
in

'afford.' read language before

o^'

'their

so-called.*

21
24

'initios.'
read

xcv.
c.

for

'of

which*

'from

which.*

25

for

'abaddha'
'a

cii.

29
10

insert
for

'kbaddha.' read before division or

'night.'

re.

Line.

ciii.

30
"

for

^kamk' *kshura* 'khui-a' 'ktantad'

*naso

read read read

'khamll.*
'kshura.'

for
31

for

'khura.*

civ.

10

for
for

19
30
cv.

ho

va

'ktkntad.' read dirgh'-"c., read

read
'

'fiaso

ho

vk

dirgh-"c.

for
1

*adirghas'

'adlrghas.'
read

for for for

'chitthasya *krinmringamam*
'ktvodanih* *sodvkgatah* *srigalasya
a

chishthah'
read read
read

'chiMiasja

chish/hah.*

7
14
18

'krinmringamkm.'

*ktvodknih.'
'sodhvagatah.'

for

21

27

render for 'many insert

"iala
read

"ikle
*from

sialakah.*
many facts.*

fact' knowledge

cvi

'any

of 'its.'

before

'the

Pali.'

16
20

insert
for

'when'
read yb,

before
'are.'

'when'
'nara

evil.

7 9
12

for
for

yadi'
read

read

'nara

yb.y'adi.'

'bh,sare'
'atthakatha' 'mande'

'bhasare.'
'

for
for for for for for

"

read read read

atthakatha.'

13 14 20

'manrfe.' 'khatemi.'
read
"

'katemi'

'nipajajpetvb,'
"

'nipajjapetvh.'
'penti.'

21 22
31

'pentu'

read

'gachchante'

read

'gachchhante.'

for
for

'Orta'
'Kirathk'
'a^harasa' word

read

'0"a.'
read read

32

'Kirata'
'

for

a/^hjlrasa.'

cviii.

the

'broomstick'
at

should

be

'stick'

or

'ticket.'

See

'salkka'
cix.
ex.

p.

103.

for

'Brahmans' 'of
a

read read read read

'Brahmas.' 'arising from

a

12
14

for
for for

union'

union

of.'

cxi.
cxv.

'Sanki'it'
'paskritva'
ya 'game'

'Sanskrit.'

21
3

'paskretvk'

cxvi. cxvii.
23
23
30

dele
for for for

in

'Papanchasudaniya.'
read

'gkme.'
read read

cxviii.

'Buddhebi'
'kusmehi'

'Buddhebhi.' kusumehi.'

31
?"^

for
for

'kusma' 'dhanuya'
'turyam'

read
read

'kusuma.'
'dhenuyk.'
'turyam.'

cxix.
cxx.

14 25

for for for

for

read read

cxxi.

'vires'
'Ambatta'

'vis.'
read

cxxii.

29 31

'Ambaftha.*

'Attaka'
'sah^' 'Brahmana'
'panati' 'vechane'
'tesu'

read read

'Aftaka.'

cxxiv.

2 3
""

for
for

'saha.'
read

'Brkhmana.'

for
4 15

read read read read )

'panati.' 'vachanena.'
and for

for for for

for

'tlsu;' 'katk.'
,
,

'Attaka'

read

'Aftaka.'

16
18

'kathk' 'vkdhadi,

-ii

v^-

"

21
23
"7

insert for
for

'etc'

after
read

'vedesu.' 'A"aka.'

'Attaka'

CORRECTIONS,

12

Line.

25

insert
for
*

*by
roars*

that
read

tense'
*

before

*into

English/

27 3"4
14

hisses/

for
for

'chattijati*

read

*chhatt^yati.'

'diatta*
'bhu*

read

'chhatta/

8"10
20

for
for

read

*bhu;
read

'gamiyati'

'gamlyati/
and

17

for

^ghata*
frmn
that
t

read
root

^gha/a;*

observe
be

that

all

examples

2ionld

likewise

ei^pressed

by

gu li

Likewise
for 'niyanti'

here.
read

27
6

'niyyanti.'
read

for for

'kkrapayati'
'obhavo'
'

*kkrkpayati.^

read

*abhavo.*
p.

last

line,
30

insert
for

1856"8.

247.' 'kakancfa.'

*kkkanda'
'Buddk'

read

6
18

for
for

read
read

'Buddha.'

'Kutltgkra'
'version' 'which'

'Ku/kgkra.'
'Ceylonese.'
'they.'

9
13
4

insert insert for for for

for

after before
read read

'Tuwataka'

'Tuwa^a.'
Sanyutta.'

9
12
31

"'Sangutta'

'Pit^a'
'Vedattan'

read read
read

'Pi^aka.'
'Vedallan.'

32
"

for
for

'dattan'

'dallan.'
read

(twice.)
'SammMi^^hi.'
read

'Sammadhitthi'

for
"

'Sankhb'abhajaniyk'
'mkhkpunn^an'
'of after 'words.'
'

'Sankh^abhbjaniya.'

for
"

read

'mahkpunnamkyu.'

27
1

insert for for

'nikkaddhita' 'gambira'
read

nikka^Mita.' 'gambhlra.'

26

^*^ }for
21 3
8

'akappakarsnJl'

read
'

'ikappakarank;

for for for for for

'vijahetvk'
'mbbuttk'
'evam'ahansu'

read read

vijahitvk.'
'nibbattk.'
read

'evam'khansu.'
read

9
14

'evanavachuttha'
'khlyante' 'Abhayuvark'
'attan'

'evam'avachuttha.'

read

'khlyanti.'
read

for
"

'Abhaydvark.'

16
20
2

for } ^^'
i

read read
read

'atthan.'

'puchchi' 'paripatV
'passaddiyk'
'bhante.'

'puchchhi.'
'paripa/l.' read

7
13

for
for
dele

'pa^isaddhiyit.'

9
"

for

'Sadhu'

read

'Skdhu.'

CORRECTIONS

OF

THE

TEXT.

II

". ". ""17

15

for
for for

eo3

^38
"S9.^D3

read

eo

^S"".

diQo

read

(5io"3^"'^9.
esog"'^^^.

99

csogs"-^^
c?coa^"
CFQO"
O)oa"

read
read

Ill

".
""

15
19

for
for for

dfisarf^.

99

read
read read

cpGoSb.
(dsoes.

lY

".

12

".
"

36

for

tf

cfi^

dbcoeS.

INDEX.

Page.

l*agf

cUiknapadlpikk,
defined
.

vii., iz", xi., xcii.

25

Attatiagalu^^ansa
Attanopada Attha, Af^haslla
.

Xxxi^.
.

sa

terminations
see

2,

20,

42

tadhamma

60
88

ktman.
.

ii^

harma

jnkna
.

prasth^

XXX.

AttaksL,

rishi
of
"

xix.

anyapura

liv.

author
Augment

Vedas
.

cxxiii

anyu
.

Iv.

"

hammapi^a
.

Ixv.
Ixxix.
"

Aurva,

son a

of

Urva
*
. .
.

xxxv.

Avanti,

dialect

Ixxxii.
. .

voice
Surds

19,20
%

Avinft^a
13

defined
arya.

84

es
or
XXV.

Ayyk,

see

k
of
of

Buddha
.

bcvi* writers
^

Bactrian

Greeks
PMi
.

Dramatic
.'

xciv.

xlii Ixxxv.
.

satta
or

xxix

Ixxiii.
1,

Baburajendralal
Bk"/ava
Bli^aVa
or

Mitra,

Esq.
fire
.

59,
xxxv^

62

atanl,

the

present

perfect 7, 12,
.

submarine
see

43

dda
.

nder

the

Great
.
.

xlii.,
.

xlii^ Ixxxv*

Bahlikk, Bahusutikk Bala

.

mukha, dialect a

Yalabkmukha.
Ixxxii.
.
.

heretics
^
. .

67

ndria
.

xliii.
xi.,

...

87
vi.,
"

ac,

Ceylon,
^ "

for

1834,
"
.

xii.

Bklavatkra
"

",

xiv.,
xl.,

xxxvi.
12,

sinha,

age
.

of

xxxvi^ In.

'^^

quoted
a

33

BMadichchk,
Buddhist

fraternity
. .

of
xv.

kosha
.

lii., xcii.
.

priests

can
a

Oriental

Journal
of Medankara
XXX

cxii.

Bambu,
Ballentyne*s

used
for

for Laghu

writing
Kaumudhi

103
.

a,

pupil

xiii.,
vi.
of

Barks

used

writing
a

103
.

rishi,
.
.

xix.;

author
cxxiu.

BaAivantudslve,

pandit

i",

cxxxvi*
.

rasa edaa

Bentota,

learned

priest,
see

tara
extract

Nikhy
from

xxii.
^
*

Benedictive Benfey,
Pr.

mood,
.

Panchami.
.
.

xxviii*

xlii xcix* xxxi.

dassi
.

xxxvi.

quoted

ndhas
...

1
a

Bhaddrakalpa
.

"

ubh,

metre
a

xxiv,
xxivv

Bhadraykni Bhagu,
a

heretics
.

68
.
.

ubh-tristubh,
see

metre

rishi of
a

xix* cxxiiit

ra,

Niggahita.
Ixxviii*

author

Vedas
.

ansa
Wilson's

Bharadvaja
"
"

Pr.
.

Magadhi,

dialect

xlii" lxxxii" Ixxiii.

xliv.
40,

author

rishi Vedas of
as

xixi cxxiiii Ixxxiii

.

Bhkshk,

tradition
"

to
%

sha

Bha^-kavya
Bhartrihari
. *

\
w

Ct

liii

dhktukk
.

41

Bhattogi Bhavissanti, Bhattudesaka

Iv.,
i
"

lix.

"

xxvi.,

y^a
a

xix.,

xlv.,
"

Ixvi.,
.

xxxi* Ixix.

or

the
^

Future
" .

7,

10

.103

particle
or

ix"
the
soul
.

Bimbiskra,kittgof
Bodhi,
"

!"fflgadhacxTk, 82
%
*

Attha,

xxidii*

tree

"

86

Page.

thUng,
quoted.

Pr.
.
.

"

^lii.

lecte* cxvii.; Compomids,

Kach.
32

cxii.,of of bhii,

Pali
hii,

and
"c.,

Vedic
46* of

Sai

jjhanga
Pr., his

^^
. .
"

fourth
Grammar
Mood, classes
*

book

p,

quoted

xcii.,
12,
.

cxxr.

xy
see

Comp.

Gram.
acceptation

23,

Conditional

KM^tipatti.
.
.

hmachariyk,
the
term
.

of

amongst
.

hists BuddXXXV.,
.

Conjugational Prof. Cowel^

95

xxxvi.,
.

xcii

his

Prakrit

Praklisa

ahmanism
...

xxxm.
"

hmadatta

104
xxxvi.
.

Damila,
Dan^alankara

kingdom
.

of

Chola
.

ddhagosa

xxxviii.,
. "

Ixxvi

ddhapiya,
siddhi
.

author
.

of
.

Rupaxiv.,
.

^-

Dan^
xxxvi.

Ixxx

age

of
....

Daradas

xli
. . "

ddhavansa

quoted
era

xlviii.

Dasavatthu

ddhistical

Ixyi.
.

Dksyas
Declension,
Kach.

....

xli
second

mouf,
quoted

Professor
.

xxxii.
59
mv.

book
.
.

of

vanekabihu

xxxix. king
.

Ix.

xcvii,
.

Grammar of Pr^fait Pali,

xv

Definition
of

Ixxxvi.
. .

shmir,

Iv.;

probably
Code
.

the

seat

Definite 60 Denarius Desi

.

Past,
....

see

Hiyattani.

fourth of the institution ste,

affixes

"

xl Ixxvii
. " . .

of
.

xxxiii.
x.,

usal

16.
xu.

Devala, Dhakki,
Dhammapada

Iv
a
a

ylon

Almanac
Branch
.

for
of
.

1834

xi.,

rishi dialect
.

"

Ixxxii
.

ylon Journal

the

R.
"

A.
"

S.
x^^*

xxiii.,
.

xxvi
.

comments

on

ylon

possesses for
.

great the
.

tages advan-

Dhktu
of

Manjusa

...

study
!""
.

Dhammapadknl
Dhammuttarikk,

Pali

cxxxm.

heretics
.

ammakkhanda,
havagga

sec.

of

Ma.

Dhammagutta,
"Dialectus Difference

heretics

Ixxxiv

andragupta

xxix. Iv Ivii.
,

prmcipua" between
...

Pali

and

handuli
heretics

Ixxx.
.

Sanskrit
Desiderative Dlpb-vansa,
forms
extract

hannagkrika

68

hannakka
defined
.

Ixviii.
.

Verbs of from
...

31,3 54,

harana

xxxiv,

86

DighaNikkya
Distortions Dr. Wilkins' of
the

hetiya,

heretics
sanvaran
.

67
88

Scriptures
. .

xxxi

hhadvara

hinas

hinese

Scriptures
a

xliv. 59
of
xv.

Dodanpahala, Dramatic

quoted learned a

priest
discrepancy

writers,
between, accounted

the and

hudkmknikyo,
Buddhist

fraternity
.

marians, Gramfor
.

xci

priests

lassification
the

lough, his

of radicals B. Rev.
Grammar

22,
.

23

Dravidas Drawing
Dutiya Dvisu,
minine

....

ix.
.

....

Pali

cxxv.
.

olebrook's

Essays

xlvi.,

Ixxiii.,
Ixxvi.

sanglti both masculine

.
. "

and
"
.

fe-

ombination,
chkyana's

section Grammar
tables
of

ofKachxvi.
.

Dvanda Ekanipata

Compounds
a

section

of
.

Buddhist xxii.,

omparative
xcv.;

Pali

"

Prkkrit, ciii.;

Scriptures
EUsion
. .

xxv

of

Pali"

Prkk.

Mkgadhl,

1,42,43.
.

Page.
sur

le

Pali
.
.

Gkthk
.xcix.
.

dialect

xcvii.,

demia
.

xlii.

Geyyan

6
or

cts

from
v.;

Buddhagosa^s

atiik,

Asoka's

atthainscrip.iv.; Pa-

Ghosa

sonants

xiv.

Ghosaka Ginendra
.

102

aDchasudanl,
v.;

ib.;

Yibhanga
ib.;

tuvk,

Bodhivansa,

Bkla-

Gimar, Gokulika,

inscription
heretics

at

xli

atlra,

ii.;

vi.; Padasadana,

Abhidhknapadipikk) xiii.; Kupasiddhi,

its
commentator,

Goldstucker,

Pr.

xxxviii.,

ib.;

xiy.;

xlvii. Ivii., Ix
.

achchkjana's
to

Grammar,

xvi.;

Grotama,
Gowda.

age
....

of

Ixvi
. .

mmentator

Kupasiddhi,
Kachchkyana
Kavikan^hapksa, of
the

xix.;

Ixxix,

ttaNiddesa,xxi.;
xxii.; Ekanipkta

Grammars

Pali,
ancient

number

of,

nnank,

Grantha,

dialects

Ixxxviii.

V.;

Anguttara
to

kkya,3Lxvii,;

commentator

the

Hiuanthsang,
.

the

Chinese
xxxvii.,

traveller

me,xxYiii.;

Nyksa

or

Mukhamat-

xlviii.,
.

dlpani,ib.;
Dipavansa,

NeruttiskraManjusa,
xxx.;

Heretics,
Heterodox

the

acts

of

6
.

.;

Pradipikk,

doctrines
.
.

xiv.;

JViilindappanna,

xlii.;
commentator

Majto

Hemachandra
Hikkaduve,
a

ima
the

Nikk,
same,

xlv.; ib.;

xxvi., learned
.

Ixxxiii.,
priest. cxxxvi.,

Atthakathk

112
xxxv.

ddhavansa,
Ixix.;

Iviii.;

Majjhima

Ni-

Historic Hiyattani,

du
or

Buddhisme
.

Dan"?ialankkra,

Ixxvii.;

the

definite

Past
12,43

machandra,
linguae
c;

Ixxxvi.; Prkk.
Ixxxix.;

InstitU"
Bha^d

ones

Hodgson
.

I
.
.
.

vya,

Payogasiddhi, ib.;

anga

Atthakathk,
cxv.;

Vicvii.; Papansuttan,

quoted Hushka
....

cxxxii.

5
a

asudanl,

Ambai^
Lassen's
54,

Hu,

radical

4
.

.30,

xiv.;ViniatiVinodaniTika, lavatara, 33. 12,

Dipavansa,
57.
53,

ib.;

Inst. Vish-

Iddhi
....

xxxiv,

63.

Iddhipkdk
....

8
see

purana,
99.

SumangalaVilasini,
Vagga,
72, A
.

Indefinite
100.

Past,
....

Parokkhk.

Maha

92,

Indriya Innovations Institutiones

lonians
....

nguttara

Nikk,

97 101.

tthakathk

of

in

Buddhism
.

53
.
.

ammapada,
103.

SamantapaskBheda
105.

Prkkrit

33

k^,

Eachchkyana

xlii
...

kk,

ib.; Nettipakarana,
to

dress Ad-

Itiwuttakan Itihasa, designated

.

60
as

Sir

Charles

MacCarthy,

Maha
.

1.
a

bharata
.

xix.,

Ixx,

am,

Chinese
a name

traveller

xcv.

i-lun,

for

Abhid.

rma

jnana

prasth^a

xxxi.

Jagati,
Jains,

a see

metre

XXIV.

ll,
of
a

the erudite Dhammapada

word

translator
cxxv.
.

Lokkyata.

Jktakan
Jetavana vihkra
.

60
.
. .

Chinese
....

for

Brah-

xi

xxxii.
of
71
3

meaning
person

tJhkna Jinavachana,
Jones, Sir
of

xxxiv.,

88

name

for quoted

Pali

William, the
.

xxvi. Ixxxvii.

digest

of

Buddhists
.

60
24, 34

Journal
Branch

R.
.

A.

S.,
.

Ceylon
xi.,

ntative

form

of

Verbs

Ixxxiv.

Page.

Page

achchkjana,
class

the
Pali

most

numerous

Kachchk^ana
to

bheda
Grammar

Tlkk

Com.
xv.,

of

Grammars,
is extant

work .original ib.; Burmah, ^d known asBldaYatkra,

"c.,

the xiv.; in Ce^flon its revisions RiLpasiddhi, high into

estimation,

Pall

10

Eachch^yana

bheda

Yannank

xv

ib.;

is xvi.; ib.;

held

in

is divided its

eight
remarks,

books,

introductory
687

ib.;
ib.;
its in first
its

contains section

suttans,

extracted,

mention examples Buddhist cities, xviii.; made it between the correspondence rivation Deib.; its date, xix.; andPknini,

xvU.;

of

of
a

the

with
was

patronymic, Malik the

xix., xxix.; ib.; his identification

term,

Eachchkyana,

ib.;

he

xxL; by Sutta

author his identity

of Neruttipitaka, further confirmed

Eklktipatti,

or

the

conditional
10,43

Niddesa,xxii.;the
this composed farther Confirmatory fi-om the

locality
Gram-

Ealhkna

Pandit
.
. .

Ixvi

in. which

he

Eamma/Zhknan

xxi,
.

mar,ib.; of his identity,

yana the

proof Kachchaof ib.;

Kambojas
Eandragupta Eanishka

xHy

see

Chandragupta.

Yannank,
Anguttara
was

ib.;

Ekanipltta

5
....

Nikiya

he

the

rana,and former
extract

author Nerutti

of Pakarana,ib.;

quoted, Ketti Paka-

Eassapa,

rishi
of heretics

xix
.

the
xxiii.;
105;

author Eassapikk

Yedas

cxxiii

6
.

extant

in

Ceylon,
Appendix^
of the

Easmir, Ekrika Ektantra Eathk

see

Cashmir

therefix^m.
stanza

xHu. fi

the

is

opening in the

Grammar
metre,

Vasantatilaka

xxiv.;

the

terthe minology adopts writer Sanskrit xxv.; writers, of

skrit Eavikanfhapksa,

skgara
extract
see

xxxviii., fi"om

x I
xxv.

Ekvyadarsha, Eetubha
....

Danf^ialankkra.

the

design

of this

Grammar, evidence in

xxvi.;
support

Ixx
....

circumstantial
of
aiithor*s
and

Ehasas
Ehattiya
or

xliv

the

tradition,
as a

ib.;

the

Ehsastriya
.

xxxiii.

celebrity

theologian,
as

proof

to

his

Kachcbkyana,
Avanti, called
author of ib.;

xxviii.; identity Mahk with ib.; a resident

work
xxx.;

philologer farther

Eirktas
....

xHv. derivatives
.

Eitaka Eolisarpas

or

verbal

xvi
^

xliv

of

Eoresi,

Mon.

de
.

xxvii.

this xxLx.; Sandhikappa, different

from

also
its

Eumkrilk

quoted

xxxvi.

the

author

Abhidliarma different
Prakksa,

jnana
from the xxxvi.;
xl.; seq.;

prasthana, writer
relative evidence Panini before

Lalita
of Laghu

Yistkra Eaumudi

quoted
.

Ixv.,
11,
34,

Ixv

45

Prakrit

Language, Lankkgoda, Lassen,

Pr.

divisions
a

of priest

Ixxxiii.

of priority in xli. support,

Panini,
et

learned

quoted

GotamaBuddha,lxvi.;
of illustrate of

mar Gramdesigned
forms
to

xxxix., Ixxxix,

liv

33

Eachchkyana
the

Lk^
.....

IxxLx.

Grammatical
Ixxii. Com.

Legal
Letter

Buddhist
writing

Courts
...

100

Buddhist

achchkyana

writings, bheda,

to

Pali

Likhita,

Page.

Page.

era,

F.,

District
a

Judge
scholar
.
.

of
iii.

mgarl
.
.

xxvii.
91
cxv.

olombo,
or

Pali
Jains

character

yata,

Ixy.,

Ixxi.

alphabet

Nagarj^na
a

Iv.
.
.

dlia,

nsksaka,

nation heretics

Ixxiii.
. .

N^asena
Kanda,
Nk^akas
Nepal

xxxiii.,
.

68
.

king

xlii. Ixviii.
xliv.

arthy,
to

Sir
.

Charles,
,

Pali
.111 80
.

ddress

scriptures
of works literature

XXX.

hyadesa,

extent

dnl,

Ixxiii.

See

of Pali.

"

Buddhism
.

Ixv.
59

strates
Bharata

Buddhist
.

100

Nettipakarana
.

xxi.,
.

xxii.
105

bkshya
.
. . .

liy.

extract

from

xix.,
.

xliv.

jetavana

vihkra
see

neruttipakarana,

xi.. [N^erutti-

skra Neruttipifaka,
name

Nerutti

manjusa
not

"

xxviii.

anot)ier
XXI.

of
see

Rupasiddhi
Nurkna.
or

pitaka
sadda

Nibban,
Nlti
.
. .

xl.
94

Niggahita Nighan(;?u

Anusvkra
.

19

Kachchkjana
.

Lxx.
....

Sangiti
...

67
.
.

Nlvaranappahana
.

88
.

Vagga
extract

from
.
. .

72,

xxvii, 92,
.

48
100

Nominal verb Nyaaa panl

derivatives,
....

see

Tadkita,
33

rkstri
.
.

Ixxx.
xi., xii, from Ixix.
.

or

Mukha

matthadlXV., xxvm.

vansa
Nikkya,
a name

xv.

hiina

extract

as,

for
a

Yedas king

xix.

Odras Oushra

xliv.
Ixxx.

ikyk

Chandra,
....

Ixxxiii.
xliv.

kthi

forins
....

of

hu
.
.

46

Pkli,

iii.;

name

for iv.;

MAgadhi,

ib.;
as

it

ajas

Ivii.
Rev. F. quoted
.
.

derivation,
its
names,
name,

n,

ii., cxxxi.,
.101 xxxiv.
.

47

iv.; ib.;

hematics
understanding Professor
.

speculations Tanti another included

Ixxx.;

to

of

it
the

under

term

Prkkrit,
the
Ixxx of

Muller,

xix.,

xxxii,
a

xli.,
.

xxiii., Ivi. 59 xiv.

.

of

Zend
v.;

Pali,

also Maharastri
xcv.;

peculiarities foimd in the

a

fication modi-

ankara,

priest
.

Pali,

ahder
.

xlii.

tables the

thereof,

ib.;

re,

difference
and modem
.

between

Gathk

dialect,

rektion Pali xcvii.;

the

comparative its

to

anteri

ancient

works
.
.

xxiii.
xxxv.

thereto,
the

ton

quoted
a senic

Indian
in proof

xcviii.; dialects,

oldest

of

a,

dialect
.
.

Ixxxiv.

nda
....
.

xlii.
.

root

of

other
to

xcix.; rities authoib.; it is the thereof Prakrits, ib.; its relat

c;

ndapparina
extract
....

xlii.
.

the

Sanskrit,
the
two

ples Exam-

from
.

xliii.
xxxvi.

exhibiting
those different

identity ib.;

twee be-

ndu
a

idioms,
the

Pali

allkna,
his

thera

xi., xiii.,
.

xxxvi.
34,
44

from

dialect
from
the

Pali
....

Grammar

inscriptions,
6

ci.;

the of dhist Bud-

Scriptures
thePrjiknt,ib.;
the

cha
Dr.

Eatika,
quoted

Play
.
.

Ixxxii.
.

of Nepal, from the

ib.; from

Magadhl

c.

of

Jains,

amattnadipani,
....

name

for

Md^adhl,
gadhi
of the

the modem cii.; from ib.; and from M4the

Nyksa
bhsLs^,
a name

xxviii. given
to

Grammarians, Vararuchi

ib.; the

M^adhi

of

Page,

Pa

tradition
miila

as

to

the

Pali
Pali
a

being

the

Pannatti Pachchanta,
"

heretics
the

bh^s^,

cvi.;

the

Sanskrit,

cvi.;

Extract
cvii.;

sister of from
extra-

boimdaries

of
.

xxi

"

the

foreign

regions

Vibhdnga
Tagant

Atuvi,
notions of how

Pachchaya
Pachcheka Padaka

Santosa
Buddha
. ....

rejected,
forms,
development

cix.;
ex.;

simplicity
contemporaneous

its

Gram,

I
a

of

Padaskdana,
work Pahlavas
....

Grammatical

Pali

and

Sanskrit
thereto, the

probable,

cxiii.;
relation
cxv.;
relation

objections
of

Pali

to

cxiv.; Vedic-JSan.,

....

xl

Paiskchi, PanchUa

dialect
....

cx

of lb.;

their Pah

phonetic

systems,

Ixxi

ancient ib.;
and

Alphabet

fied, identi-

language
or

of
the

Punjab
Benedictive
a

cxxx.

comparative

tables

of

Panchami,

xl.

Pali

Vedic

Sanskrit, Pali Weber its

reasons

affinity

of

the Dr. had

to

the

cxvii,; krit, Sans-

Panchikkpradipa,

work
. .

by

Totagamuva
Papanchasudani

exxv.;

cxxvi.;

Pali

origin

quoted, in the
for
state

xxvii.,
"^
.
.
.

cxvi.,
.

Paradas

xl

Punjab,
cultivation,

conjecture,

cxxix.; ib.;

this
of

Parakkamabkhu
.

its

high

Parlksara
.

xix.,
a

Ixvi.,

Ix

cxxxi.;

conclusion,

Parasu
coolies Parassapada Parakamma

Rkmk,
.

name

amongst
.
.

cxxxii. li metres. santatilaka, Anushtubtrishtub,

xxxvi
2,

See

Varespectively Anushtub, Trishtub,

terminations
...

Jagati,
Vaitiliya.

Trish-

Parinibban Parokkhd,

Suttan
.
.

xxi
6,

tub-Jagati,
tenses

or

indefinite
. .

past
.

li

compared

with

the
22

Passive Pkfciliputta

voice

San.

10;

also

the
xi.,

conj. classes
xiii.,
.

xxix

li

Grammars,
list
of

xiv., 114
.

Patangali
. .
.

Ixxiii.,

Pafisambhidk
of the

or

the

ment attainof sancti

-

li,

different
modem

from
specimen

Sanskrit

29,

45

four
....

gifts

112

fication Pa^hama,
person Paimdrakas
a

xxi for

nini, his
and

ii.;

correspondence Kax^hchky ana's

the Prakrit,
author in
name

between

name

the

third

work,
xxv.;

dwells

on as

xix.; described

....

xl

the

xxxvii.; Literature,

his

place

of the

Music, Hindu
is
a

Payogasiddhi,

Pali
.

Grammar
.
.

quoted
....

cv

xli.; the
ib.;
he

mentions
to

patronymic, Peyyaia YavaPhelevi,

dialect
. .

cxxx.

nkni,
xlvi.;
two

xlii.;
not

refers

the
affixes,

Unnkdi,
xlvii.;

Pillar Pingala

dialect
. . . ....

xxx.

siitras

but
of

I
a

existences

Pjlnini,
to

the Weber,

age

assigned ib.; account

him

xlviii.; Dr. by
him
not

Piyadassi,

pupil
....

of

Moggal-

Ikyana
Potuiakan Polonnoruva,
in

x
. .

by

Hiouenthsang,
to

given of ib.; he does

Ix.;

book
an

ancient
. .

city
.

allude
er's

Buddha,
as

GoldstuckIxi.;
Dr.

Ceylon
a

opinion

to

Weber's
in

contra,

age, Ixiii.;

his

Prkchya,

dialect
. .

x Ixxxi
.

oliier

proof
received was

Pradlpikk,
Pr^toit,
the
et
ans,

extract

from
of

xxxiv

support

of

the that

generally
Panim
Ixvi.

spoken principal Ixxvii.;

kinds

by

Palnini,

xxv.

before
seq.

opinion Gotama

tongue
defined of, by

of

the

Ar

Buddha,

Dan"^
has

four

Ixxvii.;

severa

Page,

Page.

sister-dialects, lects, ib.; Mah^rishtri,

comprehended ib.; other
one

es,

provincial Ixxx.;

Buddhist

from
M^gadhi

the

writings Prakrit, Jains,

of

Nepal, ib.;
from from

ib.; the the the

adhi

in,
dialects Prakrit dialects
later define

ib.;
of,

bhransa,

originally
Ixxxi.;
that the

language,
received

modem M^gadhi
the

of the Magadhi, of the

cii.; ib.; and from

Grammarians,
Vararuchi

ib.;
compared

several in name

Magadhi

times, them
century

Grammarians
Ixxxii.; six

of

the
the

with Buddhists Miil% of from cvii.;

of Pali,

ciii.; the
that

tradition the

Pali
it is
a

iously,
only

in the

13th

is

bh^sk, the

cvi.;

dialects, thereof,

ib.;

in

ty-six

proof diflerent the

rities authoIxxxiii.; dialects,

are

sister
extract

Sanskrit,

ib.; Attha-

Vibhanga

Asiatic

kathk,
how

xiv.; subtle

later

varieties
of

iandf o three

refinements ib.;
kinds,
Ixxxv.;

Gramresolved
one

.language

ision,

ib.; Frsikrit Pali its chief of

notions extravagant Prakrit forms rejected, cix.; Indo-European, correspondVith ib.; tables comparative cxii.; of, development contemporaneous of
and

dialect,

Pkli

Sanskrit

probable,
cxiv.;

cxiii.;

ib.;

the

acceptation authorities

the

Ixxxvi.;
the
on

quoted,
acceptation ib.; reasons

objections considered, Pali to the of

cxv.;

relation Vedic-San.,

common

nded
this

prejudice,
of the
an

conclusion,
name

Ixxxvii.;
ancient Sanskrit,

Prgikdialect

their of phonetic relation ib.; Pali was the systems, alphabet Nagkri, from ib.; authority ancient Papanchasudanl, cxvi.; tables Prinsep,
of ib.;

the

Col.

tiykes,

ilar sen^s

to

Ixxxix.; tent inconsiscation signifithe

true
meaning,

ib.;
and

comparative

Pr.,

definition the

Pali

Vedictampered

krit, Sanswith, Vedic vkk,

authorities,

with
of

primary
xc;

cxvii.;
cxx.;

Vedas

the

term,

of ascertaining ib., the xci.; xcii

term

real definition

its

having
the ib.; cxxi.;

probability been the

V

anteof Vyavaharika

of

edas

altered,

cxxii.;

m,

; authorities

quoted,

ib.; bears
to

distinguishable
xciu.;

from

the

the aflinity which Sanskrit, cxxv.;

Dr. had

Pali
5
au-

thoriti

Sanskrit,
search of

investigations cxxvi.;

ib.; Pali

Weber
its
reasons

i.; the mmarians

a

Prikiit, original discrepancy between the

the and
as

origin

quoted, in the
for

Punjab,
cultivation,

conmientators,
to

conjecture,
result,

cxxix.; ib.;

this of

its

high

state

conjecture
Mahar^stri, of
speech,

this

cxxxi;

conclusion,

v.; m

most
xcv.;

excellent the ib.;

same
comparative

cxxxii. Prbkrita Prakrit

Kalpataru
.

modification
table dialect,

of

Pali,

Prakksa,

xxxvi.,

xxxix.,

xcix. Ixii.,
10., 45

thereof,
xcvii.; thereon, Mon.

ib.;

the Bur-

hk

Present
Present

Perfect,
tense

see

Ajjatani.
-

f's

opinion

xcviii.;

5
.

reto,

peculiarities, ib.; the dialects,

thereof, Prakrits,

of

er

anterior dian Inoldest of the in authorities xcix.; ib.; Pali the root of ib.; its to relation
c;

ib.;

Pali

Pukkuskti,

king

of

Pachchanta
cxv.,

81

Pulendas
.

"

xliv.

Pur^nas
.
.

'

Purisa

lakkhana
.

xli. Ixxi.
xxxvi.

Sanskrit,
that there the

examples shewing is difference no

and

Purushottama

ween

Pali

Sanskrit,
the ci.;
dialect

ib.;
of the Radicals
.

difierent Inscriptions,

from

19,

22

fi:t"m

Hkm^yana

xix.

Page.

Pag 84

tana
....

Sangharakkhita
.

xi
XXV.,

tna

Kosha
. .

Ixxxii.

Sanyutta

Nikkya heretics

xxvii.,

inaud,
Dr

M.,

quoted

st,

xlviii. iii.
commentary

Sankantika
Sangahavatthu,

four

duties

pasiddlii,

extract
to,

from xxviii.,

the xxxvi.

xix.,

48

of Sankhkra

kings
.

Saunahotra
is the
; ;
;

Ixv

nskrit,
Ixxviii.

speech

of

the

gods,
dialect,

Saunaka

Ixv Ixxix.,
.

the
its

polished

Saurasena

Kxxiii.
Ixxxv.
as

relation relation Brahmans,

to
to

the
the

Zend,

Skriputta,
of Sarogkma,
Gotama

an

eminent
...

disciple

its

Prkkrit
Ixxxvi.
or

stated

by

fraternity
a

of
.

priests

the

Vyavah^rika
grade

Vkk of speech,

the
;

Sarvastivkda,
Sati, retentive Satipa^hina Sati

tect

fourth
derivation

Ixxxviii.

memory
.
.

xxxiv

of the tables

term

of

xciii. Sanskrit,

; comparative

Pale,

sampajafink
or

and

Mikgadhl,

tables
dlu and

of

cii. ; comparative Prkkrit, MbgaSanskrit,

Sattami,

the

Potential

xl.,

Sattavkdi

heretics

Indo-European, of
the

cxii.;

Sattatinsa racteristics cha;

bodhipakkiya
defined convocation
.
.

Sanskrit,
identical

cxiv.

SaviSnana
Second Second

Vedic
the

peculiaiities Pali, ; cxvii.

dialect cxxi. of

with
is the

xxz.,

Sanskrit
a

polished
speech,

rude Vedas

vernacular

person Selalihinisandesa
.

Ixxxiii

altered,
thereof,

Senksana Setubhandha, Sha"?bhksk-chandrikk

.

cxxh. cxxiii.

Buddhist ;
;

account

poem

Ixxvii
.

the

relation
to

Sanskrit
cxxxii,

bears

the

which Pali,

the
cxxv.

Sha^bhksk
.

cxi Ixxxii

Shae^bhasa
Tenses

paramesvara
com.
.

Ixxxiii

nskrit
the

compared

witli 107

Sharfgurusishya's Shkstras,
works

Ixv

Pali also
the

the

Grammatical

conj.
from

classes

22

ofBrahmanslxxix.,lxxxvii.
.

nskrit

different

Pali
of form
.

29
10

Sidatsangark
.
.
*

xi

bbadli^tuka,

definition
the

Sila,

kinds

of
.

bbatti-vada,
of Sarvastivkda
heretics
a

Pali

Somadeva
.

Ixvi
.

xxxu.

Specimen
68

Stenzler,
quoted Stevenson, Stupa

of Dr.

modem
.

Pali
.

11
.

Ixxxii
.
. .
.

bkri,

dialect

Ixxxiii. Ixvi.

xci

rvknukrama

Dr.

Ixxxviii.,
.

cxxix.

al
note
a

xlii.
dialect
xlii. Ixxxii. xliv.

xlv

sara,

Substantive
Sumangala
quoted

voice,

the
.
.

kark

Yilksini

xxvii

kas

cxxiv.,

katkyana
a

Iv.
sect
.

Septra Suttan

period
.

xi

rvastivkda,
heretics

xxxi.
68 87

uimiti

Sykes,

Col.,

mappadhkna
. ....

Syntax,
Grammar

quoted book third

.

of
.

xcii, Kach.
.

cxv

mkdhi
a

87
name

xv

ndhikappa,
Kachchayana's

for

Pali
Atuvk

Gram.
.

XIV.

Tadbhava
.
.

ndihikappa

XV.
XV.

Tadhita,
the

or

nominal

.Ixxviii derivatives,
of

ndhikappa

Viggaha

fifth

book

Kach.

Page.
a

Page.

silk, teaf

cbllegiate
.
.

city

80
.

Yalabk, Valabkmukha

see

Badfav^
.

82,
.

103
xxx.
xv.

xxxv.

ainasailghlirkma
a name

Valine,
V^aka,
Vkmadeva,

learned author author

.

priest

anni,
mflexions
a

for
the Pali

Ceylon Prakrit
.

of

Vedas
.

cxxiii. cxxiii.

in for
...

32
v.

of

Vedas
.
.

name

Vanaratana Vanaratana,
author
,

xxxvi.

period
.

69
"

of
.

Pali
.

a
.

Ixxviii.
.

Grammar
YasantatQaka, Yase^ha,
a

xiv.
xxiv.

nsa,

name

of

heaven
.
.

Iviii.
-53

metre

xxiii., author
.

innovations,
.

the
.

rishi,
.

xix.;

gkthk
.

61

ri-^thk
person,
.

ib.
. .
.

Vedas of Yattamkna,

cxxiii.
"

or

present
a

time
play
.

the
.

3
,

Vedagdha
VedaUan

Madura,
,
...

xciv.

ns
. .
.

Iv.

60
. .

Bud.-annals
.

xxvii.

Vedangas
.

xix.,
.

Ix

Sinhalese

annals

compared 57
xlvi.

Vedas

altered

cxxii.

th m
a

Buddhist alteration Vedas

account
. .

of

such
.

cxxiii.

term
.

expressmg

all
ix.

nders

Vedicto

called Sanskrit
the

Mantas
.

xix. affinity

bears
; one

close

y
.
.

ib.
a

Pali,
of

heaven
an a

86

kinds
Bralimans, Verbal Verb
of

cxvii. languages

of
used

the

two

by

the

muwe,

author

Ixxxiii. xxiv.

bh,

metre
a

cxxi. derivatives, the

see

Kitaka.
book
.

bh

Jagati,
M.
.

metre
*

xxiv. Iv.
.

forms

seventh

Katch.

Grammar
used
a
as

xvi.

's

Mahavansa
or

ii.,

xix.,

ka,

Tartar

Princes

xliv. Iv.

Vermilion Vessamitta,
author Veyydkaranaa

ink
.

xxvii.,
.

86.

rishi
of
.

xix.
.

Vedas
.
.

cxxiii. Ixv.,

xix.,

60

60
....

Vibhanga

Atthakath^
.

cvii.

the affixes, Grammar Kach.

eighth

book
.

Vijji
xvi.

defined
.
.

xxxiv.,

86

Vikarana
....

Sutras
,
. .

a
....
....

xlvi. Ixv.
95 94

Vikramkditya, Vimalabuddhi

king
,
.
.

lii
.

.105
.

jhayo

Vishnupm'ana Vohara-laws

quoted
.

57
.

a
....
....

.100

kja

100

Vrihat
Vriddhi

kath^
.
....

xxxviii.,

Ixvii,

padk
....

ordination

96 90

24

ha

Vutti,

supplementary
....

notes

xiii

works,
....

note

xi.
89

Vydsa
Vyavahkrika,
or

Ixvi.
vernacular Ixxxviii.
.
.

a
....

as the
first person
.

xliv.
3

speech

Weber,
a

Dr.
quoted
,

xli.,

itlvii
cxxvi. cxxi.

iya,

metre

XXIV.

Ixiii.,
Pr.,

iputtk ian heretics

country

heretics
XXX.

68

Whitney,

Wijaya,
69

king

Wilson,

Pr.H.

of II., xli.,

quoted Ceylon

Ixv.
.

Ixxxvii.,

xcii.

INDEX.

Page.

Pa

en,

acquainted
....

with

ing writ102

Ylunataggi,
author

of
a

mhi Vedas

cxxi

ting

known
....

at

the

Budd.
xxvi.

Yavankii, Yavana Yonas,

see

writing

era.

existence

of

72,
.

99,

101

Yavanas.

ting

materials
. .

in
.

ancient

times

xxvii.,

72

Zend,

dialect.

Ixxxv.,
.

Zendavastk

Ixxx

9f^tsSy"^^s""s""^X^y

CHAPTER

FIRST.

""\(3ac3{vg3"^tfco""6

"ieoo(s"^9cJo

ge^c5""tfo

cso

"^"^0

gOTocS

"^".

6,

d;

",

S).

3/"F\S

Gs"

oca"

"daS"c"o"gScca.

foefl, ^o

"

0(^8,
6""s)

^snQo)"
08^06)5

edbc9,

^wo

"

?5""o"=9o3o
o"cd^

o"^S);

tao

o"^)

"5S)o

cd")8,

"g6^S)("

qpooo

oEbSss

5.

e^D"""

ogetf

"3"^o8

'eg(33SD8esx5(3^^

0(S"""a.

db(3^9Dg^0^wo0^eaofi*^'"*v^6^wDco"t^S,

"ODco^WeoeS

^5X3g

6.

ep(^"co

"c"SG^"b.

)d^@^")9g^@^e93"vQd9Sw"'**"i^S)oo99d9
00969
009C9.

^@^e^009cd

cpcxsgtiB

t)9@^^ao8

7.

"f(5^"5!D "3^5^O"\"0.

901^08

oort",

00^".

8.

-855306-

"c5"Qecss^^5^e50^"^(3^"3
coSe^^;'

""vsn"9'an98tc")i50"("9^-"*'^*O9"g
'8co(5^e"t^c^S0""r3'.

g"v!r"o

*ew""SoC58w^;'

11.

cp^"4JoS")co"^"S8g
o5aa"5(3^^"

co^5"5)".
qp'eg")""a5)D""(3
""v5""8to

^^"")3SS^"58"

12.-

^o9g)"""o"^dS^5"o^"^C5).

59(3^08^"3^^

qp^G^")"}D(5^0

C3""^"3S)Sd

"^C5"0(o
'(5^"}

4K|")"0

q9c33

5)'2fi8f"o)45s^Q5Do^-''**^'"5^e3o")Q$Xi^oqpQoS)o;'
14.

qp""""Q""o'.

C3"(S^OC^C)^.

15.

"^"cs^"3\C5DC0^@^^6^eS.

"

"M^"2""QS5S""neQ
16.

""")"8too)Ss^e"3^:

"a(""c5'o88.

cfCTDcs)"^

coSowseDsS.

v-'**^--*

(5^e53"""

Oo

ooD^TDo

qpQc8e9"9

q^QoSSeswo'

0^OD

6^"

0)o

18.

"O^Ca93eD3^^a"d}8"S""

"5^"3Cf"3^^O0D

"036^320

19.

o"@

""
-egcf^Deg^d

c"o

ep^5DODoeag(S^Se$5^
^, ^^en^;
g9,

6qp""".
S,
"
:

e3""f(S^""33^e^^ssj85^,"^"D^S

"

c5;

"no,

")""*""

"^

20.

tocy^9

do638

"dcogo

(dc9X)8

"dcojs}c"i defies

^co^3

21.

o(3^.esSb

"f C

"^

^5*^"^

"^^^^^^2sw

^6\"".

22.

c8cos)0)^

"n

"6

gte33

^o

6\a

Skjo

23.

cfdti^^

2^ C^

"

"5

"K"3
^,

"p

c*"^"

QKIo

qp "5^"k
%o,

(f^"S)^f^"}E)ooo9"sqe6e)"""9^

"

C^l"9^l

Qs^o

24.

ef^ScawaDS

cce3"S

coa^odJ

caeaS

cae3"3

cac30"

wwd"

wc3;

e9B93@^

eft5de):

e9e9@"G"^

es""S^^S30);

eftsS^es^

"0"6^Se^

tsao

")3edooed"9

fGe)"SN4in204"6^"sd9?

^"|p"09""svc3""SedeB^{S.'

25.

"5D(33^9oCDd5

tos3D

c^^og

6\caM

CDWA

COSo

ea"6"33

CHAPTER

SECOND.

1.

ao^S"^*co^

ocScoSScsa.

3""d"

?^

'

""codd"

tfrnod,

esiicofi.'

tgd,

WW,

tftd,

egw,

(S^"^""^9QS

"D?5^^cB"gSOtf

"^"dg

"

5.

i?

"3

^oa

".

6.

OTa"Sto3

o^Se^""6.

"S,

@"5cxj"B,

a^a3"e,

o9a5"S.

tSe3d)=:"S))(?(5eod3^

"S)3(506eQ^^
*

9SiOdi"^tS^n",
'

^siO"^Qco^^;

coDS^")^"o""S

""9@^."2jBsei,

^"dqB

"^"""ogt8S
oo"o@^o"B,
C9"cd'

qpcSSa

OoO0^OOO(S^5^^=O^(S^"^"
@)"S}

t3o"ooS, 0"@"^S36)q^@^"My";^C5"cd

OD"0O""^;

00(3^"9)6C5""Qd)

(^"""o"t

^OCOOoo"Sss^o8-"^ooS

^v5"3o""5^^^

8^f^c3o=?(S^oo"S

"W^CSXJJCaS^^en

^tf,

CpQ,

f "^8"S^05

oS"003"3^C"3'fiQ^

oaeflw

oo"5")"oocaw

"8c53i^

c8""o"5

Sa"otf

"v5^o

"^eoD^

"d^;

gd"D^^oO;

gd("S)"^")9

e;t5^"^"05);

^gd^(3^""5

-egd^

12.

gS)6)dio".

a"!S(3^"", 60(3(3^"",

^9S)0^"),

(3^bJD0""R,

W4""S3(S^45),

"WW^05.

13.

0B(33e5)O"8".

14.

t!5j8o?G\^3

ep.

".-^-tO"S,
15.

Oc^fi,
dt,a)3

0"",

C8C^". ^csx^cS^

630^3

g^".

)"?ge^Sfi)

"fl("QO^BoDDc"0^")30^cao^;

"5i^SS,

tB^^^^S,

S^S.

"gS6)"

"5ieS^,

(5'ie^"S,

(^iS^eS)-",

g(5^ec"9"B.

16.

""a""ia^D

"csD.

^:g)"S, 3^S^

geSl^"S,

Sb"

"S, gd^"S.

18.

^C0D"GN^5W

KJI^.

19.

C5:"K)D""3^O"3C3O^^5"^"0".

20.

^^^dSg^^o

"

(S.

)S^c5S5B,

"fi8(^S,
21.

aBS"5S50.

""^

^^ceo. 6Do^Q04SSo6^e5)9
@H^,
4SS0099

."dS^(3\eDD
a

^(^("^6"SS)9^@^e3d

f "^ES)"S^"

^")")"s^^oS);

(3"toSN"),

(3"tK)(S"eo55

"dy"^"S),

"dys^eoCi

; gc^^

23.

55)45"25)"S".

\05,

6"W09"3^OD,

""MOtD"^"),

QtiSDS^O,
S^e^G^cso.

^05""5.

24.

6io^i3C3"""3\c6:f3

25.

9^

Cp^330C3^eJd^C3

g^(9^C09a""\6)3.

CHAPTER

THIRD.

tt

^^t^ooeno

8"^J^n)0^rjo

^es)efto"5S-^o
-eK)"(9^"^^(S^^^s^ca^

..-^"Sfi453""S,

cycgCt^-S,

^S^Cb-^S,

8S)oMeS,

"t8"ja",

3.

(Je^eaeso,

'4.

g^c5

"^^D^Oo

OcS"

^^C^X

5.

55)"(53K)"ae3

""(5)053353.

^tf-S,

^cg^S,

e?09^"S,

eo2e5""S,

c?"eoe3",

?^oqoS)"S.

8.

c^25^DeoaS^g5*""^045)a(3^^S3.

^^-^e,

8"oe3",

8"oe3",

5?g8c)c5'"S,

"egS,

"jS)oS.

10.

^s\^3qa"a^o

6"d"o"cos.

^wos^ojoeodiSo

""c5owoS)"o

6^wajS"(S^o3O0^"5'--*'"^883e"S,

11.

(So

eSe^dbD.

12.

C33

Sg^So.

"3a"6"oSo
13.

*o3a.'

^toeo

C$

C^^d

'OTo.

^oS,
"3fi"9"^o?

t56(3^e:)097S,

dS^cao,

^("ej^,

eoDoo^.
^

*S.ja5"a%c6S.*

14.

"o3"ae3C3eaM?cafi3^""oSo.

"2srd"D"3ea"sw

a3"8t"5(5^"o"^c"o^
c?Qo9c^".

t5'eo"""s^o3O0^(5"

cg"c^"S,
16.

"S4Q^",
@^25}06^q}".

8ttfd"nD")03cSW

8D3"gMW

0^^5)^(5^C"D"

"a5S"(5^a50(5^"5.

17.

"5(5tafi3cSo6^eo.

18.

@x^^"D"3eo

^"0C3G^"5e5QacSo.

19.

c""eow3""5^D6\9e^aS3eo.'3"3g.

20.

S"C3fi3b^^"flC3d"

"25)3""S".

8"f3^"""eswc)o^ww^qpe53a(3^"5S^ey)"5)"o":^i0^o)

^d6^^

21.

q^^DG^cS^eso

eS"(2".3g.

S,

cjdDc^o",

c""itf'Di),

("i)c5'a@^S)ca

"

"a5)3"5e"'x":c55S^45Soen

qS8

22.

eSe^eaooQa.
co""'dqS
;

?e8")e5yS5"s^eow"oo"^(5^")S3wi"'"N^eo")c5',

(^",

24.

")(5'e0KJe0C3o""C6C0KJ45)D"2"3.

tK)8we5eoeS8":)o^@aS "s)dQ3"S
;

c8mcom"6S"o
ea^^S;

"^QD(5^e3(S"cao"S-"-''**^")3
"s)dC$d9i).

^,

aaocsdS^

aasoooS,

9"

QD"ede8^eSc03

9""^(3cS3
"*t;03S)*-8"6D3^,

"

S)3",

^39;

c^d",

c^30;

98S^l3^":

S^is"3":f".

'0"fi)3g,

*08j$3"*

*"85J3"-8e9S3^.'

CHAPTER

FOUKTIL

c,""^"e)")tsw

Qo^ttw

^eocoww

"|po"^c"^"S

""f"^""(5^""

^5)0(5^c5eoa

aaocJcaS,

"533(5o(3^find3;

"5)0"55(5^w^,

"s)0"5S"^O'ffDefl

50dC303^

CO0(3"""S5

QO(o^S)^,

GOO")OoS,

(WS^OoS.

6.

S"
"w

8eO
"ca f

"K)3

?."Og5553G^"fi9"053(5\CO.
"D^eio ""s)3dcse5

"

"8

"^""""o^eno

"5"aD(5^"

^ca^S(3^O8""""O3e(5^(5--'"""""-(*")0"5^O},
7.

""""S,

""a8^,

"""a^.

2D8oSco6^css^(3o"a.

(5^(gO(5"K)0^"D*--'**--"OQK)S,
8.
CS)55DC0e3(3^38"3^CO.

"(S"^.

9.

CS3e^(330OD"g5S)^3'3cS.
c)3^csw
csd"'jsc^cow

cocaf0^""o)ca53

(9^(33

""e53"^ca:"B

"^c"a

10.

")"5eo63")3ceo^SD"eb'o^6"c8.

11.

cf"od"o

"0ae3o

":S@KX).e5D2O0"(3a6^oo".

12.

-e5)cae3"5^JX5Do.

13.

^cae3

^oxx)o. ^"5"y)o(5^C5D0"9
"(SciSwStSDoSScSM

qpWf

(3^""O"008S)0^C6D

S)a

14.

^tX3^^5)QDo.

15.

aae".

16.

e'^ec"3

^
.25:"50o

^o.

17.

-"^ac^3?8".

18.

e"6D3"2"e3fis";t"foa3.

19.

""5C3C3

ScJb'o.

a^oej"ao3'*o

20.

c2S3gea3^Syo.

)cg^

we"9(d9

Qo")S)3@.
*"s"9d^,

G3iS"seodot

cdQ($3^,

(s"")d)8.'
COD

2h

(S^^Se,
c)")S^ooc)@^(5

o)3

"3
c"

""3
E)9

03

"C0
Odd

0da
eo

9^3".
0cd

o9v^q3

e)3

^3

"C5d

f @^")E)"c)3

^o

qpC3^e0O3

"5'"S3a(^"DC5dy6^")-^"-^

^09^^

"05^,

@co^,

22.

cscJcaeso^csQ.

23.

cq5)6)"^OoCo

^"9-

24.

c?"5""5^o

d^cj

c?csx

"co"38d.

25.

C0S)"^3CSC0C3D""C3eOD".

26.

^coS)6)a3e5"3^55)

c^.

27.

"5c3xeae3a5,a^"33

(g";03.^as^"3.

28.

^ODCafi36^(33"5)03C3"S)3CJO^eao.

qp"s)"^c""!""vc3D

"S^Qoo"oc5Cys^o)

6"5v5)""\eao^So-'"

30.

C^55^""3'85)36^05.
^

31.

^SXJCOW

-85)0"

cSS.

32.

fflgjpSeoG^tf.

33.

cf

CO.

6^5)DCreseeS)9S)^oeS)Qse9e9(9^^e^dC|po93^^(S^e93"^(Sd9"S"9^-'***^

34.

"aDepO"3C0355"3S6\a3.

*""^-@^"^"^,

"^os^oo^

"

"^c6oc!o8tK)^(3^(""^

qps^as^^S

35.

(8^3G\d5c""3^"3

cpeoS)"S)3-ege5)"cS.

ea"?oee8",

QtBww^,

e""w^*

36.

^SSD3eg8^eDd5o9"C03e3o
ee303(S)"3".

^3S8oS^36^";C6

OoioS,

tt""^,
-eS)8^"a"c6o

ss)5c"^,
?

SdS)"S.
c^"^""

"""es^03,

o"i^"^o),

-sssScasv",

39.

@x,@\^D

i^^iScS.

(SJD"tf^, o""S,

w"5",

""^",
?

""5".
'03(8, coi^,

"f9te9es)Q9(5e^e^fisSt6"^o

Q^,

009^,

03S'

"

"ag)@S

41.

(ggcs"aeD"6^^55S33G^8e^a8a.

42.

5553S^3'20o(9\"g^(5^(33e3o
"""90^""Woa"0O83"^o

"

"S)3"?"Df

S^"5S;jS^@3WS)3^{^(9^0D*-'-****i^

"a3(5"(5^,

easc^oQ-S,

a533(^0"O"B,

e5)3"5St5c""B.

ETURN

CIRCULATION
202 Main

DEPARTMENT

O-^

Librory

AU
1

BOOKS
loans

MAY
may may

BE

RECAUEO
be be

AFTEi
by by

7
calling

DAYS
642-3405

-month 6-month Renewals

renewed recharged
may

loans

bringing
4

books
prior

to to

Circulation
due dote

Desk

and

recharges

be

mode

days

DUE

AS

STAMPED

BELOW

13

1987
li-

4
"tit

m
isg.

JiLJJ3
"
-

i!UUO

ly

\3S7
"-

"B
JAM

0 3 2Q05
A
if

% 1
m

*^"

""

Hi.

y/gd

?nnft

-C-

yy

5
^^L
O

"

"OB

pr

zoo;

'I

ft"

"

SENT
r
r
r

ON

ILL

JUN-7
U. C.
BERKELEY

1995

"

UNIVERSITY
NO.
DD6,

OF
BERKELEY,

CALIFORNIA,
CA
94720

BERKELEY

ORM

60m,

12/80

(B

UC. BERKELEY

LIBMRIES

"lllllllllll
M030213U
-

"""